Home

Hercules User Reference Guide - The Hercules System/370, ESA

Contents

1. Figure 152 SF NOMERGE command Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 331 7 96 SFC Compress a shadow file 7 96 1 Function The SFC command compresses a shadow file 7 96 2 Syntax Descriptive SFC device Diagram kk SFC a I 7 96 3 Parameter device This specifies the device for which the shadow file will be compressed jj With an asterisk it is possible to compress the shadow files for all dasd devices that have a shadow file 7 96 4 Examples Example 1 Compress the shadow file for dasd device 0148 00000FC4 sfc 0148 00000FC4 cckdcomp completed moves 1105 moved 23817149 freed 299782 00000FC4 HHCCD210I1 size free nbr st reads writes 12reads hits switches 00000FC4 HHCCD2111 readaheads misses O0000RC4 HHCCD 21 20 a Sea Se AS eee Re aE ee ee OO0000FC4 HHCCD213I 348465484 6 22 4329 1118 45 4376 7268 O0000FC4 HHCCD2141 1440 140 00000FC4 HHCCD215I D MVS DASD MVSRES CCKD 00000FC4 HHCCD216I 0 324634239 6 22rd 4061 0 45 00000FC4 HHCCD217I D MVS DASD MVSRES_ 148 00000FC4 HHCCD218I 1 23831245 0 D rw 268 1118 0 Figure 153 SFC command Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 332 7 97 SFD Display shadow file statistics 7 97 1 Function The SFD command displays statistical information about the specified shadow file s 7 97 2 Syntax Descriptive SFD device Diagram
2. hercsub usr bin perl use Socket use I0 Socket UNIX use I0 Socket INET if ARGV lt 1 print STDERR Usage hercsub socket_spec job n exit 2 my spec shift ARGV my Ssock if Sspec m Ssock I0 Socket UNIX gt new Peer gt S spec else 4 Ssock I0 Socket INET gt new PeerAddr gt Sspec die Failed to connect to socket spec n unless defined S sock while lt gt print Ssock Ss Figure 247 The Hercsub Perl Script 14 3 2 Using the netcat program The netcat nc program can also be used to submit files to a Hercules reader via TCP IP Install netcat which is useful for many other things as well and use the following syntax nc w1 localhost 1234 lt dummy jcl For more information on the netcat program type man nc from the Unix shell Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 501 Appendix A Supported DASD Device Types The following tables show the supported DASD device types and models with their sizes The symbol in the size column means that any size can be specified else the size defaults to the first listed model CKD Devices IBM 2311 Cy IBM 2311 1 200 2 IBM 2314 NM IBM 2314 200 3 IBM 3330 IBM 3330 1 404 7 IBM 3330 2 808 7 IBM 3330 11 808 7 IBM 3340 IBM 3340 1 348 1 IBM 3340 35 348 1 IBM 3340 2 696 2 IBM 3340 70 696 2
3. 7 97 3 Parameter device This specifies the device for which shadow file statistics will be written to the log file is With an asterisk it is possible to create statistical output for all dasd devices that have shadow files 7 97 4 Examples Example 1 Display statistical information for the shadow file of dasd device 0148 00000FC4 sfd 0148 00000FC4 HHCCD2101I size free nbr st reads writes l2reads hits switches 00000FC4 HHCCD2111 readaheads misses 00000FC4 HHCCD212I 5 5 55 5 5 5 5 5 00000FC4 HHCCD213I 348613498 6 30 4329 1112 45 4376 7268 O0000FC4 HHCCD2141 1440 140 00000FC4 HHCCD215I D MVS DASD MVSRES CCKD 00000FC4 HHCCD216I 0 324634239 6 22 rd 4061 0 45 00000FC4 HHCCD217I D MVS DASD MVSRES_ 148 00000FC4 HHCCD218I 1 23979259 0 8 rw 268 1112 0 Figure 154 SFD command Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 333 7 98 GER Perform a chkdsk on the active shadow file 7 98 1 Function The SFK command performs a chkdsk on the active shadow file s 7 98 2 Syntax Descriptive SFK device n Diagram a Se ee ef n 7 98 3 Parameter device This specifies the device for which active shadow file a chkdsk is to be performed ig With an asterisk it is possible to perform a chkdsk for the active shadow files of all dasd devices n The optional check level to be performed default is 2 1 devhdr
4. s F Gr EI 231 Ger E CL G EN E EI EL kr GO EI EI H CPU0000 CPU0000 CPU0000 CPUO0OOO0 CPU0000 CPU0000 CPU0000 PU0000 PU0000 PU0000 PU0000 PU0000 PU0000 PU0000 PU0000 PU0000 PU0000 PU0000 PU0000 PU0000 PU0000 PU0000 PU0000 PU0000 PSW 00082000 R 00000068 K R 00000240 K R00 00000000 R04 00000000 R08 00000000 R12 00000000 PSW 00082000 R 000001D0 K R 00000248 K R00 00000000 R04 00000000 R08 00000000 R12 00000000 PSW 00082000 R00 00000000 R04 00000000 R08 00000000 R12 00000000 PSW 00082000 R00 00000000 R04 00000000 R08 00000000 R12 00000000 HCPNO40I Instruction stepping on 8000061E INST D20700680240 MVC 06 00080000 8000060A 00000000 06 00080000 800009E6 00000000 GRO1 00000000 GRO5 00000000 GRO9 00000000 GR13 00000000 GRO1 00000000 GRO5 00000000 GRO9 00000000 GR13 00000000 0 GRO1 00000000 GRO5 00000000 GRO9 00000000 GR13 00000000 0 GRO1 00000000 GRO5 00000000 GRO9 00000000 GR13 00000000 00062A INST 1F55 00062C INST 1F00 GRO2 00000000 GRO6 00000000 GR10 00000000 GR14 00000000 80000624 INST D20701D00248 MVC 06 00000000 80000000 00000000 000009BE 06 00000000 80000000 00000000 000009BE GRO2 00000000 GRO6 00000000 GR10 00000000 GR14 00000000 Q RO2 00000000 RO6 00000000 R10 00000000 R14 00000000 Qa a Qa Q R02 00000000 R06 00000000 R10 00000000 R14 00000000 Qa a a SLR SLR 104
5. Descriptive OSTAILOR z OS 0S 390 VM VSE LINUX OPENSOLARIS QUIET NULL Diagram p gt gt OSTAILOR OPENSOLARIS QUIET NULL 7 69 3 Parameter z OS Code z OS if you intend to run z OS OS 390 Code OS 390 if you intend to run MVS 370 MVS XA MVS ESA OS 390 VM Code VM if you intend to run VM 370 VM ESA or z VM VSE Code VSE if you intend to run VSE 370 VSE ESA or z VSE LINUX Code Linux you intend to run Linux 390 or Linux for z Series OpenSolaris Code OpenSolaris you intend to run OpenSolaris for z Series QUIET QUIET discards all exception messages NULL NULL allows all exception messages to be logged Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 284 7 69 4 Examples Example 1 Display the currently specified intended operating system 2007 06 30 15 11 36 640 O0000FC4 ostailor 2007 06 30 15 11 36 671 O0000FC4 OSTAILOR z OS Figure 115 OSTAILOR command display intended operating system Example 2 Change the specified intended operating system 2007 06 30 15 11 48 187 O0000FC4 ostailor linux 2007 06 30 15 11 51 890 O00000FC4 ostailor 2007 06 30 15 11 51 890 O0000FC4 OSTAITLOR LINUX Figure 116 OSTAILOR command specify intended operating system Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 285 7 70 PANRATE Display or set console refresh rate 7 70 1 Function The PANRATE command shows the current setting of the console
6. 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 025 00 00 025 025 025 4025 00 00 00 025 025 025 025 DER 00 025 00000C24 00000C24 00000C24 00000C24 00000C24 00000C24 00000C24 00000C24 00000C24 00000C24 00000C24 version Hercules Version 3 06 c Copyright 1999 2007 by Roger Bowler Jan Jaeger and others Built on Jan 10 2009 at 01 56 22 Build information Win32 MSVC build Modes S 370 ESA 390 z Arch Max CPU Engines 8 Automatic Operator support Machine dependent assists cmpxchgl cmpxchg4 cmpxchg8 fetch_dw store_dw Running on Micky Windows_NT 5 1 i686 MP 2 Figure 200 VERSION command Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 378 8 Hercules Utilities 8 1 Overview Several utility programs exist to support the Hercules Emulator Most of them are used when working with DASD and TAPE files Other utilites perform some special functions with configuration files All these utility programs are pure line command mode programs i e Windows DOS or Unix Linux shell They can be called manually from the command line prompt or built into batch files This is generally the preferred method due to its greater flexibility and automation possibilities If the Hercules Windows GUI HercWinGUI is used the utilities can also be called interactively via the GUI and using a g
7. 2007 06 30 19 00 30 500 000000E8 conkpalv 5 3 15 2007 06 30 19 00 30 500 000000E8 HHCPN190I Keep alive 5 3 15 Figure 44 CONKPALV command Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 208 7 23 CPU Define target CPU for console displays and commands 7 23 1 Function The CPU command sets the target CPU for console displays and commands in a Hercules multi CPU environment If the Hercules configuration file sets a single CPU environment then no CPU command is necessary If the NUMCPU system parameter in the Hercules configuration file is set greater than one and no CPU command is given then always the first CPU CPU 0 is the target for console displays and commands 7 23 2 Syntax Descriptive CPU Ah Diagram p gt CPU Ah it 7 23 3 Parameter hh The hexadecimal CPU address of the CPU in the multiprocessor configuration which you wish all console commands to apply to For example entering CPU 1 followed by the command GPR in a dual CPU configuration will display the general purpose registers for CPU 1 in the configuration as opposed to CPU 0 7 23 4 Examples Example 1 Display the general purpose registers for CPU 0 in a multiprocessor configuration 16 54 24 16 54 31 781 625 O0000FC4 O0000FC4 cpu 0 gpr 16 54 16 54 16 54 16 54 cules SZ Bite 31 625 625 625 625 O0000FC4 O0000FC4 00000FC4 00000FC4 CPU0000 CPU0000
8. VS DASD SORT03 CCKD 200 VS DASD SORT04 CCKD 200 VS DASD SORT05 CCKD 200 VS DASD WORK00 CCKD 555 VS DASD WORK01 CCKD 555 VS DASD PRD000 CCKD 560 VS DASD PRD001 CCKD 560 VS DASD PRD002 CCKD 560 VS DASD PRD003 CCKD 560 VS DASD MVSRES CCKD 560 VS DASD MVSDLB CCKD 555 VS DASD PAGE00 CCKD 698 VS DASD PAGE01 CCKD 698 VS DASD PUB000 CCKD 555 VS DASD PUB001 CCKD 555 VS DASD PUB002 CCKD 560 VS DASD PUB003 CCKD 560 VS DASD SYS000 CCKD 560 VS DASD SYS001 CCKD 560 VS DASD SYS002 CCKD 560 VS DASD SYS003 CCKD 560 VS LOG hardcopy log crlf VS DASD CBT000 CCKD 555 VS DASD CBT001 CCKD 555 VS DASD CBT002 CCKD 555 VS DASD CBT003 CCKD 555 VS DASD SPOOL0 CCKD 560 VS DASD SPOOL1 CCKD 560 VS DASD TST000 CCKD 560 VS DASD TST001 CCKD 560 VS DASD TST002 CCKD 560 VS DASD TST003 CCKD 560 cyls cyls cyls cyls cyls open open open open open open open open open open open open open open open open open open open open open open open open open open open open open open open open Figure 56 DEVLIST command Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 223 7 32 DEVTMAX Display or set maximum device threads 7 32 1 Function The DEVTMAX command displays the current setting of the DEVTMAX system parameter along with the actual device threads statistics As an additional argument a new value for the maximum device threads may be specified 7 32 2 Syntax
9. Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 35 p gt gt AUTOMOUNT ADD directory e es DEL directory 4 4 3 Parameter ADD or Add an entry to the list of allowable tape automount directories DEL or Delete an entry from the list of allowable tape automount directories directory Specifies the host system directory where the guest is allowed or not to automatically load virtual tape volumes from 4 4 4 Examples Example 1 Specify directory D MVS TAPE as the host system directory from where the guest is allowed to automatically load virtual tape volumes AUTOMOUNT D MVS TAPE or AUTOMAOUNT ADD D MVS TAPE Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 36 4 5 AUTO GCGl MOUNT Automatic SCSI tape mounts 4 5 1 Function The AUTO_SCSI_MOUNT parameter specifies whether automatic detection of SCSI tape mounts are enabled or not NOTE Enabling this option may negatively impact Hercules performance depending on how the host operating system Windows Linux etc handles SCSI attached tape drive status queries 4 5 2 Syntax Descriptive AUTO_SCSI_MOUNT NO YES 7 Diagram gt gt AUTO_SCSI_MOUNT NO lt Es n 4 5 3 Parameter NO NO indicates that the SCSIMOUNT option is disabled forcing all SCSI tape mounts to be done manually via an appropriate DEVINIT command YES Yes enables the option and causes periodic queries of the SCSI tape driv
10. The following screen print shows the help information from the HercRdr program that is displayed whenever the program is called without parameters D HERCULES gt hercrdr Submits card file s to a Hercules card reader bound to a given socket port Format HERCRDR nnn host port file file Where nnn timeout value in seconds 1 999 default is 3 host port sock_spec of target reader if not specified value of HERCRDR environ var is used if set file file s to be submitted Examples HERCRDR localhost 1234 fileone txt filetwo txt set HERCRDR localhost 1234 HERCRDR file3 txt file4 txt HERCRDR override 5678 filefive txt HERCRDR 192 168 0 1 5678 666 txt 777 txt 888 txt 999 txt Returns unclassified error file s successfully submitted no route to host bad sock_spec or connection refused timeout value exceeded while trying to connect transmission error e g connection prematurely closed amp WN FF CO file not found or other file error Figure 245 HercRdr Help Screen 14 2 1 How to submit jobs directly from SPF PC If you are lucky enough to have a copy of the excellent editor SPF PC Version4 or SPF Pro produced by CTC but unfotunately no longer available then you can submit jobs directly from your edit session The SUB command can be implemented by means of a REXX macro such as the following one provided by Volker Bandke Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page
11. info caldt refdt expdt hdr dsni n yroffs n Arguments filename shadowfile Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Show Format 1 DSCB information This option is implied if any of the other options are set Display dates as YYYYMMMDD If this option is not specified then dates are displayed as YYDDD Display the last referenced date not applicable to MVT otherwise it is omitted Display the expiry date otherwise it is omitted Display column headers otherwise they are omitted Reserve space on the output line for dataset names up to n characters If m is not specified then space for 26 characters is reserved If the dsnl option is omitted then space for 44 characters is reserved Add the year offset n which may be negative to dates before displaying them If m is omitted then 28 is used No checking is done that the value of rn is sensible Name of the DASD image file for which the datasets contained will be listed Optional name of an associated shadow file s from which any datasets will be listed Page 413 8 14 4 Examples Example 1 List all the datasets currently on the volume DAMVS DASD MVSRES CCKD DASDLS D MVS DASD MVSRES CCKD Example 2 List all the datasets currently on the volume D MVS DASD MVSRES CCKD showing information from the Format 1 DSCB with column headers and reserving only 20 characters for the dataset name DASDLS dsnl 20
12. 8 26 8 5 6 Columns The Columns value should normally be specified as 0 zero to ensure a proper default character pitch of 10 characters per inch Specifying a nonzero Columns value causes all characters on your print line to either be squished or stretched in an effort to try and honor your specified value usually resulting in a very ugly looking printout 8 26 8 5 7 GreenBar FeedHoles and BarColor The default for GreenBar and FeedHoles is No BarColor defaults to Green Other valid Bar Color values are Blue Yellow Red No or rrggbb Specifying BarColor No will draw an outlined box around the area where the green bars would normally be but without being filled in with any background color i e the color of the bar is set to transparent Custom green bar colors can be specified using the RRGGBB html RGB color value format 8 26 8 5 8 Compression The Compress Yes option the default performs normal ZLIB compression of the actual PDF page data stream in order to conserve Windows host disk space Compress No should only be used when repor ting a problem viewing a HercPrt generated PDF file since such problems are usually the result of an im properly formatted PDF data stream and using ZLIB compression makes it difficult to see the actual PDF codes 8 26 9 txt2pdf Utility HercPrt also ships with a command line tool called txt2pdf which will convert a text file into either
13. An optional PARM keyword followed by a string can also be passed to the IPL command processor The string will be loaded into the low order 32 bits of the general purpose registers 4 characters per register for up to 64 bytes The PARM option behaves similarly to the VM IPL command 7 50 2 Syntax Descriptive IPL devnum filename PARM string Diagram kk IPL devnum a dies wien oe a fi lename PARM string 7 50 3 Parameter devnum The device address from which the emulator will IPL the system filename The name of a ins file to be loaded PARM Optional PARM keyword string The character string max 64 bytes to be passed to the IPL command processor The SE string will be loaded into the low order 32 bits of the GPRs 4 characters per Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 256 7 50 4 Examples Example 1 IPL normal from device 0148 ipl 0148 HHCCP0481 HHCCP075I1 HHCCP0761 HHCCP0771 HHCCP0481 HHCCP075I HHCCP0761 HHCCP0771 HHCCP0481 HHCCP075I1 HHCCP0761 HHCCP0771 HHCCP075I HHCCP0761 HHCCP0771 HHCCP0481 HHCCP075I1 HHCCP0761 HHCCP0771 HHCCP0481 HHCCP075I HHCCP0761 HHCCP0771 HHCCP0481 HHCCP075I1 HHCCP0761 HHCCP0771 HHCCP0481 HHCCP075I HHCCP0761 HHCCP0771 HHCCP0481 HHCCP075I HHCCP0761 HHCCP0771 0011 0011 0011 0011 00C1 00C1 00C1 00C1 00C2 00C2 00C2 00C2 00C3 00C3 00C3 00c4 00c4 00c4 00c4 00C5 00C5 00C5 00Cc5 00C6 00C6
14. User Reference Guide Page 299 7 77 QD Query DASD 7 77 1 Function The QD command queries one or all depending on the argument given DASD devices 7 77 2 Syntax Descriptive QD address Diagram Po So address 7 77 3 Parameter address The address of the DASD device to be queried If no address is given then a query for all DASD devices is listed 7 77 4 Examples Example 1 Query DASD device with address OAEO 02 55 40 954 02 55 40 954 02 55 40 954 02 55 40 954 02 55 40 954 02 55 40 954 02 55 40 954 02 55 40 954 02 55 40 954 02 55 40 954 02 55 40 954 02 55 40 954 02 55 40 954 02 55 40 954 02 55 40 954 02 55 40 954 000009EC qd Oaed 000009EC Oae0 SNSID 00 000009EC 000009EC Oae0 RDC 000009EC 000009EC 000009EC 000009EC Oae0 RCD 000009EC 000009EC 000009EC 000009EC 000009EC 000009EC 000009EC 000009EC 10 00 10 20 30 00 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 ff3990e9 423e0060 3990e933 e000e5a2 00000000 0677080 c4010100 e9e9f0f0 c4000000 e9e9f0f0 d4020000 e9e9f0f0 f0000001 e9e9f0f0 00000000 33900a00 900a5000 05940222 00000000 00004800 4040f3f3 fOfOfOfFO 4040f3f3 fOfOfOfFO 4040f3f9 fOfOfOfFO 4040f3f9 fOfOfOfFO 00000000 40fa0100 30972024 13090674 24241502 15 0000 9 0 0 0 fOfOfOfFO 9 0 0 0 fOfOLOLO 9 0 0c5 fOfOfOfFO f9f04040 fOfOfOfFO 00000000 41270004 0d0b000f 00000000 dfee0001 00000000
15. gt gt CNSLPORT 3270 lt host port 4 7 3 Parameter host The IP address of the host to which the telnet server will bind to If an IP address is given then it must be a valid IP address for the host system port The port number decimal on which the telnet server will listen The port number must not be in use by any other server Ports below 1024 cannot be used unless Hercules is running as root or is otherwise authorized to use low ports 4 7 4 Examples Example 1 Set the port number on which the telnet server will listen to 3270 CNSLPORT 3270 Example 2 Specify 192 168 1 10 as the IP address of the host to which the telnet server will bind to and set the port number on which the telnet server will listen to 3270 CNSLPORT 192 168 1 10 3270 Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 43 4 8 CODEPAGE Codepage conversion table 4 8 1 Function This parameter specifies the codepage conversion table used for the ASCII EBCDIC translation If no codepage is given the environment variable HERCULES_CP will be inspected The default codepage used is DEFAULT 4 8 2 Syntax Descriptive CODEPAGE DEFAULT codepage Diagram gt gt CODEPAGE EE DEFAULT lt codepage 4 8 3 Parameter codepage Specifies the codepage conversion table used for ASCII EBCDIC translation Supported codepage mappings are shown in the table below Iconv single byte codepages may also be used e g
16. 2008 08 30 09 09 04 406 O0000FC4 IGGN504A SPECIFY UNIT FOR CATALOG MVS MASTER ON MVSRES 2008 08 30 09 10 04 406 O0000FC4 scp r 00 0148 2008 08 30 09 10 04 406 O00000FC4 HHCCP041I SYSCONS interface active 2008 08 30 09 10 04 406 O00000FC4 IEE600I REPLY TO 00 IS 0148 Figure 147 SCP command Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 325 7 92 SCRIPT Run a sequence of commands contained in a file 7 92 1 Function The SCRIPT command sequentially executes the commands contained within the file filename The script file itself may also contain script commands but the system ensures that no more than 10 levels of scripts are invoked at any one time to avoid recursion loops 7 92 2 Syntax Descriptive SCRIPT filename filename Diagram r gt scrIPT e 7 92 3 Parameter filename The name and optionally the path of the script file to be executed 7 92 4 Examples Example 1 Execute script HERCULES RC 2007 06 30 13 10 53 125 00000FC4 script hercules rc 2007 06 30 13 10 53 125 00000FC4 sh telnet localhost 3270 2007 06 30 13 10 53 140 O0000FC4 2007 06 30 13 10 53 140 O0000FC4 HHCPN140I Valid panel commands are 2007 06 30 13 10 53 140 O0000FC4 2007 06 30 13 10 53 140 O0000FC4 Command Description 2007 06 30 13 10 53 140 OOQ000FC4 en 2007 06 30 13 10 53 140 O00000FC4 list all commands Figure 148 SCRIPT command Hercules Emulator V
17. Display subchannel information for device OAEO 000009EC ds Oaed 000009EC OAE0 D T 3390 Subchannel_Number 0028 000009EC PMCW IntParm 0OF3F8A8 Flags 1899 Dev 0AEO LPM 80 PNOM 00 LPUM 80 PIM 80 000009EC MBI 0183 POM FF PAM 80 CHPIDs 0A00000000000000 Misc 00000001 000009EC SCSW Flags 08C0O SCHC 4020 Stat 0000 Count 0001 CCW 3727CCFO Figure 59 DS command 7 33 5 Explanations The information presented in the output from the Display Subchannel command is taken from the Sub channel Information Block SCHIB The Subchannel Information Block shows beneath other areas the Path Management Control Word PMCW and the Subchannel Status Word SCSW The format of the SCHIB is shown on the following page Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 226 Word 0 Path Management Control Word 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Subchannel Status Word 8 9 10 Model Dependent Area 11 Measurement Block Adress 12 Model Dependent Area Figure 60 Subchannel Information Block Words 0 6 of the SCHIB contain the Path Management Control Word PMCW The format of the PMCW is the following Word I O 0 Interruption Parameter 1 00 TS ooo Tei m m p tiv Device Number 2 LPM PNOM LPUM PIM 3 MBI POM PAM 4 CHPID 0 CHPID 1 CHPID 2 CHPID 3 5 CHPID 4 CHPID 5 CHPID 6 CHPID 7 6 0000000 0 0000000 0 00000000 O O O O O F X S Figure 61 Path M
18. FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 maxrates From Wed Sep es Wed Sep MIPS 0 SIOS 0 From Wed Sep To Wed Sep 20 14 20 14 00 20 14 20 14 13 20 2005 13 20 2005 13 20 2005 24 54 2005 MIPS 397 425046 SIOS 5441 Current interval 1440 minutes Figure 107 MAXRATES command display maximum rates Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 276 7 64 MESSAGE Display message on console like VM 7 64 1 Function The MESSAGE command is actually a VM CP command It is used to transmit message text to the virtual console of other active users However some programmers also use this command as a simplified way to display messages on the own virtual machine console by using MESSAGE lt message text gt One program that uses this is the IBM System z port of Solaris which is only capable of running under z VM So basically all the MESSAGE command does is to display a message on the Hercules console with VM like headers Therefore the MESSAGE command is not really intended to be used directly from the Her cules console as shown in the example below although it does not hurt doing so MSG is the same as MESSAGE See also the MSG and MSGNOH commands in this manual 7 64 2 Syntax Descriptive MESSAGE parms Diagram MESSAGE panas _ 7 64 3 Parameter parms parms specifies the required an
19. Only I O which are known to be able to be completed without actually needing to perform any actual host I O are completed synchronously e g whenever the data being requested is found already be in the cache If the requested data is not found in the cache then actual host UO will need to be done and the request is passed to a device I O thread to be completed asynchronously instead SYNCIO is the default for CKD devices SYNCIO statistics may be displayed via the Hercules SYNCIO console command SYNCIO may be abbreviated as SY O Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 147 READONLY FAKEWRITE type ipname port devnum COMP n Note If you plan on using SYNCIO with Linux 390 and or zLinux you might also want to take a look at the IODELAY configuration statement as well READONLY returns write inhibited sense when a write is attempted Note that not all the sense bits may be set absolutely correctly FAKEWRITE is a workaround for the READONLY sense problem mentioned above In these cases the disk is not intended to be updated e g MVS updates the DSCB last referenced field for a readonly file and any writes appear to be successful even though nothing is actually written Specifies the type of control unit to which this device is attached The use of this para meter does not necessarily imply that all functions of the specified control unit are emu lated The purpose is to force a particular control
20. Reference Summary The Hercules Reference Summary booklet lists all the system parameters device definitions console commands Hercules utilities etc along with their arguments This booklet is intended as a quick reference guide for experienced users Consult the Hercules User Reference Guide for more detailed and additional information Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 20 3 Hercules Configuration File 3 1 The Configuration File This chapter describes the configuration file for the Hercules Emulator By default the configuration file is named hercules cnf or hercules conf It is located in the configuration directory refer to the Hercules Installation Guide for details of the directory structure The configuration file contains the processor defini tions in the system parameters section the device layout in the device definitions section and Hercules runtime parameters also in the system parameters section The configuration file especially the device definition part is roughly equivalent to the IOCDS definitions found on a real mainframe environment It is an ASCII text file that is read and interpreted by the Hercules Emulator during its initialization phase 3 2 System Parameters The system parameters describe the processor definition and some Hercules internal runtime parameters The processor definitions include the processor model CPU serial number memory configuration and a
21. The automount feature enables software running in guest operating systems to auto matically mount unmount and or query for themselves the host virtual tape volume Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 131 filename mounted on a tape drive via the use of special CCW opcodes 0x4B Get Diagnose and OxE4 Sense ID without any intervention on the part of the Hercules operator An example of such a program for DOS VSE called TMOUNT is provided in the util subdirectory of the distributed source code This is a sticky option When specified automount support for the device remains dis abled until the option is specifically removed via a devinit command without the option specified This means if NOAUTOMOUNT is enabled for a device while global automount functionality is currently disabled because no AUTOMOUNT statement was specified at Hercules startup then automount functionality remains disabled for the device even should global automount functionality be later manually enabled via an automount con sole command When the 0x4B Set Diagnose CCW is used to auto mount a virtual tape volume onto a given tape drive an absolute fully qualified pathname should normally always be specified but need not be if a path relative to the currently defined default allowable automount directory is used instead The default allowable automount directory is always the first allowable directory that was defined or else the current dire
22. UTF8 EBCDIC CP NL DEFAULT DEFAULT specifies the traditional Hercules codepage Supported codepage mappings Mapping ASCII EBCDIC 437 037 437 PC United States 037 United States Canada 437 500 437 PC United States 500 Latin 1 437 1047 437 PC United States 1047 Open Systems Latin 1 819 037 819 ISO 8859 1 Latin 1 037 United States Canada 819 037v2 819 ISO 8859 1 Latin 1 037 United States Canada SHARE 819 273 819 ISO 8859 1 Latin 1 273 CECP Austria Germany 819 277 819 ISO 8859 1 Latin 1 277 CECP Denmark Norway 819 278 819 ISO 8859 1 Latin 1 278 CECP Finland Sweden 819 280 819 ISO 8859 1 Latin 1 280 CEOP Italy 819 284 819 ISO 8859 1 Latin 1 284 CECP Spain Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 44 Mapping ASCII EBCDIC 819 285 819 ISO 8859 1 Latin 1 285 CECP United Kingdom 819 297 819 ISO 8859 1 Latin 1 297 CECP France 819 500 819 ISO 8859 1 Latin 1 500 CECP International 819 1047 819 ISO 8859 1 Latin 1 1047 Open Systems Latin 1 850 273 850 PC Latin 1 273 Austria Germany 850 1047 850 PC Latin 1 1047 Open Systems Latin 1 1252 037 1252 Windows Latin 1 037 United States Canada 1252 037v2 1252 Windows Latin 1 037 United States Canada SHARE 1252 1047 1252 Windows Latin 1 1047 Open Systems Latin 1 1252 1140 1252 Windows Latin 1 1140 United States Canada with Euro sign Table 3 Supported codepage mappings 4 8 4 Examples Example 1 Set the codepage conversio
23. Descriptive DEVTMAX 1 0 1 7 Diagram gt gt DEVTMAX lt 1 o l n 7 32 3 Parameter 1 Specifiy 1 to cause one time only temporary threads to be created to service each I O request to a device Once the I O request is complete the thread exits Subsequent I Os to the same device will cause another worker thread to be created again 0 Specify 0 to cause an unlimited number of semi permanent threads to be created on an as needed basis With this option a thread is created to service an I O request for a device if one does not already exist When the I O is complete then the thread enters an idle state waiting for new work If a new I O request for the device arrives before the timeout period expires the existing thread will be reused The timeout value is currently hard coded at 5 minutes Note that this option can cause one thread or possibly more to be created for each de vice in your configuration Specifying 0 means there is no limit to the number of threads that can be created 1 n Specifiy a value from 1 to n to set an upper limit to the number of threads that can be created to service any I O request to any device Like the 0 option each thread once done servicing an I O request enters an idle state If a new request arrives before the timeout period expires the thread is reused If all threads are busy when a new I O re quest arrives a new thread is created only if the specified
24. NOSIGNAL SIGNAL NOIO 10 NOTIMER TIMER NOTHREADS THREADS NOLOCK LOCK NOTOD TOD NOLOGGER LOGGER NOWRAP WRAP TO nnn mmm Diagram NOERROR NOCONTROL EEN ERROR CONTROL NOPROG NOINTER NOSIE NOSIGNAL NOIO NOTIMER SIGNAL 10 TIMER Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 295 NOTHREADS LOCK TOD f THREADS NOLOCK NOTOD NOLOGGER WRAP SS LOGGER NOWRAP T r pon S i MM al 7 75 3 Parameter NOxxxxxxxx Deselects the specified trace entry type or deselects the specified option ERROR Selects the error trace entries CONTROL Selects the control trace entries PROG Selects the program interrupt trace entries INTER Selects the interlock failure trace entries SIE Selects the sie trace entries SIGNAL Selects the signaling trace entries IO Select the i o trace entries TIMER Selects the timer trace entries THREADS Selects the thread trace entries LOCK Selects the lock trace buffer entries TOD Selects the timestamp trace entries LOGGER Selects the logger trace entries WRAP Specifies that the trace table has be overwritten when it is full As soon as the end of the table is reached the next entry to be written to the table goes to the start and overlays the trace entry that was formerly there TO nnn Timeout in seconds before the automatic issuance of the PTT command is to occur to print display the internal trace table mmmmm Numb
25. R00 00000000 R04 00000000 R08 00000000 R12 00000000 CPU0001 GR01 00000000 GR05 00000000 GR09 00000000 GR13 00000000 GRO1 FFFFFFFE GRO5 00000000 GRO9 00000000 GR13 00000000 Disabled wait state PSW 000A0000 00000019 Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide G G G G G G G G Operation exception CODE 0001 ILC 2 00000000 INST 000A RO2 00000000 RO6 00000000 R10 00000000 R14 00000000 106401000 CLC RO2 00000000 RO6 00000000 R10 00000000 R14 00000000 GRO3 00000000 GRO7 00000000 GR11 00000000 GR15 00000000 Addressing exception CODE 0005 ILC 6 PSW 00080000 80000A1A INST D50 R 00000640 K 06 B22C0005 A774F 1600 2 0 0 1 FFC 50405000 184518F5 Translation exception 0005 GRO3 00000000 GRO7 00000000 GR11 00000000 GR15 00000000 DS Page 344 7 105 STOP Stop CPU or printer device 7 105 1 Function The STOP command by itself without argument simply stops a started CPU whereas STOP devicenum presses the virtual stop button on printer device devicenum 7 105 2 Syntax Descriptive STOP devicenum Diagram p gt gt STOP lt devicenum 7 105 3 Parameter devicenum The device number of the printer which has to be stopped 7 105 4 Examples Example 1 Stop the printer device OOOE 2007 06 30 10 07 39 312 00000FC4 stop 000e 2007 06 30 10 07 39 312 00000FC4 HHCPNO25I Printer 000E stopped Figure 165 STOP command stop printer
26. ececeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeseaeeeseaeeeeneeenaees 366 Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 7 7 121 TRACEOPT Instruction trace display options 368 7 122 TT32 Control query CTCI WIN functionality 0 eccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeseeeeeseaeeeseaeeeeneeeeaees 370 7 123 U Disassemble storage ennerien e a a T E E 372 7 124 UPTIME Display Hercules Emulator uptime 0 eeecceeeeceeeeeenneeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaeeeeeaas 374 7 125 V Display or alter virtual storage eee ee eeceeeeenneeeeeenaeeeeeeeaeeeseeaaeeeeeeaaeeeseeaaeeeseeaaeeeeeeaaeeeeseaas 375 7 126 VERSION Display version information c cccccccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeesaeeseeeeesaeeesaeeeneeeseaees 378 8 Hercules UutlitieS E areata arti te tet te en E 379 Ball s OVERVIOW EE 379 8 2 CCKDCDSK CCKD DASD file integrity verification recovery and repair utility ee 382 B CCKDCOMP CCKD DASD file compression Utility ccceecceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeesaeeeeneeesaees 384 8 4 CCKDDIAG CCKD DASD file diagnostics Utility ccceceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeesaeeeeaeeeeneeeeaees 386 8 5 CCKDSWAP CCKD DASD file Swap endian program 389 8 6 CKD2CCKD Copy CKD DASD file to CCKD DASD gel 390 8 7 CCKD2CKD Copy CCKD DASD file to CKD DASD gel 391 8 8 DASDCAT Display PDS datasets and members ccceecceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeceaeeeseaeeseneeesaees 392 8 9 DASDCONV DASD image file
27. 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 control c 5483 control c 5483 1 control c 5483 1 io c 664 io c 689 io c 689 io c 694 io c 516 channel c 2199 channel c 2199 1 channel c 2297 1 channel c 2430 1 channel c 2430 1 channel c 2460 cckddasd c 479 cckddasd c 479 cache c 141 cache c 141 cache c 148 ockddasd o 519 1 cckddasd c 546 1 cckddasd c 546 cache c 141 cache c 141 cache c 148 cckddasd c 564 1 C C C c C C Cc C Cc C C cnannel c Cc C C Cc C Cc C C C C Cc hannel c 3269 1 hannel c 3269 1 hannel c 3333 1 hannel c 3333 1 hannel c 3333 1 hannel c 3335 1 hannel c 3338 1 hannel c 3338 1 hannel c 3340 1 hannel c 3340 1 hannel c 3340 1 3341 1 pu 1555 enk Reetz hannel c 3504 1 hannel c 3504 1 VS WG b amp b SF BA BA A FS A FS A S amp S A A A WA A A GG A W GG GG GG S amp S GG GG GG GG GG BS GG BS GG GG GG GG BG hannel c 3543 1 hannel c 3555 1 hannel c 3555 1 hannel c 3558 1 hannel c 3558 1 hannel c 3634 1 hannel c 3635 1 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 2
28. 1 IDRC 1 METHOD 1 2 LEVEL n 4 CHUNKSIZE nnnnn 65535 MAXSIZE n MAXSIZEK n 0 MAXSIZEM n oul EOTMARGIN 7 READONLY 0 1 STRICTSIZE 1 RO NORING RW RING DEONIRQ 0 1 NOAUTOMOUNT Diagram p gt devaddr devtype oer ee ey e eee lt Les arguments St where arguments are AWSTAPE El COMPRESS 7 e Se OF Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 126 IDRC ee 9 Sy METHOD SES t r er LEVEL rz EE CHUNKSIZE i 65535 SE MAXSIZE p 0 H MAXSIZEK a 0 n MAXSIZEM p 0 n EOTMARGI N n READONLY N nnn GE STRICTSIZE Be e RO NORING RW RING DEONIRQ t Be 0 I TTT 1 L NOAUTOMOUNT a 5 8 4 3 Parameter devaddr This is the device address devtype This is the device type Valid device types are 3410 3420 3422 3430 3480 3490 8809 and 9347 hetfile The filename and path of the HET file or An asterisk defines an empty tape station The tape must be manually loaded on request If the filename starts with the character at sign the file then describes a list of tape emulation files to be loaded in succession The syntax of each line in this file is identical Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 127 AWSTAPE IDRC n to the information that can be coded directly after the
29. 129 4096 4096 19040 40 19040 3152 19040 19040 19040 3120 19069 19040 3120 19069 19069 19069 19069 Key O EH E ER A ES a ECH KE EH a eS a OO aS SS TrkstUse Ext B22 28 2 900 50 1200 38 60 24 480 12 120 1i 180 1 180 46 180 33 240 100 1500 47 180 5 LO ct 30 16 120 11 60 3 180 36 30 100 T50 S1 150 0 2970 0 900 0 30 97 30 6 t50 1 150 1 30 68 30 28 30 3 30 2 26 42 30 7 6 87 14 88 122 99 21 83 2ndry_alloc TR LGS CY CY CY CY L CY LG LG La CY CY CY CY LG Me L CY L CY LG CY CY CY TR e L CY CY CY CY CY L CY L BL L CY L TR TR TR TR 30 KA gt Te ET Ka ES St Gs E E CET ES Figure 216 DASDLS utility output extended information Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 415 8 15 DASDPDSU PDS unload utility 8 15 1 Function The DASDPDSU utility is a command that unloads PDS members from a DASD image and copies each member to a file memname mac in the current working directory 8 15 2 Syntax Descriptive DASDPDSU filename SF shadowfile pdsname ASCII Diagram gt gt DASDPDSU filename ae a ee a SF shadowfi e gt pdsname Sie alee ie ee a ey ASCII 8 15 3 Parameter filename Name of the DASD image file from which a PDS will be unloaded shadowfile Optional name of an associated shadow file pdsname Name of the partitioned dataset on the
30. 2 33 48 2 33 48 33 48 33 48 2 33 48 2 33 48 2 33 48 2 33 48 2 33 48 2 33 48 33 48 2 33 48 VS BA A A A A A WA A A A A A A B amp B BH BG 2 33 48 2 33 48 RER 762 RER RER 762 RER RER 762 RER 762 RER RER RER RER 762 RER RER 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 tt32 stats 0e20 TunTap32 dll Statistics Size of Kernel Hold Buffer 1024K Size of DLL I O Buffer 64K Maximum DLL I O Bytes Received 4K 0 Write Calls 0 Write I Os 346 Read Calls 1770 Read I Os 950 Packets Read 0 Packets Written 524372 Bytes Read 0 Bytes Written 0 Internal Packets 913 Ignored Packets Figure 192 TT32 STATS command Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 371 7 123 U Disassemble storage 7 123 1 Function The U command lets you disassemble storage The argument specifies the storage address to be disa ssembled The length of the storage area can be given as an optional argument The listed storage area is formatted as one line per instruction Every instruction is shown as a hexadecimal string and as read able assembler statement Storage areas that can not be disassembled data areas are marked with question marks 7 123 2 Syntax Descriptive U address ength Diagram kk U ae address es tae EE
31. 7 Reserved 8 11 Command Interface Word CIW for Read Configuration Data 12 15 Command Interface Word CIW for Set Interface Identifier 16 19 Command Interface Word CIW for Read Node Identifier Table 12 Sense ID The Read Device Characteristics RDC defines the characteristics of the logical volume The format is the following Bytes Description O 1 Subsystem type Subsystem model number and architecture 4 Device type 2 3 5 Device model 6 9 Subsystem and device facilities Device class code Device type cod 3 Number of primary cylinders 5 Tracks per cylinder Number of sectors TyAL9 Track length 20 21 Length of HA and RO Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 301 ER Track capacity calculation formula 23 27 Track capacity calculation factors Fl through F5 28 29 First alternate cylinder address 30 31 Number of alternate tracks 32 33 First diagnostic cylinder address 34 35 Number of diagnostic tracks 36 37 First device support cylinder address 38 39 number of device support tracks 40 DR record ID 41 OBR record ID 42 Control unit type code 43 Read trackset parameter length 44 45 Maximum record zero length 46 Reserved 47 Track set size 48 Track capacity calculation factor F6 49 50 RPS sector calculation factors 51 53 Reserved 54
32. COMMANG WEE 332 SFP comand DEE 333 SFK command chkdsk level 21 335 SFK command chkdsk level AN 336 SH Ke ell E ul DEE 338 SHRD command initialize trace table cccceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceaeeeeeaeeeeeeeseaeeesaeeesaaeseneees 339 SHRD command print trace table cccccececeeceeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeseeeeeceaeeesaaeeeeeeeeeaeeesaeeeeaeeeeeees 340 SIZEOR COM MAG KEE 341 SSD comina WEE 342 START command start DIE 211 de eaa aaa a EES a anast 343 START command stat RU ees italian aa Ae 343 STARTALL COMMANG RE 344 STOP command Stop printer ccccceceeeceseeeeeeeeeceeeeeeaeeeeaeeseeeeeceaeeesaaeeeeaeeseaeeesaeeseaaeseneees 345 STOP command stop GPW ebe he cceged ac dees Eegen Eed ES 345 STOPALL COMMANG sna ke ss e A a A A teats 346 SPORE COMMANG WE 347 SUSPEND COMIT AA ic usa sarase iiser Zeg cggeg EES Jedavandcecsussadagesadcavessekdeeetraddenustadesesate lt cedvvil cx 349 SYNGIO COMMA WEE 350 SYSCLEEAR COMMANG ET 351 SYSRESETCOMMAN TEE 352 FCOMMMANG WETTER 353 EE COMIMANG EE 355 T CORINA RE 356 Ken ID eege Eed 357 TACKD COMMEN eacisigoctevisdedact nant E suahadaavabedead sa A A RS 359 TORE COMMANA RE 359 Tedev e gl ET WEE 361 Ee gel ET KPIEPEL EE E PEE E 362 T dev command Several devices eeeeeceeeeeneeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeetaeeeeetiaeeeeneas 362 TIMERINT command list Current value aee atenten anA an EA TE 363 Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Pag
33. Ee 2225 1 ES KC 222 22241 22201 22 222 1 Ke CC SS 222 222 1 SS 22 222 1 222 reed r221 222 SS 222 1 22 5 22241 22a 12261 97 197 197 97 97 197 97 97 97 197 T97 97 97 197 97 97 97 97 197 97 97 197 97 97 97 97 197 97 97 197 97 97 97 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 F28 F28 F28 F28 F28 F28 F28 F28 F28 F28 F28 F28 F28 F28 F28 F28 F28 F28 F28 F28 F28 F28 F28 F28 F28 F28 F28 F28 F28 F28 F28 F28 F28 T O G OnO aG E E E ET E E a E EE EE e E E E EE ET H E E E EE ER O EH O 133 134 ER L40 L41 ER ER 144 45 48 149 160 161 EZ OSS Oh ae Oe A 3 20240 20241 20242 20243 20248 20249 024A 024B 030E 20340 20341 20342 20343 20344 20345 20348 20349 034A 034B 0480 2314 2314 2314 3350 3350 3350 3350 3350 3350 3350 3350 3340 3340 3350 3350 3350 3350 3350 3350 3350 3350 1403 3350 3350 3350 3350 3350 3350 3350 3350 3350 3350 3420 D DD D oD DD DD OD SEL SE TA RA EF Sek SZA zA SE SE RAN AA FA SA SE SE WAA RAN RA Sek RA SE SE HNA EAA EA RA BIA FO ATA
34. Example 2 Stop CPU 1 2007 06 30 10 09 23 148 00000FC4 cpu 1 2007 06 30 10 09 23 148 00000FC4 stop Figure 166 STOP command stop CPU Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 345 7 106 STOPALL Stop all CPUs 7 106 1 Function The STOPALL command stops all CPUs 7 106 2 Syntax Descriptive STOPALL Diagram gt gt STOPALL AAADD 7 106 3 Parameter None 7 106 4 Examples Example 1 Stop all CPU s 2007 06 30 14 26 19 137 00000FC4 stopall Figure 167 STOPALL command Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 346 7 107 STORE Store CPU status at absolute zero 7 107 1 Function The STORE command stores the CPU status of the active CPU at absolute zero 7 107 2 Syntax Descriptive STORE Diagram gt gt STORE A TR od 7 107 3 Parameter None 7 107 4 Examples Example 1 Store status for active CPU 2007 06 30 15 31 05 968 00000FC4 store 2007 06 30 15 31 05 968 00000FC4 HHCCPO10I CPU0000 store status completed Figure 168 STORE command Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 347 7 108 SUSPEND Suspend Hercules 7 108 1 Function This command lets you suspend the current Hercules session and shutdown the host machine Subse quently the suspended session can be resumed see RESUME commana The data necessary to be saved for a later restart is saved in a packed zippe
35. IBM 3350 IBM 3350 1 555 5 IBM 3375 IBM 3375 1 959 1 IBM 3380 IBM 3380 1 885 1 IBM 3380 A 885 1 IBM 3380 B 885 1 Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 502 Devicetype Model Cylinders Alternate Cylinders IBM 3380 D 885 1 IBM 3380 J 885 1 IBM 3380 2 1770 2 IBM 3380 E 1770 2 IBM 3380 3 2665 3 IBM 3380 K 2665 3 EMC 3380 K 3339 3 EMC 3380 K 3993 3 IBM 3390 1 IBM 3390 1 1113 1 IBM 3390 2 2226 2 IBM 3390 3 3339 1 IBM 3390 9 10017 3 IBM 3390 27 32760 3 IBM 3390 54 65520 3 IBM 9345 IBM 9345 1 1440 0 IBM 9345 2 2156 0 Table 23 Supported CKD DASD Devices Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 503 FBA Devices IBM 3310 NM IBM 3310 1 125664 IBM 3370 NM IBM 3370 A1 558000 IBM 3370 B1 558000 IBM 3370 A2 712752 IBM 3370 B2 712752 IBM 9313 NM IBM 9313 1 246240 IBM 9332 RN IBM 9332 200 360036 IBM 9332 400 360036 IBM 9336 600 554800 IBM 9335 NM IBM 9335 1 804714 IBM 9336 NW IBM 9336 10 920115 IBM 9336 20 1672881 IBM 9336 25 1672881 IBM 0671 08 513072 IBM 0671 574560 IBM 0671 04 624456 Table 24 Supported FBA DASD Devices Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 504 Appendix B Configuration of Emulated CPUs This appendix describes the cooperation of the configuration statements related to the emulated CPUs in more d
36. RO NORING RW RING Ek 1 NoAUTOMOUNT _____________________________ Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 124 5 8 3 3 Parameter devaddr This is the device address devtype This is the device type Valid device types are 3410 3420 3422 3430 3480 3490 8809 and 9347 awsfile The filename and path of the AWSTAPE file or An asterisk defines an empty tape station The tape must be manually be loaded on request If the filename starts with the character at sign the file then describes a list of tape emulation files to be loaded in succession The syntax of each line in this file is identical to the information that can be coded directly after the device type in the overall configu ration file Any emulation file name parameter specified in this file may be substituded by the character in which case it specifies a set of options to be applied to all additional emulation files specified in the list This function emulates an Automatic Cartridge Feeder ACF The ACF is a feature on cartridge type tape drives 3480 3490 etc that automatically loads a new tape when a tape is removed from the drive There is no real control over this device by the host as it just keeps on feeding tapes one after the other Although the ACF feature is unique to cartridge type systems the emulation accepts the use of the same technique for emu lated 1 2 inch tapes reel drives as
37. The TT32 command controls or queries the CTCI WIN functionality for a given device address It allows you to enable or disable global CTCI WIN debug tracing or displays TunTap32 statistics for the specified CTC device 7 122 2 Syntax Descriptive TT32 DEBUG NODEBUG STATS devnum Diagram TT32 DEBUG lt WEE J STATS devnum 7 122 3 Parameter DEBUG Enable global CTCI WIN debug tracing NODEBUG Disable global CTCI WIN debug tracing STATS Display TunTap32 statistics for CTC device devnum Device number of the device for which the TunTap32 statistics have to displayed 7 122 4 Examples Example 1 Enable global CTCI WIN debug tracing 2007 06 30 17 29 16 296 00000FC4 tt32 debug 2007 06 30 17 29 16 296 00000FC4 HHCPNxxxI TT32 debug tracing messages enabled Figure 190 TT32 DEBUG command Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 370 Example 2 Disable global CTCI WIN debug tracing 2007 06 30 17 29 16 296 O0000FC4 tt32 nodebug 2007 06 30 17 29 16 296 00000FC4 HHCPNxxxI TT32 debug tracing messages disabled Figure 191 TT32 NODEBUG command Example 3 Display TunTap32 statistics for device 0E20 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2 33 48 2 33 48
38. around 1 GB on 32 bit platforms on 64 bit platforms the value should only be limited by available paging space 4 33 2 Syntax Descriptive MAINSIZE size Diagram gt gt MAINSIZE size gt lt 4 33 3 Parameter size A valid decimal number whose value is at least 2 The upper limit must not exceed 4095 almost 4GB for 32 bit platforms and 4 294 967 295 about 4 million GB for 64 bit plat forms 4 33 4 Examples Example 1 Set the size of the main storage to 64 MB MAINSIZE 64 Example 1 Set the size of the main storage to 4 GB MAINSIZE 4096 Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 76 4 34 MANUFACTURER Manufacturer name returned by STSI instruction 4 34 1 Function MANUFACTURER specifies the manufacturer name returned by the STSI instruction The default name is HRC 4 34 2 Syntax Descriptive MANUFACTURER HRC name Diagram MANUFACTURER am HRC EE name 4 34 3 Parameter name Any name with a maximum length of four characters If MANUFACTURER is not specified in the configuration file then the default name is HRC 4 34 4 Examples Example 1 Set the manufacturer name returned by the STSI instruction to HERC MANUFACTURER HERC Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 77 4 35 MAXCPU Maximum number of CPUs 4 35 1 Function The MAXCPU configuration statement specifies the maximum num
39. cdevhar I1 table 0 devhdr cdevhar 11 table 12 tables 1 devhdr cdevhdr l1 table 12 tables free spaces 2 devhdr cdevhdr 11 table 12 tables free spaces trkhdrs 3 devhdr cdevhar I1 table I2 tables free spaces trkimgs 4 devhdr cdevhdr build everything else from recovery Use check level 4 only after making a backup and be prepared to wait a long time Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 334 7 98 4 Examples Example 1 Perform chkdsk level 2 for the shadow file of dasd device OAEO OOOOOAEO sfk 0148 00000AE0 HHCCD2101 size free nbr st reads writes 12reads hits switches 00000AE0 HHCCD2111 readaheads misses OOOQ0AEO HHCCD2121 e 5 5 E E EE E e E a e a E E 00000AE0 HHCCD213I 340102838 0 0 8823 836 142 27681 33892 00000AE0 HHCCD2141I 2614 1191 00000AE0 HHCCD215I D MVS DASD MVSRES CCKD 00000AE0 HHCCD216I 0 340048223 0 D rd 8570 0 137 00000AE0 HHCCD217I D MVS DASD MVSRES 148 00000AE0 HHCCD218I 1 54615 0 0 rw 253 836 5 Figure 155 SFK command chkdsk level 2 Example 2 Perform chkdsk level 4 for the shadow file of dasd device OAEO 00000AE0 sfk OAEO OOOOOAEO sfk 0148 4 00000AE0 HHCCU301I OAEO file l trk 26309 recovered offset 0x2f10 len 57 00000AE0 HHCCU301I OAEO file l trk 34077 recovered offset 0x2f49 len 125 00000AE0 HHCCU301I OAEO file l trk 34047 recovered offset Ox2fc6 len 208 00000AE0 HHCCU301I OAEO file l trk 34050 recovered of
40. devtype This is the device type Valid card reader types are 1442 2501 3505 filename The name and optionally the path of the card reader file SOCKDEV Indicates that the card reader is a socket device wherein the filename is actually a socket specification instead of a device filename When used there must be only one filename specified in the form port host port or sockpath sockname The device then accepts remote connections on the given TCP IP port or Unix domain socket and reads data from the socket instead from a device file This allows automatic remote submission of card reader data See chapter Submitting Jobs via the Socket Reader for more details EOF EOF specifies that unit exception status is presented after reading the last card in the file This option is persistent and will remain in effect until the reader is reinitialized with the INTRQ option Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 114 INTRO INTRO specifies that unit check status with intervention required sense bytes is presen ted after reading the last card in the file This option is persistent and will remain in effect until the reader is reinitialized with the EOF option MULTIFILE Specifies when multliple files are entered to automatically open the next input file and continue reading whenever EOF is encountered on a given file If not specified reading stops once EOF is reached on a given file and an attention interrupt i
41. e CBT MVS Utilities Tape CBTTAPE www cbttape org e Microsoft Visual C 2008 Express http www microsoft com express download Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 516 e ZLIB http www zlib net http www softdeviabs com Hercules ZLIB1 1 2 3 bin lib inc vc2008 x86 x64 zi e BZIP2 http www bzip org http www softdeviabs com Hercules BZIP2 1 0 5 bin lib inc vc2008 x86 x64 zi e PCRE http www pcre org http www softdeviabs com Hercules PCRE 6 4 1 bin lib inc vc2008 x86 x64 zi Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 517 Hercules Emulator LL SL J Y UOISI A pin souaJsajay Joen 10 ejnwg ainyoayyo1y zZ 066 VSa 0Z E wajshs Soinen URO31100 01 Ei HE Page 518 Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide
42. every instruction is listed with detailed trace information The trace information includes the executing CPU the PSW the executed instruction in hexadecimal and in dis assembled form as well as register hexadecimal displays of all involved register types This function is similar to the instruction stepping The difference between these two function is that with instruction stepping the execution of every instruction has to be initiated by hitting ENTER on the Hercules console whereas instruction tracing once started traces the instructions without inter ruption Please note that this function will create an enormous amount of output in the Hercules log Running it on a relatively current machine 3 GHz HT Processor for 10 seconds creates more than 10 MB of trace data 7 113 2 Syntax Descriptive T addr addr addr addr addr length 0 Diagram gt gt T addr addr addr addr addr length 0 7 113 3 Parameter addr Specifies an address The range can be coded as addr addr or addr addr from begin address to end address or as address length from begin address for length length Specifies the length of the range 0 No range is specified or an existing range is reset Tracing is active for all addresses Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 354 7 113 4 Examples Example 1 Turn instruction tracing on t H CPU0000 CPU0000 CPU0000 CPU000
43. feature LOADPARM IPL parameter LOGOPT Log options LPARNAME LPAR name returned by DIAG x 204 LPARNUM LPAR identification number MAINSIZE Main storage in MB MANUFACTURER Manufacturer name returned by STSI instruction MAXCPU Maximum number of CPUs MODEL Model names returned by STSI instruction MODPATH Dynamic load module path Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 22 MOUNTED_TAPE_REINIT Control tape initialization Table 1 Hercules System Parameters 3 3 Device Definitions NUMCPU Number of emulated CPUs NUMVEC Number of vector facilities OSTAILOR Intended operating system PANRATE Panel refresh rate PANTITLE Hercules console window title PGMPRDOS LPP license setting PLANT Plant name returned by STSI instruction SCLPROOT SCLP base directory SHCMDOPT Shell command option SHRDPORT Shared device server port SYSEPOCH Base date for TOD clock TIMERINT Internal timer update interval TODDRAG TOD clock drag factor TODPRIO Timer thread process priority TRACEOPT Instruction trace display option TZOFFSET TOD clock offset from GMT XPNDSIZE Expanded storage in MB YROFFSET TOD clock offset from actual date The device definitions describe the layout of the emulated hardware i e DASD tape terminals and printers It is comparable with the IOCDS found in a real mainframe environment Each emulated device must be specified in this part of the conf
44. hdr D MVS DASD MVSRES CCKD Example 3 List all the datasets currently on the volume D MVS DASD MVSRES CCKD showing information from the Format1 DSCB with column headers calendar date format and reserving only 20 characters for the dataset name DASDLS dsnl 20 hdr caldt D MVS DASD MVSRES CCKD 8 14 5 Sample Utility Output Sample 1 List all the datasets currently on the volume DAMVS DASD MVSRES CCKD D Hercules gt dasdls D MVS DASD MVSRES CCKD Hercules DASD list program Version 3 10 0 c Copyright 1999 2010 by Roger Bowler Jan Jaeger and others D MVS DASD MVSRES CCKD VOLSER MVSRES SYS1 STAGE1 OUTPUT SYS1 LPALIB SYS1 LINKLIB SYS1 SVCLIB SYS1 NUCLEUS SYS1 DCMLIB several lines not displayed SYS1 SMPCRQ SYS1 SMPSCDS SYS1 COBLIB SYS1 FORTLIB SYS1 PL1LIB SYS1 SORTLIB Figure 215 DASDLS utility output basic information Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 414 Sample 2 List all the datasets currently on the volume D MVS DASD MVSRES CCKD showing information from the Formati DSCB with column headers expiration date calendar date format with a year offset of 10 years and reserving only 20 characters for the dataset name D Hercules gt dasdls caldt expdt hdr dsnl 20 yroffs 10 D MVS DASD MVSRES CCKD Hercules DASD list program Version 3 10 0 c Copyright 1999 2010 by Roger Bowler D MVS DASD MVSRES CCKD VOLSER MVSRES Dsname SYS1 STAGE1 OUT
45. panel refresh rate and allows a new value to be set 7 70 2 Syntax Descriptive PANRATE SLOW FAST rate Diagram p gt gt PANRATE a SLOW FAST rate 7 70 3 Parameter SLOW SLOW is a synonym for a panel refresh rate of 500 milliseconds FAST FAST is a synonym for a panel refresh rate of 50 milliseconds rate Any value between 1 10 and 5000 milliseconds A value less than the Linux system clock tick interval 10 on Intel platforms 1 on Alpha platforms or a value of more than 5000 will be rejected 7 70 4 Examples Example 1 Display current panel refresh rate 2007 06 30 14 31 53 653 00000FC4 panrate 2007 06 30 14 31 53 653 00000FC4 HHCPNO37I Panel refresh rate 1000 millisecond s Figure 117 PANRATE command list current value Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 286 Example 2 Set a new panel refresh rate 2007 06 30 14 31 55 623 00000FC4 panrate fast 2007 06 30 14 31 55 623 00000FC4 HHCPNO37I Panel refresh rate 50 millisecond s Figure 118 PANRATE command set new value Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 287 7 71 PGMTRACE Trace program interrupts 7 71 1 Function The PGMTRACE command without arguments displays the actual trace program interrupt options Given with an argument interruption code the command changes the current options Precede the interruption code with a minus sign to stop tracing of that particular
46. start button on printer device devicenum 7 103 2 Syntax Descriptive START devicenum Diagram START a devicenum 7 103 3 Parameter devicenum The device number of the printer which should be started 7 103 4 Examples Example 1 Start the printer device OOOE 2007 06 30 10 07 43 296 00000FC4 start 000e 2007 06 30 10 07 43 296 00000FC4 HHCPNO18I Printer 000E starter Figure 162 START command start printer Example 2 Start CPU 1 2007 06 30 10 09 23 148 00000FC4 cpu 1 2007 06 30 10 09 23 148 00000FC4 start Figure 163 START command start CPU Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 343 7 104 STARTALL Start all CPUs 7 104 1 Function The STARTALL command starts all CPUs 7 104 2 Syntax Descriptive STARTALL 7 104 3 Parameter None 7 104 4 Examples Example 1 Start all CPU s 00000FC4 00000FC4 00000FC4 00000FC4 00000FC4 00000FC4 00000FC4 00000FC4 00000FC4 00000FC4 00000FC4 00000FC4 00000FC4 00000FC4 00000FC4 00000FC4 00000FC4 P GO Fa GY a E ED ER EE G Qe EE 8 Figure 164 STARTALL command HCCPO1 HCCPO1 HCCPO1 tartal 1 4I PU0001 PU0001 PU0001 PU0001 PU0001 G G G G 4I PU0001 PU0001 PU0001 PU0001 PU0001 PU0001 PU0001 G G G G 1I CPU0001 PSW 00000000 R00 00000000 R04 00000000 R08 00000000 R12 00000000 CPU0001 R 7FFFFFFE
47. symbol The name of a symbol If no symbol name and optionally a value is given then all previously defined symbols are listed value The value that is assigned to the symbol If the value is omitted then the previously defined symbol is cleared the symbol itself is not deleted 7 28 4 Examples Example 1 List all defined symbols 2007 06 30 12 44 06 890 00000FC4 defsym 2007 06 30 12 44 06 890 00000FC4 HHCPN042I CUU CUU 2007 06 30 12 44 06 890 00000FC4 HHCPN042I cuu cuu 2007 06 30 12 44 06 890 00000FC4 HHCPN042I CCUU CCUU 2007 06 30 12 44 06 890 00000FC4 HHCPN042I ccuu ccuu 2007 06 30 12 44 06 890 00000FC4 HHCPN042I DASDPATH D MVS DASD_CCKD 2007 06 30 12 44 06 890 00000FC4 HHCPN042I CSS 0 Figure 51 DEFSYM command list all symbols Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 217 Example 2 Define new symbol and list the symbols afterwards 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 N N N NNNNA 44 4 44 44 44 4 44 4 44 4 44 44 36 296 296 EE s296 296 296 296 a N N N NY NY k ND 187 00000ED0 00000ED0 00000ED0 00000ED0 00000ED0 00000ED0 00000ED0 00000ED0 defsym tapedir home hercules tapes defsym HHCPNO421 HHCPNO421 HHCPNO421 HHCPNO421 HHCPNO421 HHCPNO421 CUU CUU cuu cuu CCUU CCUU ccuu ccuu CSS 0 tape
48. this group name can be used to indicate that a device in this group is to be used If a group name is specified as a terminal type suffix e g IBM 3278 GROUPNAME and there are no devices defined with that group name or no available devices remaining in that group then the connection is rejected If no group name is specified as a terminal type suffix then the connection will only be eligible to terminal devices which also have no group name specified Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 110 The terminal group name should be 1 8 alphanumeric characters in length the first cha racter being alphabetic and it should not be a hexadecimal number Upper and lower case letters in the group name are considered to be equivalent The asterisk is used to indicate any terminal group name It may be omitted if there are no additional arguments following the group name If an IP address and optionally mask is specified and there is no specific group name desired then the asterisk must be coded to distinguish the terminal group name and the IP address arguments ipaddr mask The optional IP address and subnet masks specify the IP address es at which client s are allowed to connect via the device address identified by the device statement This provides an additional means of specifying which device s a client tn3270 session may connect to If the IP address and mask default 255 255 255 255 if not specified of the tn3270 client a
49. to a eo is always performed last to ensure that no invalid or illegal characters remain in the final output Windows filename 8 26 8 5 PDF section The PDF section contains options used to define how you wish your output pdf or rtf file to be formatted Please note that while all of the below options are supported for PDF output not all of them are supported for RTF output The options which are not supported for rtf files are all of the GreenBar options e g color as well as the Feedholes Compressed and Columns options All of other PDF options e g paper and font size etc are supported for both PDF and RTF files Option PDF RTF PaperSize formname Yes Yes PaperWidth width Yes Yes PaperHeight height Yes Yes Orientation Portrait Landscape Yes Yes HorzMargin margin Yes Yes FontSize 9 10 11 12 Yes Yes LPI 6 8 Yes Yes Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 455 Columns 0 cols Yes No GreenBar No Yes Yes No BarColor colour rrggbb Yes No FeedHoles No Yes Yes No Compress Yes No Yes No Table 21 HercPrt PDF and RTF Options 8 26 8 5 1 PaperSize Predefined PaperSize values are USFanFold default USCompactFanFold LPI 8 USLetter ISOA3 ISOA4 ISOB4 ISOB4Extra and ISOC3 When a predefined PaperSize value is used then a PaperWidth and PaperHeight value need not be entered Otherwise
50. vies 4 unsigned int 4 CONG de eege See 4 Chong Vong scene 8 size va vawavews 4 OFF E aas eee ss 8 EE 42848 REOS EE 41624 REGS copy len 1480 POWYS ots rotors Ee E 40 DEV BK gg hg 1816 TLB entry 36 TLB table 36864 FILENAME_MAX 260 PATH_MAX 260 Page 341 7 102 SSD Signal shutdown 7 102 1 Function The SSD signal shutdown command signals an imminent hypervisor shutdown to the guest Guests who support this are supposed to perform a shutdown upon receiving this request An implicit ssd command is given on a hercules QUIT command if the guest supports ssd In that case the Hercules shutdown will be delayed until the guest has shutdown or a second quit command is given 7 102 2 Syntax Descriptive SSD Diagram SS ee wou HHT_ 1 7 102 3 Parameter None 7 102 4 Examples Example 1 Signal an imminent hypervisor shutdown to the guest operating system In this example the guest operating system does not support this function 2007 08 25 18 18 40 294 000004B8 ssd 2007 08 25 18 18 40 294 000004B8 HHCCPO81E SCP not receiving quiesce signals Figure 161 SSD command Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 342 7 103 START Start CPU or printer device 7 103 1 Function The START command by itself without argument simply starts a stopped CPU whereas START devicenum presses the virtual
51. 0 cyl 0 head 0 record 1 kl 4 dl 24 of 0 read data 24 bytes Stat 0C00 Count 0000 gt 00080000 8000015A CCW 06004A98 60000060 gt 00000000 00000000 read count orientation is data cyl 0 head 0 record 2 kl 4 dl 144 of 0 read data 144 bytes 40000006 40000006 00000000 seeking to cyl 0 head 0 Stat 0C00 Count 0000 CCW 31004ABE 40000005 gt 00000000 04000000 read count orientation is index cyl 0 head 0 record 0 kl 0 dl 8 of 0 Stat 0C00 Count 0000 CCW 08004AA0 00000000 gt 31004ABE CCW 31004ABE 40000005 gt 00000000 40000005 04000000 read count orientation is count cyl 0 head 0 record 1 kl 4 dl 24 of 0 Stat 0C00 Count 0000 CCW 08004AA0 00000000 gt 31004ABE 40000005 CCW 31004ABE 40000005 gt 00000000 04000000 read count orientation is count cyl 0 head 0 record 2 kl 4 dl 144 of 0 Stat 0C00 Count 0000 CCW 08004AA0 00000000 gt 31004ABE 40000005 CCW 31004ABE 40000005 gt 00000000 04000000 read count orientation is count cyl 0 head 0 record 3 kl 4 dl 80 of 0 Stat 0C00 Count 0000 CCW 08004AA0 00000000 gt 31004ABE 40000005 CCW 31004ABE 40000005 gt 00000000 04000000 06004A98 00000000 31004ABE 31004ABE 00000400 00000000 08004AA0 00000000 08004AA0 00000000 08004AA0 00000000 08004AA0 00000000 60000060 00000000 40000005 40000005 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 Figure 141 S dev command He
52. 00020078 00020011 1 00 58 171 00000FC4 R 00000090 K 0E 0004B000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00 58 171 00000FC4 R 000000A0 K 0E 00000000 013B8188 00000000 00000000 00 58 171 00000FC4 R 000000B0 K 0E 00000000 00000000 00010009 OOF3CC08 00 58 171 00000FC4 R 000000C0 K 0E 28000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 1 00 58 171 00000FC4 R 000000D0 K 0E 00000000 OF5D2000 00000000 00000000 00 58 171 00000FC4 R 000000E0 K 0E 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00 58 171 00000FC4 R 000000F0 K 0E 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 Figure 132 R command display real storage Example 2 Alter 4 bytes of real storage at location x 00000000 to x FFFFFFFP 11 01 55 015 00000FC4 r 00000000 ffffffff 11 01 55 015 00000FC4 R 00000000 K 0E FFFFFFFF 81080278 00000000 00000000 Figure 133 R command alter real storage Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 307 7 81 RESTART Generate restart interrupt 7 81 1 Function The RESTART command generates a restart interrupt the virtual RESTART key is pressed 7 81 2 Syntax Descriptive RESTART Diagram RESTART TH 7 81 3 Parameter None 7 81 4 Examples Example 1 Generate restart interrupt 2007 06 30 15 30 23 703 00000FC4 restart 2007 06 30 15 30 23 718 00000FC4 HHCPNO38I Restart key depressed Figure 134 RESTART command Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 308 7 82 RESUME Resume Her
53. 0010 80011571 COA80065 COA80063 0000F130 q y ef y c 10 2008 01 27 19 04 30 937 00000378 0020 93363000 C1DC84EA 928D5000 031181A7 160 A d k P ax 2008 01 27 19 04 30 937 00000378 0030 7256FAF1 2C74E437 2E32D6E1 OBB94DC7 rV 1 tU7 20 MG 2008 01 27 19 04 30 937 00000378 0040 32A143D1 796B4E57 73E431C1l 0A7E75E7 2 CJykNWsU1A uX 2008 01 27 19 04 30 937 00000378 0050 746E90B1 06DD5477 2CD450A1 26F97A07 tn Tw MP amp 9z 2008 01 27 19 04 30 937 00000378 0060 44BA6191 285B7697 OCC6B381 4932DA27 D aj vp F alI2 Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 214 2008 01 27 19 04 30 937 00000378 0070 29903671 3AE634B7 SF8EDA61 1BA31647 6q W4 _ a t G 2008 01 27 19 04 30 937 00000378 0080 700B8F51 O6EEOED7 77104541 4D32AE67 p Q Pw EAM2 g 2008 01 27 19 04 30 937 00000378 0090 3A57EC31 625384F7 593E7421 133A2287 W 1bSd7Y gt t g 2008 01 27 19 04 30 937 00000378 00A0 4DBOCD11 12671717 2E1CE701 6B81F2A7 M g X ka2x 2008 01 27 19 04 30 937 00000378 00B0 2061B1F1 6DE94537 6DBF1DE1 1E429EC7 a l1mZE7m B G 2008 01 27 19 04 30 937 00000378 00CO 27C61AD1 3F0A8F57 4E4898C1 0024A6E7 F J WNHgA wX 2008 01 27 19 04 30 937 00000378 00D0 664987B1 656B7577 71ECD7A1 74408B07 fIg ekuwq P t 2008 01 27 19 04 30 937 00000378 00E0 39677891 381C7797 S4EF5A81 2E1ECB27 9gxj8 wpT Za 2008 01 27 19 04 30 937 00000378 00FO0 67AB6D71 279E15B7 7BA3A161 33B7E747 g mq t a3 XG 2008 01 27 19 04 30 937 00000378 0100
54. 00C6 00C6 00C7 00C7 00C7 00C7 0480 0480 0480 0480 CCW 03000000 20000001 gt 040C0000 0001CEFA 00000000 00000000 Stat 0200 Count 0001 Sense 40000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 Sense INTREQ CCW 03000000 20000001 gt 040C0000 OO01CEFA 00000000 00000000 Stat 0200 Count 0001 Sense 40000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 Sense INTREQ CCW 03000000 20000001 gt 040C0000 OO01CEFA 00000000 00000000 Stat 0200 Count 0001 Sense 40000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 Sense INTREQ Stat 0200 Count 0001 Sense 40000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 Sense INTREQ CCW 03000000 20000001 gt 040C0000 0001CEFA 00000000 00000000 Stat 0200 Count 0001 Sense 40000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 Sense INTREQ CCW 03000000 20000001 gt 040C0000 OO01CEFA 00000000 00000000 Stat 0200 Count 0001 Sense 40000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 Sense INTREQ CCW 03000000 20000001 gt 040C0000 OO01CEFA 00000000 00000000 Stat 0200 Count 0001 Sense 40000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 Sense INTREQ CCW 03000000 20000001 gt 040C0000 OO01CEFA 00000000 00000000 Stat 0200 Count 0001 Sense 40000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 Sense INTREQ CCW 03000000 20000001 gt 040C0000 OQO01CEFA 00000000 00000000 Stat 0200 Count 0001 Sense 40220000 00C00300 00000000 00800100 O10000FF FF000000 Sense INTR
55. 0120 3310 D DASD TST001 FBA Example 2 Define a 3370 FBA DASD device on device address 0120 The DASD device is attached to a shared device server which is running on a machine with IP address 192 168 200 1 and listening on port 3990 The device address of the DASD on the shared device server is 0121 0120 3370 192 168 200 1 3990 0121 Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 145 5 11 CKD DASD Devices 5 11 1 Function This device statement is used to define a CKD DASD device to the Hercules configuration The argument specifies the name of a file that contains the CKD DASD image or the INET address of a Hercules shared device server The file consists of a 512 byte device header record followed by fixed length track images The length of each track image depends on the emulated device type and is always rounded up to the next multiple of 512 bytes Volumes larger than 2 GB for example the 3390 model 3 can be supported by spreading the data across more than one file Each file contains a whole number of cylinders The first file which contains cylinders 0 2518 in the case of a 3390 usually has _1 as the last two characters of its name The ckddasd driver allocates the remaining files by replacing the last characters of the file name by the characters 2 3 and so on If your operating system supports large file sizes or 64 bit offsets then volumes larger than 2GB can be kept in a single file The t
56. 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 amp b B WB WA FSF BA A A FS A A A A A DA A A BG amp B B A A BA WB WB A B WA GG A BA A A A GG A A A D B 249 249 249 249 249 249 249 249 249 249 249 249 249 249 249 249 249 249 249 249 249 249 249 249 249 249 249 249 249 249 249 249 249 249 249 249 249 249 249 249 249 249 249 249 57 ST STs 57a Diy 57s STs 57 059 ois
57. 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 eee roy PST GR ST SSC S TIT 157 G 757s ST GE TOT TIT 137 044 044 044 044 044 044 044 044 059 059 059 059 059 059 059 059 00000FC4 00000FC4 00000FC4 00000FC4 00000FC4 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 CA FC4 FC4 CA FC4 FC4 exit CEI Cr 900I 9011 CCPOO08I CCP008I CE CC CC FO471 FO471 FO471 CTTOO3I CC CC CC EE CC CC CG FO471 FO471 FO471 FO471 FO471 FO471 FO471 Begin Hercules shutdown Releasing configuration CPU0000 thread ended tid 0000049C pid 232 CPU0001 thread ended tid 0000046C pid 232 Subc Subc Subc Timer thread ended Subc Subc Subc Subc Subc Subc Subc nannel nannel nannel nannel nannel nannel nannel nannel nannel nannel 0000 0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 0006 0007 0008 0009 de de de de de det de de de det Cac Cac Cac Cac Cac ac Cac Cac Cac ac hed hed hed hed hed hed hed hed hed hed Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 232 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007
58. 1112 Page 349 7 109 SYNCIO Display SYNCIO device statistics 7 109 1 Function This command shows the SYNCIO device statistics for all DASD devices 7 109 2 Syntax Descriptive SYNCIO Diagram gt gt SYNCIO 7 109 3 Parameter None 7 109 4 Examples Example 1 Display SYNCIO device statistics 14 33 16 700 14 33 16 700 14 33 16 700 14 33 16 700 14 33 16 700 O0000FC4 00000FC4 00000FC4 00000FC4 00000FC4 syncio HHCPNO721 HHCPNO721 HHCPNO721 HHCPNO721 several lines not displayed 1423354 6 716 14 33 16 716 14 33 16 716 14 33 16 716 14 33 16 716 00000FC4 00000FC4 00000FC4 00000FC4 00000FC4 HHCPNO721 HHCPNO721 HHCPNO721 HHCPNO721 HHCPNO741 0130 0131 0132 0133 014B 014C 0160 0161 TOTAL synchronous synchronous synchronous synchronous synchronous synchronous synchronous synchronous synchronous 397 11 134 2326 44 57957 asynchronous asynchronous asynchronous asynchronous asynchronous asynchronous asynchronous asynchronous asynchronous 629 19 9267 86 Figure 170 SYNCIO command Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 350 7 110 SYSCLEAR Issue SYSTEM CLEAR RESET manual operation 7 110 1 Function The SYSCLEAR command issues a SYSTEM CLEAR RESET manual operation This is basically the same as the SYSRESET command see below but also clears main storage to
59. 2 the value of ratn can be a number from 0 to 16 A value of zero disables read ahead Sets the number of writer threads When the cache is flushed updated cache entries are marked write pending and a writer thread is signalled The writer thread compresses the track or block group and writes the compressed image to the emulation file A writer thread is CPU intensive while compressing the track or block group and I O intensive while writing the compressed image The writer thread runs one nicer than the CPU thread s The default is 2 a value from 1 to 9 can be specified This is the number of seconds the garbage collector thread waits during an interval At the end of an interval the garbage collector performs space recovery flushes the cache and optionally fsyncs the emulation file However the file will not be fsynced unless at least 5 seconds have elapsed since the last synchronization FSYNC The default is 10 seconds You can specify a number between 1 and 60 A value affecting the amount of data moved during the garbage collectors space recovery routine The garbage collector determines an amount of space to move based on the ratio of free space to used space in an emulation file and on the number of free spaces in the file The garbage collector wants to reduce the free space to used space ratio and the number of free spaces The value is logarithmic a value of 8 means moving 2 the selected value while a nega tive v
60. 25 Figure 26 Figure 27 Figure 28 Figure 29 Figure 30 Figure 31 Figure 32 Figure 33 Figure 34 Figure 35 Figure 36 Figure 37 Figure 38 Figure 39 Figure 40 Figure 41 Figure 42 Figure 43 Figure 44 Sample Configuration Elle 28 E ME TE EE 142 Hercules Hardware Console cccccceceeeeeseeeeeeeeceeeeecaaeeeeaaeseeeeeseaeeeseaeeeeaeeseeeeeseeeeseaeeeeeeeeaes 154 Hercules device and status Panel cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeaaeeeseeaaeeeseeseeeeeeeneneeees 155 Hercules web browser interface ccccecceeesenceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeseseeaeeeeeeeaaeseseeaaeeeseeeeeeeseeneneeees 156 Message prefixing using the native Hercules console ssssssssssssrssssrssssrrssrrrssrirnssrirnssrennsnne 159 WinGUI Advanced Logging Options c ccccceeeeeeceeeee cece eeeeaeeeeeeeseaeeesaaeeseaeeseeeeeseaeeeeaeeeeneeee 160 Message prefixing using the console of the Hercules WinGUll 160 LOG COMMENT COMMANG EE 173 EH DEE ee Abee Dee e ee EEN 174 ee COMMING EE 176 ABA COMMANG WEE 177 AIASCOMIMGNG EE 178 ARI COMMANG EE 179 ARCHMODE command display architecture mode 180 ARCHMODE command set architecture model 181 ATTACH command configure printer cccccceecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeecaaeeeseaeseeeeeseaeeesaeeeeaaeseneees 182 ATTACH command configure display ferminal 183 AUTOMOUNT command add ent 185 AUTOMOUNT command list entries eeen eeer nesr nsstnesrnssrns
61. 3 Ce e EA 16 425 3701156 913267 2787889 Figure 221 HETMAP utility output print all label and file information Sample 2 Show information about a HET tape file print only dataset information G Hercules gt hetmap d G MVS TAPE RPF142 HET Hercules HET and AWS tape map program Version 3 0 7 c Copyright 1999 2009 vol RPF142 seq 1 dsn RPF INST SRPFASM job HERCO1L UNLOAD seq 2 dsn RPF INST SRPFOBJ job HERCO1L UNLOAD seq 3 dsn RPF INST SRPFHELP job HERCO1L UNLOAD seq 4 dsn RPF INST SRPFLOAD job HERCO1L UNLOAD seq 5 dsn RPF INST CNTL job HERCO1L UNLOAD by Roger Bowler owner file 2 ertdt 1 974 recfm VS file 5 ertdt 1 974 recfm VS file 8 ertdt 1 974 recfm VS file 1 ertdt 1 1 974 recfm VS file 1 ertdt 1 4 974 recfm VS 186 186 186 186 186 Jan Jaeger and others expdt 0000 000 lrecl 19056 expdt 0000 000 lrecl 3136 expdt 0000 000 lrecl 19056 expdt 0000 000 lrecl 19085 expdt 0000 000 lrecl 19056 blocks 196 blksize 19060 blocks 126 blksize 3140 bl bl bl bl bl bl Locks 8 lksize 19060 Locks 55 lksize 19089 Locks 19 lksize 19060 Figure 222 HETMAP utility output print only dataset information Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 427 Sample 3 Show information about a HET tape file in TAPEMAP format D Hercules gt het
62. 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 amp b B WB WA FSF BA A A FS A A A A A DA A A BG amp B B A A BA WA WB A B WA A A A BA A A A GG A A A D B 249 249 249 249 249 249 249 249 249 249 249 249 249 249 249 249 249 249 249 249 249 249 249 249 249 249 249 249 249 249 249 249 249 249 249 249 249 249 249 249 249 249 249 249 57 ST STs 57a Diy 57s STs 57 059 ois 57a Siy 57s STs 57 Bhs ois STs R I 57 ST ef STs Dh 57s DI Sv 59 59 59 59 59 59 59 59 I9 59 59 59 59 59 59 5O 59 59 059 059 059 059 059 059 059 059 00000 00000 00000 00
63. 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 Hes ios 226 28 ee 220 28 28 A 528 28 ee 223 2283 220 bes 220 28 o Oo Oo Oo Oo o o o o 7622 ER ER ER ER ER ER ER ER ER ER ER ER ER ER ER ER ER 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 EE buf size ALCS AE E fast hits MISSES cde cent E EENEG AGS sasa taitaa last adjusted last wait adjustments cache 1 0 229 0 0 0 0 0 94500 Thu Jan 01 Thu Jan 01 0 not created 01 00 00 1970 01 00 00 1970 Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 191 2007 06 30 14 28 48 622 00000FC4 cache 2 not created 2007 06 30 14 28 48 622 O0000FC4 cache 3 not created 2007 06 30 14 28 48 622 O0000FC4 cache 4 not created 2007 06 30 14 28 48 622 O0000FC4 cache 5 not created 2007 06 30 14 28 48 622 O0000FC4 cache 6 not created 2007 06 30 14 28 48 622 O0000FC4 cache 7 not created Figure 27 CACHE command Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 192 7 16 CCKD CCKD command 7 16 1 Function The CCKD console command can be used to affect CCKD processing Th
64. 57a Siy 57s STs 57 Bhs ois STs R I 57 ST ef STs Dh 57s DI Sv 59 59 59 59 59 59 59 59 I9 59 59 59 59 59 59 5O 59 59 059 059 059 059 059 059 059 059 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 059 059 059 059 059 059 059 059 059 059 075 075 075 075 075 075 075 841 841 841 841 841 841 841 841 841 950 950 950 950 950 950 950 950 950 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 CCF047I CCF047I CCF047I CCF047I CCFO471I CCFO471I CCF047I CCFO471I CCFO471I CCFO471I CTEOO4I CDA0231 CCFO471I CDA0231 CCFO471I CDA0231 CCF047I CDA023I CCFO471I CCFO47I CCF047I CCF047I CCF047I CCF047I CCF047I CCFO471I CCFO471I 9021 9031 CHD900I CHD9011 CHD902I CHD9011 CHD950I1 CHD9511 CHD9521 Cc e Cc E E E HD9511 HD9521 HD9591 HD902I1 HD9011 LGO141 LGO141 CINO99I 000A det 000B det 000C det 000D detached 000E det OOOF det 0010 detached 0011 de
65. 8 0 576 0 00000000 80000000 GRO3 00000000 GRO7 00000000 GR11 00000000 GR15 00000000 464 8 0 584 0 GRO3 00000000 RO7 00000000 R11 00000000 R15 00000000 Qa a Qa 575 R03 00000000 R07 00000000 R11 00000000 R15 00000000 0 0 R03 00000000 R07 00000000 R11 00000000 R15 00000000 move_character move_character subtract_logical_register subtract_logical_register Figure 138 S command Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 315 7 86 S Instruction stepping off 7 86 1 Function This command turns off the instruction stepping To continue normal processing after stopping the instruction stepping use the G command 7 86 2 Syntax Descriptive S Diagram S pa 7 86 3 Parameter None 7 86 4 Examples Example 1 Turn off instruction stepping 2009 02 15 10 07 39 312 00000FC4 s 2009 02 15 10 07 39 312 00000FC4 HHCPNO40I Instruction stepping off range 1048576 1056768 Figure 139 S command Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 316 7 87 S Instruction stepping query 7 87 1 Function The S command displays whether instruction stepping is on or off and the active range if any 7 87 2 Syntax Descriptive S Diagram kk S Ki 7 87 3 Parameter None 7 87 4 Examples Example 1 Query instruction stepping 2009 02 15 10 08 05 112 00000FC4 s 2009 02 15 10 08 05 112 00
66. 8 1 SCSI Tapes 5 8 1 1 Function When defining SCSI tapes the argument specifies the tape device name usually dev nst0 SCSI tapes are read and written using variable length EBCDIC blocks and filemarks exactly like a mainframe tape volume see also the AUTO_SCSI_MOUNT system parameter 5 8 1 2 Syntax Descriptive devaddr devtype devname no erg blkid 32 blkid 22 Diagram devaddr devtype devname EE OO no erg lt bl kid 32 blkid 22 5 8 1 3 Parameter devaddr This is the device address devtype This is the device type Valid device types are 3410 3420 3422 3430 3480 3490 8809 and 9347 devname The tape device name usually dev nst0 on Linux or Tape0 on Windows no erg This option is intended to prevent issuance of the Erase Gap command to those SCSI tape drives that do not support it e g Quantum DLT series It causes Hercules s device emulation logic to ignore any Erase Gap commands issued to the drive and to return immediate success instead Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 121 This option should only be used specified for drives such as the Quantum which support switching from read mode to write mode in the middle of a data stream without the need of an intervening Erase Gap command Specifying it for any other model SCSI drive may cause incorrect functioning as a result of the Erase Gap command not being issued
67. 8 to 8 Indicates whether stress writes will occur or not A track or block group may be written under stress when a high percentage of the cache is pending write or when a device I O thread is waiting for a cache entry When a stressed write occurs the compression algo rithm and or compression parm may be relaxed resulting in faster compression but usually a larger compressed image If NOSTRESS is set to one then a stressed situa tion is ignored You would typically set this value to one when you want create the smal lest emulation file possible in exchange for a possible performance degradation The default is 0 You can specify 0 enable stressed writes or 1 disable stressed writes Specifies the free pending value for freed space When a track or block group image is written the space it previously occupied is freed This space will not be available for future allocations until n garbage collection intervals have completed In the event of a catastrophic failure previously written track or block group images should be recoverable if the current image has not yet been written to the physical disk By default the value is set to 1 which means that if FSYNC is specified then the value is 1 otherwise it is 2 If 0 is specified then freed space is immediately available for new allocations The default is 1 You can specify a number from 1 to 4 Enables or disables FSYNC When FSYNC is enabled then the disk emulation file is syn chronize
68. AWS or HET virtual tape volume Decompression is invoked automatically when required Descriptive AWSGET INDSN dsname QUTDD ddname FILENO nnnnn SL YES NO Diagram p gt gt AWSGET INDSN dsname OUTDD ddname _ FILENO nnnnn SL YES LL w INDSN dsname OUTDD ddname FILENO nnnnn SL value This specifies the dataset name up to 44 bytes of a dataset stored inside of the AWS or HET virtual tape This is the DDNAME representing the dataset to receive the data from the virtual tape Specifies the file number of the dataset inside of the AWS or HET virtual tape This may be a standard label file number or an absolute file number depending on the value of the SL keyword If the value is YES then standard label numbers are present if the value is NO then the file numbers are absolute numbers This keyword also impacts the meaning of the FILENO keyword Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 468 8 28 5 AWSPUT Control Statement The AWSPUT control statement causes a dataset to be copied into the AWS or HET virtual tape file Multiple AWSPUT statements may be specified A set of standard labels are produced as each statement is processed If necessary the dataset is staged into a temporary dynamically allocated dataset prior to insertion into the virtual tape The AWS or HET virtual tape output file may specify
69. CPU and State CPU1 CPU2 cPU3 CPU4 CPUS CPU6 CPU7 CPU8 3 5 6 ga SS MAXCPU 1 2 4 NUMCPU 1 2 3 4 E aks Bae ENGINES CP CP CR AP IP IP ER CE CPU type CP CR ER AP IP IP Status O O O O F F SE oz Table 27 Correct CPU configuration example 3 Example 4 ENGINES CP CP CP AP IP IP AXCPU 8 NUMCPU 4 The first four engines are defined with their specified type and are taken online because of the NUMCPU configuration statement The next two CPUs are also defined with their specified type but are taken offline because of the NUMCPU value MAXCPU is set to eight CPUs but ENGINES specifies only the type of six of the engines so the remaining two CPUs are defined per default as type CP and are taken offline as specified in NUMCPU CPU and State CPU1 CPU2 CPU3 CPU4 CPU5 CPU6 CPU 8 3 5 6 7 8 MAXCPU 1 2 4 NUMCPU 1 2 3 4 a m SS ENGINES CP CP CP AP IP IP CPU type CP CP CP AP IP IP CP D CP D Status O O O O F F F F Table 28 Correct CPU configuration example 4 Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 507 Example 5 ENGINES CP CP AP IP AXCPU 6 NUMCPU 6 The first four engines are defined with their specified type and are taken online The next two CPUs are defined per default as type CP because the number in MAXCPU exceeds the number of CPUs in the ENGINES statement T
70. Conversion Drogram 396 8 10 DASDCOPY Copy DASD file to another DASD giel 398 8 11 DASDINIT DASD image file Creation ccecsceceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceaeeeeeaeeseeeeseaeeesaeeseaaeeeeeeeeaas 400 8 12 DASDISUP Fix XCTL tables in SVCLIB 0 cecececeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeee seas eeeeaeeseeeeseeeesaeesseeeeeeeeeaas 403 8 13 DASDLOAD DASD loader program 405 8 14 DASDLS List datasets on a volume neen nenn 413 8 15 DASDPDSU PDS unload utility 2 cece ceeeceeeeeceeeeeceaeeeeeee scenes ceaeeesaaeeseeeeseeeeesaeeseeeseeeeeeeas 416 8 16 DASDSEQ Display sequential datasets 0 cceccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeaaeeeeaeeseaeeesaeeseaeeeeeeeeaas 418 8 17 HETGET Extract files from an AWS or HET tape Tei 420 8 18 HETINIT Initialize an AWS or HET tape Tei 422 8 19 HETMAP Show information about a HET or AWS tape Tel 424 8 20 HETUPD Update and or copy an AWS or HET tape Tel 429 8 21 TAPECOPY Copy a SCSI tape to or from an AWSTAPE disk Del 431 8 22 TAPEMAP Show information about an AWS tape lei 433 8 23 TAPESPLT Split an AWS tape lei 435 8 24 DMAP2HRC P 390 DEVMAP conversion program ccceecceceeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeseaeeesaeeeeeeeeaas 437 8 25 FTAPE SCSI Tape Test Utility ion prisa aiaa irendi ae iaa iea annaia a eai i 438 8 26 HercPrt Remote Hercules Printer Gpooolert 446 8 27 PRTPUB Mainframe print publishing program 463 8 28 AWSSE AWS virtual Ee 467 8 29 AWSUTIL AWS format tape file generation ut 47
71. DASD MVSRES CCKD SYS1 PARMLIB c c Copyright 1999 2006 by Roger Bowler Jan gt Member COMMNDOO TOD NOPROMP T gt Member GTFPARM gt Member IEAABDOO gt Member IEAAPF0O0 SYS1 LINKLIB SYS1 SVCLIB SYS1 LPALIB SYS1 VTAMLIB SYS1 INDMAC gt Member IEABLDOO SDATA ALLSDATA PDATA ALLPDATA several lines not displayed gt Member TSOKEY00 USERMAX 8 RECONLIM 60 BUFRSIZE 132 HIBFREXT 48000 LOBFREXT 24000 ODE NOBREAK ODESW NO CHNLEN 4 SCRSIZE 1920 MVSRES MVSRES MVSRES MVSRES MVSRES SYS1 LINKLIB ALLOC ALLOCATE E EDIT HEWL IEWL IEWLF128 IEWLF440 IEWLF880 IFOX01 IFOX02 IFOX03 IFOX04 IFOX05 IFOX06 IFOX11 IFOX21 IFOX31 IFOX41 IFOX51 IFOX61 IFOX62 LINK LINKEDIT LOADER LOGOFF LOGON SUBMIT TEST AXIMU AXIMU VTIOC AX BU IMIMU EYBOA ODESW O OF AXIMU Jaeger TRACE SYS USR TRC DSP PCI SRM RR EXT PI SVC 10 SIO r r TSO US DISCON BUFFER S FFERS BE BUFFER RD LOCK ITCH FRO RU S PE SCREEN and others ERS ECT MINUTES IZE FORE SWAP OUT S BEFORE SWAP IN OPTION TERMINAL OPTION R CHAIN SIZE efi SZ SZ SG Wi St S i S SA Figure 207 DASDCAT utility output list all members of a PDS Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 395 8 9 DASDCONV DASD image file conversion program 8 9 1 Function The DASD CKD image conversion util
72. DASD MVSRES CCKD SYS1 PARMLIB IEAIPSOO0 c Hercules DASD cat program Version 3 05 c Copyright 1999 2006 by Roger Bowler Jan Jaeger and others CPU 10 0 IOC 5 0 MSO 3 0 DEFAULT IPS IEAIPS00 WKL 1 50 99 100 OBJ 1 SRV 1000 0 FIRST PERIOD BATCH DMN1 OBJ 2 SRV 1000 0 SECOND PERIOD BATCH DMN1 OBJ 3 SRV 1000 0 FIRST PERIOD TSO DMN2 OBJ 4 SRV 1000 0 SECOND PERIOD TSO DMN2 OBJ 5 SRV 1000 0 THIRD PERIOD TSO DMN3 OBJ 6 SRV 1000 1000 1000 1000 HOT BATCH DMN1 OBJ 7 SRV 1000 1 0 LOW PRIORITY BATCH DMN1 DMN 1 CNSTR 1 50 1 BATCH DMN 2 CNSTR 1 50 255 SHORT AND MEDIUM TSO DMN 3 CNSTR 1 50 16 LONG TSO PGN 1 DMN 1 APG 6 DUR 10K ISV 10K OBJ 1 RTB 0 BATCH SHORT DMN 1 APG 6 ISV 10K OBJ 2 RTB 0 MEDIUM PGN 2 DMN 2 APG 14 DUR 600 ISV 600 OBJ 3 RTB 0 ZS TSO SHORT DMN 2 APG 13 DUR 1400 ISV 2K OBJ 4 RTB 0 E MEDIUM DMN 3 APG 6 ISV 10K OBJ 5 RTB 0 ee LONG PGN 3 DMN 1 APG 9 ISV 100K OBJ 6 RTB 0 HOT BATCH PGN 4 DMN 1 APG 6 ISV 10K OBJ 7 RTB 0 LOW PRTY BATCH Figure 206 DASDCAT utility output list a member from a PDS Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 394 Sample 3 Print all members from PDS SYS1 PARMLIB on volume MVSRES CCKD as card images D Hercules gt dasdcat Hercules DASD cat program Version 3 05 i D MVS
73. DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD D ae Ze D ei D D ei D n eR D en T Zei Za ai Ze a n T d Dee Zeg Det mi n SR ai Dee Ze ESS VS DASD SORTOO VS DASD SORTO1 VS DASD SORTO2 VS DASD SORTO3 VS DASD SORTO4 VS DASD SORTO5 VS DASD WORKOO VS DASD WORKO1 VS DASD PRDOOO VS DASD PRDOO1 IVS DASD PRD002 VS DASD PRD003 VS DASD MVSRES VS DASD PAGEOO VS DASD PAGEO1 VS DASD PUBO00 VS DASD PUBO01 IVS DASD PUBO02 VS DASD PUB003 VS DASD SYS000 VS DASD SYS001 VS DASD SYS002 VS DASD SYS003 VS DASD CBT000 VS DASD CBT001 VS DASD CBT002 VS DASD CBT003 VS DASD SPOOLO VS DASD SPOOL1 VS DASD TST000 VS DASD TST001 VS DASD TST002 VS DASD TST003 MAXSIZEM 210 MAXSIZEM 210 MAXSIZEM 210 MAXSIZEM 210 CG TEC St Dee CC CC JCE TEG JEC st SE CC SEL VS DASD MVSDLB CC TEC St CC CC st LE CC CC dee SEL CC CC CC VE SE St Oe CC CC CC D O G G G U DT DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD a a O EOTMARGIN 131072 EOTMARGIN 131072 EOTMARGIN 131072 EOTMARGIN 131072 Figure 1 Sample Configuration File Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 28 3 7 Symbol Substitution In configuration and device statements as well as in console commands and OAT files symbols may be substituted for text 3 7 1 Syntax To substitute symbol symbol with its contents the symbol should be enclosed within parenthesis and preceded by a sign For example if symbol
74. Device and control unit features 55 Reserved 56 Real control unit type code 57 Real device type cod 58 63 Reserved Table 13 Read Device Characteristics The Read Configuration Data RCD contains configuration data It shows how the internal disk subsystem is configured The RCD has the following format Bytes Name Description 000 031 NED1 Volume NED logical volume within the subsystem 032 063 NED2 NED for the RAID array 064 095 NED3 NED for the logical subsystem 096 127 NED4 Token NED establishes a relationship among all configu ration data records in a control unit in the subsystem 128 223 Reserved 224 255 QNEQ General NEQ describes paths and addresses Table 14 Read Configuration Data Legend NED Node Element Descriptor NEO Node Element Qualifier Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 302 7 78 QUIET Toggle automatic refresh of console display data 7 78 1 Function The QUIET command either disables automatic screen refreshing if it is currently enabled or enables it if it is currently disabled When disabled you will not be able to see the response of any entered commands nor any messages issued by the system nor be able to scroll the display etc Basically all screen upda ting is disabled Entering ouer again re enables screen updating Please note that the QUIET command is disabled in the dyngui and therefore is not a
75. ENTER from the console allows Hercules to execute exactly one instruction and lists detailed trace information The trace information includes the executing CPU the PSW the executed instruction in hexadecimal and in disassembled form as well as register hexadecimal displays of all involved register types A range can be specified as for the S command otherwise the existing range is used If there is no range or range was specified as 0 then the range includes all addresses When an instruction within the range is about to be executed the CPU is temporarily stopped and the next instruction is displayed You may then examine registers and or storage etc before you press Enter to execute the instruction and stop at the next instruction To turn off instruction stepping and continue normal execution enter the G command 7 85 2 Syntax Descriptive S addr addr addr addr addr length 0 Diagram gt gt St addr addr addr addr addr length 0 7 85 3 Parameter addr Specifies an address The range can be coded as addr addr or addr addr from begin address to end address or as address length from begin address for length length Specifies the length of the range 0 No range is specified or an existing range is reset Instruction stepping is active for all addresses Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 314 7 85 4 Examples Example 1 Turn on instruction stepping
76. Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 514 Appendix D Links e The Hercules System 370 ESA 390 and z Architecture Emulator http www hercules 390 eu e Hercules source code repositories https github com rbowler spinhawk release 3 xx development stream https github com rbowler sandhawk release 4 xx development stream https github com hercules 390 hyperion cutting edge developer sandbox e Hercules Developer Snapshots Dave Wade http www smrcc org uk members g4ugm snapshots e Hercules PDF Documentation Peter Glanzmann http nercdoc glanzmann org e The MVS Tur n key System Version 3 Volker Bandke http www bsp gmbh com turnkey index htm e Hercules WinGUI Fish David B Trout http www softdeviabs com Hercules hercqui index htm e CTCI WIN Fish David B Trout http www softdeviabs com Hercules CTCI WIN index htm e Hercules Studio Jacob Dekel http www mvsdasd org hercstudio Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 515 e Hebe Hercules Image Manager Robin Atwood http kde apps org content show php Hebe content 126738 e WinPcap Politecnico di Torino http www winpcap org e Vista tn3270 Tom Brennan Software http www tombrennansoftware com e X3270 Paul Mattes http x3270 bgp nu e AWSBROWSE Fish David B Trout http www softdeviabs com Hercules hercqui index htm e XMIT Manager www cbttape org
77. Example 3 Show the ECPS VM level 2007 06 30 17 16 40 843 O00000FC4 ecpsvm 2007 06 30 17 16 40 843 00000FC4 HHCEVO 2007 06 30 17 16 40 843 00000FC4 HHCEVO 2007 06 30 17 16 40 843 00000FC4 HHCEVO 2007 06 30 17 16 40 843 00000FC4 HHCEVO 2007 06 30 17 16 40 843 00000FC4 HHCEVO1 2007 06 30 17 16 40 843 00000FC4 HHCEVO1 2007 06 30 17 16 40 843 00000FC4 HHCEVO1 level 1I 6I 7I 7W 8W ER TI ECPS VM Command processor invoked Current reported ECPS VM Level is 0 But ECPS VM is currently disabled WARNING current level 0 is not supported WARNING Unpredictable results may occur The microcode support level is 20 ECPS VM Command processor complete Figure 65 ECPSVM LEVEL command Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 231 7 35 EXIT Terminate the emulator 7 35 1 Function The EXIT command see also the QUIT command initiates the Hercules shutdown It terminates all threads detaches all channels and devices and releases the configuration Finally it terminates the emulator 7 35 2 Syntax Descriptive EXIT 7 35 3 Parameter None 7 35 4 Examples Example 1 Initiate the Hercules shutdown 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30
78. FOO contains the text string BAR then FOO will be substituted with the string BAR Symbol names are case sensitive 3 7 2 Examples DEFSYM TAPEDIR home hercules tapes 0380 3420 TAPEDIR scratch aws In the above example device 0380 will be a 3420 loaded with the AWSTAPE file in the directory nome hercules tapes scratch aws 3 7 3 Special symbols 3 7 3 1 Device group symbols When multiple devices are defined with a single device definition then the following symbols may be used These are defined as containing the relevant device address for each device e CUU 3 digit device number upper case hexadecimal digits e CUUU 4 digit device number upper case hexadecimal digits e cuu 3 digit device number lower case hexadecimal digits e cuuu 4 digit device number lower case hexadecimal digits Example 0200 0201 3340 home hercules dasds myvols CUU will define 2 3340 packs with device 0200 being loaded from the file myvols 200 and device 0201 defined from myvols 201 3 7 3 2 Environment variables If a symbol is not explicitly defined by a DEFSYM statement and an environment variable by the same name exists then the string contents of that environment variable will be used for substitution Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 29 3 7 3 3 Undefined symbols If a symbol is not defined by an explicit DEFSYM is not an automatically generated symbol or is not an enviro
79. Guide Page 148 5 11 4 Examples Example 1 Define a 3390 CKD DASD device on device address 0A8C The name and path of the file containing the DASD image is D DASD SARES1 CKD OA8C 3390 D DASD SARES1 CKD Example 2 Define a 3390 CKD DASD device on device address 0AA2 The name and path of the file containing the DASD image is D DASD SARES1 CKD Synchronous I O has to be enabled and the device has to return the write inhibited sense when a write is attempted OAA2 3390 D DASD SARES1 CKD SYNCIO READONLY Example 3 Define a 3390 CCKD DASD device on device address 0A00 The name and path of the file containing the DASD image is D DASD SARES1 CCKD All changes to the DASD device have to go to the shadow file s D SHADOW SARES1_ CCKD 0A00 3390 D DASD SARES1 CCKD SF D SHADOW SARES1_ CCKD Example 4 Define a 3390 CKD DASD device on device address 0A8C The DASD device is attached to a shared device server which is running on a machine with IP address 192 168 200 1 and listening on port 3990 The device address of the DASD on the shared device server is also OA8C OA8C 3390 192 168 200 1 3990 0A8C Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 149 5 12 Communication Lines Preliminary 2703 BSC Support 5 12 1 Function This statement describes a BSC emulation line entry to either link 2 Hercules engines or a custom made program emulating a 2780 3780 or 3x74 or a custom made program inte
80. It is used to transmit message text to the virtual console of other active users However some programmers also use this command as a simplified way to display messages on the own virtual machine console by using MSG lt message text gt One program that uses this is the IBM System z port of Solaris which is only capable of running under z VM So basically all the MSG command does is to display a message on the Hercules console with VM like headers Therefore the MSG command is not really intended to be used directly from the Hercules con sole as shown in the example below although it does not hurt doing so MESSAGE is the same as MSG See also the MESSAGE and MSGNOH commands in this manual 7 66 2 Syntax Descriptive MSG parms Diagram gt gt MSG paras i F 7 66 3 Parameter parms parms specifies the required and optional parameters as described in IBM s VM CP Commands and Utilities Reference manual 7 66 4 Examples Example 1 Display a message on the own virtual machine console 18 24 09 msg transmitted message to VM console 18 24 09 18 24 09 MSG FROM HERCULES transmitted message to VM console Figure 111 MSG command Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 280 7 67 MSGHLD Display or set timeout of held messages 7 67 1 Function The MSGHLD console command is used to display or set the timeout value of held messages It is also possible to release all he
81. LCS LAN Channel Station 5 9 5 1 Function This statement defines an emulated LAN Channel Station adapter This emulation mode appears to the operating system running in the Hercules machine as an IBM 8232 LCS device an IBM 2216 router an IBM 3172 running ICP Interconnect Communications Program the LCS31 72 driver of an IBM P 390 or an IBM Open Systems Adapter OSA Rather than a point to point link this emulation creates a virtual ethernet adapter through which the guest operating system running in the Hercules machine can communicate As such this mode is not limited to TCP IP traffic but in fact will handle any ethernet frame 5 9 5 2 Syntax Descriptive devaddr LCS n dev devname o oat fi e m mac macaddr debug guestip Diagram kk devaddr LCS Lamm TE devname dev o o Ai oat m SE macaddr mac Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 140 lt d a guestip debug 5 9 5 3 Parameter devaddr LCS n devname This is the address pair of the LCS device This pair must be an even odd address This can be specified as two separate LCS statements with a single device address 0E20 LCS or as a single statement with a device address count 0E20 2 LCS This specifies the LAN Channel Station device protocol type Identifies the host network adapter to use On Linux systems this is name of the
82. MVS DASD MVSRI Example 3 Name of DASD image file to be compressed ES CCKD ES CCKD Display relative TT data fora CCKD DASD image file CCKDDIAG r 15 D MVS DASD MVSRI 8 4 5 Sample Utility Output Sample 1 ES CCKD Display the DEVHDR and CDEVHDR for a CCKD DASD image file and additionally enable debug output D Hercules gt cckddiag d c g D MVS DASD MVSRES CCKD READPOS seeking 0 0x00000000 READPOS reading buf addr 0012FA68 length 512 0x00000200 DEVHDR 512 decimal bytes 0000 434B445F 43333730 1E000000 004C0000 0010 50000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 0020 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 3350 device has 30 heads cyl READPOS seeking 512 READPOS reading buf addr 001 CDEVHDR 512 0000 00030141 0010 21F74901 0020 0B000000 0030 00000000 decimal 42000000 19631500 00000000 00000000 0x00000200 bytes 00010000 EBO71000 30020000 00000000 Linder OCFF5901 5CE90E00 00010500 00000000 Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide 2FC68 length 512 0x00000200 Page 387 MAKBUF malloc L1TAB buffer of 264 bytes at 003B2860 READPOS seeking 1024 0x00000400 READPOS reading buf addr 003B2860 length 264 0x00000108 Figure 203 CCKDDIAG utility output Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 388 8 5 CCKDSWAP CCKD DASD file swap endian program 8 5 1 Function The CCKDSWAP utility is the swap end
83. O0000FC4 HHCPNO37I Timer update interval 100 microsecond s Figure 183 TIMERINT command set new value Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 364 7 119 TLB Display TLB tables 7 119 1 Function The TLB command shows the actual contents of the TLB Translation Lookaside Buffer tables 7 119 2 Syntax Descriptive TLB Diagram kk TLB _ Fd 7 119 3 Parameter None 7 119 4 Examples Example 1 Display the TLB tables 00000FC4 00000FC4 00000FC4 00000FC4 00000FC4 00000FC4 several lines 00000FC4 00000FC4 00000FC4 00000FC4 tlb tlbID 0x0011c4 mainstor 10041000 ix 000 001 002 Set 3fe Sit 792 tlbID matches 000000003fffe07f 00000000022b907 O00000000022b907 not displayed 000000000a9eb07f 000000000a9eb07f 000000000a9eb07f vaddr 0000000000000000 0000000001801000 0000000001802000 00000000013 d000 000000007fffe000 0000000000 ff000 pte 0000000000000000 000000003e91e008 000000003e91f008 000000003 760208 000000000aef4000 000000003 362208 id 11c4 11c4 11c4 11c4 11c4 11c4 ey eS oo of oO OF oO oO o S ky 00 00 00 00 00 00 main 3fbe3000 3 11d000 3 121000 3e41b000 5508a000 3 c1b000 Figure 184 TLB command Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 365 7 120 TODDRAG Display or set TOD clock drag factor 7 120 1 Function The TODDRAG comman
84. Page The next figure shows the second of two available configuration pages from the HercPrt application the PDF Options page Paper size ISOA4 Z Width 210mm millimeters Lines per inch eur Height 297mm millimeters Columns 0 Green Bar Default Green v Horz Margin 6 35mm Orientation Portrait Options V Feed holes Landscape V Compressed Instructions Enter your desired PDF output formatting options and click OK or Apply to update the currently running spooler The options you specify will be used beginning with the next spooled report Note the changes made via this page are only temporary and will be discarded when HercPrt exits or a new control file is selected with different options To make your changes permanent you must manually edit your Job Separator Control File yourself and enter your changes there x Reset Amy Heb Figure 230 HercPrt PDF Options Page On this page the desired PDF or RTF output formatting options can be specified to update the currently running spooler The options specified here will be used beginning with the next spooled output Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 449 The changes made on this page are only temporary and will be discarded when HercPrt exits or a new control file with different options is opened To make this changes permanent you must manually edit the job separator control
85. SCLP disk I O If no operand is specified SCLPROOT displays the current setting 7 90 2 Syntax Descriptive SCLPROOT NONE directory Diagram p gt gt SCLPROOT lt NONE directory 7 90 3 Parameter NONE Disables SCLP disk I O directory Specifies the directory from which SCLP disk I O is allowed A subsequent IPL of an ins file or a subsequent CCW type IPL will override this 7 90 4 Examples Example 1 Display SCLP base directory 2009 03 07 21 30 15 796 O00000D80 sclproot 2009 03 07 21 30 15 796 00000D80 SCLP DISK I O Disabled Figure 145 SCLPROOT command display directory Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 323 Example 2 Set SCLP base directory 2009 03 07 21 30 27 109 00000D80 sclproot D ISO Figure 146 SCLPROOT command set directory Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 324 7 91 SCP Send system control program command 7 91 1 Function The SCP command sends a command to the system control program i e the guest operating system running under Hercules in any CMDTGT mode 7 91 2 Syntax Descriptive SCP cmd Diagram E I a aa cmd 7 91 3 Parameter cmd This is the command to be sent to the system control program the guest operating system 7 91 4 Examples Example 1 Send a command to the system control program running under Hercules when in HERC or PSCP command target mode
86. TIT 137 044 044 044 044 044 044 044 044 059 059 059 059 059 059 059 059 00000FC4 00000FC4 00000FC4 00000FC4 00000FC4 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 CA FC4 FC4 CA FC4 FC4 quit HHCC HHCC HHCC HHCC HHCC HHCC HHCC HHCC HHCC 900I 9011 HHCCPO08I HHCCPO08I FO471 FO471 FO471 HHCTTOO31 FO471 FO471 FO471 FO471 FO471 FO471 FO471 Begin Hercules shutdown Releasing configuration CPU0000 thread ended tid 0000049C pid 232 CPU0001 thread ended tid 0000046C pid 232 Subc Subc Subc Timer thread ended Subc Subc Subc Subc Subc Subc Subc nannel nannel nannel nannel nannel nannel nannel nannel nannel nannel 0000 0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 0006 0007 0008 0009 de de de de de det de de de det Cac Cac Cac Cac Cac ac Cac Cac Cac ac hed hed hed hed hed hed hed hed hed hed Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 304 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06
87. TUN TAP special character device normally dev net tun On Windows this is either the IP or MAC address of the host systems network card TunTap32 will automatically select the first network adapter it finds if the option is omitted this may be not desirable for some users dev devname This is the same as n devname o file Oat file m macaddr file specifies the filename of the Address Translation file If this option is specified the optional mac and guestip entries are ignored in preference to statements in the OAT file For a description of the OAT file see next section This is the same as o file macadar is the optional hardware address of the interface in the format Xx Xx XX XX XX XX If you use the o oat option do not specify an address here it will be ignored mac macaddr This is the same m macaddr d debug guestip Specifies that debugging output has to be produced on the Hercules control panel This should normally be left unspecified This is the same as d This is an optional IP address of the Hercules guest OS side This is only used to establish a point to point routing table entry on the driving system If you use the oat option do not specify an address here it will be ignored 5 9 5 4 OAT File Syntax The syntax for the Address Translation file is as follows KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK Dev 0400 0402 0
88. Text Format RTF files HercPrt provides sample control files already configured for three of the most popular Hercules guest operating systems Control File Name Operating System DOSVSR23 INI DOS VS Release 34 VM370R6 INI VM 370 Release 6 MVSJES2 INI MVS V3 8J Table 20 Sample Control Files The provided samples can either be used as is or can be customized to suit your needs 8 26 8 1 Separator section The Separator section contains the information which defines what your guest s end of job or beginning of job separator page looks like Each trigger defines one line of the separator page and all of them must match together as a group in order for the page to be considered a job separator page For most systems these lines would be those which appear on your guest s end of job separator page not the beginning of job separator page since it is the end of job separator page which defines where the current print job ends and thus where the next one begins Some operating systems however use a spooler which only outputs beginning of job separator pages making it impossible to know with any degree of certainty when the current print job has ended except in the special case where another print job immediately follows it the next print job s beginning of job sepa rator would thus also serve to define the end of the previous job Nevertheless a special format is supported to try and accommodate these unusual s
89. Translations and Trigger Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 453 8 26 8 2 2 fieldname Line Column Width Each fieldname sub section following the primary FieldNames section should match one of the field names defined in one of the Name entries Note that it is not considered an error if it does not match any of your defined Name entries Rather it will simply never be used The reverse however is not true For each field name defined by a Name entry a corresponding fieldname section must exist or it is considered an error The Line Column and Width values define where on the page that particular field is located Just like the Line and Column values of the Separator section the line and column number values are 1 relative A Width value of 0 is invalid but a width value of 1 means the field extends through to the end of the print line Whenever a job separator page is detected as defined by the Separator section all job accounting field values are extracted and saved according to the information contained in your fieldname sections All defined job accounting field names are case sensitive and all extracted field values have their leading and trailing blanks removed before being saved 8 26 8 3 Output File section The OutputFile section contains a single Names entry which defines how the job accounting fields must be used to construct the spooled report s
90. W4 2008 01 27 19 04 30 937 00000378 0070 5F8EDA61 1BA31647 700B8F51 O6EEOED7 _ a t Gp Q P 2008 01 27 19 04 30 937 00000378 0080 77104541 4D32AE67 3A57EC31 625384F7 w EAM2 g W 1bSd7 2008 01 27 19 04 30 937 00000378 0090 59367421 133A2287 4DBOCD11 12671717 Y gt t gM g 2008 01 27 19 04 30 937 00000378 00A0 2E1CE701 6B81F2A7 2061B1F1 6DE94537 X ka2x a 1mZE7 2008 01 27 19 04 30 937 00000378 00B0 6DBF1DE1 1E429EC7 27C61AD1 3F0A8F57 m B G F J W 2008 01 27 19 04 30 937 00000378 00CO 4E4898C1 0024A6E7 664987B1 656B7577 NHgQA wXfIg ekuw 2008 01 27 19 04 30 937 00000378 00D0 71ECD7A1 74408B07 39677891 381C7797 q P t 9gxj8 wp 2008 01 27 19 04 30 937 00000378 00EO 54EF5A81 2E1ECB27 67AB6D71 279E15B7 T Za g mq 2008 01 27 19 04 30 937 00000378 00FO0 7BA3A161 33B7E747 6EBOE651 1FEOCFD7 t a3 XGn WQ P 2008 01 27 19 04 30 937 00000378 0100 606D2C41 1F745F67 11236331 2A4525F7 m A t_g c1 E 7 2008 01 27 19 04 30 937 00000378 0110 21BF7B21 222CB387 24BE6411 UE DEE 2008 01 27 19 04 30 937 00000378 HHCCTO49I 0E20 Received packet from tun0 284 bytes 2008 01 27 19 04 30 937 00000378 0000 4500011C A2570000 80011571 COA80065 E sW q y e 2008 01 27 19 04 30 937 00000378 0010 C0OA80063 O000F130 93363000 C1DC84EA y c 10160 A d 2008 01 27 19 04 30 937 00000378 0020 928D5000 031181A7 7256FAF1 2C74E437 k P axrV 1 tU7 2008 01 27 19 04 30 937 00000378 0030 2E32D6E1 OBB94DC7 32A143D1 796B4E57 20 MG2 CJykNW 2008 01 27 1
91. WO WWW GA GA GA GA L L L L GA GA 00000F 00000F 00000F 00000F 00000F 00000F 00000F 00000F 00000F 00000F 00000F 00000F 00000F 00000F PPR CH O AE EI E O O E Oaa PU0000 PU0000 PU0000 PU0000 PU0000 PU0000 PU0000 PU0000 PU0000 PU0000 HCCD001I HCCDOO1I HCCP014I CPU0000 OO GY E GY Qe Or E RO0 00000000 RO4 00000000 RO8 00000000 R12 00000000 ROO 01B00200 RO4 00000000 RO8 00000000 R12 00000000 G OO OO o oO o C R01 00000000 R05 00000000 R09 00000000 R13 00000000 R01 00000000 R05 00000000 R09 00000000 R13 00000000 G Oe OS Ce or Gy Gy R02 00000000 R06 00000000 R10 00000000 R14 00000000 R02 00000000 RO6 FE000000 R10 00000000 R14 C2000000 Readahead thread 1 started tid 000000DC Readahead thread 2 started tid 00000B6C SACF OO OO oO DO C pid pid Special operation exception CODE 0013 ILC 4 PSW 00080000 80000606 INST B2790000 R 00000000 K 06 00080000 800005EC 40404040 FO 0 0 FO4040 RO3 00000000 RO7 00000000 R11 00000000 R15 00000000 RO3 00000000 RO7 00000000 R11 00000000 R15 00000000 2068 2068 Figure 73 G command Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 239 7 41 GPR Display or alter general purpose registers 7 41 1 Function The GPR command displays or alters the actual content of the general purpose registers 7 41 2 Syntax Descriptive GPR 7N XXXXXXXX Di
92. With the run commands file shown above the Hercules startup is fully automated After starting Hercules there is no manual intervention required until MVS is up and running Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 493 The next figure shows the batch file that is used in the run commands file step 5 to start the tn3270 sessions ECHO OFF EEGEN REM Start master console and wait for connection to Hercules REM KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK KKK KKKKKKKKK KKK KKK START D C Program Files x86 TomBrennanSoftware VistaTN3270 VistaIN3270 EXE MVS38J_MST SES CHOICE t 1 d y EEGEN REM Start operator console and wait for connection to Hercules REM KKK KKK KKK KKK kk kk kk KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK START D C Program Files x86 TomBrennanSoftware VistaTN3270 VistaIN3270 EXE MVS38J_OPR SES CHOICE yt 1 d y REM I II III II II III III III III III III III III III III II III II III I III III III III II ICICI ICI ICICI ae REM Start TSO terminals and wait for connection to Hercules REM II III III III I III III III III III III III III II II III III II III III III II III II III ICICI ICI I k k k k START D C Program Files x86 TomBrennanSoftware VistaTN3270 VistaIN3270 EXE MVS38J_TSO SES CHOICE t 1 d y START D C Program Files x86 TomBrennanSoftware VistaTN3270 VistaTN3270 EXE MVS38
93. ZLIB and the filename has to be TSTVOL DSD The DASD volume must be placed in directory D MVS DASD DASDINIT z a D MVS DASD TSTVOL DSD 3390 3 SYS3A0 Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 401 8 11 5 Sample Utility Output Sample 1 Create a 3390 model 3 DASD image file named SYS3A0 3A0 with volser SYS3A0 D HERCULES gt DASDINIT D MVS DASD SYS3A0 3A0 3390 3 SYS3A0 HHCDUO441 HHCDUO411 HHCDUO411 HHCDIOO1I Creating 3390 volume SYS3A0 3339 cyls 15 trks cyl 56832 bytes track 2519 cylinders successfully written to file D MVS DASD SYS3A0_1 3A0 820 cylinders successfully written to file D MVS DASD SYS3A0_2 3A0 DASD initialization successfully completed Figure 210 DASDINIT utility output Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 402 8 12 DASDISUP Fix XCTL tables in SVCLIB 8 12 1 Function The DASDISUP utility fixes the XCTL tables in SVCLIB on OS 360 systems On an OS 360 system the OPEN CLOSE EOV modules in SYS1 SVCLIB have XCTL tables embedded within them These tables contain TTRs pointing to other modules and these TTRs need to be adjusted after loading SVCLIB to DASD OS 360 provides a program called IEHIOSUP to perform this function however the issue is that you cannot run IEHIOSUP until you have the system up and running and you cannot IPL the system until you have fixed the XCTL tables To circumvent this problem Hercules provides a utility program call
94. a time stamp in front of each log message whereas NOTIMESTAMP displays log messages with no time stamps Entering the command without any argument displays the current logging options 7 58 2 Syntax Descriptive LOGOPT TIMESTAMP NOTIMESTAMP TIME NOTIME Diagram gt gt LOGOPT TIMESTAMP NOT IMESTAMP TIME NOTIME 7 58 3 Parameter TIMESTAMP Insert a time stamp in front of each log message This is the same as using TIME NOTIMESTAMP Display log messages without a timestamp This is the same as using NOTIME TIME Insert a time stamp in front of each log message This is the same as using TIMESTAMP NOTIME Display log messages without a timestamp This is the same as using NOTIMESTAMP 7 58 4 Examples Example 1 Insert a time stamp in front of each log message 2007 06 30 17 34 47 843 O000008E logopt timestamp 2007 06 30 17 34 47 843 O000008E HHCPN197I Log option set TIMESTAMP Figure 99 LOGOPT command Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 268 7 59 LPARNAME Display or set LPAR name 7 59 1 Function The LPARNAME command is used to display the current LPAR name or to define the LPAR name returned by the DIAG x 204 7 59 2 Syntax Descriptive LPARNAME parname Diagram gt gt LPARNAME lt parname 7 59 3 Parameter lparname This specifies the new LPAR name The value must be maximum 8 alphanumeric characters If this pa
95. an overview of the ideas and concepts of the Hercules Emulator as well as a documentation of the emulator s functionality It explains what Hercules does and does not do It helps you decide if the software fits your needs fulfills your requirements 2 2 Hercules Emulator Installation Guide The Hercules Installation Guide shows you how to install Hercules and all related optional and required software components under the Microsoft Windows Linux and Apple Macintosh OS X operating systems After going through the installation guide you will have a working emulator environment ready to IPL a 370 S 390 or z Architecture mainframe operating system 2 3 Hercules Emulator User Reference Guide The Hercules User Reference leads you through all aspects of the emulator s operation It provides instruction in the operation of the Hercules Emulator with and without the Windows GUI The usage details for all Hercules utilities are also covered in this guide After reading this manual you should be able to work with Hercules and the Hercules console create virtual devices understand backup restore procedures and general housekeeping within the Hercules environment 2 4 Hercules Emulator Messages and Codes The Messages and Codes manual provides a detailed explanation of all Hercules related messages It is the primary source for troubleshooting and debugging when experience problems with Hercules 2 5 Hercules Emulator
96. clc8d9c3 f 0f1 0300 clc8d9c3 f0f1 0300 9c8d9c3 f 0f1 0300 40c8d9c3 f 0f1 0300 00000000 D 339000AH ZZ000000000001 D 339000A ZZ000000000001 M 39900E9H ZZ000000000001 0 3990 H ZZ000000000001 RC RC RC RC Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 300 02 55 40 954 000009EC 90 00000000 00000000 00000000 02 55 40 954 000009EC a0 00000000 00000000 00000000 02 55 40 970 000009EC bO 00000000 00000000 00000000 02 55 40 970 000009EC cO 00000000 00000000 00000000 02 55 40 970 000009EC dO 00000000 00000000 00000000 02 55 40 970 000009EC e0 80000007 00001e00 Oae080e0 02 55 40 970 000009EC fO 008080e0 00000000 00000000 02 55 40 970 000009EC OaeO SNSS 00 01e01 00 00000000 00000000 02 55 40 970 000009EC 10 00000000 00000000 00000000 02 55 40 970 000009EC 20 00000000 00000ae0 00000000 Figure 129 QD command 7 77 5 Explanations 00000000 OOO000000 00000000 Jecke RRC eck 00000000 00000000 lit i aa ec Ze A e0e00700 Jee se OOO00 000 TL ere as 00000000 00000000 The Sense ID SNSID is describing the type and the model number of the subsystem and logical volume of the channel and has the following format Bytes Description D a 1 2 Subsystem Type 3 Subsystem Model and Architecture 4 5 Device Type 6 Device Model
97. command ienn Mee ii enk ee 231 EAM Lulu ne DEE 233 EXAT GOMMAN D 234 El el ue WEE 235 EILER 235 FPG COMIMANG NEE 236 FPR gommand basic format EE 237 FPR command extended format arene a aE EEE AE A TEE AEA ARES 238 G cOMMANG EE 239 GPR command display general purpose registers cecececeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeesaeeeeeeeeeeees 240 GPR command alter general purpose register cccseceeseeceeeeeceeeeeeaeeeeeeeseaeeeseaeeeeaeeeeeeees 241 HAO command TOL EE 243 HAO Command CMA EE 243 HAO command HA DEET 243 HAO command dely samanas ana aara ee aa e aaa aa a aaa a aat a etae 244 HAO command Der NEE 244 HAO fired COMMANG DEET 244 HELP command information available AA 245 HELP command no information available AA 246 AERO COM Lite Lele DEE 247 HERGLOGO command aana a aaa aa aaa e T A a ASi AEREE 248 HS ein UN NEE 250 Be ell El BEE 251 IODELAY command display value ccccccceeceeeeceeeeeceeeeeaaeeeeneeseaeeesaaeeseaeeseeeeessaeeesaeeeenees 252 IODELAY command set Valle ss 0i anna ecient ae eg 253 IPENDING command i siet sehceeteevetativia tetele ced ee S igeg Sege eaaa aa il gege else 255 Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 11 Figure 91 Figure 92 Figure 93 Figure 94 Figure 95 Figure 96 Figure 97 Figure 98 Figure 99 Figure 100 Figure 101 Figure 102 Figure 103 Figure 104 Figure 105 Figure 106 Figure 107 Figure 108 Figure 109 Figure 110 Fig
98. console printer keyboard device on device address 0009 and suppress the ENTER INPUT FOR CONSOLE DEVICE nnnn prompt messages 0009 1052 NOPROMPT Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 111 Example 3 Define a 3215 console printer keyboard device on device address 0009 Allow only clients with terminal group name CONSOLES and from IP address 192 168 0 100 to connect 0009 3215 CONSOLES 192 168 0 100 255 255 255 0 Example 4 Define a 3215 console printer keyboard device on device address 0009 Allow only clients with terminal group name CONSOLES and from IP address 192 168 0 100 with subnet mask 255 255 255 0 to con nect Additionally suppress the ENTER INPUT FOR CONSOLE DEVICE nnnn prompt messages 0009 3215 NOPROMPT CONSOLES 192 168 0 100 255 255 255 0 Example 5 Define a 3215 console printer keyboard device on device address 0009 Allow clients with any terminal group name but only from IP address 192 168 0 100 with subnet mask 255 255 255 0 to connect Additionally suppress the ENTER INPUT FOR CONSOLE DEVICE nnnn prompt messages 0009 3215 NOPROMPT 192 168 0 100 255 255 255 0 Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 112 5 4 Integrated Console Printer Keyboard Devices 5 4 1 Function These device statements are used to define Integrated Console Printer Keyboard devices to the Hercu les configuration The statements have one optional argument the default command pr
99. convert a compressed CCKD DASD file to an uncompressed CKD DASD file This utility is obsolete it is replaced through the DASDCOPY utility which performs the same and additional functions For details see DASDCOPY utility 8 7 2 Syntax See DASDCOPY utility 8 7 3 Parameter See DASDCOPY utility 8 7 4 Examples See DASDCOPY utility 8 7 5 Sample Utility Output See DASDCOPY utility Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 391 8 8 DASDCAT Display PDS datasets and members 8 8 1 Function The DASDCAT utility displays pds datasets and members from a DASD image file It can generate a list of members in a given PDS dataset or can list the contents of a single member or all members in a PDS 8 8 2 Syntax Descriptive DASDCAT i jmage SF shadowfile pdsname spec flags Diagram DASDCAT i mage REESEN IESSE SF shadowfi e pdsname spec flags 8 8 3 Parameter i image The name and optionally path of the DASD image file shadowfile The optional name of an associated shadow DASD file pdsname The name of the partitioned dataset from which information will be extracted spec spec can be one of the following The name of a PDS member to be listed An asterisk meaning that all members in the PDS are to be listed A question mark which causes the list of members in the PDS to be returned flags flags can b
100. core image file loadtext Load a text deck file Idmod Load a module rmmod Delete a module Ismod List dynamic modules Isdep List module dependencies iodelay Display or set I O delay value ctc Enable disable CTC debugging Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 169 tt32 Control query CTCI WIN functionality toddrag Display or set TOD clock drag factor panrate Display or set console refresh rate msghlid Display or set timeout value of held messages syncio Display syncio device statistics maxrates Display maximum observed MIPS SIO rate or define new reporting interval defsym Define symbol script Run a sequence of console commands contained in a file cscript Cancel a running script thread ecpsvm ECPS VM commands aea Display AEA absolue effective address tables aia Display AIA absolute instruction address tables tlb Display TLB tables sizeof Display size of structures suspend Suspend Hercules resume Resume Hercules herclogo Read a new logo file traceopt Instruction trace display option cmdtgt Specify the command target herc Send Hercules command scp Send system control program command pscp Send system control program priority message sf Create a new shadow file sf Remove a shadow file Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 170 sfc Compress a shadow
101. device type in the overall configuration file Any emulation file name parameter specified in this file may be substitued by the character in which case it specifies a set of options to be applied to all additional emulation files specified in the list This function emulates an Automatic Cartridge Feeder ACF The ACF is a feature on cartridge type tape drives 3480 3490 etc that automatically loads a new tape when a tape is removed from the drive There is no real control over this device by the host as it just keeps on feeding tapes one after the other Although the ACF feature is unique to cartridge type systems the emulation accepts the use of the same technique for emulated 1 2 inch tapes reel drives as well Parameters are appended in succession In all cases if the same parameter is coded more than once the last instance takes precedence Therefore it is possible to specify a set of parameters in the base configuration file another on an line and another for each individual line in the list of files Parameters are then appended in that order A SCSI tape device should not be given in a file list The AWSTAPE argument causes HET files to be written in AWSTAPE format This disables the additional feature provided by the HET format COMPRESS and IDRC control whether compression should be used when writing to HET files The value of n can be 1 to turn compression on the default or can be 0 to turn comp
102. file compression utility 8 3 1 Function The CCKDCOMP utility removes all free space from a compressed or shadow CKD DASD emulation file If level is specified then the CCKDCDSK utility is called first with the specified level this is a short hand method to call both functions in one utility call 8 3 2 Syntax Descriptive CCKDCOMP option option filename Diagram gt gt CCKDCOMP em filename bi option 8 3 3 Parameter Options V Display version information and exit f Force check even if OPENED bit is on level The level of checking that is to be performed The higher the level the longer the integrity check takes The level is any number from 1 4 Level 1 performs a minimal check Device headers are verified free space is verified primary lookup table and secondary lookup tables are verified Level 2 performs a normal check These are the same checks as in level 1 plus all 5 byte track headers are verified Level 3 performs the maximum checking These are the same checks as in level 1 plus all track images are read uncompressed and verified Level 4 recovers everything Arguments filename Name of DASD image file to be compressed Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 384 8 3 4 Examples Example 1 Compress a CCKD DASD file CCKDCOMP D MVS DASD MVSRES CCKD Example 2 Compress a CCKD DASD file and perform integrity checking and repair CCKDCO
103. grow and grow in size and users are typcially only interested in the last part printed most recently An option lets you specify the number of lines at the end of the file to publish to the target file or lets you publish only the new data since the last run 3 Locking is provided under UNIX type operating systems As a courtesy this program will acquire an advisory read lock on the entire file before it starts processing If the emulator uses an advisory write lock then this program can be scheduled to publish the output asynchronously to the emulator producing that output and the result will always be consistent 4 If you want to publish the output as a web page without using a mechanism like server side includes this program provides the option of supplying HTML tags to wrap the output although this facility is only rudimentary For sophisticated formatting server side includes are likely more appropriate to pull data into a page but this facility may be useful for simple scenarios The program should be used in a batch file It is possible to use it for a single call or to build a loop for continuous processing see examples below The possible return codes and their meaning are 0 Translation was done 4 Translation was skipped because the file size did not change 8 Processing failed for an ordinary reason An error message is sent to stderr indicating why 16 Processing failed due to some abnormality An abend code is given for diagn
104. is ready to be set pending NOWARN If the IODELAY value is non zero a warning message HHCCF037W will be issued unless NOWARN is specified 4 26 4 Examples Example 1 Set the amount of time to wait after an I O interrupt is ready to be set pending to 1000 microseconds IODELAY 1000 Example 2 Set the amount of time to wait after an I O interrupt is ready to be set pending to 500 microseconds and suppress the warning message HHCCF037W IODELAY 500 NOWARN Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 69 4 27 LDMOD Additional dynamic load modules 4 27 1 Function LMOD provides the capability of defining additional modules that will be loaded by the Hercules Dynamic Loader The default search order is within the Hercules directory and in the default DLL search path Most systems also support absolute filenames eg Names starting with 7 or in which case the default search path is not taken Multiple LDMOD statements may be used 4 27 2 Syntax Descriptive LMOD module module module Diagram gt gt LDMOD module lt 4 27 3 Parameter module A list of modules that are to be loaded by the Hercules Dynamic Loader 4 27 4 Examples Example 1 Instruct Hercules to load the additional modules named MODULE01 MODULE02 and MODULEOZ from the Hercules directory or the default DLL search path LDMOD MODULEO1 MODULE02 MODULEO3 Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Referen
105. length 7 123 3 Parameter address The address of the storage area that is to be disassembled length The length of the storage that is to be disassembled This value must be specified in hexadecimal If the length is omitted then 64 bytes of storage are disassembled by de fault The length argument must follow immediately the address parameter seperated by a dot address length 7 123 4 Examples Example 1 Disassemble 4096 bytes beginning at address 00040130 00000C24 u 00040130 1000 00000C24 P00040130 90DF02EC STM 13 15 748 0 store_multiple 00000C24 P00040134 4166000C LA 6 12 6 0 load_address 00000C24 P00040138 58606160 L 6 352 0 6 load 00000C24 P0004013C 58300010 L 3 16 0 0 load 00000C24 P00040140 58430184 L 4 388 3 0 load 00000C24 P00040144 55C06058 CL 12 88 0 6 compare_logical 00000C24 P00040148 478060E0 BC 8 224 0 6 branch_on_condition 00000C24 P0004014C 8840000A SRL 4 10 0 shift_right_single_logical Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 372 00000C24 P000401 00000C24 P000401 00000C24 P000401 00000C24 P000401 00000C24 P000401 00000C24 P000401 00000C24 P000401 00000C24 P000401 00000C24 P000401 00000C24 P000401 00000C24 P000401 00000C24 P000401 00000C24 P000401 00000C24 P000401 00000C24 P000401 00000C24 P000401 00000C24 P000401 00000C24 P000401 00000C24 P000401 00000C24 P000401 00000C24 P000401 00000C24 P000401 00000C24 P0004
106. log message This is the same as using TIME NOTIMESTAMP Display log messages without a timestamp This is the same as using NOTIME TIME Insert a time stamp in front of each log message This is the same as using TIMESTAMP NOTIME Display log messages without a timestamp This is the same as using NOTIMESTAMP 4 30 4 Examples Example 1 Specify that messages in the log are to be time stamped LOGOPT TIMESTAMP Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 73 4 31 LPARNAME LPAR name returned by DIAG x 204 4 31 1 Function LPARNAME defines the LPAR name returned by DIAG x 204 4 31 2 Syntax Descriptive LPARNAME HERCULES parname Diagram gt gt LPARNAME HERCULES OO parname 4 31 3 Parameter lparname Maximum 8 byte character name for the LPAR The default is HERCULES 4 31 4 Examples Example 1 Specify HERCULES as LPAR name returned by DIAG x 204 LPARNAME HERCULES Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 74 4 32 LPARNUM LPAR identification number 4 32 1 Function The LPARNUM configuration statement sets the LPAR identification number It can be one or two hexa decimal digits If one digit is specified then STIDP stores a format 0 CPU ID containing the logical CPU number the LPAR number and the last four digits of the CPU serial number If two digits are specified then STIDP stores a format 1 CPU ID containing the two digit LP
107. maximum number of threads have not yet been reached If the specified maximum number of threads already has been reached then the I O request is placed in a queue and will be serviced by the first available thread i e whichever thread becomes idle first Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 224 This option was created to address a threading issue possibly related to the Cygwin phtreads implementation on Windows systems The default for Windows is 8 The default for all other systems is 0 7 32 4 Examples Example 1 Display the maximum allowed device threads along with the current statistics OO000FC4 devtmax OOO000FC4 HHCPNO76I Max device threads 0 current 2 most 5 waiting 0 max exceeded 0 Figure 57 DEVTMAX command list maximum device threads Example 2 Set a new value for the maximum allowed device threads OO0000FC4 devtmax 25 00000FC4 HHCPNO76I Max device threads 25 current 2 most 5 waiting 0 max exceeded 0 Figure 58 DEVTMAX command set maximum device threads Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 225 7 33 DS Display subchannel 7 33 1 Function The DS command shows the subchannel information for a given device number 7 33 2 Syntax Descriptive DS devnum Diagram gt gt DS devaua H 7 33 3 Parameter devnum The device number for which the subchannel information has to be displayed 7 33 4 Examples Example 1
108. no logo file is specified then Hercules uses a built in default logo Upon startup Hercules will first look in the current directory for a file called herclogo txt The name of the logo file can also be specified as a startup option by using the b flag The file may also be specified using the LOGOFILE configuration statement or can be changed during Hercules operation using the HERCLOGO console command 10 2 Orders Order commands are used to set the current buffer position set the highlight and or protected attributes to force a skip to a new line and to specifiy text alignment 10 2 1 Set Buffer Address Descriptive SBA x y Diagram gt gt SBA x y H pa The Set Buffer Address order sets the current buffer position to row x and column y Row and column both begin counting with zero 10 2 2 Set Field Descriptive SF H P HP Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 481 Diagram p gt SF H lt ES HP The Set Field order sets the highlight H and or protected P attribute 10 2 3 New Line Descriptive NL Diagram ONL H The New Line order forces a skip to a new line 10 2 4 Align Descriptive ALIGN NONE LEFT RIGHT CENTER Diagram p gt gt G ALIGN NONE lt LEFT RIGHT CENTER The Align order specifies the text alignment relative to the left and reight borders of the termi
109. of the built in logo ALIGN NONE SBA 0 0 QSF P Hercules Version SF HP S VERSION NL QSF P Host name Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 483 SF HP HOSTNAME NL QSF D Host OS SF HP HOSTOS HOSTOSREL NL QSF p Host Architecture QSF HP HOSTARCH NL QSF p Processors QSF HP HOSTNUMCPUS NL QSF p Chanl Subsys QSF HP CSS NL QSF P Device number QSF HP CCUU NL QSF D Subchannel SF HP SUBCHAN QSF D ALIGN LEFT Copyright HHHHHHHHHHHHH HHHHHHHHHHHHH HHHHHHHHHHHHH c HOSTOSVER HH The S 370 ESA 390 HH Emula HH EEEE RRR ccc U U HH E R RC U U HH EEE RRR C U y HH E KS E U U HH EEEE R R CCC UU HH I can t believe i 1999 2010 Roger Bowler and z Architecture ctor L EEEE SSS L E S L EEE SS L E S LLLL EEEE SSS t s not a MAINFRAME Jan Jaeger and others Figure 241 Logo File Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 484 This above sample file results in the following Hercules Logo screen r mg amp A MVS Master Console a File Edit Font Transfer Macro Options Window Help sleale gt gt ul ml ee E Hercules Yersion 3 07 Host Name GOOFY Host OS Windows_HNT 6 1 Host Architecture AMD64 Processors MP 8 Channel Subsystem 6 Device Number 66186 Subchannel 66865
110. options may be specified The underscored option is the default if the whole keyword statement is not coded default choice 1 optional choice _1l optional choice 2 An optional choice keyword or variable with default appears vertically stacked with the default value above the main path of the horizontal line and the remai ning optional elements below the main path of the horizontal line Only one of the available options may be specified If none of these elements is explicitly specified the default above the main line is taken E optional Choice SC Ka optional choice SS required_element a E SE An arrow returning to the left of an ele ment below the main path of the hor izontal line indicates an optional repeat able item A character within the arrow path means that repeated items have to be separated by that character If there is no character within the arrow path then the items are separated by a blank An arrow returning to the left of an ele ment on the main path of the horizontal line indicates an required repeatable item A character within the arrow path means that repeated items have to be separated by that character If there is no character within the arrow path then the items are separated by a blank Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 511 Symbol SEGMENT Description This symbol is a reference to a syntax segment
111. owner dyncrypt OOO000FC4 symbol z900_cipher_message_with_chaining loadcount 1 owner dyncrypt OO000FC4 symbol z900_cipher_message loadcount 1 owner dyncrypt 00000FC4 symbol s390_compute_message_authentication_code loadcount 1 owner dyncrypt OOO000FC4 symbol s390_compute_last_message_digest loadcount 1 owner dyncrypt OOO000FC4 symbol s390_compute_intermediate_message_digest loadcount 1 owner dyncrypt OOO000FC4 symbol s390_cipher_message_with_chaining loadcount 1 owner dyncrypt 00000FC4 symbol s390_cipher_message loadcount 1 owner dyncrypt 00000FC4 dll type load name hdteq 00000FC4 symbol hdl_device_type_equates loadcount 1 owner hdteq 00000FC4 dll type main name Hercules flags nounload 00000FC4 symbol panel_display loadcount 0 owner Hercules 00000FC4 symbol panel_command loadcount 0 owner Hercules 00000FC4 symbol parse_args loadcount 0 owner Hercules 00000FC4 devtype 9336 9335 9332 9313 3370 3310 0671 9345 3390 3380 3375 3350 3340 3330 2314 2311 Figure 105 LSMOD command Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 274 7 63 MAXRATES Display maximum observed MIPS SIO rate or define new reporting interval 7 63 1 Function The MAXRATES command shows the maximum observed MIPS million instructions per second and SIO Start I O rates reached during the current interval It lets you also set the MAXRATES interv
112. rejected The optional IP address and subnet mask may be specified in conjunction with the ter minal group argument In this case the terminal group argument must be specified ahead of the optional IP address and subnet mask arguments To specify an IP address and a subnet mask without also specifying a terminal group use an asterisk as the group name substitute or placeholder If an IP address mask are not specified then any client tn3270 session is allowed to connect to the device provided they are also a member of the specified terminal group if any The terminal group name must match if specified regardless of any optional IP address mask To summarize the device number suffix always takes precedence over any group name and any group name always takes precedence over any IP address mask value 5 1 4 Examples Example 1 Define a 3270 device on device address 0200 0200 3270 Example 2 Define a 3270 device on device address 0200 Allow clients with any terminal group name but only from IP address 192 168 0 100 to connect 0200 3270 192 168 0 100 Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 105 Example 3 Define a 3270 device on device address 0200 Allow clients with any terminal group name but only from IP address 192 168 0 100 with subnet mask 255 255 255 0 to connect 0200 3270 192 168 0 100 255 255 255 0 Example 4 Define a 3270 device on device address 0200 Allow only clie
113. statement defines a printer to the Hercules configuration The argument specifies the name of a file to which the printer output will be written The output is written in the form of variable length lines of ASCII characters delimited by line feeds or carriage return line feed sequences Trailing blanks are removed from each line Carriage control characters are translated to blank lines or ASCII form feed characters If the file exists it will be overwritten If the filename begins with the vertical bar pipe character then it is removed and the remainder of the filename is interpreted as a command line the name of a program or batch file followed by any necessary arguments to which to pipe the printer output to This is known as the print to pipe feature All printer output is then sent to the piped program s stdin input and all of the piped program s stdout and stderr out put is piped back to Hercules for displaying on the hardware console SOCKDEYV indicates that the line printer is a socket device wherein the filename is actually a socket spe cification in the form host port instead of a device filename The device then accepts remote connections on the given TCP IP port and writes data to the socket instead to a device file A Windows software that supports a socket printer is Fish s HercPrt Hercules Remote Printer Spooler It spools the print output from a Hercules socket printer and creates either PDF RTF or just plain text f
114. statements READ ddname Perform BSAM read from ddname and convert each block to AWS tape format This works on whatever BSAM will read The maximum BLKSIZE is 32760 GET ddname Perform QSAM read from ddname and convert each block to AWS tape format This works on whatever QBSAM will read The maximum BLKSIZE is 32760 TAPEFILE ddname Perform EXCP read from a real tape device and convert each block to AWS TAPE format Only works on a tape device Maximum BLKSIZE is 65535 This command stops reading when a tape mark is read Therefore only the current tape file is processed If BLP were used only the tape headers would be pro cessed TAPEALL ddname Perform EXCP read from a real tape device and convert each block to AWS TAPE format Only works on a tape device Maximum BLKSIZE is 65535 This command rewinds the tape and reads until an error condition is returned This effectively copies the entire contents of the tape BLP is not necessary as a rewind command is sent before the tape is read Tape marks are duplicated as they are encountered NOTE Because end of reel reflectors are rarely effective this command can run a tape off the reel on a 3420 type drive 3480 3490 3590 type drives have better stopping mechanisms TAPEMARK Write a tape mark to the output file This is usually used to separate individual files on a tape Two consecutive tape marks sometimes signals the end of the tape VERIFY Print a message after each command verifying that
115. subject to whatever case sensitivity the host operating system happens to enforce or allow Under Win dows environment variables are not case sensitive whereas on other operating systems they may be Thus FOO foo Foo etc all cause the same value to be substituted on Windows whereas the DEFSYM symbols FOO and foo could be substituted with two completely different values under a case sensitive operating system IE the Hercules implementation of DEFSYM is case sensitive across all supported platforms Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 30 3 8 2 Syntax To substitute symbol symbol with the current environment variable value the symbol should be enclosed within braces and preceded by a sign For example if an environment variable named FOO holds the value BAR then FOO will be substituted with the string BAR If the environment variable FOO is not defined then a null empty string is substituted instead If the string FOO myfoo is used instead then the value BAR will still be substituted if the value BAR was previously assigned to FOO but will be substituted with the value myfoo instead if the en vironment variable FOO is currently undefined Note too that the default value is a literal string and no substitution is applied to it Thus attempting to use the syntax foo bar will not yield the expected results It will not be substituted with the currently defined value of
116. that you execute one or more channel pro grams to read a record on a CKD track update a record on the same track and then read another or the same record on the track For the first read the server will read the track image and pass it to the client as it was originally compressed in the file To update a portion of the track image the server must uncom press the track image so data in it can be updated When the client next reads from the track image the track image is uncompressed Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 478 Specifiying COMP n means that uncompressed data sent to the client will be compressed If the data to be sent to the client is already compressed then the data is sent as is unless the client has indicated that it does not support that compression algorithm 9 4 Usage of Shared Devices To use a device on a remote Hercules instance instead of specifying a file name on the device state ment an IP address or a DNS name is specified 9 4 1 Syntax Descriptive Joc_devnum devtype host port rem_devnum COMP n7 Diagram 23990 Joc_devnum devtype host EEN sport oD eee DER EE ENEE rem_devnum COMP 7 9 4 2 Parameter loc_devnum This specifies the device address on the local Hercules instance devtype This is the device type host This specifies the host name or the IP address of the system where the Shared Device Server is running port The port number on whic
117. the Connect button on the main dialog It connects to the defined Hercules printer at the specified IP address and port number Disconnect Selecting Disconnect performs the same action as the Disconnect button on the main dialog It either disconnects from the Hercules printer or stops trying to recon nect depending on whether Automatic Reconnect Retry is enabled or not Help Opens the applications help file About Displays the applications About dialog which displays the program version num ber and copyright information as well as the Software Developments Laboratories support email address used when submitting problem reports Exit Selecting Exit performs the same action as the Exit button on the main dialog It immediately disconnects from the Hercules printer and exits the program Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 451 8 26 8 Job Separator Control File The Job Separator Control File describes the layout of the guest s job separator page as well as other spooler options HercPrt uses this control file to be able to decide when the end of the spooled report has been reached as well as how to name the resulting file Additionally the control file also contains various options related to how you want your spooled output to look like for those file types whose appearance can be customized currently limited to Portable Document Files PDF and to a limited degree to Rich
118. the command was executed ok This merely prints a message It has no effect on the integrity of the data Because SYSOUT should be directed to disk there should be no data integrity problems anyway ASCII All subsequent labels generated are converted to ASCII before they are written This only affects labels All data is copied exactly as it is read no matter the setting of this command Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 472 EBCDIC VOL1 HDR1 HDR2 EOF1 EOF2 EOV1 EOV2 UHL1 UHL8 UTL1 UTL8 All subsequent labels generated are not to be converted before they are written The implication is that the data is still in EBCDIC format This only affects labels All data is copied exac tly as it is read no matter the setting of this command These commands write 80 byte labels to the tape image The format of the labels is controlled by the AS Cll and EBCDIC commands Except for the first 4 bytes of each input line none of the data is checked to make sure it is a valid tape label It is up to the user to pro vide correctly formatted labels as desired Essentially the entire 80 byte input record is written to the AWS TAPE image as is or converted to ASCII if this flag is s See VOL1 above See VOL1 above See VOL1 above See VOL1 above See VOL1 above 8 29 3 Examples The following example reads the first dataset from DASD and a second one dataset from tape and writes them to an AWS forma
119. the value within double quotations if it con tains any blanks There is no minimum or maximum value for the number of triggers you may define but you should define enough of them to uniquely identify the page as a job separator page to prevent normal report pages from being erroneously detected as job separator pages 8 26 8 2 Field Names section The FieldNames section defines where the job accounting fields appear on your job separator page thus allowing you to use them in your spooled report s output filename via the OutputFile section The individual job accounting field values are extracted directly from the separator page s individual print lines based on the values defined in the FieldNames section 8 26 8 2 1 Names Name The Namess value defines how many job accounting fields are being defined and how many Name entries immediately follow it The character in each Name entry should of course be replaced with the associated field number For example if you wish to define three job accounting fields you would spe cify Names s3 followed by Name1 one Name2 two and Name3 three where one two and three are of course the specific job accounting field s unique name You can assign whatever name you wish to your defined job accounting fields as long as the name does not contain any blanks and does not match any of the following reserved section names FieldNames OutputFile PDF Separator
120. their numeric value It is also possible to delete all defined or partially defined rules by issuing the following command HAO CLEAR 13 4 Substituting Substrings The command may contain special variables 1 2 3 etc which will be replaced by the values of capturing groups in the match pattern A capturing group is a part of the regular expression enclosed in parenthesis which is matched with text in the target message In this way commands may be constructed which contain substrings extracted from the message which triggered the command The following special variables are recognized e 1 to 9 the text which matched the first to nineth capturing group in the target regular expression e the text preceeding the regular expression match e the text following the regular expression match e replaced by a single dollar sign Note that the substitution of a n variable does not occur if there are fewer than n capturing groups in the regular expression 13 5 Limitations The current implementation limits the total number of defined rules to 64 This limit may be raised by in creasing the value of the HAO_MAXRULE constant in module hao c and rebuilding Hercules All defined rules are checked for a match each time Hercules issues a message There is no way to specify stop processing subsequent rules If a message is issued that matches two or more rules each associated command is then issued i
121. to and receive frames from the TCP IP stack This network interface is configured on Linux platforms by the hercifc program which is invoked by Hercules after the TUN TAP device is opened The following are the emulation types currently supported e CTCI Channel to Channel link to TCP IP stack e CTCT Channel to Channel emulation via TCP Connection e LCS e VMNET Channel to Channel link via SLIP VMNET LAN Channel Station emulation 5 9 2 CTCI Channel to Channel link to TCP IP stack 5 9 2 1 Function The CTCI is a point to point connection with the TCP IP stack of the driving system on which Hercules is running 5 9 2 2 Syntax Descriptive devaddr CTCI n dev devname s netmask netmask m macaddr macaddr 00 00 5E nn nn nn t mtu mtu 1500 Linux only i ibuff 7bufFf 64 Windows only k kbuff kbuff 1024 Windows only d debug guestip hostip Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 135 Diagram kk devaddr ers ER CTCI La domme n PE devname dev BEE S netmask Se netmask w e mac 00 00 5E nn nn nn t o mtu mtu ea ee RS ibuff 64 T aan vu kbuff 1024 a guestip get d debug 5 9 2 3 Parameter devaddr This is the device address CTCI This specifies the device protocol type n devname For Linux Specifies the name of the tunnel device to use The default is dev ne
122. trk 31995 recovered offset O0x4cdl len 3870 00000AE0 HHCCU301I OAEO file l trk 34087 recovered offset Ox5bef len 340 00000AE0 HHCCU301I OAEO file trk 34091 recovered offset 0x5d43 len 340 00000AE0 HHCCU301I OAEO file l trk 34092 recovered offset 0x5e97 len 340 00000AE0 HHCCU301I OAEO file trk 31999 recovered offset Ox5feb len 7932 Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 335 340 340 338 339 340 340 339 340 340 340 340 338 338 340 340 340 340 295 277 349 338 340 345 338 338 ads readaheads hits switches misses 00000AE0 HHCCU301I OAEO file 1 trk 4 recovered offset 0x7ee7 len 1 00000AE0 HHCCU301I OAEO file l trk 5 recovered offset 0x840f len 1 00000AE0 HHCCU301I OAEO file l trk 3 recovered offset 0x8a05 len 1 00000AE0 HHCCU301I OAEO file l trk 34093 recovered offset Ox8faa 00000AE0 HHCCU301I OAEO file l trk 34094 recovered offset 0x90fe 00000AE0 HHCCU301I OAEO file l trk 34095 recovered offset 0x9252 00000AE0 HHCCU301I OAEO file l trk 34096 recovered offset 0x93a4 00000AE0 HHCCU301I OAEO file l trk 34097 recovered offset 0x94f7 00000AE0 HHCCU301I OAEO file l trk 34098 recovered offset 0x964b several lines not displayed 00000AE0 HHCCU301I OAEO file 1l trk 34060 recovered offset Oxa9fd 00000AE0 HHCCU301I OAEO file l trk
123. unit type to be indicated in the data returned by SENSE ID and similar CCW s Normally the default value is appropriate and this parameter need not to be specified Additional to the table below the following values may be specified 3990 3 and 3990 6 The default value depends on the device type Device Type Default CU Type 2311 2841 2314 2314 3330 3340 3350 3375 3380 3880 3390 3990 9345 9343 Table 6 Default CU Types This is the host name or IP adress of the system where the Hercules shared device ser ver is running This is the port number the shared device server is listening on If omitted the default is 3990 Devnum specifies the device number on the shared device server If omitted the default is the current device number on the local system This keyword requests that the data has to be transferred compressed between the client and the server The argument n specifies the compression level 1 9 A value closer to 1 means less compression but also less processor time to perform the compression A value closer to 9 means the data is compressed more but also more processor time is required to compress the data Two other options LAZYWRITE and FULLTRACKIO have been deprecated They are still accepted to support compatibility with older configuration files but do nothing It is strongly recommended to remove these statements from the configuration file Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference
124. value of SYSEPOCH or more than 142 years later than SYSEPOCH will produce unexpected results 4 56 4 Examples Example 1 Specify 28 years to offset the TOD clock from the actual date YROFFSET 28 Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 101 4 57 Process and Thread Priorities This section covers details regarding the priority settings within Hercules The relevant system parame ters are e CPUPRIO e DEVPRIO e HERCPRIO e TODPRIO 4 57 1 Process Priorities Under Linux a process is a thread and thread priority information applies instead For Windows the following conversions are used for translating Unix process priorities to Windows priority classes Unix Windows Process Priority Priority Class 20 to 16 Realtime Process that has the highest possible priority The threads of the process preempt the threads of all other processes inclu ding operating system processes performing important tasks For example a real time process that executes for more than a very brief interval can cause disk caches not to flush or cause the mouse to be unresponsive 15 to 9 High Process that performs time critical tasks that must be executed immediately The threads of the process preempt the threads of normal or idle priority class processes An example is the Task List which must respond quickly when called by the user re gardless of the load on the operating system Use extreme care when using the high p
125. 0 CPU0000 CPU0000 CPU0000 CPU0000 CPU0000 CPU0000 CPU0000 CPU0000 CPU0000 CPU0000 CPU0000 CPU0000 CPU0000 E G Q E E C Cc C Q E E E e Cc BS Qa aa Qa PU0000 PU0000 PU0000 PU0000 PU0000 PU0000 PU0000 PU0000 PU0000 PU0000 PU0000 PU0000 PU0000 PU0000 PU0000 PU0000 PU0000 PSW 00080000 R 00002000 K RO0 00000000 RO4 00000000 RO8 00000000 R12 00000000 PSW 00080000 RO0 00000000 RO4 00000000 RO8 00000000 R12 00000000 PSW 00080000 RO0 00000000 RO4 00002000 RO8 00000000 R12 00000000 PSW 00080000 R 00000010 K RO0 00000000 RO4 00033000 RO8 00000000 R12 00000000 PSW 00080000 R 00000528 K RO0 00000000 RO4 00033000 RO8 00000000 R12 00000000 PSW 00080000 R 00000010 K RO0 00000000 RO4 00033000 RO8 00000000 R12 00000000 HCPNO40I Instruction tracing on 8000064C INST 50405000 ST 04 00000000 00000000 00000000 G G 8 0 8 0 8 0 G G 0 G G G G 0 G G G G 0 4 G GRO5 00033000 G G 0 6 G G G G 0 6 G G G G RO1 00000000 RO5 00002000 RO9 00000000 R13 00000000 RO1 00000000 RO5 00002000 RO9 00000000 R13 00000000 RO1 00000000 RO5 00002000 RO9 00000000 R13 00000000 RO1 00000000 RO9 00000000 R13 00000000 RO1 00000000 RO5 00033000 RO9 00000000 R13 00000000 RO1 00000000 RO5 00033000 RO9 00000000 R13 00000000 G G G G 000650 INST 184 G G G G 000652 INST 18F G G G G
126. 0 2007 12 07 07 05 09 685 00000DBC psw sm 04 pk 0 cmwp C as ar cc 0 pm 0 am 31 ia 15E43D8 2007 12 07 07 05 09 685 00000DBC PSW 040C4000 815E43D8 Figure 123 PSW command modify PSW Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 293 Example 3 Change the PSW condition code to zero and the addressing mode bits to AM 24 2007 12 07 07 10 49 006 00000DBC psw cc 0 am 24 2007 12 07 07 10 49 006 00000DBC psw sm 04 pk 0 cmwp C as ar cc 0 pm 0 am 24 ia 15E43D8 2007 12 07 07 10 49 006 00000DBC PSW 040C4000 815E43EA Figure 124 PSW command modify PSW Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 294 7 75 PTT Set display pthread trace 7 75 1 Function The PTT command sets or displays the internal trace options When specified with no operands the PTT command displays the trace options and the contents of the internal trace table When specified with operands the PTT command sets the trace options and or specifies which events are to be traced If the last operand is numeric it sets the size of the trace table and activates the trace The following events can be traced error trace control trace program interrupt trace interlock failure trace sie trace signaling trace i o trace timer trace thread trace logger trace lock trace buffer timestamp trace entries 7 75 2 Syntax Descriptive PTT NOERROR ERROR NOCONTROL CONTROL NOPROG PROG NOINTER INTER NOSIE SIE
127. 0 00000FC4 HHCTTOO3I Timer thread ended Figure 38 CFALL command configure all CPUs offline Example 3 Configure all CPUs online 14 24 42 375 00000FC4 cfall on 14 24 42 375 00000FC4 HHCCP002I CPU0N000 thread started tid 00000CCO pid 3172 priority 0 14 24 42 375 00000FC4 HHCTTO0O2I Timer thread started tid 00000A14 pid 3172 priority 20 14 24 42 375 00000FC4 HHCCPOO03I CPU0000 architecture mode ESA 390 14 24 42 375 00000FC4 HHCCP002I CPU0001 thread started tid 0000012C pid 3172 priority 0 14 24 42 375 00000FC4 HHCCPOO3I CPU0001 architecture mode ESA 390 14 24 42 375 00000FC4 HHCCP002I CPU0002 thread started tid 00000390 pid 3172 priority 0 14 24 42 375 00000FC4 HHCCP003I CPU0002 architecture mode ESA 390 14 24 42 375 00000FC4 HHCCP002I CPU0003 thread started tid O00000E08 pid 3172 priority 0 14 24 42 375 00000FC4 HHCCP003I CPU0003 architecture mode ESA 390 14 24 42 375 00000FC4 HHCCP002I CPU0004 thread started tid 00000EF4 pid 3172 priority 0 14 24 42 375 00000FC4 HHCCPOO3I CPU0004 architecture mode ESA 390 14 24 42 375 00000FC4 HHCCP002I CPU0005 thread started tid 00000FAC pid 3172 priority 0 14 24 42 375 00000FC4 HHCCP003I CPU0005 architecture mode ESA 390 14 24 42 375 00000FC4 HHCPN154I CPU0000 online 14 24 42 375 00000FC4 HHCPN154I CPU0001 online 14 24 42 375 00000FC4 HHCPN154I CPU0002 online 14 24 42 375 00000FC4 HHCPN154I CPU0003 online 14 24 42 375 00000FC4 HHCPN154I CPU0004 online 14 24 42 375 00000FC4 HHCP
128. 0 17 16 55 468 00000FC4 HHCEV01 2007 06 30 17 16 55 468 00000FC4 HHCEV01 2007 06 30 17 16 55 468 00000FC4 HHCEV01 5T 5I SI 6I SI SI 5I SE 5I GE 5I ST SI 5I SE 5I GE 5I ST 5I 5I 5I ST 5I SL ST 5I 6I 1I ECPS VM VM ASSIST feature LCTL Enabled ECPS VM VM ASSIST feature DIAG Enabled ECPS VM VM ASSIST feature IUCV Enabled All ECPS VM VM ASSIST features Enabled ECPS VM CP ASSIST feature FREE Enabled ECPS VM CP ASSIST feature FRET Enabled ECPS VM CP ASSIST feature LCKPG Enabled ECPS VM CP ASSIST feature ULKPG Enabled ECPS VM CP ASSIST feature SCNRU Enabled ECPS VM CP ASSIST feature SCNVU Enabled ECPS VM CP ASSIST feature DISPO Enabled ECPS VM CP ASSIST feature DISP1 Enabled ECPS VM CP ASSIST feature DISP2 Enabled ECPS VM CP ASSIST feature DNCCW Enabled ECPS VM CP ASSIST feature DFCCW Enabled ECPS VM CP ASSIST feature FCCWS Enabled ECPS VM CP ASSIST feature CCWGN Enabled ECPS VM CP ASSIST feature UXCCW Enabled ECPS VM CP ASSIST feature TRBRG Enabled ECPS VM CP ASSIST feature TRLOK Enabled ECPS VM CP ASSIST feature VIST Enabled ECPS VM CP ASSIST feature VIPT Enabled ECPS VM CP ASSIST feature STEVL Enabled ECPS VM CP ASSIST feature FREEX Enabled ECPS VM CP ASSIST feature FRETX Enabled ECPS VM CP ASSIST feature PMASS Enabled ECPS VM CP ASSIST feature LCSPG Enabled All ECPS VM CP ASSIST features Enabled ECPS VM Command processor complete Figure 64 ECPSVM ENABLE command
129. 00 GR13 00000000 GR14 00000000 GR15 00000000 load_control Figure 187 TRACEOPT command TRADITIONAL Example 2 Display the instruction trace in regsfirst mode registers followed by instruction traceopt regsfirst HHCPN162I Hercules instruction trace displayed in regsfirst mode CPU0000 GROO 00000000 GRO1 00000000 GRO2 00000000 GR0O3 00000000 CPU0000 GRO4 00000000 GRO5 00000000 GRO6 00000000 GRO7 00000000 CPU0000 GRO8 00000000 GRO9 00000000 GR10 00000000 GR11 00000000 CPU0000 GR12 00000000 GR13 00000000 GR14 00000000 GR15 00000000 CPU0000 PSW 00080000 800005F4 INST A7F40002 BRC 15 4 branch_relative_on_condition Figure 188 TRACEOPT command REGSFIRST Example 3 Display the instruction trace in noregs mode instruction only traceopt noregs move_character HHCPN162I Hercules instruction trace displayed in noregs mode CPU0000 PSW 00080000 800005FC INST D207006804B8 MVC 104 8 0 1208 0 CPU0000 R 00000068 K 06 000A0000 0002007B 00000000 00000000 ECKE CPU0000 R 000004B8 K 06 00080000 80000606 20000000 00100000 CPU0000 PSW 00080000 80000602 INST B2790000 SACF 0 0 CPU0000 R 00000000 K 06 00080000 800005EC 40404040 FOF04040 00 set_address_space_control_fast Figure 189 TRACEOPT command NOREGS Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 369 7 122 TT32 Control query CTCI WIN functionality 7 122 1 Function
130. 000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 059 059 059 059 059 059 059 059 059 059 075 075 075 075 075 075 075 841 841 841 841 841 841 841 841 841 950 950 950 950 950 950 950 950 950 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 CCF047I CCF047I CCF047I CCF047I CCFO471I CCFO471I CCF047I CCFO471I CCFO471I CCFO471I CTEOO4I CDA0231 CCFO471I CDA0231 CCFO471I CDA0231 CCF047I CDA023I CCFO471I CCFO47I CCF047I CCF047I CCF047I CCF047I CCF047I CCFO471I CCFO471I 9021 9031 CHD900I CHD9011 CHD902I CHD9011 CHD950I1 CHD9511 CHD9521 Cc e Cc E E E HD9511 HD9521 HD9591 HD902I1 HD9011 LGO141 LGO141 CINO99I 000A det 000B det 000C det 000D detached 000E det OOOF det 0010 detached 0011 det 0012 det 0013 det Console connection 0300 hits 812 Subchannel 0014 det 0310 hits 5 Subchannel 0015 0320 Subchannel 0330 Subchannel Subchannel ached Subchannel ached Subchannel ached Subchannel Subchannel ached Subchan
131. 0000 00000000 0 2 HHCCPO75I 00C5 Stat 0200 Count 0001 HHCCPO76I 00C5 Sense 40000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 HHCCPO77I 00C5 Sense INTREQ HHCCP048I 00C6 CCW 03000000 20000001 gt 040C0000 0001CEFA 00000000 00000000 0 HHCCPO75I 00C6 Stat 0200 Count 0001 HHCCPO76I 00C6 Sense 40000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 HHCCPO77I 00C6 Sense INTREQ HHCCP048I 00C7 CCW 03000000 20000001 gt 040C0000 0001CEFA 00000000 00000000 002 HHCCPO75I 00C7 Stat 0200 Count 0001 HHCCPO76I 00C7 Sense 40000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 HHCCPO77I 00C7 Sense INTREQ HHCCP048I 0480 CCW 03000000 20000001 gt 040C0000 0001CEFA 00000000 00000000 0 HHCCPO75I 0480 Stat 0200 Count 0001 HHCCPO76I 0480 Sense 40220000 00C00300 00000000 00800100 O10000FF FFO00000 HHCCPO077I 0480 Sense INTREQ EOC WRI Figure 92 IPLC command Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 259 7 52 K Display CCKD internal trace 7 52 1 Function The K command displays the internal CCKD trace entries Because the default value for the CCKD trace entries is set to zero the trace must first be enabled by setting a trace entry value This can be done either with the system parameter or the console command CCKD TRACE n where n specifies the number of available trace entries and can be in the range of 1 to 200000 Please note that the K command can produc
132. 0000008E 1 0000008E 1 0000008E 1 0000008E 1 0000008E 1 0000008E 1 0000008E 1 0000008E 1 0000008E 1 0000008E 1 0000008E 1 0000008E 1 0000008E 1 0000008E 1 0000008E 1 0000008E 1 0000008E 1 0000008E 1 0000008E 1 0000008E 1 0000008E 1 0000008E 1 0000008E 1 0000008E 1 0000008E 1 0000008E 1 amp A A A BA A WB A A A WA FS A A A A A A A S amp S A A A A A A GG GG GG GG GG GG GG GG GG GG GG GG FG W U U L GA GA GA GA LA LA L GA GA LA L L L L L GA GA L L L L L L GA GA GA L GA GA L GA GA GA GA GA GA wow Ww WwW 227 1 EST Las L271 L 2721 EPN 27I bead 27 4 ST Lead L327 51 Le 27e T Lt EK 27 4 271 L27 L27 Le 27ek SC E bead L272 2T Ze Last 1 Le 27s L271 et LZ Pe 279eL i274 227 1 Sek L t EK i274 GREEN ES L271 Sek RSC GER beads l 27a 09844 109850 109942 09950 09956 109961 09968 09973 09981 109986 110006 10012 10018 120709 20719 20734 20743 20749 120755 20759 20766 120771 20778 20783 20789 20794 120799 20814 20822 120837 20845 20852 20857 20862 120869 20874 20881 20886 120892 20897 20902 20914 120922 20934 OE EN ES Ch e E e a Oe en EE a ER a 148 148 148 148 148 148 148 148 148 148 148 148 148 148 148 148 148 148 148 148 148 148 148 148 148 148 148 148 148 148 148 148 148 148 148 148 148 148 148 148 148 148
133. 00065C INST 504 00000000 00000 G G G G 000660 INST 504 00000000 40000 G G G G 000664 INST 582 00033000 00000 Q Qa a Qa RO2 00000000 RO6 00000000 R10 00000000 R14 00000000 5 LR RO2 00000000 RO6 00000000 R10 00000000 R14 00000000 5 LR R02 00000000 R06 00000000 R10 00000000 R14 00000000 00010 ST 390 00000000 R02 00000000 R06 00000000 R10 00000000 R14 00000000 00528 ST 009 D840E5C3 R02 00000000 R06 00000000 R10 00000000 R14 00000000 00010 L 390 00000000 R02 00000000 R06 00000000 R10 00000000 R14 00000000 00 G OH DO GrG D4 4 0 0 5 000000 RO3 00000032 RO7 00000000 R11 00000000 R15 00000000 4 5 RO3 00000032 RO7 00000000 R11 00000000 R15 00000000 1575 R03 00000032 R07 00000000 R11 00000000 R15 00000000 4 16 0 0 000000 R03 00000000 R07 00000000 R11 00000000 R15 00033000 4 1320 0 0 D340D9 R03 00000000 R07 00000000 R11 00000000 R15 00033000 2 16 0 0 000000 R03 00000000 R07 00000000 R11 00000000 R15 00033000 H VCML R store load_register load_register store store Figure 174 T command Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 355 7 114 T Instruction trace off 7 114 1 Function This command turns off the instruction tracing function 7 114 2 Syntax Descriptive T Diagram kb TE 7 114 3 Parameter None 7 114 4 Examples Example 1 Turn off instruction tracing 2009 02 1
134. 000FC4 HHCPNO40I Instruction stepping on range 1048576 1056768 Figure 140 S command Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 317 7 88 S dev Turn CCW stepping on or off 7 88 1 Function This command turns on s dev or turns off s dev the CCW stepping function After CCW stepping is turned on every execution of a CCW has to be confirmed by hitting ENTER on the Hercules console and produces detailed trace output 7 88 2 Syntax Descriptive S devaddr Diagram S NEISES E devaddr lt 7 88 3 Parameter devaddr This is the address of the device for which CCW stepping will be turned on or off The plus sign turns on the CCW stepping for the given device The plus sign must immediately follow the S command without an intervening blank The minus sign turns off the CCW stepping for the given device The minus sign must immediately follow the S command without an intervening blank 7 88 4 Examples Example 1 Turn on CCW stepping s 0148 HHCPN137I CCW stepping is now on for device 0148 0148 start i o file 0 bufcur 1 cache 1 HHCCP048I 0148 CCW 02000000 60000018 gt 02000000 60000018 00000000 00000000 48 HHCDA038I seeking to cyl 0 head 0 8 read trk 0 asynchronous 8 0 rdtrk 0 8 0 rdtrk 0 0 cache miss 8 0 rdtrk 0 0 buf OODA4FBO len 56832 8 trk 0 read_trkimg 8 file 0 12 0 0 trk 0 read_l2ent 0x710 01 014 014 01
135. 001804 R 001B12 R 000B42 R 001B3B R 001B14 R 001B45 Hercules PDS unload program Version 3 05 t 1999 2006 by Roger Bowler Reading directory block at cyl 198 head 0 rec 1 cyl 198 head 0 rec 2 cyl 198 head 0 rec 3 Jan Jaeger and others Figure 217 DASDPDSU utility output Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 417 8 16 DASDSEQ Display sequential datasets 8 16 1 Function The DASDSEQ utility is used to extract and list sequential datasets from a DASD image file 8 16 2 Syntax Descriptive DASDSEQ DEBUG EXPERT ASCII image SF shadowfile filespec Diagram DASDSEQ DEBUG EXPERT E DEE E ASCII SF shadowfi le 8 16 3 Parameter Options DEBUG Display additional debug options EXPERT Display an additional help panel that describes the expert operands ASCII Translate the output file to ASCII and trim trailing blanks Arguments image The file name and optionally path of the DASD image file shadowfile The optional name and path of an associated shadow file filespec The name of a sequential dataset DSORG PS on the DASD image file This name is also used as filename for the extracted data All expert facilities as described in the EXPERT help panel are experimental and therefore not yet described here Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 418 8 16 4 Examples Example 1 Extract and list the sequential dataset SYS2 SEQ DATA o
136. 01 00000C24 P000401 00000C24 P000401 00000C24 P000401 00000C24 P000401 00000C24 P000401 00000C24 P000401 00000C24 P000401 00000C24 P000401 00000C24 P000401 00000C24 P000401 00000C24 P000401 00000C24 P000401 remaining lines 50 47F060E4 BC 15 228 0 6 54 88400005 SRL 4 5 0 58 9620820C Or 524 8 32 5C 55C06058 CL 12 88 0 6 60 478060F8 BC 8 248 0 6 64 58506228 L 5 552 0 6 68 47F060FC BC 15 252 0 6 6C 5850622C L 5 556 0 6 70 58AB0000 L 10 0 11 0 74 12AA LTR 10 10 76 4770611A BC 7 282 0 6 7A 94DF820C I 524 8 223 7E 9102022A 554 0 2 82 O717 BCR 1 7 84 980402B8 L 0 4 696 0 88 98DF02EC L 13 15 748 0 8C 07F7 BCR 15 7 8E 465060FC BCT 5 252 0 6 92 55A06230 CL 10 560 0 6 96 4740620E BC 4 526 0 6 9A 48E301DC LH 14 476 3 0 9E 54A06234 N 10 564 0 6 A2 15AE CLR 10 14 A4 4720620E BC 2 526 0 6 A8 B60082B0 STCTL 0 0 688 8 AC B6000308 STCTL 0 0 776 0 BO D40303086166 NC 776 4 0 358 6 B6 D6030308616A OC 776 4 0 362 6 BC B7000308 LCTL 0 0 776 0 CO ADO10308 STOSM 776 0 1 C4 ACFE0308 STNSM 776 0 254 C8 B6000308 STCTL 0 0 776 0 CC D60082B00308 OC 688 1 8 776 0 D2 B70082B0 LCTL 0 0 688 8 D6 47F0616E BC 15 366 0 6 not displayed branch_on_condition shift_right_single_logical or_immediate compare_logical branch_on_condition load branch_on_condition load load load_and_test_register branch_on_condition and_
137. 01417I Modes S 370 ESA 390 z Arch 2010 06 18 19 12 18 071 000008E4 HHCO1417I Max CPU Engines 8 2010 06 18 19 12 18 071 000008E4 HHCO1417I Using fthreads Threading Model 2010 06 18 19 12 18 072 000008E4 HHC01417I Using FishIO 2010 06 18 19 12 18 072 000008E4 HHCO1417I Dynamic loading support 2010 06 18 19 12 18 072 000008E4 HHC01417I Using shared libraries 2010 06 18 19 12 18 072 000008E4 HHC01417I HTTP Server support 2010 06 18 19 12 18 072 000008E4 HHC01417I No SIGABEND handler 2010 06 18 19 12 18 072 000008E4 HHCO1417I Regular Expressions support 2010 06 18 19 12 18 072 O00008E4 HHC01417I Automatic Operator support Figure 8 Message prefixing using the console of the Hercules WinGUI Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 160 6 5 Hercules Console Commands sorted alphabetically The following table shows an overview of the valid Hercules console commands that can be entered in the control panel Hercules console display In this table the commands are sorted alphabetically rather than grouped by functionality Imessage SCP priority message Log comment to syslog Log comment to syslog reply SCP command List all commands command specific help alias for help aea Display AEA absolue effective address tables aia Display AIA absolute instruction address tables ar Display access registers archmode Set architecture mode attach Configure device auto_scsi_mount Automatic
138. 04 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 07 07 DI DI DI DI 07 DI DI 07 DI DI Hi DI DI DI 07 O07 OT 07 DI DI 07 07 DI DI 07 OT DI DI DI DI 07 Hi DI DI DI DI DI DI 07 07 DI 07 O07 DI DI 07 07 509191 509201 509206 509496 509524 509526 509528 509543 509546 0 0 00000ac4 0 0 00000ac4 509548 0 509550 0 509576 509578 0 509580 0 509584 509586 509588 509589 0 509607 0 509612 0 509623 509625 509627 509629 0 509631 0 509632 0 509634 509636 509638 509639 0 509641 0 509642 0 509644 509646 509647 509649 0 509651 0 509652 0 509663 509665 509666 509668 0 509677 0 509681 509683 509684 509694 0 509697 0 509699 0 Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 297 2 04 35 00000ed0 lock before 2 04 35 00000ed0 lock after 2 04 35 00000ed0 lock before L2c194c 00000000 cckddasd c 479 1 2c194c 00000000 cckddasd c 479 04bd998 00000000 cache c 141 04 07 509803 04 07 509805 0 04 07 509806 14 04 35 00000ed0 IOINT 00010013 00000000 cpu c 1159 4 04 07 509701 00000000 14 04 35 00000ed0 unlock 007c3684 00000000 cpu c 1241 4 04 07 509704 0 14 04 35 00000ed0 STSCH 00010013 000320c0 io c 664 4 04 07 509709 00000eb8 14 04 35 00000ed0 lo
139. 06 01 05 53 23 212 00000C24 HHCDAO55I search key SYS2 LINKLIB 2007 06 01 05 53 23 228 00000C24 CDAO55I search key SYS2 CMDLIB 2007 06 01 05 53 23 244 00000C24 CDAO55I search key IEAVNP10 2007 06 01 05 53 23 259 00000C24 HHCDAO55I search key IEAOPTOO 2007 06 01 05 53 23 275 00000C24 HHCDAO55I search key IEAIPS0O 2007 06 01 05 53 23 306 00000C24 CDAO55I search key ILRPREAD 2007 06 01 05 53 23 322 00000C24 CDAO55I search key IEAVNPO4 2007 06 01 05 53 23 322 00000C24 HHCDAO55I search key ILROPSOO 2007 06 01 05 53 23 415 00000C24 HHCDAO55I search key IEAVNPA8 2007 06 01 05 53 23 415 00000C24 CDAO55I search key IEAVNPO5 2007 06 01 05 53 23 415 00000C24 CDAO55I search key SYS1 LPALIB 2007 06 01 05 53 23 572 00000C24 HHCDA055I search key IEAPAK00 2007 06 01 05 53 28 587 00000C24 HHCDA055I search key IEABLDO0O 2007 06 01 05 53 28 603 00000C24 CDAO55I search key ALLOC 2007 06 01 05 53 28 603 00000C24 CDA055I search key E 2007 06 01 05 53 28 603 00000C24 HHCDAO55I search key HEWL 2007 06 01 05 53 28 603 00000C24 HHCDAO55I search key IEWL 2007 06 01 05 53 28 603 00000C24 CDAO55I search key IEWLF440 2007 06 01 05 53 28 603 00000C24 CDA055I search key IFOX01 2007 06 01 05 53 28 603 00000C24 HHCDAO55I search key IFOX11 2007 06 01 05 53 28 603 00000C24 CDA055I search key IFOX62 2007 06 01 05 53 28 603 00000C24 CDAO55I search key LIN 2007 06 01 05 53 28 619 00000C24 CDAO55I search key ALLOC 2007 06 01 05 53 28 619 00000C24 HHCDAO55I search key E 2007 06 01 05 53 28 61
140. 07 06 01 2007 06 01 2007 06 01 2007 06 01 2007 06 01 2007 06 01 2007 06 01 2007 06 01 05 05 OSs 05 05 05 05 05 05 05 05 05 05 05 52 533 338 53s 533 S24 537 53 53 53 Ss 53 53 59 41 23 290 02 02 02 02 02 7025 Ke 2364 22341 23 223 72351 ys el 634 650 DAS TIS 822 34 34 34 134 34 50 65 00000C24 00000C24 00000C24 00000C24 00000C24 00000C24 00000C24 00000C24 00000C24 00000C24 00000C24 00000C24 00000C24 00000C24 t ckd CDAO55I CDAO55I CDAO55I CDAO55I CDAO55I CDAO55I CDAO55I CDAO55I CDAO55I CDAO55I CDAO55I CDAO55I CDAO55I Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide searc searc searc searc searc searc searc searc searc searc searc searc searc key key key key key key key key key key key key key SYS1 NUCLEUS IEANUCO1 IEAVNIPM IEAVNPA2 IEAVNPO1 IEAVNPB2 SYS1 LOGREC SYS1 SVCLIB IEAVNP11 SYSCATLG Z9999994 VSAMDSPC IEAVNP1A IEAVNP03 Page 358 2007 06 01 05 53 23 165 00000C24 CDAO55I search key IEAVNP12 2007 06 01 05 53 23 165 00000C24 HHCDAO55I search key SYS1 PARMLIB 2007 06 01 05 53 23 181 00000C24 CDAO55I search key IEASYS00 2007 06 01 05 53 23 197 00000C24 CDAO55I search key SYS1 LINKLIB 2007 06 01 05 53 23 197 00000C24 CDAO55I search key LNKLSTOO 2007 06 01 05 53 23 197 00000C24 HHCDAO55I search key SYS1 CMDLIB 2007
141. 1 00000FC4 XXXXXXXXX Device 0561 parameter level 4 00000FC4 HHCTA1OOI 0561 Now Displays NT RDY 00000FC4 HHCPNO98I Device 0561 initialized Figure 55 DEVINIT command Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 221 7 31 DEVLIST List device or all devices 7 31 1 Function The DEVLIST command lists all the devices that are defined in the active Hercules configuration and displays their current status 7 31 2 Syntax Descriptive DEVLIST Diagram kk DEVIISI AS TTT 7 31 3 Parameter None 7 31 4 Examples Example 1 List all devices of the current configuration 2007 05 30 2007 05 30 2007 05 30 2007 05 30 2007 05 30 2007 05 30 2007 05 30 2007 05 30 2007 05 30 2007 05 30 2007 05 30 2007 05 30 2007 05 30 2007 05 30 2007 05 30 2007 05 30 2007 05 30 2007 05 30 23 23 3 SEH 233 23 a3 233 233 233 aot 23 3 23 07 07 07 07 07 07 07 OT 07 07 07 SREL 23 23 233 233 23s 233 07 07 07 OF 07 07 2241 12251 eee Bone P2224 222 1 222 22 222 1 22d Seel 22 KSE 22241 2244 22 722 1 Reged 81 97 97 197 97 97 97 197 97 97 97 197 97 97 97 197 97 97 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 F28 F28 F28 F28 F28 F28 F28 F28 F28 F28 F28 F28 F28 F28 F28 F28 F28 F28 devli
142. 1 select re 0 select set 1020 id 1 select re 0 select set 964 id 1 select re 0 select set 992 id 1 select rc 0 select set 936 id 1 select re 0 select set 1048 id 1 Figure 159 SHRD command print trace table Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 340 7 101 SIZEOF Display size of structures 7 101 1 Function The SIZEOF command shows the size of various Hercules internal structures 7 101 2 Syntax Descriptive SIZEOF 7 101 3 Parameter None 7 101 4 Examples Example 1 Display the size of structures 2009 02 07 18 41 40 191 2009 02 07 18 41 40 191 2009 02 07 18 41 40 191 2009 02 07 18 41 40 191 2009 02 07 18 41 40 191 2009 02 07 18 41 40 191 2009 02 07 18 41 40 191 2009 02 07 18 41 40 191 2009 02 07 18 41 40 191 2009 02 07 18 41 40 191 2009 02 07 18 41 40 191 2009 02 07 18 41 40 191 2009 02 07 18 41 40 191 2009 02 07 18 41 40 191 2009 02 07 18 41 40 191 2009 02 07 18 41 40 191 00000830 sizeof 00000830 HHCPN1 00000830 HH 00000830 HH 00000830 HH 00000830 HH 00000830 HH 00000830 HH 00000830 HH 00000830 HH 00000830 HH 00000830 HH 00000830 HH 00000830 HH 00000830 HH 00000830 HH p p CL AE ET E T EI IER O OT 3 G Figure 160 SIZEOF command Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Sp En Oy Dy Or a er er Sp SP En Sr En en en H H H H H HH HH H H H HH HH H H VOLO Ak of
143. 1 0252DF80 GR15 FF000000 Figure 75 GPR command alter general purpose register Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 241 7 42 HAO Hercules Automatic Operator 7 42 1 Function The Hercules Automatic operator HAO feature is a facility that allows to automatically issue console commands in response to certain messages being issued To use the HAO facility it is necessary to define a rule consisting of a target and an associated command The Hercules Automatic Operator is only for those messages issued by Hercules to its console It can not be used for messages issued from the guest operating system The current implementation limits the total number of defined rules to 64 There is currently no way to define a command whose arguments varies based on actual message text All of the defined rules are checked for a match each time Hercules issues a message there is no way at this time to stop the pro cessing of subsequent rules 7 42 2 Syntax Descriptive HAO TGT target HAO CMD command HAO LIST an HAO DEL on HAO CLEAR Diagram HAO TGT target XY gt gt HAO CMD comand ___YYY gt nn p gt HAO DEL azn HHR TTT gt p gt HAO CLEAR ____ gt Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 242 7 42 3 Parameter TGT Keyword to define a ne
144. 101I Module dyncrypt loaded Figure 94 LDMOD command Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 262 7 54 LOADCORE Load a core image file 7 54 1 Function The LOADCORE command allows you to load a binary data file into real storage This function is used mainly for emulator debugging purposes A certain core snapshot that was saved can be restored at any later time to reproduce some tests with identical real storage values The file filename is presumed to be a pure binary image file previously created via the SAVECORE command Please note that you must stop all CPUs see STOP STOPALL commands before loading a core image from a file 7 54 2 Syntax Descriptive LOADCORE filename address 0 Diagram H LOADCORE filename anf aora address 7 54 3 Parameter filename This argument specifies the file name and optionally the path of the file from which the core image will be loaded address Address specifies the start address of the real storage to where the saved file has to be loaded to A value of zero the default means the beginning of real storage 7 54 4 Examples Example 1 Load a core image file to address zero of real storage 2007 06 30 09 52 20 203 0000008E stopall 2007 06 30 09 52 25 781 0000008E loadcore d core02 bin 0 2007 06 30 09 52 25 812 O0000008E HHCPN112I Loading d core02 bin to location 0 2007 06 30 09 52 34 171 O000008E HHCPN113I 268431360
145. 11 User Reference Guide Page 81 4 38 MOUNTED_TAPE_REINIT Control tape initialization 4 38 1 Function This system parameter specifies whether reinitialization of tape drive devices via the DEVINIT command in order to mount a new tape should be allowed if there is already a tape mounted on the drive This option is meant as a safety mechanism to protect against accidentally unmounting a tape from the wrong device as a result of a simple typing error and thereby eventually cancelling a potentially important tape job Please note that for SCSI tape drives the DEVINIT nnnn command has no effect The tape must be unmounted manually since it is a real physical device and not emulated via a disk file like AWS or HET tapes Specifiying ALLOW the default indicates that new tapes may be mounted via DEVINIT nnnn new tape filename irrespective of whether or not there is already a tape mounted on the drive Specifying DISALLOW prevents new tapes from being mounted if one is already mounted Before the new tape can be mounted the existing one has first to be unmounted via the DEVINIT nnnn com mand Otherwise the DEVINIT attempt to mount the new tape is rejected 4 38 2 Syntax Descriptive MOUNTED_TAPE_REINIT ALLOW DISALLOW Diagram gt gt MOUNTED_TAPE_REINIT ee ALLOW lt DISALLOW 4 38 3 Parameter ALLOW Indicates that new tapes may be mounted irrespective of wether or not there is already a tape m
146. 13 2 Syntax Descriptive B addr addr addr Diagram kk B addr ma el eee SS addr addr 7 13 3 Parameter addr Instruction address or range of addresses where instruction execution is to be stopped 7 13 4 Examples Example 1 Set a breakpoint at instruction address 01000000 12 50 14 546 00000FC4 b 01000000 12 50 14 546 00000FC4 HHCPNO40I Setting breakpoint at 0000000001000000 0000000001000000 Figure 25 B command Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 189 7 14 B Delete breakpoint 7 14 1 Function The B command removes any previously set breakpoint 7 14 2 Syntax Descriptive B Diagram kb H bi 7 14 3 Parameter None 7 14 4 Examples Example 1 Delete the previously set breakpoint 2007 06 30 12 50 33 312 O0000FC4 b 2007 06 30 12 50 33 312 00000FC4 HHCPNO41I Deleting breakpoint Figure 26 B command Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 190 7 15 CACHE Cache command 7 15 1 Function The CACHE command displays the current Hercules cache statistics 7 15 2 Syntax Descriptive CACHE Diagram CACHE oH __ _ 7 15 3 Parameter None 7 15 4 Examples Example 1 Display the current cache statistics 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06
147. 148 148 cted space Oxfb7ea56 len 65778 5 read off Oxfb7ea56 len 65778 99 111 trk 25455 read_l2ent 0x31f10 che 82 hit 99 111 trk 25455 read_l2ent Oxfb7ea56 22094 22094 trk 25455 at pos Oxfb7ea56 len 22094 25455 write_trkimg len 22094 buf O8BOFF28 0106a10000 0 0 read_l12 99 active 0 0 0 9 0 file 0 read_12 99 active 0 99 82 0 read_12 127 active 0 99 82 25455 write_trkimg oldl2 Oxfb7ea56 22094 22094 space len 22094 largest 16099545 flags 0x01 ound 0x10f9c970 len 22094 size 22094 5 write off 0x10f9c970 len 22094 99 111 trk 25455 write_1l2ent 0x10f 9c970 22094 22094 5 write off 0x32288 len 8 ffset fb7ea56 len 22094 size 22094 127 0 trk 32512 read_l2ent 0x3ff10 ache 110 hit 127 0 trk 32512 read_l2ent Oxfb840a4 372 372 trk 32512 at pos Oxfb840a4 len 372 32512 write_trkimg len 372 buf 08B15576 0108770007 file 0 read_12 127 active 0 127 110 gcperc sele file 0 Cal file 121 file 12 0 99 ca file 12 gcperc move file 0 trk file 0 trk get_ get_space f file 0 fd file 0 12 file 0 fd rel_space o file 0 12 file SLA OEZ e file 0 12 gcperc move file 0 trk file 0 trk get_space f file 0 fd file 0 12 file 0 fd rel_space o file 0 12 file 12 0 126 c file 0 12 gcperc move file 0 trk 32512 write_trkimg oldl2 Oxfb840a4 372 372 get_space len 372 largest 16077451 flags 0x01 ound Oxfba543c len 372 size 372 5 wr
148. 148 HHCDA0411 148 HHCDA0431 HHCCPO75I 0148 HHCCP048I 0148 HHCCP048I 0148 148 HHCDA0411 148 HHCDA0431 HHCCPO75I 0148 HHCCP048I 0148 0148 HHCDA045I HHCCPO75I 0148 148 end i o bu j 0 0 cache miss 0 buf OODA4FAO len 56832 d_trkimg 0 0 trk 0 read_l2ent 0x710 ad 12 0 active 1 1 1 che 0 miss 5 read off 0x710 len 2048 che 0 12 0 read offset 0x710 0 0 trk 0 read_l2ent 0xf10 3057 3057 5 read off Oxf10 len 3057 0 complete buf 00DA4FA0 0100000000 comp 1 len 3057 maxlen 56832 trk 0 loc OODBCEC8 len 56832 zlib newlen 6491 rc 0 trk 0 len 6491 0000000000 0000000000000008 D uncompressed len 6491 read count orientation is index cyl 0 head 0 record 0 kl 0 dl 8 of 0 cyl 0 head 0 record 1 kl 4 dl 24 of 0 read data 24 bytes Stat 0C00 Count 0000 gt 00080000 8000015A 06004A98 60000060 CCW 06004A98 60000060 gt 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 read count orientation is data cyl 0 head 0 record 2 kl 4 dl 144 of 0 read data 144 bytes read count orientation is count cyl 0 head 0 record 1 kl 4 dl 24 of 0 Stat 0C00 Count 0000 CCW 08004AA0 00000000 gt 31004ABE 40000005 O8004AA0 00000000 CCW 31004ABE 40000005 gt 00000000 04000000 00000000 00000000 read count orientation is count cyl 0 head 0 record 2 kl 4 dl 144 of 0 Stat 0C00 Count 0000 CCW 08004AA0 00000000 gt 31004ABE 40000005 O8004AA0 00000000 CCW 31004ABE 40000005 gt 00000000 04000000 00000000 00000000 read count o
149. 2 8 30 RAWSTAPE Reverse AWSTAPE utility 0 cccccececececeeeeeeeeeeeee sees eeeeaeeeeneeseaeeesaeeeeaaeseeneeeaas 474 8 31 VTTS Virtual tape transportation system 475 9 Shared Device Support niece ei a A sea ei deeg 478 9 1 EIER EE ee Ee 478 9 2 CaCl ing EE 478 9 3 e ee lee Le EE 478 9 4 Usage of Shared Devices A 479 10 Hercules 3270 LOGO sosie ruear ade EE ALE EREE RAAKAA KIKA AARSE RAN AA AERALA REEE AATE ARRAIS AREA 481 10 1 EU DEED ee NEE ee r a a a a a ty 481 10 2 OK CIEST E TT E E A E T 481 Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 8 10 3 VIe EE 483 10 4 NEE 483 11 Starting the Hercules Emulstor nt 486 11 1 Starting Hercules in Native Mode 486 11 2 Starting Hercules with the Windows GU 487 11 3 Starting Hercules with the Hercules Studio ecccccceeeeeseeceeeeeceeeeeeeaeeecaeeseeeeeseaeeesaeeeeeeeeeaees 488 12 The Run Commands File hercules tc 490 12 1 FUNCUOM BEE 490 12 2 Run Commands File Statements s eoeeeeeeeeneeeneeeeeseeesrnssreesttnsrnnsrenstrnttnnntnnntnnttnnntnnnennnenn nenn 490 12 3 Automating Hercules Startup 0 ccccccecececeeeceeeeeeeeceeceaeeeeaaeseeaeeseaeeeseaeseeaaesseeeseaeeeeaaeseeneeesaees 492 13 The Hercules Automatic Operator HAO Facility eeseeeeeeeeeinsereesiresrresrnesrrnsrnesrnesrnnnnnsnnse 495 13 1 HAO Mro d TO e r a a A a a A ANA A 495 13 2 Defining HAO R AS a a a a a E A ct a E a e 495 13 3 Nee Lee UI 495 13 4 Substitutin
150. 3 11 User Reference Guide Page 326 7 93 SCSIMOUNT Automatic SCSI tape mounts 7 93 1 Function The SCSIMOUNT command displays or modifies the automatic SCSI tape mount option When entered without any operands it displays the current value and any pending tape mount requests Entering a value between 1 and 99 enables the option and specifies how often in seconds to query SCSI tape drives to automatically detect when a tape has been mounted When a tape is mounted an unsolicited device attention interrupt will be presented to the guest operating system Notes Enabling this option may negatively impact Hercules performance depending on how the host operating system Windows Linux etc processes SCSI attached tape drive status queries SCSI MOUNT is a synonym for the AUTO_SCSIMOUNT command 7 93 2 Syntax Descriptive SCSIMOUNT NO YES 4 Diagram gt gt SCSIMOUNT NO lt Esg n 7 93 3 Parameter NO No indicates that the SCSIMOUNT option is disabled forcing all SCSI tape mounts to be done manually via an appropriate DEVINIT command YES Yes enables the option and causes periodic queries of the SCSI tape drive in a five second interval to automatically detect when a tape is mounted YES is equivalent with SCSIMOUNT 5 n A value from 1 to 99 seconds inclusive enables the option and causes periodic queries of the SCSI tape drive to automatically detect when a tape is mounted Hercules Emulato
151. 3 trk images recovered 00000AE0 HHCCU1O04I OAEO file free space rebuilt 00000AE0 HHCCD2101 size free nbr st reads writes Lire 00000AE0 HHCCD2111 OOOQOAEO HHCCD2121 7 3 3555 5 5 nn a a 00000AE0 HHCCD2131I 340102838 0 0 8825 836 00000AE0 HHCCD214I1 00000AE0 HHCCD215I D MVS DASD MVSRES CCKD 00000AE0 HHCCD216I 0 340048223 0 0 rd 8572 0 00000AE0 HHCCD217I D MVS DASD MVSRES CCKD 00000AE0 HHCCD218I 1 54615 0 0 rw 253 836 Figure 156 SFK command chkdsk level 4 Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 336 7 99 SH Shell command 7 99 1 Function The SH command passes the given command and the parameters if any as is to the shell for process sing The results of the passed command are displayed on the Hercules console The special STARTGUI command must be used if the command being started either directly or indirectly starts a Windows graphical user interface non command line program e g Notepad If STARTGUI is not used in such cases then Hercules will hang until the graphical user interface program is closed Note that starting a batch file command line program that itself starts a graphical user interface program still requires using STARTGUI If foo bat contains start notepad exe then issuing sh foo bat will hang Hercules until Notepad is being closed The same applies if sh start foo bat is used The correct way is using STARTGUI for invoking
152. 34061 recovered offset Oxab50 00000AE0 HHCCU301I OAEO file l trk 34062 recovered offset Oxaca4 00000AE0 HHCCU301I OAEO file 1 trk 34063 recovered offset Oxadf8 00000AE0 HHCCU301I OAEO file trk 34064 recovered offset Oxaf4c 00000AE0 HHCCU301I OAEO file 1 trk 34065 recovered offset Oxb0a0 00000AE0 HHCCU301I OAEO file l trk 34066 recovered offset Oxblf2 00000AE0 HHCCU301I OAEO file 1 trk 34067 recovered offset 0xb344 00000AE0 HHCCU301I OAEO file l trk 34068 recovered offset 0xb498 00000AE0 HHCCU301I OAEO file l trk 34069 recovered offset Oxb5ec 00000AE0 HHCCU301I OAEO file l trk 34070 recovered offset 0xb740 00000AE0 HHCCU301I OAEO file l trk 34071 recovered offset 0xb894 00000AE0 HHCCU301I OAEO file l trk 1 recovered offset Oxb9bb len 1 00000AE0 HHCCU301I OAEO file l trk 34107 recovered offset Oxbfdd 00000AE0 HHCCU301I OAEO file l trk 6 recovered offset OxcO0f2 len 00000AE0 HHCCU301I OAEO file 1 trk 34072 recovered offset Oxc40e 00000AE0 HHCCU301I OAEO file l trk 34073 recovered offset 0xc56b 00000AE0 HHCCU301I OAEO file 1 trk 34074 recovered offset Oxc6 bd 00000AE0 HHCCU301I OAEO file l trk 34104 recovered offset Oxc811 00000AE0 HHCCU301I OAEO file trk 34105 recovered offset Oxc96a 00000AE0 HHCCU301I OAEO file l trk 34106 recovered offset Oxcabc 00000AE0 HHCCU301I OAEO file l trk 8 recovered offset Oxcc0e len 00000AE0 HHCCU301I OAEO file l trk 2 recovered offset Oxcea7 len 1 00000AE0 HHCCU300I OAEO file 7
153. 4 014 014 014 Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 318 48 file 0 48 12 0 0 148 file 0 148 file 0 L48 file 0O 12 148 file 0 fd 148 0 rdtrk 0 148 uncompress fd 48 newbuf mall cache 0 read_12 0 active 1 1 1 cache 0 miss 5 read off 0x710 len 2048 12 0 read offset 0x710 0 0 trk 0 read_l2ent Oxf10 3057 3057 5 off Oxf10 len 3057 D complete buf OODA4FB0 0100000000 comp 1 len 3057 maxlen 56832 trk 0 loc OODBCED8 len 56832 read l48 read trk 148 HHCDAO411 148 HHCDA043I1 148 HHCDA0431 48 HHCDAO045I HHCCPO75I 0148 HHCCPO048I 0148 0148 HHCDA0411 0148 HHCDA0431 0148 HHCDA045I1 HHCCPO75I 0148 HHCCPO048I 0148 HHCCP048I 0148 0148 HHCDA0381 HHCCPO75I 0148 HHCCP048I 0148 148 HHCDA0411 148 HHCDA0431 HHCCPO75I 0148 HHCCP048I 0148 HHCCP048I 0148 148 HHCDA0411 148 HHCDA0431 HHCCPO75I 0148 HHCCP048I 0148 HHCCP048I 0148 148 HHCDA0411 148 HHCDA0431 HHCCPO75I 0148 HHCCP048I 0148 HHCCPO48I 0148 148 HHCDA0411 148 HHCDA0431 HHCCPO75I 0148 HHCCP048I 0148 HHCCP048I 0148 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 Stat 0C00 Count 0000 gt 07004AB8 CCW 08004A98 00000000 gt 07004AB8 CCW 07004AB8 40000006 gt 00000000 48 uncompress zlib newlen 6491 rc 0 L48 validating trk 0 len 6491 0000000000 0000000000000008 D uncompressed len 6491 read count orientation is index cyl 0 head 0 record 0 kl 0 dl 8 of
154. 404 0406 Mode Port Entry specific information KKEKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK KK KKKKKK IP 00 PRI 172 021 003 032 IP 00 SEC 172 021 003 033 IP 00 NO 172 021 003 038 IP 01 NO 172 021 002 016 SNA 00 O40E py Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 141 HWADD 00 02 00 FE DF 00 42 HWADD 01 02 00 FE DF 00 43 ROUTE 00 172 021 003 032 255 255 255 224 D D Figure 2 OAT File Syntax Dev This is the base device address Mode This is the operation mode IP or SNA Note The SNA operation mode is currently not implemented Port This is the virtual relative adapter number Entry This applies only for IP Mode and specifies where a packet with an unknown IP address is forwarded PRI is the primary default entry SEC is the entry to use when the primary is not available and NO specifies that this is not a default entry n n n n This specifies the home IP address When the operation mode is IP specify only the even read device number dev The odd write address will be created automatically Additionally two other statements can be included in the Address Trans lation file These are the HWADD and ROUTE statements Use the HWADD statement to specify a hardware MAC address for a virtual adapter The first para meter after the HWADD specifies the relative adpater for which the address is applied The ROUTE statement is included for convenience It a
155. 410000 WSE LARA 2008 01 27 19 04 44 421 00000378 00D0 00000000 24000000 00000501 02100000 2008 01 27 19 04 44 421 00000378 00E0 0F0155AA 00 DG HE Figure 49 CTC command Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 215 7 27 DEFINE Rename device 7 27 1 Function The DEFINE command can be used to rename a device change the device number 7 27 2 Syntax Descriptive DEFINE o ddevice newdevice Diagram gt gt DEFINE o ddevice newdevice T gt 1 7 2 7 3 Parameter olddevice The device number of the device that has to be renamed newdevice The new device number to which the device should now be attached 7 27 4 Examples Example 1 Rename two devices 2007 06 30 14 31 59 718 00000FC4 define 0704 0705 2007 06 30 14 32 20 328 00000FC4 define Oa8c Oa8d Figure 50 DEFINE command Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 216 7 28 DEFSYM Define symbol 7 28 1 Function The DEFSYM command defines symbol symbol as to contain value value The symbol can be the object of a substitution If the value contains blanks or spaces then it must be enclosed within quotes or apostro phes See chapter Symbol Substitutions for a more in depth discussion on this feature 7 28 2 Syntax Descriptive DEFSYM symbol va ue Diagram gt gt DEFSYM lt ES symbol a value 7 28 3 Parameter
156. 47 1 Function The command generates an I O attention interrupt for a certain device 7 47 2 Syntax Descriptive I device Diagram gt gt device H T gt 7 47 3 Parameter device The number of the device for which an I O attention interrupt will be generated 7 47 4 Examples Example 1 Generate an UO attention interrupt for device 0148 2007 06 30 15 29 37 062 O0000FC4 i 0148 2007 06 30 15 29 37 062 O0000FC4 HHCPNO45I Device 0148 attention request raised Figure 87 command Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 251 7 48 IODELAY Display or set I O delay value 7 48 1 Function The IODELAY command displays the current setting or sets the amount of time in microseconds to wait after an I O interrupt is ready to be set pending The purpose of this parameter is to bypass a bug in the Linux 390 and z Linux dasd c device driver The problem is more apt to happen under Hercules than on a real machine as Hercules may present an I O interrupt sooner than a real machine 7 48 2 Syntax Descriptive IODELAY usecs NOWARN Diagram IODELAY a Bez uSECS eee NOWARN 7 48 3 Parameter usecs Amount of time in microseconds to wait after an I O interrupt is ready to be set pending NOWARN If the IODELAY value is non zero a warning message HHCCF037W will be issued unless NOWARN is specified 7 48 4 Examples Example 1 Display the curren
157. 499 _ REXX L Name D APPS SPFPRO REXX USER SUB SPF JR Type SPF edit macro at Des X3 Cre c submit JCL to MVS 3 8 ation date 24 Aug 1999 creation time 18 49 40 CS Author c Volker Bandke isredit ma cro pl p2 p3 p4 p5 p6 p7 p8 pg ISREDIT member MEMBER ISPEXEC CO parse upper do ISREDIT RE ADDRESS CM zedsmsg zedlmsg ispexec se ADDRESS CM end EXIT 0 TROL ERRORS CANCEL var member file ext PLACE SPF ZF ZL D HERCRDR 192 168 1 102 3505 5 SPF File submitted The member member has been submitted to MVS tmsg msg isrz000 D DELETE SPF S s SA SI ZS SI S4 ST Sch S7 SI S S Figure 246 14 3 Su SUBmit REXX for SPF PC bmitting Jobs from Unix Submitting jobs from Unix can be done in two different ways described in detail in the next sections e Using a Perl script e Using the netcat program 14 3 1 Using a Perl script Malcolm Beattie has provided a simple Perl script which can submit jobs using either TCP IP or Unix Domain Sockets The script is invoked using one of the following command formats hercsub 1 hercsub 92 168 1 102 3505 dummy jcl tmp hercrdr 00C dummy jcl Hercules Emu ator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 500 Here is the Hercsub script
158. 5 10 07 39 312 00000FC4 t 2009 02 15 10 07 39 312 O00000FC4 HHCPNO40I Instruction tracing off range 1048576 1056768 Figure 175 T command Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 356 7 115 T Instruction trace query 7 115 1 Function The T command displays whether instruction tracing is on or off and the range if any 7 115 2 Syntax Descriptive T Diagram kk T __ pita 7 115 3 Parameter None 7 115 4 Examples Example 1 Query instruction tracing 2009 02 15 10 08 05 112 00000FC4 t 2009 02 15 10 08 05 112 00000FC4 HHCPNO40I Instruction tracing on range 1048576 1056768 Figure 176 T command Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 357 7 116 T CKD Turn CKD_KEY tracing on or off 7 116 1 Function The T CKD command turns the CKD key tracing on T CKD or turns it off T CKD 7 116 2 Syntax Descriptive T CKD Diagram a Po DEE E lt 7 116 3 Parameter T CKD T CKD 7 116 4 Examples Example 1 The T CKD turns on the CKD key trace The plus sign and the CKD argument must immediately follow the T command without an intervening blank The T CKD turns off the CKD key trace The minus sign and theCKD argument must immediately follow the T command without an intervening blank Turning the CKD key trace on 2007 06 01 2007 06 01 2007 06 01 2007 06 01 2007 06 01 2007 06 01 20
159. 5 59 14 447 00000C24 V 000100A0 K 06 204045E0 A2E441B0 202C58D0 O2FC98CD sU e 05 59 14 447 00000C24 V 000100B0 K 06 D19CO5ED 91803001 4770A2DA 1FCC59CO J j ERT 05 59 14 447 00000C24 V 000100C0 K 06 30504780 A2A691C0O 32004770 A2A659CO amp Sswj sw 05 59 14 447 00000C24 V 000100D0 K 06 200C4780 A2DA58CO 305412CC 4770A2DA_ 8 Sh 05 59 14 447 00000C24 V 000100E0 K 06 1F114180 0001BA18 30544770 A2DA5810 Siow 05 59 14 447 00000C24 V 000100F0 K 06 305858F0 001058F0 F2645800 F0005000 0 02 0 amp 05 59 14 447 00000C24 V 00010100 K 06 1004BA01 FO004770 A2CE982E 31C0947F 0 8 q m Figure 198 V command display virtual storage with range Example 4 Display 256 GEET bytes of virtual storage starting from address x 00010000 Force Secondary trans lation instead of current PSW mode 05 56 20 087 00000C24 v s 00010000 ff 05 56 20 087 00000C24 V 00010000 secondary R 00010000 05 56 20 087 00000C24 V 00010000 K 04 4770A1C8 5820901C 47FOA1FO 91802003 H O 0j 05 56 20 087 00000C24 V 00010010 K 04 47E0A1EC 58202004 47FOA1FO 96803200 O 0o 05 56 20 087 00000C24 V 00010020 K 04 91803200 4770A1FE 12224770 A1DC5850 j Rakes E 05 56 20 087 00000C24 V 00010030 K 04 30201FCC 195C4770 AO1C50CO 30245820 Be ee EE 05 56 20 087 00000C24 V 00010040 K 04 30089140 320047E0 A28441B0 202C58D0 43 sd 05 56 20 087 00000C24 V 00010050 K 04 02FC98CD D1900
160. 56 20 087 00000C24 V 00010000 K 04 4770A1C8 5820901C 47F0A1F0 91802003 ne 0 03 05 56 20 087 00000C24 V 00010010 K 04 47E0A1EC 58202004 47F0A1F0 96803200 0 00 05 56 20 087 00000C24 V 00010020 K 04 91803200 4770A1FE 12224770 A1DC5850 j DE 8 05 56 20 087 00000C24 V 00010030 K 04 30201FCC 195C4770 A01C50C0 30245820 earal 05 56 20 087 00000C24 V 00010040 K 04 30089140 320047E0 A28441B0 202C58D0 j sd n 05 56 20 087 00000C24 V 00010050 K 04 02FC98CD D19005ED 58C031F4 12CC4780 q d 4 05 56 20 087 00000C24 V 00010060 K 04 A24E9120 300047E0 A2424160 203047F0 stj s 0 05 56 20 087 00000C24 V 00010070 K 04 A2464160 20485870 31F445E0 A2E458C0 s 4 sU 05 56 20 087 00000C24 V 00010080 K 04 31F812CC 4780A262 187C4160 203045E0 8 s 05 56 20 087 00000C24 V 00010090 K 04 A2E458C0 31FC12CC 4780A276 187C4160 sU s 05 56 20 087 00000C24 V 000100A0 K 04 204045E0 A2E441B0 202C58D0 02FC98CD Ketti e g 05 56 20 087 00000C24 V 000100B0 K 04 D19CO5ED 91803001 4770A2DA 1FCC59CO J j4 S 05 56 20 087 00000C24 V 000100C0 K 04 30504780 A2A691C0 32004770 A2A659C0 E sw 05 56 20 087 00000C24 V 000100D0 K 04 200C4780 A2DA58C0 305412CC 4770A2DA Sela alan s 05 56 20 087 00000C24 V 000100E0 K 04 1F114180 0001BA18 30544770 A2DA5810 s 05 56 20 087 00000C24 V 000100F0 K 04 305858F0 001058F0 F2645800 F0005000 0 02 0 6 Figure 196 V command display virtual storage with length Example 2 Chang
161. 5ED 58C031F4 12CC4780 q J 4 05 56 20 087 00000C24 V 00010060 K 04 A24E9120 300047E0 A2424160 203047FO0 s j s 0 05 56 20 087 00000C24 V 00010070 K 04 A2464160 20485870 31F445E0 A2E458CO s 4 suU 05 56 20 087 00000C24 V 00010080 K 04 31F812CC 4780A262 187C4160 203045EO0 8 s 05 56 20 087 00000C24 V 00010090 K 04 A2E458C0 31FC12CC 4780A276 187C4160 sU s 05 56 20 087 00000C24 V 000100A0 K 04 204045E0 A2E441B0 202C58D0 O2FC98CD sU perg 05 56 20 087 00000C24 V 000100B0 K 04 D19C05ED 91803001 4770A2DA 1FCC59CO J j Sesal 05 56 20 087 00000C24 V 000100C0 K 04 30504780 A2A691C0 32004770 A2A659C0 amp swj SW 05 56 20 087 00000C24 V 000100D0 K 04 200C4780 A2DA58C0 305412CC 4770A2DA 8 s 05 56 20 087 00000C24 V 000100E0 K 04 1F114180 0001BA18 30544770 A2DA5810 Sey 05 56 20 087 00000C24 V 000100F0 K 04 305858F0 001058F0 F2645800 F0005000 0 02 0 amp Figure 199 V command display virtual storage with S option Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 377 7 126 VERSION Display version information 7 126 1 Function The version command is used to display various version and build information about the Hercules emulator 7 126 2 Syntax Descriptive VERSION Diagram gt gt VERSION AA 7 126 3 Parameter None 7 126 4 Examples Example 1 Display the Hercules version information
162. 678 9ABCDEF012345678 JABCDEF 012345678 9JABCDEF 012345678 9ABCDEF0 EES EES EEN EN Figure 120 PGMTRACE command change settings Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 289 7 72 PR Display prefix register 7 72 1 Function The PR command displays the contents of the prefix registers 7 72 2 Syntax Descriptive PR Diagram kk DR so fsTss osfW TH _ _ 7 72 3 Parameter None 7 72 4 Examples Example 1 Display the prefix register 2007 06 30 14 25 13 997 00000FC4 pr 2007 06 30 14 25 13 997 00000FC4 Prefix 3FBE3000 Figure 121 PR command Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 290 7 73 PSCP Send system control program priority message 7 73 1 Function The PSCP command sends a system control program i e guest operating system priority command in any CMDTGT mode 7 73 2 Syntax Descriptive PSCP cmd Diagram kk PSCP Se ae oo eee cmd 7 73 3 Parameter cmd This is the command to be sent as a system control program i e guest operating system priority command 7 73 4 Examples For a similar sample please refer to the SCP command Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 291 7 74 PSW Display or alter program status word 7 74 1 Function The PSW command displays or alters the actual content of the Program Status Word PSW 7 74 2 Syntax
163. 69 88056276 88056276 238492 238502 238509 238519 238524 238530 238534 238560 238988 238999 239006 239020 239028 239035 239041 239075 239243 239252 239260 239270 239278 9915 71 591579 591630 840521 840537 840538 840547 840563 840569 840572 840579 591236 591253 841130 841149 841177 841186 841187 841197 841220 841229 590940 590957 0000 148 148 148 148 148 148 000 148 148 148 148 148 148 148 j oO Ke CS E OO ca Ex OS oS E EN ek E G3 148 0148 0148 0148 0340 0340 0341 0341 0342 0343 0342 0343 0148 0148 0340 0340 0342 0342 0341 0341 0343 0343 0148 0148 select rel select isset 1048 id 1 select ready 1048 id 1 recvData e3 00 148 1 0 server_request 0 e3 00 148 1 0 server_request inactive id 1 server_send 00 00 148 1 0 select set 1048 id 1 select re 1 select isset 1048 id 1 select ready 1048 id 1 recvData e2 00 148 1 0 server_request 0 e2 00 148 1 0 server_request active id 1 server_send 00 00 148 1 0 select set 1048 id 1 select rel select isset 1048 id 1 select ready 1048 id 1 recvData e8 00 148 1 4 server_request 0 e8 00 148 1 4 server_request inactive id 1 server_send 00 00 148 1 0 select set 1048 id 1 select rc 0 select set 1020 id 1 select re 0 select set 992 id 1 select re 0 select re 0 select set 964 id 1 select set 936 id 1 select re 0 select set 1048 id
164. 6C2404040 _ ses SBGOLOB LO95I Member FILE728 TTR 000210 Userdata 044600000105311F 105311F07330005 00050000C3C2E360 F4F7F0404040 son tCBI 470 LO95I Member ICHPWX01 TTR 000109 Userdata 010100000105311F 105311F0711019A 019A0000D1D6E4E2 D4C140404040 we eee eee JOUSMA LO90I End of directory LO13I Dataset SYS2 RACF UTIL contains 1 track LO57I VTOC starts at cyl 0 head 2 and is 1 track LO14I Free space starts at cyl 0 head 3 LO16I Total of 3339 cylinders written to D MVS DASD TST001 A80 Figure 213 DASDLOAD utility output XMIT method message level 3 Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 410 Sample 3 Create a 3390 model 3 in a compressed file called TST001 A80 containing a sequential file using the control file TST001 DAT with message level 5 The control file TST001 DAT looks like follows TSTOO1 3390 3 SYS2 SEQ DATA SEQ D MVS DASD SEQ BIN TRK 5 5 0 PS FB 80 3120 The corresponding output from the utility is the following D HERCULES gt dasdload z D MVS DASD TST001 DAT D MVS DASD TST001 A80 5 Hercules DASD loader program Version 3 05 TSTOO1 3390 3 HHCDLOO9I Loading 3390 volume TSTOO1 HHCDLO12I Creating dataset SYS2 SEQ DATA at cyl 0 head 1 HHCDLO13I Dataset SYS2 SEQ DATA contains 5 tracks HHCDLO57I VTOC starts at cyl 0 head 6 and is 1 track HHCDLO58I Fo
165. 6EB0E651 1FEOCFD7 606D2C41 1F745F67 n WQ P m A t_g 2008 01 27 19 04 30 937 00000378 0110 11236331 2A4525F7 21BF7B21 222CB387 c1 E 7 g 2008 01 27 19 04 30 937 00000378 0120 24BE6411 S d 2008 01 27 19 04 44 406 00000378 HHCCTO49I 0E20 Received packet from tun0 229 bytes 2008 01 27 19 04 44 421 00000378 0000 450000E5 02180000 8011B53A COA80066 E V y f 2008 01 27 19 04 44 421 00000378 0010 COA800FF O08A008A 00D1B65E 1102804F f y data 2008 01 27 19 04 44 421 00000378 0020 COA80066 008A00BB 00002045 4D454246 y f EMEBF 2008 01 27 19 04 44 421 00000378 0030 43454243 41434143 41434143 41434143 CEBCACACACACACAC 2008 01 27 19 04 44 421 00000378 0040 41434143 41434143 41434100 20464445 ACACACACACA FDE 2008 01 27 19 04 44 421 00000378 0050 50464345 44454646 43454646 43434143 PFCEDEFFCEFFCCAC 2008 01 27 19 04 44 421 00000378 0060 41434143 41434143 41434142 4E00FF53 ACACACACACABN S 2008 01 27 19 04 44 421 00000378 0070 4D422500 00000000 00000000 00000000 MB 2008 01 27 19 04 44 421 00000378 0080 00000000 00000000 00000000 00001100 2008 01 27 19 04 44 421 00000378 0090 00210000 00000000 OO00000E8 03000000 KSE 2008 01 27 19 04 44 421 00000378 00A0 00000000 00210056 00030001 00000002 V 2008 01 27 19 04 44 421 00000378 00B0 0032005C 4D41494C 534C4F54 5C42524F 2 MAILSLOT BRO 2008 01 27 19 04 44 421 00000378 00C0 57534500 010080FC 0A004C41 52
166. 7 2007 08 25 17 37 2007 08 25 17 37 2007 08 25 17 37 2007 08 25 17 37 2007 08 25 17 37 2007 08 25 17 37 2007 08 25 17 37 2007 08 25 17 37 2007 08 25 17 37 2007 08 25 17 37 2007 08 25 17 37 2007 08 25 17 37 2007 08 25 17 37 2007 08 25 17 37 2007 08 25 17 37 58 58 58 58 58 58 58 58 58 58 58 58 58 58 58 58 58 58 58 58 58 58 58 356 356 356 356 356 356 356 356 356 356 356 356 356 356 356 356 356 356 356 356 356 356 356 000001 000001 000001 000001 000001 000001 000001 000001 000001 000001 000001 000001 000001 000001 000001 000001 000001 000001 000001 000001 000001 000001 000001 90 shrd trace 90 11 90 11 90 11 90 11 SD 1T 90 11 90 11 90 11 90 11 90 11 90 11 9 0 12 90 11 90 11 90 11 90 11 90 11 90 11 90 11 90 11 90 11 90 11 90 11 90 11 90 11 90 11 90 11 90 11 90 11 90 11 90 11 90 11 90 11 90 11 90 11 90 11 90 11 90 11 90 11 90 11 90 1T 90 T1 90 11 90 11 88056256 88056256 88056256 88056256 88056256 88056256 88056256 88056256 88056256 88056256 88056256 88056256 88056256 88056256 88056256 88056256 88056256 88056256 88056256 88056256 88056256 88056256 88056256 88056256 88056259 88056259 88056259 88056259 88056259 88056259 88056259 88056259 88056266 88056266 88056269 88056269 88056269 88056269 88056269 88056269 88056269 880562
167. 7 4 6 CCKD Compressed CKD DASD opttons ne 38 4 7 CNSLPORT Telnet client port cece cceeeeseeeecee cee eeeeaeeeeaaeseeeeeceaeeseaaeseeaeeseeeeeseaeeeeaeeneneeenaees 43 4 8 CODEPAGE Codepage conversion table c ccceccceeeeeeeeseeceeeeeceaeeeeaaeeseneeseaeeesaeeesaeeteeeeseaees 44 4 9 CONKPALV Console and telnet clients keep alive Option ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetaeeeeeeeeeaees 46 4 10 GPUMODEL GPU MOGGI s icsscccesccecededa cecucddcuhvsea cauedvaddabessncdenishadaccbvssd cabadhagideessecdenisttd eacdhedeceed 48 4 11 CPUPRIO CPU thread process priority ccccccceceeeceeseeceeeeeceeeeeceaeeeeaeeeeeeeeseaeeesaeeneaeeeeeeeess 49 4 12 CPUSERIAL CPU Serial number 50 4 13 CPUVERID CPU version Code AAA 51 4 14 DEFSYM Define Symboly eimie aiaee ana raea aae aaa aaea aaa a aaea ia 52 Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 3 4 15 DEVPRIO Device threads process priority cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaeeseeeeseaeeesaeeeeneeenaees 53 4 16 DEVTMAX Maximum number of device threads A 54 4 17 DIAG8CMD DIAGNOSE 8 command Setting ccccceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeseeeeeseaeeesaeeeeneeenaees 56 4 18 ECPSVM ECPS VM support status VM 58 4 19 ENGINES Processor engine Type 60 4 20 HERCLOGO Hercules 3270 1000 uiie heau aieiaa a a a aaaea aa aa aaa aan 62 4 21 HERCPRIO Hercules process priority c ccecccceceeeceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeceaeeeeaaeseeeeeenaeeesa
168. 70 ESA 390 ESAME z ARCH Diagram gt gt ARCHMODE S 370 lt ESA 390 ESAME z ARCH 7 8 3 Parameter S 370 Use S 370 for OS 360 VM 370 and MVS 3 8 ESA 390 Use ESA 390 for MVS XA MVS ESA OS 390 VM ESA VSE ESA Linux 390 and ZZSA z OS can be run until version 1 2 with ESA 390 mode without installed bimodal feature or until version 1 4 with installed bimodal feature ESAME Use ESAME Enterprise System Architecture Modal Extensions for z OS z VM z VSE and z Linux When ESAME is specified the machine will always be IPL ed in ESA 390 mode but the system is capable of being switched into the z Architecture mode after IPL This is handled automatically by all z Architecture operating systems z ARCH This is the same as ESAME 7 8 4 Examples Example 1 Display the current setting of the initial architecture mode 2007 06 30 08 15 41 859 00000FC4 archmode 2007 06 30 08 15 41 859 O0000FC4 HHCPN126I Architecture mode ESA 390 Figure 15 ARCHMODE command display architecture mode Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 180 Example 2 Change the setting of the current architecture mode 2007 06 30 08 15 54 625 00000FC4 archmode esame 2007 06 30 08 15 54 625 00000FC4 HHCPN129I Architecture successfully set to z Arch mode Figure 16 ARCHMODE command set architecture mode Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 181 7 9 ATTACH Configure device 7 9 1 F
169. 75 00000FC4 HHCPN154I CPU0001 online 2007 06 30 14 24 25 875 00000FC4 HHCPN155I CPU0002 offline 2007 06 30 14 24 25 875 00000FC4 HHCPN155I CPU0003 offline 2007 06 30 14 24 25 875 00000FC4 HHCPN155I CPU0004 offline 2007 06 30 14 24 25 875 00000FC4 HHCPN155I CPU0005 offline Figure 37 CFALL command display status of all CPUs Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 202 Example 2 Configure all CPUs offline 2007 06 30 14 24 46 625 00000FC4 cfall off 2007 06 30 14 24 46 625 00000FC4 HHCCPOO8I CPU0000 thread ended tid 00000CC0 pid 3172 2007 06 30 14 24 46 625 00000FC4 HHCCPOO8I CPU0001 thread ended tid 0000012C pid 3172 2007 06 30 14 24 46 625 00000FC4 HHCCPOO8I CPU0002 thread ended tid 00000390 pid 3172 2007 06 30 14 24 46 625 00000FC4 HHCCPOO8I CPU0003 thread ended tid 00000E08 pid 3172 2007 06 30 14 24 46 625 00000FC4 HHCCPOO8I CPU0004 thread ended tid 00000EF4 pid 3172 2007 06 30 14 24 46 625 00000FC4 HHCCPOO8I CPU0005 thread ended tid 00000FAC pid 3172 2007 06 30 14 24 46 625 00000FC4 HHCPN155I CPU0000 offline 2007 06 30 14 24 46 625 00000FC4 HHCPN155I CPU0001 offline 2007 06 30 14 24 46 625 00000FC4 HHCPN155I CPU0002 offline 2007 06 30 14 24 46 625 00000FC4 HHCPN155I CPU0003 offline 2007 06 30 14 24 46 625 00000FC4 HHCPN155I CPU0004 offline 2007 06 30 14 24 46 625 00000FC4 HHCPN155I CPU0005 offline 2007 06 30 14 24 46 64
170. 9 00000C24 CDAO55I search key LIN 2007 06 01 05 53 28 619 00000C24 CDAO55I search key LOGOFF 2007 06 01 05 53 28 619 00000C24 CDAO55I search key SUBMIT 2007 06 01 05 53 28 619 00000C24 CDAO55I search key IEALODOO Figure 177 T CKD command Example 2 Turning the CKD key trace off 2007 06 01 05 54 08 572 00000C24 t ckd 2007 06 01 05 54 08 572 00000C24 HHCPN134I CKD KEY trace is now off Figure 178 T CKD command Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 359 7 117 T dev Turn CCW tracing on or off 7 117 1 Function This command turns the CCW tracing for a certain device on T dev or turns it off T dev It is possible to trace several devices concurrently To enable the tracing of more than one device the T command must be issued for each device The traces can be turned off independently of each other This function is similar to the CCW stepping described in section 7 88 The difference between these two function is that with CCW stepping the execution of every CCW has to be initiated by hitting ENTER on the Hercules console whereas CCW tracing once started traces the instructions without interruption Please note that the tracing function will create an enormous amount of output in the Hercules log 7 117 2 Syntax Descriptive T devaddr Diagram lt T E devaddr 7 117 3 Parameter devaddr This is the address of t
171. 9 04 30 937 00000378 0040 73E431C1 OA7E75E7 746E90B1 O6DD5477 sU1A uXtn Tw 2008 01 27 19 04 30 937 00000378 0050 2CD450A1 26F97A07 44BA6191 285B7697 MP amp 9z D aj vp 2008 01 27 19 04 30 937 00000378 0060 OCC6B381 4932DA27 29903671 3AE634B7 F al2 6q W4 2008 01 27 19 04 30 937 00000378 0070 5F8EDA61 1BA31647 700B8F51 O6EEOED7 _ a t Gp Q P 2008 01 27 19 04 30 937 00000378 0080 77104541 4D32AE67 3A57EC31 625384F7 w EAM2 g W 1bSd7 2008 01 27 19 04 30 937 00000378 0090 593E7421 133A2287 4DBOCD11 12671717 Y gt t gM g 2008 01 27 19 04 30 937 00000378 00A0 2E1CE701 6B81F2A7 2061B1F1 6DE94537 X ka2x a 1mZE7 2008 01 27 19 04 30 937 00000378 00B0 6DBF1DE1 1E429EC7 27C61AD1 3F0A8F57 m B G F J W 2008 01 27 19 04 30 937 00000378 00CO 4E4898C1 0024A6E7 664987B1 656B7577 NHgA wXfIg ekuw 2008 01 27 19 04 30 937 00000378 00D0 71ECD7A1 74408B07 39677891 381C7797 q P t 9gxj8 wp 2008 01 27 19 04 30 937 00000378 00E0 54EF5A81 2E1ECB27 67AB6D71 279E15B7 T Za g mq 2008 01 27 19 04 30 937 00000378 00FO 7BA3A161 33B7E747 6EBOE651 1FEOCFD7 t a3 XGn WQ P 2008 01 27 19 04 30 937 00000378 0100 606D2C41 1F745F67 11236331 2A4525F7 m A t_g c1 E 7 2008 01 27 19 04 30 937 00000378 0110 21BF7B21 222CB387 24BE6411 ata oxide 2008 01 27 19 04 30 937 00000378 HHCCTO41I 0E21 CTC Received Frame 292 bytes 2008 01 27 19 04 30 937 00000378 0000 01240122 08000000 4500011C A2570000 E sW 2008 01 27 19 04 30 937 00000378
172. AR identifier followed by the last four digits of the CPU serial number If LPARNUM is not specified in the configuration file then STIDP returns a CPUID as before where the leftmost digit of the serial number is replaced by the logical CPU number if the serial number begins with a zero 4 32 2 Syntax Descriptive LPARNUM 00 sn Diagram gt gt LPARNUM 00 e ME nn 4 32 3 Parameter XX Specifies the one or two digit hexadecimal LPAR identification number stored by the STIDP instruction If a one digit number is specified then STIDP stores a format 0 CPU ID If a two digit number is specified then STIDP stores a format 1 CPU ID 4 32 4 Examples Example 1 Set the LPAR identification number to x 21 Format 1 CPU ID LPARNUM 21 Example 2 Set the LPAR identification number to x A Format O CPU ID LPARNUM A Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 75 4 33 MAINSIZE Main storage in MB 4 33 1 Function Specifies the size of the main storage in megabytes The actual upper limit of the main storage is deter mined by the host system s architecture operating system and on some systems the amount of physical memory and paging space you have available The value must not exceed 4095 almost 4GB for 32 bit platforms and 4 294 967 295 about 4 million GB for 64 bit platforms The practical limit depends on the maximum amount of storage that can be obtained by malloc usually
173. ASSIST ASSIST ASSIST ASSIST ASSIST ASSIST ASSIST sssssssq lt s fea fea fea fea fea fea fea fea cure cure cure cure cure cure cure cure invoked SVC Enabled SSM Enabled LPSW Enabled STNSM Enabled STOSM Enabled SIO Enabled VTIMER Enabled STCTL Enabled Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 230 2007 06 30 17 16 55 468 00000FC4 HHCEV01 2007 06 30 17 16 55 468 00000FC4 HHCEV01 2007 06 30 17 16 55 468 00000FC4 HHCEV01 2007 06 30 17 16 55 468 00000FC4 HHCEV01 2007 06 30 17 16 55 468 00000FC4 HHCEV01 2007 06 30 17 16 55 468 00000FC4 HHCEV01 2007 06 30 17 16 55 468 00000FC4 HHCEV01 2007 06 30 17 16 55 468 00000FC4 HHCEV01 2007 06 30 17 16 55 468 00000FC4 HHCEV01 2007 06 30 17 16 55 468 00000FC4 HHCEV01 2007 06 30 17 16 55 468 00000FC4 HHCEV01 2007 06 30 17 16 55 468 00000FC4 HHCEV01 2007 06 30 17 16 55 468 00000FC4 HHCEV01 2007 06 30 17 16 55 468 00000FC4 HHCEV01 2007 06 30 17 16 55 468 00000FC4 HHCEV01 2007 06 30 17 16 55 468 00000FC4 HHCEV01 2007 06 30 17 16 55 468 00000FC4 HHCEV01 2007 06 30 17 16 55 468 00000FC4 HHCEV01 2007 06 30 17 16 55 468 00000FC4 HHCEV01 2007 06 30 17 16 55 468 00000FC4 HHCEV01 2007 06 30 17 16 55 468 00000FC4 HHCEV01 2007 06 30 17 16 55 468 00000FC4 HHCEV01 2007 06 30 17 16 55 468 00000FC4 HHCEV01 2007 06 30 17 16 55 468 00000FC4 HHCEV01 2007 06 30 17 16 55 468 00000FC4 HHCEV01 2007 06 30 17 16 55 468 00000FC4 HHCEV01 2007 06 3
174. AWSTAPE specification chunksize 4096 no compression V Verbose information display usage summary Z Use zlib compression Arguments source Name and optionally path of the source tape file destination Name and optionally path of the destination tape file Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 429 8 20 4 Examples Example 1 Create an AWSTAPE file from an existing HET tape file HETUPD s D MVS TAPE T001002 HET D MVS TAPE T001002 AWS Example 2 Change the compression level to 2 with BZLIB compression and create a new HET tape file HETUPD 2 b D MVS TAPE TLEVO009 HET D MVS TAPE TLEV002 HET 8 20 5 Sample Utility Output Sample 1 Change the compression level to 4 best match between speed and compression rate and create a new HET tape file D HERCULES gt hetupd 4 D MVS TAPE T38321A HET D MVS TAPE T38321B HET Hercules HET copy update program Version 3 05 c Copyright 1999 2005 by Roger Bowler Jan Jaeger and others Figure 224 HETUPD utility output Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 430 8 21 TAPECOPY Copy a SCSI tape to or from an AWSTAPE disk file 8 21 1 Function The Hercules tape copy program copies a SCSI tape to or from an AWSTAPE disk file Tapecopy reads a SCSI tape and outputs an AWSTAPE file representation of the tape or reads an AWSTAPE file and creates an identical copy of its contents on a tap
175. C automount add D MVS Tape_1 0000097C HHCPN210I Default Allowed AUTOMOUNT directory D MVS Tape_1 0000097C automount add D MVS Tape_2 0000097C HHCPN210I Allowed AUTOMOUNT directory D MVS Tape_2 Figure 19 AUTOMOUNT command add eniry Example 2 List all currently defined list entries of allowable tape automount directories 0000097C automount list 0000097C HHCPN203I D MVS Tape_1 0000097C HHCPN203I D MVS Tape_2 Figure 20 AUTOMOUNT command list entries Example 3 Delete an entry from the list of allowable tape automount directories 0000097C automount del D MVS Tape_2 0000097C HHCPN214I Ok Figure 21 AUTOMOUNT command delete entry Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 185 7 11 AUTO GC MOUNT Automatic SCSI tape mounts 7 11 1 Function The AUTO_SCSI_MOUNT command displays or modifies the automatic SCSI tape mount option When entered without any operands it displays the current value and any pending tape mount requests Entering a value between 1 and 99 enables the option and specifies how often in seconds to query SCSI tape drives to automatically detect when a tape has been mounted When a tape is mounted an unsolicited device attention interrupt will be presented to the guest operating system Notes Enabling this option may negatively impact Hercules performance depending on how the host operating system Windows Linux etc processes SC
176. CAPACITY No TAPE_DRIVE_TAPE_REMAINING No TAPE_DRIVE_VARIABLE_BLOCK Yes TAPE_DRIVE_WRITE_PROTECT Yes Figure 228 FTAPE utility output display status Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 445 8 26 HercPrt Remote Hercules Printer Spooler 8 26 1 Function HercPrt is a remote Hercules printer spooler written by Fish David B Trout the author of the widely used HercGUI CTCI WIN AWSBrowse and FTAPE packages HercPrt is designed to receive text output from a Hercules socket device Sockdev line printer and use it to create a disk file on the local Windows system Because HercPrt uses standard TCP IP sockets to communicate with a Hercules line printer the actual Hercules system whose line printer output HercPrt is spooling can be physically located at any place reachable via standard IP networking HercPrt supports creation of either plain text files HTML files Rich Text Format files RTF or Portable Document Files PDF according to the options provided in a Job Separator Control File Several sample job separator control files are provided with the HercPrt package The job separator control file tells HercPrt what the Hercules guest operating systems job separator pages look like so that it can automatically create separate Windows files for each print job each optionally named according to a choice of job accounting field values extracted directly from the job separator page itself HercPrt wi
177. CPU0000 CPU0000 GR00 00000000 GR04 02502400 GR08 0248EF58 GR12 813799C8 GR01 00000000 GRO5 00000C00 GRO 9 00000000 GR13 0252DF80 GRO2 0252E12C GRO 6 01379E76 GR10 0252EF7F GR14 81379D22 GR03 02501EB0 GR07 00000000 GR11 0252DF80 GR15 00000C00 Figure 45 CPU command Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 209 7 24 CR Display or alter control registers 7 24 1 Function The CR command displays or alters the actual contents of the control registers 7 24 2 Syntax Descriptive CR LAn XxxxXxXxxx NN XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Diagram gt gt CR lt NN XXXXXXXX NNEXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 7 24 3 Parameter nn This specifies the optional register number 00 15 to be altered XXXXXXXX This is the register value in hexadecimal 1 8 hex digits for 32 bit registers 1 16 hex digits for 64 bit registers 7 24 4 Examples Example 1 Display the control registers 14 22 33 559 00000FC4 cr 14 22 33 559 00000FC4 CPU0000 CROO 5FB1EE40 CRO1 3FFFEO7F CRO2 3F149FCO CRO3 00000001 14 22 33 559 00000FC4 CPU0000 CRO4 00010001 CRO5 3FFE7040 CRO6 FE000000 CRO7 3FFFEO7F 14 22 33 559 00000FC4 CPU0000 CRO8 00000000 CRO9 00000000 CR10 00000000 CR11 00000000 14 22 33 559 00000FC4 CPU0000 CR12 01984E80 CRI3 3FFFEO7F CRI4 FF8BF15F CR15 03150010 Figure 46 CR command display control registers Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 210 Example 2 Alter cont
178. D DASD loader program 8 13 1 Function The Hercules DASD loader program is used to create new DASD file images and load them with data from unloaded PDS files e g a list of TSO XMIT files or a sequential file 8 13 2 Syntax Descriptive DASDLOAD option option ct file outfile msglevel Diagram PE ee EE option gt outfile msgleve H 8 13 3 Parameter Options Z Build compressed DASD image file using zlib bz2 Build compressed DASD image file using bzip2 0 Build compressed DASD image file with no compression 0 zero Ifs Build a large DASD image file can exceed 2 Gb in size a Build DASD image file that includes alternate cylinders Arguments ctlfile This is the name of the control file that specifies the datasets to be loaded onto the newly created volume outfile The name of the DASD image file to be created msglevel Msglevel can be a number from 0 to 5 it controls the detail level of messages issued during the load Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 405 8 13 4 Control File The control file required by the DASDLOAD program is an ASCII text file consisting of a volume statement followed by one dataset statement for each dataset to be created 8 13 4 1 Volume Statement Descriptive volser devtype model cy s ip text Diagram volser devtype eee if ENEE model lt cyls e ipltext where v
179. DASD image file from which the members will be unloaded ASCII If the optional keyword ASCII is specified the members will be unloaded as ASCII variable length text files Otherwise the members are unloaded as fixed length EBCDIC binary files 8 15 4 Examples Example 1 Unload the dataset SYS1 PARMLIB on DASD image file MVSRES CCKD in ASCII format DASDPDSU D MVS DASD MVSRES CCKD SYS1 PARMLIB ASCII Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 416 8 15 5 Sample Utility Output Sample 1 Unload the dataset SYS1 PARMLIB on DASD image file MVSRES CCKD in ASCII format D Hercules gt dasdpdsu D MVS DASD MVSRES CCKD SYS1 PARMLIB ASCII ember ember ember ember ember ember ember ember ember ember ember ember ember ember ember ember ember ember ember ember ember End of c Copyrigh COMMND 00 GTFP TEAABDOO IEAAPFO00 IEAB IEAD IEAD ITEAL IEAL LDOO POO ROO PSOO OD00 IEAOPTOO IEAP IEAS IPCS IRB JES2 LNKL MVI RPF SMFP TSO VATL directory AKOO YSO00 PROO F100 PARM STOO EY00 EY00 RMOO EYOO STOO TE RK TT TT LT TE TT KEE TT TT Ge TT EF TT TI EE tT TL EF TE R 001A27 ARM TTR 001A33 R 001A35 R 001A29 R 001B0C R 001A31 Reading directory block at R 001A2F R 000112 R 000712 R 000126 R 00062E R 002D2E R 00041B R 001B1E R 003C07 Reading directory block at R
180. Descriptive PSW operand value operand value where operand is one of the following SM xx PK 77 CMWP x AS PRI SEC HOME CC n PM x TA XXXXXXXX AM 24 31 64 Diagram PSW lt Es operand va lue er where operand is one of the following Myx _____ e Pkn a a E a Mx nmmr Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 292 AS PRI Ef HOME cean L EE 1 Les Ek a AM 24 SS 64 7 74 3 Parameter SM xx Modifies the PSW system mask xx is 2 hexadecimal digits PK nn Modifies the PSW protection key nn is decimal 0 to 15 CMWP x Modifies the EC M W P bits of the PSW x is 1 headecimal digit AS pri sec home This modifies the PSW address space control bits CC n Modifies the PSW condition code n is decimal 0 to 3 PM x Modifies the PSW program mask x is one hexadecimal digit IA XXXXXXXX Modifies the PSW instruction address xxxxxxxx is one to 16 hexa decimal digits AMZ 24 31 64 Modifies the addressing mode bits of the PSW 7 74 4 Examples Example 1 Display the Program Status Word 2007 12 07 07 04 31 609 00000DBC psw 2007 12 07 07 04 31 609 00000DBC psw sm 04 pk 0 cmwp C as ar cc 2 pm 0 am 31 ia 15E43D8 2007 12 07 07 04 31 609 00000DBC PSW 040C6000 815E43EA Figure 122 PSW command display PSW Example 2 Change the PSW condition code to zero 2007 12 07 07 05 09 685 00000DBC psw cc
181. Descriptive TAPECOPY tapedrive Lawsfi e or TAPECOPY awsfi e tapedrive Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 431 Diagram p gt gt TAPECOPY lt tapedrive aws file or p gt gt TAPECOPY lt aws file tapedrive 8 21 3 Parameter tapedrive Specifies the device filename of the SCSI tape drive Must begin with dev to be recognized awsfile Specifies the filename of the AWSTAPE disk file The first filename is the input the second one is the output 8 21 4 Examples Example 1 Copy a SCSI file to an AWSTAPE disk file TAPECOPY dev nst0 scsifile bin D MVS TAPE T3832AA AWS 8 21 5 Sample Utility Output Sample 1 Copying an AWSTAPE disk file to a SCSI drive this sample abends because the SCSI drive does not exist D HERCULES gt tapecopy D T38321A AWS dev nts0 scsifile bin Hercules tape copy program Version 3 05 c Copyright 1999 2005 by Roger Bowler Jan Jaeger and others HHCTCOO1LE Error opening dev nts0 scsifile bin errno 22 Invalid argument HHCTCOOOI Abnormal termination Figure 225 TAPECOPY utility output Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 432 8 22 TAPEMAP Show information about an AWS tape file 8 22 1 Function The TAPEMAP program shows information about an AWS tape It displays all header data contained on the tape Please note that the utility does not display the actual contents of the files Althou
182. E ENABLE ECHO NOECHO Diagram gt gt DIAG8CMD DISABLE lt pa ENABLE ECHO NOECHO 4 17 3 Parameter DISABLE Commands issued through the Diagnose 8 interface will generate a Specification Exception program interrupt on the issuing CPU This is the default ENABLED Commands issued through the Diagnose 8 interface will be executed by Hercules as Hercules commands ECHO When ECHO is specified a message is issued as the console is about to issue the command the command is redisplayed as if it was entered through the console input line and a final message is issued to indicate the command completed NOECHO When NOECHO is specified no such messages are displayed and the command com pletes silently except for the output of the command itself if the Diagnose 8 interface did not request a response buffer This is the default The value of ECHO or NOECHO has no effect on command output being placed into a response buffer if the Diagnose 8 interface requested one Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 56 4 17 4 Examples Example 1 Specify that commands issued through the Diagnose 8 interface are executed as Hercules commands Additionally issue a message as the console is about to execute the commnd redisplay the command itself and give a final message indicating the command has completed DIAG8CMD ENABLE ECHO Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 57 4 18 ECPSVM ECP
183. E 0 c Gaen GCSTART et 8 a ee Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 39 4 6 3 Parameter option Set a CCKD option Multiple options may be specified separated by commas with no intervening blanks The CCKD options are COMP n Specifies the compression type to be used This overrides the compression used for all CCKD files The default 1 means don t override the compression Valid compression types are 1 Default 0 None 1 zlib 2 bzip2 COMPPARMEen Overrides the compression parameter A higher value generally means more compres RA n RAQ n RAT n WR n GCINT n GCPARM n sion at the expense of CPU and or storage The default 1 means don t override the compression parameter The value of n can be from 1 and 9 Sets the Number of read ahead threads When sequential track or block group access is detected some number RAT n of tracks or block groups are queued RAQ n to be read by one of the read ahead threads The default is 2 the value of ncan be a number from 1 to 9 Sets the size of the read ahead queue When sequential track or block group access is detected some number RAT n of tracks or block groups are queued in the read ahead queue The default is 4 the value of n can be a number from 0 to 16 A value of zero disables read ahead Sets the number of tracks or block groups to read ahead when sequential track or block group access is detected The default is
184. EQ EOC WRI Figure 91 IPL command Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 257 7 51 IPLC IPL clear from device xxxx 7 51 1 Function This console command performs the Initial Program Load IPL clear manual function from the given de vice The IPL command may also be used to perform a load from CD ROM or server For example if a standard SUSE S 390 Linux distribution CD is loaded and mounted on cdrom this CD ROM may then be IPL ed using IPL cdrom suse ins If the first operand is a device name devnum is a 1 to 4 digit hexadecimal number a CCW type IPL is initiated from the indicated device number and SCLP disk I O is disabled If the first operand is a filename a list directed IPL is performed from the specified ins file and SCLP disk I O is enabled for the directory path where the ins file is located An optional PARM keyword followed by a string can also be passed to the IPL command processor The string will be loaded into the low order 32 bits of the general purpose registers 4 characters per register for up to 64 bytes The PARM option behaves similarly to the VM IPL command 7 51 2 Syntax Descriptive IPLC devnum filename PARM string Diagram kk IPLC devnum or Vike te Gece SNE filename PARM string 7 51 3 Parameter devnum The device address from which the emulator will IPL the system filename The name of a ins file to be loaded PARM Optional PARM k
185. F command display CPU status Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 200 Example 2 Configure CPU 1 offline 2007 06 30 14 2007 06 30 14 12 47 531 00000FC4 cpu 1 12 49 859 00000FC4 cf off 2007 06 30 14 12 49 859 00000FC4 HHCCPOO8I CPU0001 thread ended tid 00000D28 pid 2972 2007 06 30 14 12 49 859 00000FC4 HHCPN153I CPU0001 offline Figure 35 CF command configure CPU offline Example 3 Configure CPU 1 online 14 12 50 531 OO000FC4 cpu 1 14 12 52 906 00000FC4 cf on 14 12 52 906 00000FC4 HHCCP002I CPU0001 thread started tid 000009D8 pid 2972 priority 0 14 12 52 906 OO0000FC4 HHCCP003I CPU0001 architecture mode ESA 390 14 12 52 906 00000FC4 HHCPN152I CPU0001 online Figure 36 CF command configure CPU online Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 201 7 19 CFALL Configure all CPUs online or offline 7 19 1 Function The CFALL command is used to place all CPUs online or offline If the CFALL command is issued without a parameter the actual status of all CPUs is displayed 7 19 2 Syntax Descriptive CFALL ON OFF Diagram gt gt CFALL lt ON OFF 7 19 3 Parameter ON Place all CPUs online OFF Place all CPUs offline 7 19 4 Examples Example 1 Display the current status of all CPUs 2007 06 30 14 24 25 875 00000FC4 cfall 2007 06 30 14 24 25 875 00000FC4 HHCPN154I CPU0000 online 2007 06 30 14 24 25 8
186. File 533 can be used freely The CBT MVS Utilities Tape CBTTAPE can be found at www cbttape org File 533 of the CBT tape contains the following programs VTT2DISK VTT2TAPE VTT2CNVU VTT2FK2T VTT2T2FK 8 31 1 Function The VTT2TAPE program converts AWS format tape files to real tapes while the VTT2DISK program creates an AWS format virtual tape file from a real tape The VIT2CNVU program converts a VB format AWS format tape such as the one produced by the AWSUTIL program to FB 80 format on MVS so that VTT2TAPE can be used subsequently to convert the data to a real tape The VTT2T2FK program is similar to VTT2DISK except that a real tape is converted to a FAKETAPE tm format tape see below VTT2FK2T is similar to VTT2TAPE except that a FAKETAPE tape image folded over on MVS into FB 80 format is converted into a real tape Unless otherwise mentioned AWS format virtual tape files on an MVS system have been folded over into fixed blocked 80 byte record format AWS format files on other systems are just long strings of data The FAKETAPE file format is a published interface of Fundamental Software Inc Fundamental Software reserves the right to change the format at any time FAKETAPE and FLEX ES are registered trademarks of Fundamental Software Inc The AWS Tape format is produced by IBM s P 390 and Hercules systems to create disk files which an MVS system reads and writes as if they were actual tapes Another name for these disk files
187. HCEVOOLI Total 0 O 100 2007 06 30 17 16 05 656 00000FC4 HHCEVOO3I te Pleas eSeSaS parnm 2007 06 30 17 16 05 656 O0000FC4 HHCEVOO5I 11 Entries not shown never invoked 2007 06 30 17 16 05 656 00000FC4 HHCEVOO3I Ketter Eege K eteegerereeeg 2007 06 30 17 16 05 656 00000FC4 HHCEVOO02I CP ASSIST Calls Hits Ratio 2007 06 30 17 16 05 656 00000FC4 HHCEVOO3I Sa a a ce aR RRT Presa aren trsa 2007 06 30 17 16 05 656 00000FC4 HHCEV001I Total 0 O 100 2007 06 30 17 16 05 656 00000FC4 HHCEV003I eae Hevea at E 2007 06 30 17 16 05 656 O0000FC4 HHCEVOO5I 23 Entries not shown never invoked 2007 06 30 17 16 05 656 00000FC4 HHCEVO11I ECPS VM Command processor complete Figure 63 ECPSVM STATS command Example 2 Enable the ECPS VM features 2007 06 30 17 16 55 468 O0000FC4 ecpsvm 2007 06 30 17 16 55 468 00000FC4 HHCEVO 2007 06 30 17 16 55 468 00000FC4 HHCEVO1 2007 06 30 17 16 55 468 00000FC4 HHCEVO 2007 06 30 17 16 55 468 00000FC4 HHCEVO1 2007 06 30 17 16 55 468 00000FC4 HHCEVO1 2007 06 30 17 16 55 468 00000FC4 HHCEVO1 2007 06 30 17 16 55 468 00000FC4 HHCEVO 2007 06 30 17 16 55 468 00000FC4 HHCEVO 2007 06 30 17 16 55 468 00000FC4 HHCEVO1 enable TI SI SE 5T 5I GE St SI 5I EC EC EC EC EC EC EC EC EC PS PS PS PS PS PS PS Ss PS a a a a a a a a sg Command processor ASSIST
188. HHH HHH S7370 ESA 396 and z Architecture HHH HHH Emulator HHH HHH HHH HHH RRR CCC U HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH R RC U HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH RRR C U EEE SS HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH RR C U E S HHH HHH R R CCC UU LLL EEEE 555 HHH HHH HHH HHH HHH HHH I can t believe it s not a MAINFRAME U EEEE SSS U E S U U Copyright c 1999 2616 Roger Bowler Jan Jaeger and others 6 8 19 66 18 16 178 11 32 192 168 686 161 2 Figure 242 Logo Screen Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 485 11 Starting the Hercules Emulator 11 1 Starting Hercules in Native Mode Hercules can be manually started from a Windows Command Prompt or can be started by calling a batch file the preferred way In both cases the syntax is the same 11 1 1 Syntax Descriptive HERCULES f configfile d b Jogofile p dyndir 1 dynmod gt ogfi Je Diagram gt gt HERCULES f configfile d E b ogofile _J L p iep lt poo gt Jogfile SS 1 dynmod 11 1 2 Parameter f configfile This is the name of the configuration file If the filename is not specified the default is HERCULES CNF The name of the default configuration file may be overriden via the HERCULES CNET environment variable d Specifies that Hercules is to be run in daemon mode wherein it runs invisibly with no attached console b logofile Specifies the name of a customized logo text file in the current Hercules directory for deta
189. Hercules System 370 ESA 390 z Architecture Emulator Hercules User Reference Guide Version 3 Release 11 Hercules System 370 ESA 390 z Architecture Emulator Hercules User Reference Guide Version 3 Release 11 Second Edition November 13 2015 HEURO31100 01 Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 2 Contents nft hares eatin ie hae eri eegen he eee Deeg he deed eet ies 3 FONTES Renee eer Renee reer cee eege ere ener errr cree Serer reer cree re reece ery eee eege 10 Tables scte eset Bene eseu adhe e Wa toe ee eet ee ee ee Lesen Meee 16 UE Ee EE 17 1 1 Eqition IMTOrMatiOn asao a E isin ett e ten thine AET 17 LSZ What this DOOK iS abouts ee ee ee a ee een 17 13 Who should read this DOOK 00 0 cccceecccceeeeecceeeeee cece eeeeceeeeeeeaeeesaeeaeeeeaaeaaeesaaaaeeeesaaaeeseeeaeeneneeaeenees 17 1 4 What you need to know to understand this book 17 tS HOW touse tis DOOK saana AN A E E EE A e ee eeh 17 L Revision NOTICE sii sis a ehgea ces Sieteeea podecvac cbs ug stapiieag de T A 17 GEN ie Ee eine ET 18 ENEE RA le 18 EC Re in ELE 18 1 10 Acknowledgement nacre ienaa a esis Mitbd evened hindi nde 19 2 Related EObleef tEAeetteoee t etssa antes Gegend tarred deep Bregen D geed EE E Eden Di geed See 20 2 1 Hercules Emulator General Information c ccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee eeeeaeeeeaeeeeeeeeseaeeesaeseeaeeeeeeees 20 2 2 Hercules Emulator Installation Guide 20 2 3 Hercu
190. I 3339 cylinders successfully written to file D MVS DASD TST001 A80 56832 bytes track SSS SHS ass SYS2 SEQ DATA SEQ D MVS DASD SEQ BIN TRK 5 5 0 PS FB 80 3120 HHCDLO58I Format 1 DSCB CCHHR 0000000603 TTR 000003 SYS2 SEQ DATA Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 411 0050 0060 0070 0080 0090 C5E24040 90000C30 O02DCDE00 00000000 00000000 40404000 00500000 00010000 00000000 00000000 HHCDLO59I Format 0 DSCB HHCDLO59I Format 0 DSCB 00000000 00004000 ES OOA08000 00050000 0 amp 00000100 00000500 ee eee 00000000 00000000 eee eee eee CCHHR 0000000604 TTR 000004 CCHHR 0000000605 TTR 000005 several lines not displayed HHCDLO59I1 HHCDLO59I1 HHCDLO141 HHCDLO161 HHCDLO171 Format 0 DSCB CCHHR 0000000631 TTR 000031 Format 0 DSCB CCHHR 0000000632 TTR 000032 Free space starts at cyl 0 head 7 Total of 3339 cylinders written to D MVS DASD TSTO01 A80 Updating VTOC pointer 0000000601 Figure 214 DASDLOAD utility output SEQ method message level 5 Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 412 8 14 DASDLS List datasets on a volume 8 14 1 Function The DASDLS utility is used to list all datasets on the specified DASD image file 8 14 2 Syntax Descriptive DASDLS option option Diagram filename SF shadowfi e es al option SF shadowfi e 8 14 3 Parameter Options
191. J_TSO SES EXIT Figure 244 Batch file to start tn3270 sessions The CHOICE command used in the batch file is to issue a delay before trying to connect the next tn3270 session The t parameter specifies the number of seconds to pause before a default choice is made Option d specifies the default choice that is issued after the timeout has expired The character given as argument must be in the set of choices specified by the c option defaults are Y and N Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 494 13 The Hercules Automatic Operator HAO Facility 13 1 HAO Introduction The Hercules Automatic Operator HAO feature is a facility which can automatically issue panel com mands in response to specific messages appearing on the Hercules console To use the Hercules Automatic Operator facility you first define a rule consisting of a target and the associated command The target is a regular expression pattern used to match against the text of the various messages that Hercules issues as it runs Whenever a match is found the rule fires and ist associated command is automatically issued The Hercules Automatic Operator facility only operates on messages issued to the Hercules console These messages may originate from Hercules itself or from the guest operating system via the SCP SYSCONS interface or via the integrated console printer keyboard 3215 C or 1052 C HAO can
192. L PP AA AA JE YY RR RR OO oo LL LL PP AA AA YY YY RR RR 00 oo LL LL PP AA AA ZE YE RR RR 00 oo LL LL PPPPPPPPPPPP AAAAAAAAAAAA YYYY RRRRRRRRRRRR OO oo LL LL PPPPPPPPPPP AAAAAAAAAAAA TE RRRRRRRRRRR OO oo LL LL PP AA AA YY RR RR OO oo LL LL PP AA BA Kai RR RR o0 oo LL LL PP AA AA ZE RR RR OO oo LL LL PP AA AA TE RR RR O00000000000 LLLLLLLLLLLL LLLLLLLLLLLL PP AA AA SE RR RR 000000000000 LELLLLLLLLLLE LLLLLLLLLLLL JgJJJJJJJJJ O00000000000 BBBBBBBBBBB 00000000 555555555555 8888888888 6666666666 00000000 JJJJJJJJJJ O00000000000 BBBBBBBBBBBB 0000000000 555555555555 888888888888 666666666666 000000000 JJ 00 oOo BB BB 00 0000 55 88 88 66 66 00 00 JJ 00 oo BB BB 00 00 00 55 88 88 66 oo 00 JJ 00 00 oo 55 88 88 66 oo 00 d 00 o0 00 555555555 88888888 66666666666 oo oo ao o0 o0 oo 5555555555 88888888 666666666666 00 00 JJ 00 o0 oo 55 88 88 66 66 00 00 JJ JJ 00 o0 oo 55 88 88 66 66 0000 JJ JJ 00 oO BB BB 000 oo 55 88 88 66 66 000 JJJJJJJJ 000000000000 BBEBBBEBEBBBBEB 0000000000 555555555555 888888888888 666666666666 000000000 JJJJJT 000000000000 BEBBBBBBBBBB 00000000 55555555555 8888888888 6666666666 00000000 0 00 oo o0 oo oo o0 o0 oo D Figure 232 HercPrt Report Sample Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 462 8 27 PRTPUB Mainframe print publishing program The mainframe print publishing program is written by Dan Nelson and can be obtained in the file section of the Hercules 390 discussion group http groups yah
193. LD UNIT 3490 VOL SER xXXXXX LABEL 1 BLP EXPDT 98000 SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT SYSFILES DD SYSOUT SYSTRACE DD SYSOUT SYSMOVED DD SYSOUT SYSUDUMP DD SYSOUT Figure 239 VTT2TAPE utility JCL Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 476 Example 3 Convert an AWSUTIL file VB to standard AWS format FB J RRR KR KKK KK KK KK I k kkk k kkk k kkk k kkk A k k k k k k A I k k k k k k k k k k k VTT2CNV Jk U CONV KKKKKKKKK AWSCNVT STEPLIB AWSVBIN AWSFBOUT SYSPRINT SYSFILES SYSTRACI SYSMOVED SYSUDUMP F a EX DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD EC x PG py VTT2CNVU RT AWSUTIL FILE KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK VB TO STANDARD AWS FORMAT FB DSN your loadlib DISP SHR DSN your vbaws file DISP SHR DSN your fbaws file DISP NEW CATLG DCB RECFM FB LRECL 80 BLKSIZE 27920 SPACE CYL 300 50 RLSE SYSOUT SYSOUT SYSOUT SYSOUT SYSOUT Figure 240 VTT2CNVU utility JCL Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 477 9 Shared Device Support 9 1 Basics Shared Device Support see also General Information manual allows multiple Hercules instances to share devices The device will be local to one Hercules instance and remote to all other Hercules instan ces Th
194. MP 3 D MVS DASD MVSRES CCKD 8 3 5 Sample Utility Output Sample 1 Compress a CCKD DASD file and perform integrity checking and repair D HERCULES gt cckdcomp 3 D MVS DASD MVSRES CCKD cckdcomp completed moves 33665 moved 301552856 freed 407400 Figure 202 CCKDCOMP utility output Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 385 8 4 CCKDDIAG CCKD DASD file diagnostics utility 8 4 1 Function The CCKDDIAG utility is the diagnostic program which allows you to examine various aspects of a CCKD DASD image file 8 4 2 Syntax Descriptive CCKDDIAG option option filename Diagram gt gt CCKDDIAG Ten filename El option 8 4 3 Parameter Options V Display version information and exit d Display DEVHDR C Display CDEVHDR 1 Display L1TAB numeric one g Enable debug output CKD track related options a cc hh Display absolute CCHH data r tt Display relative TT data 2 Display L2TAB related to a or r t Display track data X Hex display track key data Offset option o oo II Hex display data at offset oo of length II Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 386 Arguments filename 8 4 4 Examples Example 1 Display the DEVHDR and CDEVHDR for a CCKD DASD image file CCKDDIAG d c D MVS DASD MVSRI Example 2 Display the L1TAB and enable debug output for a CCKD DASD image file CCKDDIAG 1 g D
195. MUS DASD CBT 4 1 MUS DAS D CBT G82 MUS DASD CBT G3 MUS DASD S POOLG MUS DASD S POOL MUS DASD TST666 MUS DASD TST 1 MUS DASD TST 2 MUS DASD TST 3 MIPS SIO s D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D 634B D 6486 3426 Figure 4 Hercules device and status panel 6 2 Web browser interface It is not necessary to work directly on the PC where Hercules is running to enter the console commands Instead of using the hardware management console on the Hercules server itself it is possible to work from a browser interface in a web browser The requirement to be able to work with the web browser interface is a running Hercules HTTP server The HTTP server is started through the HTTPPORT and HTTPROOT configuration statements For details on configuring the HTTP server please see section System Parameter Descriptions Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 155 Once the HTTP server is started the interface can be used from a web browser on any machine that has a network connection to the Hercules server With this interface you can operate Hercules nearly in the same way as you would do locally on the hardware management console The following picture shows the main panel of the web browser interface e Hercules Windows Internet Explore seni cse Dese EE Em iy Favorites E Hercules fh Bly amp e Pag
196. N154I CPU0005 online Figure 39 CFALL command configure all CPUs online Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 203 7 20 CLOCKS Display TOD clock and CPU timer 7 20 1 Function The CLOCKS command is used to display the actual values of the emulators various internal clocks and timers 7 20 2 Syntax Descriptive CLOCKS Diagram gt gt CLOCKS AS Rd 7 20 3 Parameter None 7 20 4 Examples Example 1 Display the TOD clock and CPU timer 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 14 14 14 14 14 14 Re ree 22 S22 22 x22 22s Ee Ge 22 222 222 T37 137 137 137 137 137 00000FC4 clocks 00000FC4 HHCPNO28I 00000FC4 00000FC4 00000FC4 00000FC4 tod h w off cke cpt BE23401EA237A000 BE23401EA237A000 0000000000000000 BE23401EA77DD000 O00000000000ED000 2005 364 13 22 22 115706 2005 364 13 22 22 115706 2005 364 13 22 22 137309 Figure 40 CLOCKS command Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 204 7 21 CMDTGT Specify the command target 7 21 1 Function The CMDTGT command specifies the target environment for all following commands entered on the com mand line of the Hercules hardware console 7 21 2 Syntax Descriptive CMDTGT HERC SCP PSCP Diagram p gt gt CMDTGT HERC lt SCP PSCP 7 21 3 Parameter HERC
197. OO4I Device OOOF bound to socket 192 168 0 101 14032 HHCSDO20I Socketdevice listener thread started tid 00000F98 pid 3900 HHCTE001I Console connection thread started tid 00000FB8 pid 3900 Devices Version Info Documentation Internet Protected Mode On Figure 5 Hercules web browser interface 6 3 Using the keyboard The usage of the keyboard in the Hercules hardware management console is distinguished between normal cursor handling and extended cursor handling Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 156 6 3 1 Normal cursor handling The normal cursor handling is available on all platforms Windows and Unix Normal cursor handling Key Erases the contents of the command input area If the command input area is Esc f already empty switches to semi graphical New Panel Del Deletes the character at the cursor position Backspace Erases the previous character Insert Toggles between insert mode and overlay mode Attempts to complete the partial file name at the cursor position in the Tab command input area If more than one possible file exists a list of matching file names is displayed Moves the cursor to the start of the input in the command input area If the Home e command input area is empty scrolls the message area to the top Moves the cursor to the start of the input in the command input area If the End command input area is e
198. OOO OO OO OO VO 263 263 1263 263 263 263 EES 263 263 00000E1 00000E1 00000E1 00000E1 00000E1 00000E1 00000E1 00000E1 00000E1 oO fpr C E Q E ES E E PU0000 PU0000 PU0000 PU0000 PU0000 PU0000 PU0000 PU0000 FPRO 00000000 FPR1 00000000 FPR4 00000000 FPR5 00000000 FPR8 00000000 FPR9 00000000 FP12 00000000 FP13 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 FPR2 00000000 FPR3 00000000 FPR6 00000000 FPR7 00000000 FP10 00000000 FP11 00000000 FP14 00000000 FP15 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 Figure 72 FPR command extended format Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 238 7 40 G Turn off instruction stepping and start CPU 7 40 1 Function The G command turns off the instruction stepping and starts the CPU This command has also to be used to continue normal processing after stopping the instruction stepping with the S command 7 40 2 Syntax Descriptive Diagram kb D o Fd 7 40 3 Parameter None 7 40 4 Examples Example 1 Stop the instruction stepping and start the CPU SC S523 T52 5 23 E SZ SE EH SE GE GER Sr SZ SE 59 39 59 59a 59 SES I9 59 59 59 DR 59 SES 59 375 373 375 315 375 375 37 5 3 75 379 375 375 375 390 390
199. PN123I CPU0004 offline 14 24 05 341 00000FC4 HHCPN123I CPU0005 offline 14 24 05 341 00000FC4 HHCPN123I CPU0006 offline 4 24 05 341 00000FC4 HHCPN123I CPU0007 offline 4 24 05 341 00000FC4 Config mask 00000003 started mask 00000003 waiting mask 00000003 14 24 05 341 00000FC4 Broadcast count 0 code 4 14 24 05 341 00000FC4 Signaling facility not busy 14 24 05 341 00000FC4 TOD lock not held 14 24 05 341 00000FC4 Main lock not held 14 24 05 341 00000FC4 Int lock not held 14 24 05 341 00000FC4 DEVOAEO suspended 14 24 05 341 00000FC4 DEVOE21 busy local 14 24 05 341 00000FC4 I O interrupt queue NULL Figure 90 IPENDING command Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 255 7 50 IPL IPL normal from device xxxx 7 50 1 Function This console command performs the Initial Program Load IPL manual function from the given device The IPL command may also be used to perform a load from CD ROM or server For example if a stan dard SUSE S 390 Linux distribution CD is loaded and mounted on cdrom this CD ROM may then be IPL ed using IPL cdrom suse ins If the first operand is a device name devnum is a 1 to 4 digit hexadecimal number a CCW type IPL is initiated from the indicated device number and SCLP disk I O is disabled If the first operand is a filename a list directed IPL is performed from the specified ins file and SCLP disk I O is enabled for the directory path where the ins file is located
200. PUT SYS1 LPALIB SYS1 LINKLIB SYS1 SVCLIB SYS1 NUCLEUS SYS1 DCMLIB SYS1 INDMAC SYS1 CMDLIB SYS1 HELP SYS1 SAMPLIB SYS1 MACLIB SYS1 PROCLIB SYS1 TELCMLIB SYS1 UADS SYS1 VTAMLIB SYS1 IMAGELIB SYS1 PARMLIB SYS1 BRODCAST SYS1 MANX SYS1 MANY SYS1 TCOMMAC SYS1 DUMP00 SYS1 LOGREC SYS1 VTAMSRC SYS1 VTAMOBJ SYS1 VTAMLST SYS1 UMODMAC SYS1 UMODSRC SYS1 UMODOBJ SYS1 UMODLIB SYS1 SMPCRQ SYS1 SMPSCDS SYS1 COBLIB SYS1 FORTLIB SYS1 PL1LIB SYS1 SORTLIB Created 1983Apr28 1983Apr28 1 1983Apr28 1 1983Apr28 1 1983Apr28 1 1983Apr28 1 1983Apr28 1 1983Apr28 1 1983Apr28 1 1983Apr28 1 1983Apr28 1 1983Apr28 1 1983Apr28 1 1983Apr28 1983Apr28 1 1983Apr28 1 1983Apr28 1 1983Apr28 1983Apr28 1 1983Apr28 1 1983Apr28 1 1983Apr28 1 1983Apr28 1983Apr29 1 1983Apr29 1983Apr29 1983Apr29 1 1983Apr29 1 1983Apr29 1983Apr29 1 1983Apr29 1983Apr29 1983Apr29 1 1983Apr29 1983Apr29 1983Apr29 Exp Date Jan Jaeger ORG RECFM LRECL PS FB 80 PO U PO U PO U PO U 19069 PO U PO FB 80 PO U PO FB 80 PO H 80 PO FB 80 PO EB 80 PO U PO FB 80 PO U BG D PO F 80 DA PS VBS 4096 PS VBS 4096 PO FB 80 U PS U 40 PO FB 80 PO E 3152 PO FB 80 PO FB 80 PQ FB 80 PO ER 80 PO U PO FB 80 PO FB 80 PO U PO U PO U PO U and others BLKSZ 19040 19069 19069 19069 19069 19069 19040 19069 19040 80 19040 19040 19069 800 19069 1024 80
201. Printer Keyboard Devices 5 3 1 Function These device statements are used to define Console Printer Keyboard devices to Hercules To use the Console Printer Keyboard device a telnet client must connect to the host machine via the port number specified on the CNSLPORT statement in that configuration file If the telnet client software allows it to specify a device type suffix e g ansi 0009 then the suffix can be used to specify the specific 1052 or 3215 device to which the client should connect If no suffix is used in the telnet client software or the software does not allow it then the client will be connected to the first available 1052 or 3215 device for which it is eligible 5 3 2 Syntax Descriptive devaddr devtype NOPROMPT groupname al ipaddr mask Diagram devaddr devtype EE EE NOPROMPT lt groupname ipaddr mask 5 3 3 Parameter devaddr This is the device address devtype This is the device type Valid terminal device types are 1052 and 3215 NOPROMPT The NOPROMPT argument may be specified to cause suppression of the ENTER INPUT FOR CONSOLE DEVICE nnnn prompt message which is otherwise normally issued to the device whenever the system is awaiting input from the device The NOPROMPT argument if specified must preceed the optional group name and any ipaddr mask arguments groupname If a terminal group name is given on the device statement then a device type suffix with
202. S VM support status VM 4 18 1 Function This parameter specifies whether ECPS VM Extended Control Program Support Virtual Machine support is to be enabled and if it is enabled to which level The purpose of ECPS VM is to provide to the VM 370 operating system a set of shortcut facilities to perform hypervisor functions CP Assists and virtual machine simulation VM Assists Although this feature does not affect VM operating system products operating in XA ESA or z Architec ture mode it will affect VM 370 and VM SP products running under VM XA VM ESA or z VM Running VM 370 and VM SP products under VM XA VM ESA or z VM should be done with ECPS VM disabled ECPS VM should not be enabled in AP or MP environments ECPS VM has no effect on non VM opera ting systems It is however recommended to disable ECPS VM when running native non VM operating systems If a specific level is given this value will be reported to the operating system when it issues a Store ECPS VM level but it does not otherwise alter the ECPS VM facility operations Please note that this is a partial implementation 4 18 2 Syntax Descriptive ECPSVM NO YES LEVEL mn Diagram p gt gt ECPSVM NO lt LEVEL nn 4 18 3 Parameter NO ECPS VM support is disabled This is the default YES ECPS VM support is enabled The support level that is reported to the operating system is set to 20 LEVEL nn ECPS VM support is enabled The value n
203. S running under this instance of Hercules rport Specifies the remote TCP port The rport parameter on this system must match the Iport parameter on the remote system and vice versa bufsize Specifies the buffer size for the link If this link is used for IP traffic this parameter should be more than the MTU of the interface definition in the OS TCPIP stack 5 9 3 4 Examples Example 1 Define 3088 CTC adapters on device addresses 0400 and 0401 The device protocol type is CTCT Channel to Channel emulation via TCP connection The local TCP ports on which Hercules will listen are 30880 and 30881 The IP address of the remote host is 192 168 100 2 the remote ports are also 30880 and 30881 The buffer size for the link is 2048 KB 0400 3088 CTCT 30880 192 168 100 2 30880 2048 0401 3088 CTCT 30881 192 168 100 2 30881 2048 5 9 4 CTCE Enhanced Channel to Channel emulation via TCP Connection 5 9 4 1 Function The CTCE device type will emulate a real 3088 Channel to Channel Adapter also for non IP traffic en hancing the CTCT capabilities CTCE connections are also based on TCP IP between two or more Hercules instances and require an even odd pair of port numbers per device side Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 138 Only the even port numbers are to be configured the odd numbers are just derived by adding 1 to the configured even port numbers The socket connection pairs cross connect the arrows are showi
204. SCIIPTIONS 2 00 02 eee eee enee eee eetee ee eee ae ee ee tana ee ee eaaeeeeetaaeeeeesaaeeeeenaaeeeeeeaeeeeneaeeeene 104 5 1 Local non SNA 3270 Devices gesiess wea nie ake Ae iad 104 5 2 Integrated 3270 SYSG Console siae etara a aaa ian aae aaa aaa a aaa araea lieia 107 Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 4 5 3 Console Printer Keyboard Devices cecccecceeeeneeteeeeeceaeeeeaaeeeeeeeceeeeecaaeeeeaaeseeeeseaeeeeaeeeeneeeeaees 110 5 4 Integrated Console Printer Keyboard Devices c ccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaeeseneeesaeeesaeeeeneeenaees 113 5 5 Gard Reader D VICES esn ema ENEE Edel 114 5 6 Gard Punch Devices 2 greeikseeeg e ee iadnn taaria andae EERE Ed Red 116 5 7 Line Printer DeViCe S ce ceeeceeeeeecceeeeeeeceee teen cece e a e ra 118 567 Emulated Tape Davi o S untsus cc deeg sheet ated bededeccewsdna E AK AN EE E dee gek 121 5 9 Channel to Channel Adapters ccccccceccceeeeeeeenceceeeeecaeeeeaaesneneeeaeeesaaeseeaeeseeeeeseaeeeeaaeseeneeesaes 135 5 10 FBA DASD MRT 144 5 11 GKD DASD DEVOE Sr a A a ai ee AE ee ee ad 146 5 12 Communication Lines Preliminary 2703 BSC Support cccccceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeseaeeeeeeesaees 150 E Hercules Console E E A A vag hoansish as conadadacd edu eege eebe ee eebe dee 153 6 1 Hercules Hardware Console ssssssssssssssssssirssitssrtssrtsstiestnesttestnnsttattnnttnnttnnttnnttnnntnnnenn nenun nn nenn 153 6 2 Web browser interfac
205. SCSI tape mounts synonym for SCSIMOUNT automount Show or update allowable tape automount directories b Set breakpoint synonym for B b Set breakpoint synonym for B b Delete breakpoint cache Cache command cckd CCKD command cd Change directory cf Configure CPU online or offline cfall Configure all CPU s online or offline clocks Display TOD clock and CPU timer cmdtgt Specify the command target conkpalv Display alter console TCP IP keep alive settings Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 161 CDU Define target CPU for console display and commands cr Display or alter control registers cscript Cancel a running script thread ctc Enable disable CTC debugging define Rename device defsym Define symbol detach Remove device devinit Reinitialize device devlist List device or all devices devtmax Display or set max device threads ds Display subchannel ecpsvm ECPS VM commands exit Synonym for quit ext Generate external interrupt f addr Mark frames usable unusable fpc Display floating point control registers fpr Display floating point register g Turn off instruction stepping and start CPU gpr Display or alter general purpose registers hao Hercules Automatic Operator HAO help List all commands command specific help herc Send Hercules command herclogo Read a new logo file hst Hist
206. SI attached tape drive status queries AUTO_SCSI_MOUNT is a synonym for the SCSIMOUNT command 7 11 2 Syntax Descriptive AUTO_SCSI_MOUNT NO YES 7 Diagram gt gt AUTO_SCSI_MOUNT lt die NO YES n 7 11 3 Parameter NO No indicates that the AUTO_SCSI_MOUNT option is disabled forcing all SCSI tape mounts to be done manually via an appropriate DEVINIT command YES Yes enables the option and causes periodic queries of the SCSI tape drive in a five second interval to automatically detect when a tape is mounted YES is equivalent with AUTO_SCSI_MOUNT 5 n A value from 1 to 99 seconds inclusive enables the option and causes periodic queries of the SCSI tape drive to automatically detect when a tape is mounted Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 186 7 11 4 Examples Example 1 Display the current AUTO_SCSI_MOUNT settings 2009 03 07 21 50 43 843 00000574 auto_scsi_mount 2009 03 07 21 50 43 843 00000574 Auto SCSI mount 0 seconds Figure 22 AUTO_SCSI_MOUNT command display settings Example 2 Set AUTO_SCSI_ MOUNT to 30 seconds 2009 03 07 21 50 52 062 00000574 auto_scsi_mount 30 2009 03 07 21 51 04 468 00000574 auto_scsi_mount 2009 03 07 21 51 04 468 00000574 Auto SCSI mount 30 seconds Figure 23 AUTO_SCSI_MOUNT command set value Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 187 7 12 B Set breakpoint 7 12 1 Function The B comma
207. TA TA TA TA TA TA TA TA TA TA TA TA TA TA TA TA TA TA TA TA TA TA TA TA TA TA TA PE_D RIVE_ABS_BLK_IMMED PE_D DE D DE D DE D DE D RIVE_ABSOLUTE_BLK RIVE_END_OF_DATA RIVE_FILEMARKS RIVE_LOAD_UNLOAD RIVE_LOAD_UNLD_TI PE_D PE_D RIVE_LOCK_UNLOCK RIVE_LOCK_UNLK_I PE MED MED RIVE_LOG_BLK_IMMED RIVE_LOGICAL_BLK RIVE_RELATIVE_BL RIVE_REVERSE_POS S ITION RIVE_REWIND_IMMEDIATE RIVE GEOUENTIAL RIVE_SEQUENTIAL_ RIVE_SET_BLOCK_S RIVE_SET_COMPRES RIVE_SET_ECC RIVE_SET_PADDING RIVE_SET_REPORT RIVE_SETMARKS RIVE_SPACE_IMMED RIVE_TENSIO FMKS SMKS IZE SION SMKS IATE RIVE_TENSION_IMMED RIVE_WRITE_FILEMARKS RIVE_WRITE_LONG_FMKS RIVE_WRITE_MARK IMMED RIVE_WRITE_SETMARKS RIVE_WRITE_SHORT FMKS RIVE_COMPRESSION RIVE_CLEAN_REQUE RIVE_ECC RIVE_EJECT_MEDIA STS RIVE_ERASE_BOP_ONLY RIVE_ERASE_LONG RIVE_ERASE_IMMED RIVE_ERASE_SHORT RIVE_FIXED RIVE_FIXED_BLOCK RIVE_INITIATOR RIVE_PADDING IATE RIVE_GET_ABSOLUTE_BLK RIVE_GET_LOGICAL BLK RIVE_REPORT_SMKS No No 32 768 bytes 65 536 bytes 1 bytes 2 partitions 0 bytes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 444 TAPE_DRIVE_SELECT No TAPE_DRIVE_SET_EOT_WZ_SIZE No TAPE_DRIVE_SET_CMP_BOP_ONLY No TAPE_DRIVE_TAPE_
208. TACH command Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 219 7 30 DEVINIT Reinitialize device 7 30 1 Function The DEVINIT command can be used to reopen an existing device The arguments if any override the arguments specified in the configuration file for this device If no arguments beneath the device number are given then the DEVINIT command will reinitialise the device with the same arguments that were pre viously specified The device type cannot be changed and must not be specified This command can be used to rewind a tape to mount a new tape or disk image file on an existing device to load a new card deck into a reader or to close and reopen a printer or punch device 7 30 2 Syntax Descriptive DEVINIT devnum argument argument Diagram EE a argument 7 30 3 Parameter devnum The device number of the device to be reinitialized argument Any arguments that are acceptable for the kind of device being reinitalized Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 220 7 30 4 Examples Example 1 Initialize a tape device OO0000FC4 devinit 0561 D MVS TAPE TST001 HET chunksize 65535 compress 1 method 1 level 4 00000FC4 HHCTA998I Device 0561 D MVS TAPE TSTOO1 HET is a Hercules Formatted Tape OOOO0FC4 XXXXXXXXX Device 0561 parameter chunksize 65535 00000FC4 XXXXXXXXX Device 0561 parameter compress 1 OOOO0FC4 XXXXXXXXX Device 0561 parameter method
209. TMARGIN 65536 tape03 het MAXSIZE 0 The above example is equivalent to issuing the following one at the start and one after each tape unload a in the configuration file 180 3420 tapeOl aws maxsizeM 16 eotmargin 131072 compress 0 b via devinit panel command devinit 180 tape02 het compress 1 maxsizeM 32 eotmargin 65536 devinit 180 tape03 het eotmargin 131072 compress 1 maxsize 0 Example 2 kI Resolution of the arguments using lines The following ACF file compress 0 tape0l aws compress 1 tape02 aws is equivalent to this one compress 1 tapeOl aws tape02 aws Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 134 5 9 Channel to Channel Adapters 5 9 1 Introduction The Channel to Channel Adapter device statements define CTC adapters to the Hercules configuration All of the communications emulation implemented within Hercules use a CTCA Channel to Channel Adapter type device Depending on the type the CTCA device will provide either a point to point or a virtual network adapter interface to the driving system s TCP IP stack or in the case of CTCT a true CTCA connection to another instance of Hercules via a TCP IP connection All current emulations with the exception of VMNET and CTCT use the Universal TUN TAP driver on Linux and TunTap32 WinPCap on the Windows platforms which creates a network interface on the driving system which allow Hercules to present frames
210. The TIMERINT parameter sets the internal timer update interval in microseconds This parameter speci fies how frequently Hercules s internal timers update thread updates the TOD clock CPU Timer and other architectural related clock timer values The default interval is 50 microseconds which strikes a reasonable balance between clock accuracy and overall host performance The minimum allowed value is 1 microsecond and the maximum is 1 000 000 microseconds one second CAUTION While a lower TIMERINT value may help increase the accuracy of the guest s TOD clock and CPU Timer values it could also have severe negative impact on the overall performance of the host operating system This is especially true when a low TIMERINT value is coupled with a high HERCPRIO and TODPRIO priority setting Exercise extreme caution when choosing your desired TIMERINT in re lationship to your chosen HERCPRIO and TODPRIO priority settings 4 50 2 Syntax Descriptive TIMERINT 50 7nterva Diagram gt gt TIMERINT gt ee 50 aa interval 4 50 3 Parameter interval Specifies the timer update interval in microseconds The minimum allowed value for the interval is 1 microsecond and the maximum is 1 000 000 microseconds one second 4 50 4 Examples Example 1 Set the timer update interval to 100 microseconds TIMERINT 100 Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 95 4 51 TODDRAG TOD clock drag factor 4 51 1 Functio
211. The command target is the Hercules Emulator This is the default when no CMDTGT target has been given SCP The target for the commands is the system control program i e the guest operating system running under Hercules PSCP All entered commands are system control program i e guest operating system priority commands Display the current target environment for commands 7 21 4 Examples Example 1 Display the current target environment for commands 2008 08 30 09 10 04 390 00000FC4 cmdtgt 2008 08 30 09 10 04 390 00000FC4 cmdtgt Commands are sent to Hercules Figure 41 CMDTGT command display current setting Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 205 Example 2 Set the system control program as the target for commands 2008 08 30 09 10 04 390 O0000FC4 cmdtgt scp 2008 08 30 09 10 04 390 O0000FC4 cmdtgt Commands are sent to scp Figure 42 CMDTGT command set target to SCP Example 3 Set the command target from SCP or PSCP back to Hercules see also HERC command 2008 08 30 09 10 04 390 O0000FC4 here cmdtgt herc 2008 08 30 09 10 04 390 O0000FC4 cmdtgt Commands are sent to Hercules Figure 43 CMDTGT command set target back to Hercules Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 206 7 22 CONKPALV Display alter console TCP IP keep alive settings 7 22 1 Function The CONKPALV command specifies the tn3270 console and telnet clients keepalive
212. a set of parameters in the base configuration file another on an line and another for each individual line in the list of files Parameters are then appended in that order A SCSI tape device should not be given in a file list The remaining parameters are described in section 5 8 6 Common parameters for AWS HET and FakeTape virtual files 5 8 5 4 Examples Example 1 Define a 3490 tape device on device address 0580 The tape device is an Fake Tape virtual file named R0528A FKT located in path S390 TAPES 0580 3490 S390 TAPES RO528A FKT 5 8 6 Common parameters for AWS HET and Fake Tape virtual files MAXSIZE n This specifies the maximum number of bytes specified in Bytes for the emulated file This parameter defaults to 0 meaning there is no limit on the file size MAXSIZEK n This is the same as above but specified in Kilobytes MAXSIZEM n This is the same as above but specified in Megabytes EOTMARGIN En Specifies the number of bytes remaining before reaching MAXSI ZEx at which point the tape device will signal the presence of the End of Tape marker thus allowing the program to switch to the next tape READONLY en Specifies whether the tape is mounted read only without a write ring or with the cartridge protect switch set to write protect A parameter of 1 means read only a parameter of 0 means read write If READONLY 1 RO or NORING is not specified READONLY 0 is the default Note t
213. a PDF or RTF file All of the PDF options that can be specified to HercPrt can also be specified to txt2pdf Note however that just like with HercPrt when converting text files to RTF files then not all of the PDF options are supported 8 26 9 1 Syntax Descriptive TXT2PDF option option i infile o outfile Diagram SE E ae REENEN option Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 457 SE lt 0 outfile 8 26 9 2 Parameter options a l Ipi f fontsize w width h height m margin t title s subject r author i infile O outfile PDF options g c color cols Notes Indicates that each input file line starts with an ASA ANSI carriage control character e g 1 0 or lt blank gt Lines per inch 6 or 8 The default is 6 LPI Font size 9 10 11 or 12 pt The default is 12 pt if 6 LPI otherwise 9pt Paper width in inches or millimeters Default is 13 875 inches Paper height in inches or millimeters Default is 11 0 inches Left right margin in inches or millimeters Default is 0 25 inches Document title property Document subject property Document author property The name and optionally path of the input txt file to be converted The name and optionally path of the output pdf or rtf file see notes Green bar paper Green Bar color Green default Bl
214. address OOOF The printed output has to be written to the file D A PRT PRT2 TXT with line feeds only at the end of each line Any existing output in the file will be over written when the file is opened for output OOOF 3211 D PRT PRT2 TXT Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 119 Example 3 Define a 1403 line printer device on device address OOOE The line printer is a socket device with the IP address 192 168 0 199 and port 1403 Output is written to the socket instead to a device file OOOH 1403 192 168 0 199 1403 SOCKDEV Example 4 Define a 1403 line printer device on device address 000E The command line for the print to pipe feature is usr bin lpr the argument for the Tor program is Phplj Unix example In the case of the Windows example the command line for the print to pipe feature is C utils pr the argument for the pr program is PLPTP1 Each printed line will have a carriage return line feed sequence at the end 000E 1403 usr bin lpr Phplj crlf for Unix 000E 1403 c utils pr s PLPT1 crlf for Windows Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 120 5 8 Emulated Tape Devices Tape device statements are used to define tape devices to the Hercules configuration Five types of emulation are supported e SCSI tapes e Optical Media Attach OMA virtual files e AWSTAPE virtual files e HET virtual files e Fake Tape virtual files 5
215. aeeeeetaeeeenead 376 V command display virtual storage with angel 377 V command display virtual storage with S option 377 VERSION Command Ge eege EENHEETEN due 378 CCKDCDSK utility Outputs e are idee i aiii EEN ia a ieai aa 383 CCKDCOMP utility out 385 CCKBDDIAGiutility ONE we ee ye tigen atin iie a lee 388 CCKDSWAP utility output 2 eee cece eccne cece ee eeeeee eae ee ceaeeeeaeeseeeeesaaeeeseaeseeeeeseaeeesaeeeeaaeesnees 389 DASDCAT utility output create PDS member en 393 DASDCAT utility output list a member from a PDG 394 DASDCAT utility output list all members of a PDS 395 RTR GI Eidel TEEN 397 DASDCOP deet EE 399 DASDINIT utility Output egier eegenen erter re lge e aaa aaan Aranan Eis egene 402 DASDISUP utility oufput NEEN 404 DASDLOAD utility output MIT method message level 71 409 DASDLOAD utility output MIT method message level 31 410 DASDLOAD utility output SEQ method message level pi 412 DASDLS utility output basic Information 414 DASDLS utility output extended Information 415 DASDPD SU utility OUtDUt me neea ona ea e adaa aa ae aE a iatan 417 DASDSEGiutility OUTPUT e ee A Ate a hee EEN 419 HETGET utility OUtpUt rsssccscecccebsrtaccesscacetuseseacenesaeceavttengccnntegeetstteaccenaecerstteaescnezcacetusegevenenseae 421 HETINIT utility opt 62cc elt ele cid ee NOESEN dE dE ENEE 423 HETMAP utility output print all label and file mom aton eee eeeeeeeeeenteeeeeeneeeeeeaaes 427 HETMAP
216. agram p gt GPR lt NN XXXXXXXX NN XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX NN XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 7 41 3 Parameter nn XXXXXXXX This specifies the optional register number 00 15 to be altered This is the register value in hexadecimal 1 8 hex digits for 32 bit registers 1 16 hex digits for 64 bit registers 7 41 4 Examples Example 1 Display the general purpose registers 16 54 16 54 16 54 16 54 16 54 Bilis SS Sch 31 Sle 625 625 625 625 625 00000FC4 00000FC4 00000FC4 00000FC4 00000FC4 gpr CPU0000 CPU0000 CPU0000 CPUO0OO0O0 GRO0 00000000 GRO04 02502400 GRO8 0248EF58 GR12 813799C8 GRO1 00000000 GRO5 00000C00 GRO 9 00000000 GR13 0252DF80 GRO2 0252E12C GRO06 01379E76 GR10 0252EF7F GR14 81379D22 GR03 02501EB0 GR07 00000000 GR11 0252DF80 GR15 00000C00 Figure 74 GPR command display general purpose registers Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 240 Example 2 Alter general purpose register number 15 16 L63 16 Les T6 54 54 54 54 54 41 41 41 625 41 41 625 625 625 ER 00000FC4 00000FC4 00000FC4 00000FC4 00000FC4 gpr 15 FF000000 CPU0000 CPU0000 CPU0000 CPU0000 GR00 00000000 GR04 02502400 GR08 0248EF58 GR12 813799C8 GR01 00000000 GR05 00000C00 GR09 00000000 GR13 0252DF80 GR02 0252E12C GR06 01379E76 GR10 0252EF7F GR14 81379D22 GR03 02501EB0 GR07 00000000 GR1
217. al to another value than the default of 1440 minutes 1 day 7 63 2 Syntax Descriptive MAXRATES 7nterva Diagram gt gt MAXRATES lt interval 7 63 3 Parameter interval The new interval time in minutes The default value is 1440 minutes 1 day 7 63 4 Examples Example 1 Change the MAXRATES interval from the default value or the last manually set interval value to 60 minutes 2007 06 30 14 24 59 343 00000FC4 maxrates 60 2007 06 30 14 24 59 343 00000FC4 Maxrates interval set to 60 minutes Figure 106 MAXRATES command set the interval time Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 275 Example 2 Display the maximum observed MIPS and I O rates during the last interval 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 VS A A A A A A B A A A S amp S B amp B A b b 24 24 24 224 DER 224 224 DER 224 224 DER 224 DER 224 DER 224 254 754 754 54 754 754 54 254 754 54 254 754 754 754 754 754 262 DEER DEER 262 262 DEER x262 DEER 262 DEER DEER DEER 262 DEER DEER DEER 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 FC4 FC4 Highest observed MIPS SIOS rates
218. also have no group name specified The terminal group name should be 1 8 alphanumeric characters in length the first cha racter being alphabetic and it should not be a hexadecimal number Upper and lower case letters in the group name are considered to be equivalent The asterisk is used to indicate any terminal group name It may be omitted if there are no additional arguments following the group name If an IP address and optionally mask is specified and there is no specific group name desired then the asterisk must be coded to distinguish the terminal group name and the IP address arguments The optional IP address and subnet masks specify the IP address es at which client s are allowed to connect via the device address identified by the device statement This provides an additional means of specifying which device s a client tn3270 session may connect to If the IP address and mask default 255 255 255 255 if not specified of the tn3270 client attempting to connect match the IP address mask entered on the device statement then the client is eligible to connect at this device address Otherwise the client is ineligible to connect at this device address and the next available device if any for which the client is eligible to connect will be attempted If no permissible terminal devices remain terminal devices for which the client is eligible to connect or there are no more available terminal devices then the client connection is
219. alue similarly decreases the amount to be moved Normally 256K will be moved for a file in an interval Specifying a value of 8 can increase the amount to 64M At least 64K will be moved Specifying a large value Such as 8 may not increase the garbage collec tion efficiency correspondingly The default is 0 You can specify a number from 8 to 8 Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 40 NOSTRESS n Indicates whether stress writes will occur or not A track or block group may be written under stress when a high percentage of the cache is pending write or when a device I O thread is waiting for a cache entry When a stressed write occurs the compression algo rithm and or compression parm may be relaxed resulting in faster compression but usually a larger compressed image If NOSTRESS is set to one then a stressed situa tion is ignored You would typically set this value to one when you want create the smal lest emulation file possible in exchange for a possible performance degradation The default is 0 You can specify 0 enable stressed writes or 1 disable stressed writes FREEPEND n Specifies the free pending value for freed space When a track or block group image is written the space it previously occupied is freed This space will not be available for future allocations until n garbage collection intervals have completed In the event of a catastrophic failure previously written track or block group images should be r
220. am gt gt AIA H i A 7 6 3 Parameter None 7 6 4 Examples Example 1 Display the AIA fields 00000FC4 aia 00000FC4 mainstor 10041000 aim 4ECA4000 aiv 0000000001581000 aie 0000000000000000 Figure 13 AIA command Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 178 7 7 AR Display access registers 7 7 1 Function Display the current contents of the access registers 7 7 2 Syntax Descriptive AR Diagram ROS S _WTJHYSHtWTHY SsW WHtfWT 4 7 7 3 Parameter None 7 7 4 Examples Example 1 Display the access registers 14 14 14 14 14 GE Lae GE EE E 01 01 DER 01 DI 091 091 DER DI 091 00000FC4 00000FC4 00000FC4 00000FC4 00000FC4 ar CPU0000 CPU0000 CPU0000 CPU0000 AR00 00000000 AR04 88582860 AR08 8858631C AR12 00000000 AR01 00000000 AR05 090C52C8 AR09 081F6060 AR13 00000000 AR02 0000195B AR06 88586190 AR10 00000000 AR14 00000002 AR03 88586380 AR07 00000000 AR11 00000000 AR15 00000000 Figure 14 AR command Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 179 7 8 ARCHMODE Set architecture mode 7 8 1 Function Specifying the archmode command without any parameters displays the current setting of the the initial architecture mode Additional parameters may be specified to set a new value for the architecture mode 7 8 2 Syntax Descriptive ARCHMODE S 3
221. ame The dataset is loaded from an unloaded PDS created by the TSO XMIT command The input is a binary file containing fixed length 80 byte records with no record delimiters VS filename The dataset is loaded from an unloaded PDS created by IEBCOPY The input is a binary file containing variable length spanned records with the record descriptor words omitted and with no record delimiters SEQ filename The dataset is loaded from an binary file ASCII EBCDIC conversion is not currently supported Also the DSORG must be PS or DA and RECFM must either be F or FB XMSEQ filename The dataset is loaded from a dump of a sequential dataset created by the TSO XMIT command The input is a binary file containing fixed length 80 byte records with no record delimiters EMPTY The dataset is initialized with an end of file record if DSORG is PS or is an empty PDS directory if DSORG is PO DIP The dataset is initialized with a LOGREC header record CVOL The dataset is initialized as an OS SYSCTLG containing the minimum entries needed to IPL an OS 360 system VTOC filename Specifies the size and location of the VTOC A dataset name must be coded on this statement although it is not used If no VTOC statement is present the VTOC will be placed after the last dataset on the volume and the size of the VTOC will be the minimum number of tracks necessary units This specifies the space allocation units TRK or CYL pri This is the space allocation pr
222. anagement Control Word Legend ISC Interruption Subclass Code E Enabled LM Limit Mode MM Measurement Mode Enable D Multipath Mode T Timing Facility V Device Number Valid LPM Logical Path Mask PNOM Path Not Operational Mask LPUM Last Path Used Mask PIM Path Installed Mask MBI Measurement Block Index POM Path Operational Mask Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 227 PAM Path Available Mask CHPIDs Channel Path Identifiers F Measurement Block Format Control A Extended Measurement Word Enable S Concurrent Sense The Subchannel Status Word SCSW provides information about the status of a subchannel and its associated devices The format of the SCSW is as follows Word 0 Key S L CC F P IT A UJ Z E N O FC AC SC 1 CCW Address 2 Device Status Subchannel Status Count Figure 62 Subchannel Status Word Initial Status Interruption Control Address Limit Checking Control Suppress Suspend Interruption Legend Key Subchannel Key S Suspend Control L ESW Format CC Deferred Condition Code F Format Prefetch l A U Z Zero Condition Code E Extended Control N Path Not Operational 0 Reserved FC Function Control AC Activity Control SC Status Control Count Residual Count Details about the control blocks that have been described here only briefly can be found in IBM s z Architecture Principles of Operation manual Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Gui
223. and write it to file FILE 25 BIN in directory D S390 UNLOAD HETGET D MVS TAPE T001003 AWS D S390 UNLOAD FILE 25 BIN 25 Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 420 8 17 5 Sample Utility Output Sample 1 Extract file number 10 from the AWSTAPE file named T38321A AWS and write it to file FILE10 BIN D HERCULES gt hetget D MVS TAPE T38321A AWS D FILE1O BIN 10 Hercules HET extract files program Version 3 05 c Copyright 1999 2005 by Roger Bowler Jan Jaeger and others File Info DSN BBC BBC53XX F5 DCB Attributes used RECFM V LRECL 32756 BLKSIZE 32760 Figure 219 HETGET utility output Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 421 8 18 HETINIT Initialize an AWS or HET tape file 8 18 1 Function The HETINIT utility is used to initialize a tape file 8 18 2 Syntax Descriptive HETINIT option option filename volser owner Diagram mr HEINE i EG option S RK volser FS owner 8 18 3 Parameter Options d Disable compression creates an AWSTAPE file h Display usage summary help text i Create an IEHINITT formatted tape set on by default n Create a NL non labeled tape Arguments filename Name and optionally path of the tape file to be created volser The volser of the tape owner The owner of the tape Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 422 8 18 4 Examples Exampl
224. anually mounting any file via the DEVINIT console command even one in a currently defined disallowed auto mount directory The AUTOMOUNT statement only controls guest invoked automatic tape mounts and not manual tape mounts performed by the Hercules operator All directories must be specified on separate statements but as many statements as needed may be specified in order to describe the desired allowable unallowable directories layout For convenience an AUTOMOUNT console command is also provided to dynamically add new or remove existing automount directories at any time The automount feature is activated whenever you specify at least one allowable or unallowable directory If only unallowable directories are specified then the current directory becomes the only defined allow able automount directory by default All specified directories are always resolved to fully qualified absolute directory paths before being saved Caution Enabling this feature may have security consequences depending on which allowable host system directories you specify as well as how your guest operating system enforces authorized use of the Set Diagnose X 4B channel command code Refer to the description of the virtual tape device NOAUTOMOUNT option for more information 4 4 2 Syntax Descriptive AUTOMOUNT d7rectory or AUTOMOUNT ADD directory DEL directory Diagram p gt gt AUTOMOUNT EE directory __ Y or
225. any DCB attributes that are meaningful in the users environment RECFM V Variable length output LRECL and BLKSIZE as specified The records are in a format consistent with that produced by AWSUTIL RECFM F Fixed length output LRECL and BLKSIZE as specified The records are ina format consistent with that produced by the VTTS family of utilities RECFM U Undefined length output BLKSIZE as specified The records are written in an aggregated BLKSIZE length block Note This is the preferred method when the virtual tape is to be transported to other environments such as Hercules Descriptive AWSPUT INDD ddname INDSN dsname O0UTDSN dsname TAPEDSN tapedsn UNLOAD IEBCOPY IDCAMS TYPE EXPORT REPRO Diagram gt gt AWSPUT INDD dsname i a OUTDSN ddname gt WS INDSN dsname L S LC tapepsn tapedsn SS UNLOAD IEBCOPY L ipcams lt i TYPE EXPORT L__ REPRO INDD ddname Specifies the statically allocated DDNAME representing the file to be copied and placed into the AWS or HET virtual tape file Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 469 INDSN dsname OUTDSN dsname TAPEDSN tapedsn UNLOAD value TYPE value Specifies the dsname to be dynamically allocated and placed into the AWS or HET virtual tape file The dataset name up to 44 bytes to be placed into the labels which preceed and follow the file on the virtual tape The datasetname up to 17 byt
226. aq tracks or block groups can be queued at any time e The number of writer threads wr should usually be 1 more than the number of host processors This is because one writer thread could be CPU bound compressing a track or block group image and the other could be i o bound writing the compressed image e The garbage collection interval governs the maximum time in seconds an updated track or block group image will reside in storage before being written to the emulation file A large value may mean more data loss if a catastrophic error occurs A small value may mean that more CPU time is spent compressing images Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 196 For example suppose that a particular image is updated several times each second If the inter val is changed from the default 5 seconds to 1 second then that image will be compressed and written 5 times more frequently A large value may cause more cache flushes within a garbage collection interval These kinds of flushes mean that a read will wait because there are no avail able cache entries slowing the emulated operating system A large value will also cause more pending free space to build up since free space is flushed each interval This may mean that the garbage collector space recovery routine will perform more work and the resulting emulation file may be larger Specify fsync 1 and gcint 5 if you are seriously concerned about your data being lost due to a fa
227. asd And for instance B we have the following device definitions and system parameter SHRDPORT 3991 0100 3390 mvsres dasd 0101 3390 localhost In this case each instance acts as both a client and a server Both instances of Hercules are running on the same machine The above examples may be clearer if we specify also all the default values To show this the same configuration is used but in this case the Hercules instances are running on separate physical machines Hercules instance A machine IP 192 168 200 1 SHRDPORT 3990 0100 3390 192 168 200 2 3991 0100 Remote on 192 168 200 0101 3390 mvscat dasd Local on 192 168 200 N mvsres dasd LA mvscat dasd Hercules instance B machine IP 192 168 200 2 SHRDPORT 3991 0100 3390 mvsres dasd Local on 192 168 200 0101 3390 192 168 200 1 3990 0101 Remote on 192 168 200 N mvsres dasd p mvscat dasd Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 480 10 Hercules 3270 Logo 10 1 Function The Hercules 3270 logo is the initial welcome screen that is presented when a 3270 terminal connects to a Hercules 3270 device While in previous releases of Hercules this logo screen was hardcoded it can now be customized The customized logo is stored in a plain text file which contains positioning orders attributes and supports variable substitutions Each line in the text file represents either an order statement or a plain text line If
228. at is if all 12 4096 byte user records contain zeroes This is used by the DASDCOPY utility The default is 0 GCSTART n If set to 1 then space recovery will become active on any emulated disks that have free Notes space Normally space recovery will ignore emulated disks until they have been updated The default is 0 raq should be at least as large as ra Read ahead threads are scheduled from entries in the read ahead queue Likewise rat should not exceed raq because only raq tracks or block groups can be queued at any time The number of writer threads wr should usually be 1 more than the number of host processors This is because one writer thread could be CPU bound compressing a track or block group image and the other could be i o bound writing the compressed image The garbage collection interval governs the maximum time in seconds an updated track or block group image will reside in storage before being written to the emulation file A large value may mean more data loss if a catastrophic error occurs A small value may mean that more CPU time is spent compressing images For example suppose that a particular image is updated several times each second If the inter val is changed from the default 5 seconds to 1 second then that image will be compressed and written 5 times more frequently A large value may cause more cache flushes within a garbage collection interval These kinds of flushes mean that a read will wait because
229. at output Options are mutually exclusive If more than one option is entered the last one is used If no options are specified a is the default Arguments filename The name and optionally path of the HET or AWS tape file about which information is to be displayed Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 424 8 19 4 Examples Example 1 Show information about a HET tape file HETMAP D MVS TAPE RPF142 HET 8 19 5 Sample Utility Output Sample 1 Show information about a HET tape file print all label and file information D Hercules gt hetmap a G MVS TAPE RPF142 HET Hercules HET and AWS tape map program Version 3 0 7 c Copyright 1999 2009 by Roger Bowler Jan Jaeger and others Filename G MVS TAPE RPF142 HET Label VOL1 Volume Serial RPF142 Improved Data Rec Ge Owner Code i Label HDRI Dataset ID RPF INST SRPFASM Volume Serial RPF142 Volume Sequence 0001 Dataset Sequence gt O 00T GDG Number ie KR GDG Version SE Creation Date 74186 Expiration Date 00000 Dataset Security 70 Block Count Low 000000 System Code IBM OS VS 370 Block Count High ie Label HDR2 Record Format yet Block Size 19060 Record Length 190567 Density KALAN Dataset Position SEI Job Step ID HERCOL UNLOAD r Recording Technique oS Control Character ee Block Attribute eh Device Serial 30001 Checkpoint ID E Large B
230. atement appears The included file itself may contain yet another INCLUDE statement as long as the maximum nesting depth of 8 is not exceeded 4 25 2 Syntax Descriptive INCLUDE f7 epath Diagram INCLUDE fi epath ____LLY 4 4 25 3 Parameter filepath Specifies the path and the filename of the configuration file that is to be included 4 25 4 Examples Example 1 Specify that Hercules should include the contents of the file D S390 CONF CONFIG2 CONF into the configuration INCLUDE D S390 CONF CONFIG2 CONF Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 68 4 26 IODEL AY UO interrupt wait time LINUX 4 26 1 Function IODELAY sets the amount of time in microseconds to wait after an I O interrupt is ready to be set pending This value can also be set using the Hercules console The purpose of this parameter is to circumvent a bug in the Linux 390 and z Linux dasd c device driver The bug is more likely to occur under Hercules than on a real machine as Hercules may present an I O interrupt sooner than a real machine NOTE OSTAILOR LINUX no longer sets IODELAY to 800 since the problem described above is no longer present in recent versions of the linux kernel 4 26 2 Syntax Descriptive IODELAY 0 usecs NOWARN Diagram kk IODELAY ee sce 0 lt uSECS l NOWARN 4 26 3 Parameter usecs Amount of time in microseconds to wait after an I O interrupt
231. ay and commands start Start CPU or printer device stop Stop CPU or printer device startall Start all CPU s stopall Stop all CPU s Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 166 cf Configure CPU online or offline cfall Configure all CPU s online or offline reply SCP command Imessage SCP priority message ssd Signal Shutdown ptt Set display pthread trace i Generate UO attention interrupt for device ext Generate external interrupt restart Generate restart interrupt archmode Set architecture mode loadparm Set IPL parameter lparname Display or set LPAR name lparnum Display or set LPAR identification number ipl IPL normal from device xxxx iplc IPL clear from device xxxx sysreset Issue SYSTEM RESET manual operation sysclear Issue SYSTEM CLEAR RESET manual operation store Store CPU status at absolute zero sclproot Set or display SCLP base directory psw Display or alter program status word gpr Display or alter general purpose registers fpr Display floating point register fpc Display floating point control registers cr Display or alter control registers ar Display access registers Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 167 pr Display prefix register timerint Display or set timers update interval clocks Display TOD clock and CPU timer ipending Displa
232. bed in the following table Syntax Element Description KEYWORDS Keywords are denoted with upper case letters Obey the spelling In the actual statements or commands they can be coded in upper case or lower case letters variables All user defined values are denoted with lower case italic letters In the actual statements or commands they can be coded in upper case or lower case letters Signifies that all or some portion of the code elements between the braces are required elements Note that the braces are not part of the statements and must be not coded Signifies that all or some portion of the code elements between the square brackets can optionally appear but are not required elements Note that the square brackets are not part of the statements and must be not coded The OR symbol signifies that you may use only one of the code elements or values from the possible choices Note that the OR symbol is not part of the statements and must be not coded XXK Signifies that there can be more than one value in a comma delimited list Note that the dots are not part of the statements and must be not coded XXX Signifies that there can be more than one value in a blank space delimited list Note that the dots are not part of the statements and must be not coded Table 31 Reading Syntax Descriptions Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 509 C 2 R
233. been reached is a somewhat unreliable way to detect the end of a print job but without an end of job separator page it s the best that can be done for now 8 26 8 1 2 Triggers The Triggers value defines how many trigger lines there are on your separator page A trigger line is a line that exists on a job separator page that together with other lines triggers identifies the page as a job separator page The Triggers value defines how many of these lines there are and thus how many Trigger sections there are following it 8 26 8 1 3 Trigger Each Trigger section defines one separator page line The character in each section s name should of course be replaced with the associated trigger number That is if there are three lines on your job separator page then you would specify Triggers 3 and define three Trigger sections called Trigger1 Trigger2 and Trigger3 8 26 8 1 4 Line Column Value The Line value identifies which line of the separator page contains the text defined by the Value va lue and the Columns defines at which column of that line the text appears at All line and column num ber values are 1 relative Thus the first line on the page would be line 1 and the letter w in Hello world would be at column 7 The text defined by Value should be the exact text that appears at that line and column All value com parisons are case sensitive and must match exactly Enclose
234. ber of installed processor engines The NUMCPU statement specifies the number of engines which will be configured online at startup time All processors are CP engines unless otherwise specified by the ENGINES statement MAX_CPU_ENGINES is a compile time variable which sets an upper limit on the value of MAXCPU The value of MAX_CPU_ENGINES is displayed in the build information message on the Hercules control panel at startup time To change the value of MAX_CPU_ENGINES you must rebuild Hercules For Unix builds specify configure enable multi cpu nn before performing make For Windows builds specify SET MAX_CPU_ENGINES nn before performing nmake MAX_CPU_ENGINES may be up to 128 on 64 bit Linux platforms On Windows and on all 32 bit plat forms the maximum value is 64 For performance reasons values above 32 are not recommended for 32 bit platforms If MAX_CPU_ENGINES is set to 1 then multiprocessing is disabled See also the NUM CPU statement for a discussion of the performance implications of MAX_CPU_ENGINES The value of MAXCPU can not exceed the value of MAX_CPU_ENGINES If MAXCPU is not specified then the default value is the value of MAX_CPU_ENGINES For detailed explanations on the interrelationship between MAXCPU ENGINES and NUMCPU please see Appendix B Configuration of Emulated CPUs 4 35 2 Syntax Descriptive MAXCPU 1 nn Diagram nn 4 35 3 Parameter nn Specifies the maximum number of insta
235. byte of the last modified page as determined by the storage key changed bit Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 321 7 89 4 Examples Example 1 Save the first 4096 bytes of real storage to file D core01 bin 2007 06 30 09 50 2007 06 30 09 50 2007 06 30 09 50 2007 06 30 09 50 40 44 44 44 156 0000008E 390 0000008E 390 0000008E 406 0000008E stopall savecore d core01 bin 00000000 00001000 HHCPN104I Saving locations 00000000 00001000 to d core0l bin HHCPN170I savecore command complete Figure 143 SAVECORE command save specific area Example 2 Save all real storage to file D core02 bin 2007 06 30 09 51 2007 06 30 09 51 22 129 2007 06 30 09 51 2007 06 30 09 51 10 22 156 0000008E 640 0000008E 640 0000008E 500 0000008E stopall savecore d core02 bin HHCPN104I Saving locations 00000000 0FFFEFFF to d core02 bin HHCPN170I savecore command complete Figure 144 SAVECORE command save from begin to end Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 322 7 90 SCLPROOT Set or display SCLP base directory 7 90 1 Function The SCLPROOT command sets or displays the SCLP base directory If a directory is given then SCLP disk I O for the specified directory path is enabled NONE disables SCLP disk I O A subsequent list directed IPL resets the path to the location of the ins file and a subsequent CCW type IPL disables
236. bytes read from d core02 bin Figure 95 LOADCORE command Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 263 7 55 LOADPARM Set IPL parameter 7 55 1 Function The LOADPARM command displays or changes the eight character IPL parameter which is used by all MVS based operating systems MVS 3 8J MVS SP MVS XA MVS ESA OS 390 z OS to select the system parameter 7 55 2 Syntax Descriptive LOADPARM 7p _parameter Diagram gt gt LOADPARM lt ipl_parameter 7 55 3 Parameter ip _parameter The system parameter used for the IPL of the intended operating system The parameters are operating system dependent the manuals of the operating system must be consulted for details 7 55 4 Examples Example 1 Display the current LOADPARM setting 2007 06 30 08 15 03 875 O0000FC4 loadparm 2007 06 30 08 15 03 875 O0000FC4 HHCPNO51I LOADPARM 014800M1 Figure 96 LOADPARM command display IPL parameter Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 264 Example 2 Change the current LOADPARM setting 2007 06 30 08 15 19 109 00000FC4 loadparm 014800t1 2007 06 30 08 15 19 109 00000FC4 HHCPNO51I LOADPARM 014800T1 Figure 97 LOADPARM command set IPL parameter Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 265 7 56 LOADTEXT Load a text deck file 7 56 1 Function The LOADTEXT command is essentially identical to the LOADCORE command see section 7 54
237. ccepted only if an ENABLE CCW is currently exectuting on the device With DIAL OUT the ENABLE CCW is rejected When DIAL IN or INOUT is coded a DIAL CCW allows the application to establish a TCP connection to a specific host For other DIAL values the DIAL CCW is rejected Specifies which IP address to listen on This also conditions the network interface from which incoming calls will be accepted An asterisk means all incoming TCP calls are accepted regardless of the destination IP address or call origin A given IP address when DIAL OUT is specified has no effect Specifies the TCP port for which to listen to incoming TCP calls This value is mandatory for DIAL IN DIAL INOUT or DIAL NO It is ignored for DIAL OUT Specifies the remote host to which to direct a TCP connection on a DIAL NO line when an ENABLE CCW is executed This value is mandatory when DIAL NO is specified It is ignored for other DIAL values Specifies the remote port to which to direct a TCP connection on a DIAL NO line when an ENABLE CCW is executed This value is mandatory when DIAL NO is specified It is ignored for other DIAL values The following arguments are tuning options In most cases using the default values will give the best result RTO PTO ETO Specifies the number of milliseconds before terminating a read on a timeout when no read termination control character is received A value of zero means the read ends immediately 1 specifi
238. ce Guide Page 70 4 28 LEGACYSENSEID SENSE ID CCW x E4 feature 4 28 1 Function This option specifies whether the SENSE ID CCW X E4 will be honored for the devices that originally did not support that feature This includes but may not be limited to 3410 and 3420 tape drives 2311 and 2314 direct access storage devices and 2703 communication controllers Because those legacy devices didn t originally support this command and for compatibility reasons the default is OFF or DISABLE Specify ON or ENABLE if your guest operating system needs the Sense ID support to dynamically detect those devices Note that most current operating systems will not detect those devices even though Sense ID is enabled because those devices never supported the Sense ID in the first place This mainly applies to custom built or modified versions of guest operating systems that are aware of this specific Hercules capability 4 28 2 Syntax Descriptive LEGACYSENSEID OFF DISABLE ON ENABLE Diagram p gt LEGACYSENSEID OFF lt DISABLE ON ENABLE 4 28 3 Parameter OFF or DISABLE Specify OFF or DISABLE if your guest operating system does not need the Sense ID support to dynamically detect devices that originally did not support that feature This is the default ON or ENABLE Specify ON or ENABLE if your guest operating system needs the Sense ID support to dynamically detect devices that originally did not support that featu
239. cility is disabled This is the default and is always disabled for S 370 and ESA 390 modes Set it to DISABLE if the operating system does not support this feature and it inadvertently sets CRO bit 44 to 1 usually leading to an unexpected program interrupt when instructions such as LASP are issued ENABLE The ASN and LX Reuse Facility is enabled Set this parameter to ENABLE if the operating system supports this z Architecture feature and the use of this feature is desired 4 3 4 Examples Example 1 Enable the ASN and LX Reuse Facility ASN_AND_LX_REUSE ENABLE Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 34 4 4 AUTOMOUNT Tape automount root directory 4 4 1 Function Specifies the host system directory where the guest is allowed or not allowed to automatically load virtual tape volumes from Prefix allowable directories with a plus sign and unallowable directories with a minus sign The default prefix if neither is specified is the sign an allowable directory All host system virtual tape volumes to be automounted by the guest must reside within one of the speci fied allowable host system directories or any of its subdirectories while not also being within any of the specified unallowable directories or any of their subdirectories in order for the guest invoked automount to be accepted Specifying a disallowed automount directory does not preclude the Hercules operator from m
240. ck before 012c0c88 00000000 io c 689 4 04 07 509711 14 04 35 00000ed0 lock after 012c0c88 00000000 io c 689 4 04 07 509712 0 14 04 35 00000ed0 unlock 012c0c88 00000000 io c 694 4 04 07 509714 0 14 04 35 00000ed0 TSCH 00010013 00032060 io c 837 4 04 07 509716 00000eb8 14 04 35 00000ed0 lock before 012c0c88 00000000 channel c 600 4 04 07 509724 14 04 35 00000ed0 lock after 012c0c88 00000000 channel c 600 4 04 07 509726 0 14 04 35 00000ed0 lock before 007c368c 00000000 channel c 799 4 04 07 509729 14 04 35 00000ed0 lock after 007c368c 00000000 channel c 799 4 04 07 509731 0 14 04 35 00000ed0 unlock 007c368c 00000000 channel c 799 4 04 07 509732 0 14 04 35 00000ed0 unlock 012c0c88 00000000 channel c 801 4 04 07 509734 0 14 04 35 00000ed0 lock before 007c3684 00000000 channel c 804 4 04 07 509736 14 04 35 00000ed0 lock after 007c3684 00000000 channel c 804 4 04 07 509738 0 14 04 35 00000ed0 lock before 007c368c 00000000 channel c 805 14 04 07 509740 14 04 35 00000ed0 lock after 007c368c 00000000 channel c 805 14 04 07 509741 0 14 04 35 00000ed0 unlock 007c368c 00000000 channel c 805 4 04 07 509743 0 14 04 35 00000ed0 unlock 007c3684 00000000 channel c 806 4 04 07 509745 0 14 04 35 00000ed0 STSCH 00010013 000320c0 io c 664 4 04 07 509779 00000ac4 14 04 35 00000ed0 lock before 012c0c88 00000000 io c 689 4 04 07 509782 14 04 35 00000ed0 lock after 012c0c88 00000000 io c 689 4 04 07 509784 0 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 14 04 35 00000ed0 unloc
241. cks in the file The default origin is Zero Specifies the number of 512 byte blocks in the minidisk This number must not exceed the number of blocks in the file minus the origin If omitted or specified as an asterisk UL then the minidisk continues to the end of the DASD image file The handling of shadow files for FBA devices is identical as that for CCKD devices Please refer to the following CCKD section for information regarding the use of the SF shadow file option SYNCIO enables possible synchronous UO and is explained in detail in the following CKD DASD section This is the host name or IP adress of the system where the Hercules shared device server is running This is the port number the shared device server is listening on If omitted the default is 3990 Devnum specifies the device number on the shared device server If omitted the default is the current device number on the local system This keyword requests that the data has to be transferred compressed between the client and the server The argument n specifies the compression level 1 9 A value closer to 1 means less compression but also less processor time to perform the compression A value closer to 9 means the data is compressed more but also more processor time is required to compress the data 5 10 4 Examples Example 1 Define a 3310 FBA DASD device on device address 0120 The name and path of the file containing the DASD image is D DASD TST001 FBA
242. contained in a XMIT files using the control file TST001 DAT with message level 3 The control file TST001 DAT looks like follows TSTOO1 3390 3 SYS2 RACF UTIL XMIT D MVS DASD CBT728 XMI The corresponding output from the utility is the following D HERCULES gt DASDLOAD z D MVS DASD TST001 DAT D MVS DASD TST001 A80 3 ere HCD HCD HCD HCD HCD HCD HCD HCD ules DASD loader program Version 3 05 c Copyright 1999 2005 by Roger Bowler Jan Jaeger and others ec TSTO0O1 3390 3 LOO6I Creating 3390 volume TST001 15 trks cyl 56832 bytes track U044I Creating 3390 volume TST001 3339 cyls 15 trks cyl 56832 bytes track U041I 3339 cylinders successfully written to file D MVS DASD TST001 A80 LOO9I Loading 3390 volume TSTOO1 ee SYS2 RACF UTIL XMIT D MVS DASD CBT728 XMI LO12I Creating dataset SYS2 RACF UTIL at cyl 0 head 1 L110I Processing file D MVS DASD CBT728 XMI LO78I File 1 DSNAME SBGOLOB CBT470 FILE728 LO79I DSORG PO RECFM FB LRECL 80 BLKSIZE 5600 KEYLEN 0 DIRBLKS 6 LO84I Original dataset DSORG PO RECFM FB LRECL 80 BLKSIZE 5600 KEYLEN 0 LO85I Dataset was unloaded from device type 3030200F 3390 LO86I Original device has 2226 cyls and 15 heads LO95I Member SSS DATE TTR 000214 Userdata 044600000105311F 105311F0733000C O000CO000C3C2E360 F4F7F0404040 ee CB A ID LO95I Member SSNOTE1 TTR 00020E Userdata 010100160105311F 105311F07330009 000A0000E2C2C7D6 D3D
243. control register 7 38 2 Syntax Descriptive FPC Diagram kk FPE pit 7 38 3 Parameter None 7 38 4 Examples Example 1 Display the floating point control register 2007 06 30 12 14 14 968 00000FC4 fpc 2007 06 30 12 14 14 968 00000FC4 FPC 00000000 Figure 70 FPC command Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 236 7 39 FPR Display floating point registers 7 39 1 Function The FPR command displays the actual contents of the floating point registers basic format If the AFP bit is set in CRO then additional floating point registers are displayed extended format 7 39 2 Syntax Descriptive FPR Diagram gt gt FPR HA _ od 7 39 3 Parameter None 7 39 4 Examples Example 1 Display the floating point registers 2007 08 25 18 07 09 263 00000E18 fpr 2007 08 25 18 07 09 263 O0000E18 CPU0000 FPRO 00000000 00000000 FPR2 00000000 00000000 2007 08 25 18 07 09 263 O0000E18 CPU0000 FPR4 00000000 00000000 FPR6 00000000 00000000 Figure 71 FPR command basic format Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 237 Example 2 Display the floating point registers when the AFP bit is set in CRO 2007 08 25 1 2007 08 25 1 2007 08 25 1 2007 08 25 1 2007 08 25 1 2007 08 25 1 2007 08 25 1 2007 08 25 1 2007 08 25 1 o co CO CO Oo P0721 OTid r0731 OTET 07 1 10751 2 07 1 20724 Se
244. count of blocks to write Specifies the number of files blocks or tape marks to process Specifies the ID of the block to be located Page 442 value Specifies the settings for compression and ECC A value of 0 means OFF whereas a value of 1 means ON The default is 1 ON margin Specifies the EOT margin margin must a value from 0 to 65535 the default is 0 offset Specifies the offset from which data blocks are to be dumped length Specifies the length of data blocks to be dumped 8 25 4 Examples Example 1 Display the status of SCSI tape device Tape0 FTAPE f Tape0 STATUS 8 25 5 Sample Utility Output Sample 1 Display the status of SCSI tape device Tape0 D Hercules gt ftape Fish s Win32 SCSI Tape Test Utility vl 6 1 353 Copyright C 2004 2007 Software Development Laboratories http www softdevlabs com fish softdevlabs com several lines not diplayed Command status Retrieving status Warning Unable to request variable blocksized i o due to media parameters retrieval failure Tape device Tape0 Status Not Ready Not Loaded Drive information ECC No Compression No Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 443 DataPadding ReportSetmarks DefaultBlockSize MaximumBlockSize MinimumBlockSize MaximumPartitionCount EOTWarningZoneSize TA TA TA TA TA TA TA TA TA TA TA TA TA TA TA TA TA
245. ction This device statement is used to define a FBA DASD device to the Hercules configuration The argument specifies the name of a file which contains the FBA DASD image or the INET address of a Hercules shared device server The file consists of fixed length 512 byte records each of which represents one physical block of the emulated disk To allow access to a minidisk within a full back FBA DASD image file two additional arguments origin and numblks may be specified after the filename 5 10 2 Syntax Descriptive devaddr devtype filename origin 0 numb ks sf shadowfi7e SYNCIO or devaddr devtype ipname port 3990 devnum COMP n Diagram 0 devaddr devtype filename ben origin hod Sommers Wr KEE KE DEET a numblks SF shadowfi e SYNCIO or 73990 devaddr devtype ipname fen nef port Le oes sie fo ea ts 2 devnum COMP n 5 10 3 Parameter devaddr This is the device address devtype This is the device type Valid device types are 3310 3370 9332 9335 9336 and 0671 Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 144 filename origin numblks shadowfile SYNCIO ipname port devnum COMP n This specifies the filename and path of the file containing the DASD image This defines the relative block number within the DASD image file at which the minidisk begins The number must be less than the number of blo
246. ctory if no allowable directories were specifically defined There is always a default allowable directory whenever any allowable or un allowable automount directories are defined Fully resolved absolute full path filenames are defined as being those which for Win dows have a colon in the second position or for other host operating systems e g Linux have a slash in the first position Paths which start with a period are con sidered relative paths and will always be appended to the currently defined default allow able automount directory before being resolved into fully qualified paths by the host system i e only fully resolved absolute pathnames are used in the performance of the actual automatic tape volume mount For example if more than one allowable automount directory is defined and the volume wishing to be mounted happens to reside in the second one then a fully qualified abso lute pathname should of course be specified or else one that is relative to the default directory which happens to resolve to the desired file All attempts to automount host files in any defined disallowable directory or any sub directory thereof or otherwise not within any defined allowable directory or subdirec tory will be rejected An error message is always issued in such cases just as one is whenever a successful mount or unmount is performed A sample guest automount program called TMOUNT for the DOS VSE operatin
247. cules 7 82 1 Function This command resumes a Hercules session that had been previously suspended with the SUSPEND command see section 7 108 for details The data necessary to resume the session is read from a packed zipped file called hercules srf gz located in the current configuration directory In order for an instance to be resumed HERCULES must be started with a configuration file describing the configuration at suspend time For example MAINSIZE and XPNDSIZE must match and all devices present at suspend time must be present at resume time Disk devices must be at the same state as they were at suspend time They can however be a different file type For example a disk could be a CCKD disk at suspend time then a CKD disk could be created using DASDCOPY and HERCULES resumed using the CKD disk instead HERCULES must also be configured similarly as at suspend time For example if 4 emulated CPUs were active at suspend time then the session cannot be resumed on a HERCULES with a maximum of two CPUs Similarly you will not be able to resume a session in z Architecture mode for a HERCULES that was built without 2 Architecture After entering the RESUME command on the Hercules console the suspend file is re imported and the CPUs are put in the STARTED state again resuming guest program operations at the same point and in the same state as the suspend file was created There are some caveats when resuming guest operating system process
248. d file called hercules srf gz which is located in the current configuration path After entering the SUSPEND command the CPUs are put in a stopped state and the contents of the main storage CPU states I O device states and internal Hercules states are dumped onto the Hercules srf gz file After the SUSPEND command has finished writing to the suspend file it schedules an immediate shutdown of Hercules Currently device state is only fully saved for CKD disks Each device class e g TAPE RDR PUN CTC will need code to save and restore their state Some states may not be possible to restore e g active TCP IP connections at the time of suspend Currently the vector facility state is not saved neither is the ECPSVM state The created suspend file is designed to be HERCULES release independent and to be host architecture independent For example it is possible to take a suspend file created on HERCULES 3 05 0 on an Intel machine and resume on a Sun machine running HERCULES 3 07 0 Please note that there are some caveats with suspend resume processing which can affect the guest operating system running under Hercules These caveats are described in the chapter about RESUME processing Error Reference source not found RESUME There are some caveats when suspending and resuming guest operating system processing e As seen by the guest operating system the TOD clock will appear to jump a large value Some guests may not cope
249. d displays the current setting of the TOD clock drag factor or sets a new value This parameter can be used to slow down or speed up the TOD clock by a factor of nn A significant slow down can improve the performance of some operating systems which consume large amounts of CPU time processing timer interrupts A drag factor of 2 0 slows down the clock by 50 a drag factor of 0 5 doubles the speed of the clock a drag factor of 1 01 slows down the clock by 1 and 0 99 speeds up the clock by 1 7 120 2 Syntax Descriptive TODDRAG factor Diagram factor 7 120 3 Parameter factor The factor to which the TOD clock has to be slowed down or sped up 7 120 4 Examples Example 1 Display current TOD clock drag factor 2007 06 30 14 33 29 653 O00000FC4 toddrag 2007 06 30 14 33 29 653 O00000FC4 HHCPNO36I TOD clock drag factor 1 000000 Figure 185 TODDRAG command display TOD clock factor Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 366 Example 2 Set the TOD clock drag factor 2007 06 30 14 33 29 653 O0000FC4 toddrag 0 99 2007 06 30 14 33 29 653 O0000FC4 HHCPNO36I TOD clock drag factor 0 990000 Figure 186 TODDRAG command set TOD clock factor Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 367 7 121 TRACEOPT Instruction trace display options 7 121 1 Function The TRACEOPT command determines how the registers are displayd during instruction tracing and stepping En
250. d optional parameters as described in IBM s VM CP Commands and Utilities Reference manual 7 64 4 Examples Example 1 Display a message on the own virtual machine console 18 23 58 message transmitted message to VM console 18 23 58 18 23 58 MSG FROM HERCULES transmitted message to VM console Figure 108 MESSAGE command Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 277 7 65 MOUNTED_TAPE_REINIT Control tape initialization 7 65 1 Function The MOUNTED_TAPE_REINIT command controls whether reinitialization of tape drive devices via the DEVINIT command in order to mount a new tape should be allowed if there is already a tape mounted on the drive Without a parameter given the current setting is displayed Specifiying ALLOW indicates that new tapes may be mounted via DEVINIT nnnn new tape filename irrespective of whether or not there is already a tape mounted on the drive Specifying DISALLOW prevents new tapes from being mounted if one is already mounted Before the new tape can be mounted the existing one has first to be unmounted via the DEVINIT nnnn com mand Otherwise the DEVINIT attempt to mount the new tape is rejected This option is meant as a safety mechanism to protect against accidentally unmounting a tape from the wrong device as a result of a simple typing error and thereby eventually cancelling a potentially important tape job Please note that for SCSI tape drives the DEVINIT nnnn c
251. d with the physical hard disk at the end of a garbage collection interval no more often than 5 seconds though This means that if FREEPEND is non zero and a catastro phic error occurs the emulated disks should be recovered coherently However FSYNC may cause performance degradation depending on the host operating system and or the host operating system level The default is 0 fsync disabled you can specify 0 dis able FSYNC or 1 enable FSYNC Specifies the number of CCKD trace entries You would normally specify a non zero when debugging or capturing a problem in CCKD code When the problem occurs you should enter the k Hercules console command which will print the trace table entries The default is 0 You can specify a number between 0 and 200000 Each trace entry represents 128 bytes Normally for debugging it is recommended to use 100000 If set to 1 then tracks written to 3390 CCKD volumes that were initialized with the linux option will be checked if they are null that is if all 12 4096 byte user records contain zeroes This is used by the DASDCOPY utility The default is 0 If set to 1 then space recovery will become active on any emulated disks that have free space Normally space recovery will ignore emulated disks until they have been updated The default is 0 e raqshould be at least as large as ra Read ahead threads are scheduled from entries in the read ahead queue Likewise rat should not exceed raq because only r
252. ddresses 0E20 and 0E21 The device protocol type is CTCI Channel to Channel link to Win32 TCP IP stack The WinPcap device driver capture buffer has to be set to 2048 KB the TunTap32 I O buffer size has to be set to 128 KB The IP address of the guest operating system running under Hercules is 192 168 1 99 and the MAC address of the network adapter to use is 00 80 B3 E1 DF 69 Oo Oo E20 3088 CTCI E21 3088 CTCI n 00 80 B3 n 00 80 B3 E1 DF 69 E1 DF 69 k 2048 i 128 192 168 1 99 k 2048 i 128 192 168 1 99 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 5 9 3 CTCT Channel to Channel emulation via TCP Connection 5 9 3 1 Function This is an emulated Channel to Channel adapter to another Hercules system CTCT only supports IP traffic and cannot be used to transport NJE SNA PVM etc type payloads This may change in the future Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 137 5 9 3 2 Syntax Descriptive devaddr CTT port rhost rport bufsize Diagram p gt devaddr CICT port rhost rport bufsize lt 5 9 3 3 Parameter devaddr This is the device address CTCT This specifies the device protocol type Iport Specifies the local TCP port This is the TCP port that Hercules will listen on for this CTC adapter rhost Specifies the remote host This is the name or IP address of the remote host system that Hercules is running on not the name or IP address of the O
253. de Page 228 7 34 ECPSVM ECPS VM commands 7 34 1 Function The ECPSVM command invokes ECPS VM subcommands described below Issuing command ECPSVM HELP displays a list of all available commands 7 34 2 Syntax Descriptive ECPSVM HELP STATS DISABLE ENABLE DEBUG NODEBUG LEVEL nn or with abbreviated arguments ECPSVM H ST DIS EN DEBUG NO Lol Diagram p gt gt ECPSVM lt HELP STATS DISABLE ENABLE DEBUG NODEBUG LEVEL or with abbreviated arguments gt ECPSVM lt Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 229 7 34 3 Parameter HELP Show the help panel with all available commands STATS Show statistical counters DISABLE Disable all ECPS VM features ENABLE Enable all ECPS VM features DEBUG Debug ECPS VM features NODEBUG Turn debug modus off for ECPS VM features LEVEL Set show ECPS VM level nn 7 34 4 Examples Example 1 Show ECPS VM statistical counters The value nn specifies the support level that is reported to the operating system 2007 06 30 17 16 05 656 00000FC4 ecpsvm stats 2007 06 30 17 16 05 656 O0000FC4 HHCEVO11I ECPS VM Command processor invoked 2007 06 30 17 16 05 656 00000FC4 HHCEVOO3I Rese ETEA ee dees 2007 06 30 17 16 05 656 00000FC4 HHCEV002I VM ASSIST Calls Hits Ratio 2007 06 30 17 16 05 656 00000FC4 HHCEVOO3I E les ee eg 2007 06 30 17 16 05 656 00000FC4 H
254. decimal If the TRACE argument is given with a number then a trace table with a size of n elements initialized 7 100 4 Examples Example 1 Initialize the Shared Device Server trace table with a size of 2500 trace entries 2007 08 25 17 36 48 153 00000190 shrd trace 2500 Figure 158 SHRD command initialize trace table Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 339 Example 2 Print the Shared Device Server trace table 2007 08 25 17 37 2007 08 25 17 37 2007 08 25 17 37 2007 08 25 17 37 2007 08 25 17 37 2007 08 25 17 37 2007 08 25 17 37 2007 08 25 17 37 2007 08 25 17 37 2007 08 25 17 37 2007 08 25 17 37 2007 08 25 17 37 2007 08 25 17 37 2007 08 25 17 37 2007 08 25 17 37 2007 08 25 17 37 2007 08 25 17 37 2007 08 25 17 37 2007 08 25 17 37 2007 08 25 17 37 2007 08 25 17 37 2007 08 25 17 37 57 58 58 1 58 1 58 1 58 1 58 1 58 1 58 1 58 1 58 1 58 1 58 1 58 1 58 1 58 1 58 1 58 1 58 1 58 1 58 1 58 1 091 091 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 000001 000001 000001 000001 000001 000001 000001 000001 000001 000001 000001 000001 000001 000001 000001 000001 000001 000001 000001 000001 000001 000001 several lines not displyed 2007 08 25 1 Vist 2007 08 25 17 37 2007 08 25 17 37 2007 08 25 17 37 2007 08 25 17 37 2007 08 25 17 37 2007 08 25 17 37 2007 08 25 17 3
255. ded file created Wed Jan 11 14 15 43 2006 imer thread ended 31 187 00000FC4 HHCCP003I CPU0000 architecture mode ESA 390 31 187 00000FC4 HHCTTOO2I Timer thread started tid 00000760 pid 4056 priority 20 31 187 00000FC4 HHCCP002I CPU0001 thread started tid 00000ED8 pid 4056 priority 0 31 187 00000FC4 HHCCP003I CPU0001 architecture mode ESA 390 amp A GG A A A b b B Orig HA en En on OF CP en Figure 135 RESUME command Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 310 7 83 RMMOD Delete a module 7 83 1 Function The RMMOD command deletes unloads a module 7 83 2 Syntax Descriptive RMMOD modu e Diagram gt gt RMMOD module 111 gt lt 7 83 3 Parameter module Name of the module that is to be unloaded If a device is still bound to the module then a message is issued and the module is not deleted 7 83 4 Examples Example 1 Delete module dyncrypt 2007 06 30 10 33 33 359 0000008E rmmod dyncrypt 2007 06 30 10 33 33 359 O0000008E HHCHD102I Unloading dyncrypt 2007 06 30 10 33 33 359 O0000008E HHCHD103I Module dyncrypt unloaded Figure 136 RMMOD command Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 311 7 84 S Instruction stepping 7 84 1 Function This command sets the instruction stepping and breaking range The instruction stepping is totally sepa rate from the instruction tracing range See T c
256. define your custom form size via PaperWidth and PaperHeight 8 26 8 5 2 PaperWidth PaperHeight PaperWidth and PaperHeight values are expressed in either fractional inches the default or whole millimeters To express a value in millimeters append mm to your value e g 297mm Note when defining your form s width do not include the width of the feedholes The width of the feed holes 0 5 inches on either side of your form is automatically added to your specified paper width at run time whenever the FeedHoles Yes option is specified Your PaperWidth value should always be specified as the actual printable width of your form and should not include the width of the feedholes area 8 26 8 5 3 Orientation Specifying Orientation Landscape or Orientation Portrait will swap your specified PaperWidth and PaperHeight values if necessary in order to match your defined orientation Therefore defining PaperWidth 8 5 and PaperHeight 11 or PaperSize USLetter along with Orien tation Landscape will cause a paper width of 11 inches and a paper height of 8 5 inches to be used in stead 8 26 8 5 4 HorzMargin The HorzMargin value specifies how far from the left edge of the form the first character of the print line is For PDF output the HorzMargin value defines both the left and right margins the right margin being the end of the print line i e the position past which no character will print For RTF ou
257. describe another ACF file nor an SCSI tape handle dev stx However the files may be standard AWS HET Fake Tape or OMA files These are the same arguments that apply to the AWS HET Fake Tape or OMA files as described above 5 8 7 4 Syntax ACF description file comment line arguments filename arguments 5 8 7 5 Parameter filename The hash symbol starts a comment line Any options following the asterisk are applied to each file of the list followed by the options specified on the device configuration entry followed by the options specified on each individual entry of the file list Care must be taken that all lines are processed at once The filename and path of the AWS HET Fake Tape or OMA tape file Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 133 arguments These are the same arguments that apply to the AWS HET Fake Tape or OMA files as described above The arguments are processed in the order in which they appear Any conflicting argument overrides the previous one 5 8 7 6 Examples Example 1 Define a 3490 Automatic Cartridge Feeder ACF on device address 0589 ZLIB compression is turned on The file newstack describes a list of tape emulation files to be loaded in succession a Hercules configuration file 0589 3490 NEWSTACK COMPRESS 1 b NEWSTACK file MAXSIZEM 16 EKOTMARGIN 131072 tapeO0l aws COMPRESS 0 tape02 het MAXSIZEM 32 EO
258. dip trk 1 0 0 sysl nucleus xmit cdrom os360 reslibs nucleus xmi cyl sysl svclib xmit cdrom os360 reslibs svclib xmi cyl sysl sysjobge empty cyl 20 0 da f 176 176 0 sysl dump empty cyl 10 0 0 ps u 0 3625 0 Example 2 Create a compressed 3390 3 volume in a file called LINUX 500 containing a bootable linux system for Linux 390 installation using the control file LINUX PRM with message level 5 DASDLOAD z LINUX PRM LINUX 500 5 The corresponding control file LINUX PRM looks like the following Build a bootable linux disk Note the dataset names sysl linux are hard coded in linuxipl obj and cannot be changed without rebuilding it linux 3390 3 linuxipl obj sysl linux parmfile SEQ images redhat prm trk 100ps fb 1024 1024 sysl linux tapeipl ikr SEQ images kernel img trk 200 0 0 ps fb 1024 1024 sysl linux initrd SEQ images initrd img trk 200 0 0 ps fb 1024 1024 Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 408 8 13 6 Sample Utility Output Sample 1 Create a 3390 model 3 in a compressed file called TST001 A80 containing 3 libraries which have been downloaded from CBT tape as SMIT files using the control file TST001 DAT with message level 1 The control file TST001 DAT looks like follows TSTOO1 3390 3 SYS2 RACF UTIL XMIT D MVS DASD CBT728 XMI SYS2 BATCH CNTL XMIT D MVS DASD CBT357 XMI SYS2 PL1 SAMPLES XMIT D MVS DASD CBT316 XMI The corresponding o
259. dir home hercules tapes Figure 52 DEFSYM command define new symbol Example 3 Clear defined symbol 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 MB MO NBO NY NY NY NY ND a a 249 2 44 52 2 44 52 2 44 52 2 44 52 2 44 52 2 44 52 2 44 52 281 625 625 625 625 625 625 625 00000ED0 00000ED0 00000ED0 00000ED0 00000ED0 00000ED0 00000ED0 00000ED0 defsym tapedir defsym HHCPNO421 HHCPNO421 HHCPNO421 HHCPNO421 HHCPNO421 HHCPNO421 CUU S CUU cuu cuu CCUU CCUU ccuu ccuu CSS 0 tapedir Figure 53 DEFSYM command clear defined symbol Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 218 7 29 DETACH Remove device 7 29 1 Function The DETACH command removes a device from the current configuration The effect of this command is immediately visible in the device display of the Hercules Windows GUI and the Hercules Peripherals display 7 29 2 Syntax Descriptive DETACH device Diagram DETACH device TTT TT YY 7 29 3 Parameter device The device number of the device that is to be removed from the current configuration 7 29 4 Examples Example 1 Detach device 000F from the active configuration 2007 06 30 13 31 32 187 O0000FC4 detach 000f 2007 06 30 13 31 32 187 00000FC4 HHCCFO47I Device 000F detached Figure 54 DE
260. directory is given then SCLP disk I O for the specified directory path is enabled NONE disables SCLP disk I O A subsequent list directed IPL resets the path to the location of the ins file and a subsequent CCW type IPL disables SCLP disk I O 4 46 2 Syntax Descriptive SCLPROOT NONE directory Diagram p gt gt SCLPROOT Pas NONE lt lt i eee directory 4 46 3 Parameter NONE Disables SCLP disk HO directory Specifies the directory from which SCLP disk I O is allowed A subsequent IPL of an ins file or a subsequent CCW type IPL will override this 4 46 4 Examples Example 1 Disable SCLP disk I O SCLPROOT NONE Example 2 Specifies D SCLP DISk as the directory from which SCLP disk I O is allowed SCLPROOT D SCLP DISK Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 91 4 47 SHCMDOPT Shell command option 4 47 1 Function This statement defines the behaviour of the shell sh command 4 47 2 Syntax Descriptive SHCMDOPT DISABLE NODIAG8 Diagram p gt gt SHCMDOPT TT DISABLE ee NODIAG8 4 47 3 Parameter DISABLE When set to DISABLE sh shell commands are globally disabled and will result in an error if entered either directly via the Hercules hardware console or programmatically via the DIAG8CMD interface NODIAG8 When set to NODIAG8 only the programmatic execution of shell commands via the the diagnose 8 interface is disabled sh shell commands en
261. dow files the base files can be kept on a read only device like CDROM or can be defined as read only thus ensuring that these files can never be corrupted The shadow file does not have to actually exist when it is defined in the configuration file The shadow operand of the sf parameter is simply a filename template that will be used to name the shadow file whenever one is be created Shadow files are created using the sf xxxx or sf commands The shadow file name must have a position where the shadow file number will be set This is either the character preceeding the last period after the slash or the last character if there is no period For example sf shadows linux1_ dsk Hercules console commands are provided to add a new shadow file remove the current shadow file with or without backward merge compress the current shadow file and display the shadow file status and statistics Please note that the sf parameter has to be coded in lowercase letters otherwise an error message is presented HHCDAOO3E parameter 2 is invalid SF Details on how to work with shadow files can be found in chapter 7 94 ff SYNCIO enables possible synchronous I O This is a DASD I O feature wherein guest I O requests are completed synchronously during the actual emulated execution of the SIO SSCH START IO START SUBCHANNEL instructions rather than being deferred and executed asynchronously in a separate device I O thread
262. e XPNDSIZE size Diagram XPNDSIZE size _____ gt lt 4 55 3 Parameter nnnnnnn A decimal number in the range of 0 to 16777215 The actual upper limit is determined by your host system s architecture and operating system and on some systems the amount of physical memory and paging space you have available 4 55 4 Examples Example 1 Set the size of the expanded storage to 256 MB XPNDSIZE 256 Example 2 Set the size of the expanded storage to 2 GB XPNDSIZE 204 Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 100 4 56 YROFFSET TOD clock offset from actual date 4 56 1 Function Specifies a number of years to offset the TOD clock from the actual date Positive numbers will move the clock forward in time while negative numbers will move it backward A common value for non Y2K compliant operating systems is YROFFSET 28 which has the advantage that the day of the week and the presence or absence of February 29 is the same as the current year 4 56 2 Syntax Descriptive YROFFSET years years Diagram gt gt YROFFSET oo a years lt lt lt E years 4 56 3 Parameter years Years specifies a number of years to offset the TOD clock from the actual date This value may not be specified as greater than 142 years the total range of the TOD clock Specifying a value that causes the computed TOD clock year to be earlier than the
263. e Form Feed FF Do not advance any lines before printing overstrike the pre CR vious line blank Advance one line single spacing CR LF 0 Advance two lines double spacing CRLF CRLF Advance three lines triple spacing CRLF CRLF CRLF Table 22 HercPrt ASA Control Characters and ASCII Equivalents 8 26 10 Samples The first sample shows a Job Separator Control File for MVS 3 8u It is based on the sample that is pro vided with the HercPrt Software Please note that the sections Separator and FieldNames have been shortened to keep the sample within reasonable limits in this manual Both sections show only the first and the last entry of the nume Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 459 rous Trigger and FieldNames entries Complete working job separator control files are delivered with the HercPrt software for MVS 3 8J for DOS VS Release 34 and for VM 370 Release 6 Separator Pages 1 0 Triggers 25 Trigger1 Line 31 Column 1 Value END BND XBND amp Ke ABND KKK ARND HK KA RND RAK A AARND XR AAA AARND XR RAM Trigger25 Line 55 Column 1 Value END BND XBND amp amp Ke ABND KK AEN HK KA END HK KAA ARND XR RAK AARND XH RR AM FieldNames Names 16 Namel JOBID Name1l6 SYSTEM JOBID Line 33 Column 18 Width 62 SYSTEM Line 53 Column 18 W
264. e Valid device types are 3410 3420 3422 3430 3480 3490 8809 and 9347 fakefile The filename and path of the Fake Tape virtual file or An asterisk defines an empty tape station The tape must be manually be loaded on request If the filename starts with the character at sign the file then describes a list of tape emulation files to be loaded in succession The syntax of each line in this file is identical to the information that can be coded directly after the device type in the overall configu ration file Any emulation file name parameter specified in this file may be substituded by the character in which case it specifies a set of options to be applied to all additional emulation files specified in the list This function emulates an Automatic Cartridge Feeder ACF The ACF is a feature on Cartridge type tape drives 3480 3490 etc that automatically loads a new tape when a tape is removed from the drive There is no real control over this device by the host as it just keeps on feeding tapes one after the other Although the ACF feature is unique to cartridge type systems the emulation accepts the use of the same technique for emula ted 1 2 inch tapes reel drives as well Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 130 Parameters are appended in succession In all cases if the same parameter is coded more than once the last instance takes precedence Therefore it is possible to specify
265. e 1 Create a new AWS tape file named NEWTAPE AWS with volser NEWTAP and owner HERCULES in the directory D MVS TAPE HETINIT d D MVS TAPE NEWTAPE AWS NEWTAP HERCULES 8 18 5 Sample Utility Output Sample 1 Create a new HET tape file named NEWTAPE HET with volser NEWTAP and owner HERCULES in the directory D MVS TAPE D HERCULES gt hetinit D MVS TAPE NEWTAPE HET NEWTAP HERCULES Hercules HET IEHINITT program Version 3 05 c Copyright 1999 2005 by Roger Bowler Jan Jaeger and others Figure 220 HETINIT utility output Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 423 8 19 HETMAP Show information about a HET or AWS tape file 8 19 1 Function The Hercules HETMAP program displays information about a HET or an AWSTAPE tape file By default HETMAP shows label and file information Optionally HETMAP may be used to display data set infor mation or to display label information in a format similar to the output of TAPEMAP HETMAP shows information about the tape and files on it and does not display actual file contents 8 19 2 Syntax Descriptive HETMAP option option filename Diagram eer AY ss E A option 8 19 3 Parameter Options a Print all label and file information default d Print only dataset information f Print only file information h Display usage summary l Print only label information t Print TAPEMAP compatible form
266. e 13 Figure 183 Figure 184 Figure 185 Figure 186 Figure 187 Figure 188 Figure 189 Figure 190 Figure 191 Figure 192 Figure 193 Figure 194 Figure 195 Figure 196 Figure 197 Figure 198 Figure 199 Figure 200 Figure 201 Figure 202 Figure 203 Figure 204 Figure 205 Figure 206 Figure 207 Figure 208 Figure 209 Figure 210 Figure 211 Figure 212 Figure 213 Figure 214 Figure 215 Figure 216 Figure 217 Figure 218 Figure 219 Figure 220 Figure 221 Figure 222 Figure 223 Figure 224 Figure 225 Figure 226 Figure 227 Figure 228 TIMERINT command Set new value eeeeceeeeeneeeeeenneeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeetiaeeeeneaa 364 AB e lu El EE 365 TODDRAG command display TOD clock facto 366 TODDRAG command set TOD clock Tacho 367 TRACEOPT command TRADITIONAL sssesseesseesseesseeesreserstntetnnetnnstnnstrnstnnnsnnntrnsrnsnnnnnn 369 TRACEOPT command DEOGGEIDGT intaia aana a aea a ae eau aaia 369 TRACEOPT command NOPREOG erent aa a a a a a aen tiaa aa teaiin 369 TT32 DEBUG el ET e ET 370 LISS MOER Hlp eebe a a ee 371 TIS2 STATS Command WEE 371 E el Lu Te EE 373 UPTIME command uptime lt 1 day 374 UPTIME command uptime gt 1 week 374 V command display virtual storage with length 0 eee essence eeeeeeeeeeeteeeeetaeeeeeeaeeeenees 376 V command alter virtual storage eee eeeeeeeeeene cece ener cette ae ee eee aeee ee taaeeeeeeaaeeeeee
267. e CCKD console command supports the same options as the CCKD configuration statement 7 16 2 Syntax Descriptive CCKD HELP STATS OPTS option value option vaiue where option can be COMP 1 n COMPPARM 1 oi RA 2 n GCPARM 0 NOSTRESS FREEPEND 1 ail FSYNC 0 TRACE 0 al LINUXNULL 0 1 GCSTART 0 1 0 0 Diagram CCKD option value lt HELP STATS OPTS Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 193 where option can be COMP ae a TT TN COMPPARM EE EE Ee E S SE RAE g EE See e EE W S e GCINT 5 GCPARM a7 ee NOSTRESS EE EE FREEPEND al e FSYNC o So TRACE Fee o A a t LINUXNULL SE ar GCSTART i o r Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 194 7 16 3 Parameter HELP STATS OPTS option Display the CCKD help information CCKD command only Display the current CCKD statistics CCKD command only Display the current CCKD options CCKD command only Set a CCKD option Multiple options may be specified separated by commas with no intervening blanks The CCKD options are COMP n Specifies the compression type to be used This overrides the compression used for all CCKD files The default 1 means don t override the compression Valid compression types are 1 Default 0 None 1 zlib 2 bzi
268. e Page 183 7 10 AUTOMOUNT Show or update allowable tape automount directories 7 10 1 Function The AUTOMOUNT command allows it to add or delete entries from the list of allowable unallowable tape automount directories or lists all currently defined list entries if any The format of the lt dir gt directory operand for add del operations is identical to that as described in the documentation for the AUTOMOUNT configuration file statement i e prefix with or as needed The automount feature is approriately enabled or disabled for all tape devices as needed depending on the updated empty non empty list state 7 10 2 Syntax Descriptive AUTOMOUNT ADD directory DEL directory LIST or AUTOMOUNT d7rectory Diagram p gt gt AUTOMOUNT directory Y or gt gt AUTOMOUNT ADD director rr E DEL E 7 10 3 Parameter ADD or Add an entry to the list of allowable tape automount directories DEL or Delete an entry from the list of allowable tape automount directories LIST List all currently defined list entries of allowable tape automount directories directory Specifies the host system directory where the guest is allowed or not to automatically load virtual tape volumes from Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 184 7 10 4 Examples Example 1 Add an entry to the list of allowable tape automount directories 0000097
269. e Page 248 7 46 HST History of commands 7 46 1 Function The HST command displays a list of the last commands entered from the command line 7 46 2 Syntax Descriptive HST 1 HST HST L 0 Diagram 1 7 46 3 Parameter 1 HST 1 is the same as HST without argument and retrieves the last entered command Lin If n is a positive number then HST retrieves the n th command from the list If nis a negative number then HST retrieves the n th last command from the list L or 0 HST L or HST 0 number 0 displays a list of the last ten commands entered on the command line Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 249 7 46 4 Examples Example 1 Display a list of the last ten commands entered 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 7235 ee Beat 123 233 SE 7235 123 2233 223 323 CO GO GO Oo 809 809 809 809 809 809 809 809 809 809 809 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 ipl 0A80 R aea aia ar clocks CE fpr gpr help maxrates Figure 86 HST command Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 250 7 47 Generate UO attention interrupt for device 7
270. e STIDP instruction The default version code is FD when ARCHMODE S 370 or ARCHMODE ESA 390 is specified For the z ARCH or ESAME architecture mode respectively the version code is alwyas stored as 00 and any value specified here is ignored 4 13 2 Syntax Descriptive CPUVERID 00 For Z ARCH and ESAME CPUVERID FD verid For S 370 and ESA 390 Diagram For Z ARCH and ESAME p gt CPUVERID 00 lt lt For S 370 and ESA 390 gt gt CPUVERID EE FD ee ee verid 4 13 3 Parameter verid Any valid 2 digit hexadecimal CPU version code A list of valid version codes can be found in the Hercules Windows GUI file cpu types txt 4 13 4 Examples Example 1 Set the CPU version code to FD CPUVERID FD Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 51 4 14 DEFSYM Define symbol 4 14 1 Function Defines symbol symbol is to contain value value The symbol can then be the object of a substitution used later in the configuration file or for console commands If va ue contains blanks or spaces it must be enclosed within quotes or apostrophes See chapter Symbol Substitutions for a more in depth discus sion on this feature Substitution is available in configuration statements meaning it is possible to perform substitution in the DEFSYM statement itself However symbols are always defined as the last step in the process so attempting to self define a symbol will resul
271. e a lot of messages depending on the available trace entries 7 52 2 Syntax Descriptive Diagram kb Kb 7 52 3 Parameter None 7 52 4 Examples Example 1 Display the current CCKD trace entries 0000008E k 0000008E HH 0000008E 1 0000008E 1 0000008E 1 0000008E 1 0000008E 1 0000008E 1 0000008E 1 0000008E 1 4 A CCD900I print_itrace 3d Ae WwW GA U U UUU 22741 ce el ee ee iZ Ta CS E 227 24 22731 2275 several lines not 09347 01 09371 09382 109392 09403 09413 09421 109428 Oo Go CH CH oro G amp G displayed 4 4 4 8 Oo oO oo Oo gcperc gcperc gcperc gcperc gcperc gcperc gcperc gcperc size free free free free free free free 2621 0fb72c45 end 0fb72cbe end 0fba543c end 0fba6094 end 0fbb7989 end O0fbb7ab4 end O0fbc971la end 44 1st Oxfb72c45 nbr 69 Ofb72cbe Ofb7ea56 Ofba5f64 Ofba60bb Ofbb7alb Ofbb7b26 Ofbc975b argest 16099545 121 pend Len Len Len Len Len Len Len 48536 2856 39 146 114 65 pend pend pend pend pend pend oa So oS e Go kA Ga Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 260 0000008E 1 0000008E 1 0000008E 1 0000008E 1 0000008E 1 0000008E 1 0000008E 1 0000008E 1 0000008E 1 0000008E 1 0000008E 1 0000008E 1 0000008E 1 0000008E 1 0000008E 1 0000008E 1 0000008E 1 0000008E 1
272. e address devtype This is the device type Valid device types are 3410 3420 3422 3430 3480 3490 8809 and 9347 tdf The filename and path of the tape descriptor file 5 8 2 4 Examples Example 1 Define a 3480 tape device on device address 0582 The tape device is an Optical Media Attach OMA virtual file CD ROM The filename of the Tape Descriptor File TDF is UAA186 TDF located in path CDROM TAPES 0582 3480 CDROM TAPES UAA186 TDF 5 8 3 AWSTAPE virtual files 5 8 3 1 Function AWSTAPE device statements are used to define AWSTAPE virtual files to the Hercules configuration AWSTAPEs contain a complete tape in one file AWSTAPE files consist of variable length EBCDIC blocks Each block is preceded by a 6 byte header Filemarks are represented by a 6 byte header with no data This is the same format as is used by the IBM P 390 systems The argument specifies the location of the AWSTAPE file 5 8 3 2 Syntax Descriptive devaddr devtype awsfile arguments Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 123 where arguments are MAXSIZE n MAXSIZEK 0 MAXSIZEM n oul EOTMARGIN 7 READONLY 0 1 RO NORING RW RING DEONIRQ 0 1 NOAUTOMOUNT Diagram devaddr devtype eo lt L arguments a where arguments are MAXSIZE H n MAXSIZEK p 0 n MAXSIZEM ge e 0 n EOTMARGIN n HAA READONLY 0 8S 7 p Ee
273. e device provided they are also a member of the specified terminal group if any The terminal group name must match if specified regardless of any optional IP address mask To summarize the device number suffix always takes precedence over any group name and any group name always takes precedence over any IP address mask value 5 2 4 Examples Example 1 Define an integrated 3270 SYSG console on device address 0000 the device address is ignored for SYSG consoles 0000 SYSG Example 2 Define an integrated 3270 SYSG console on device address 0000 Allow only clients with terminal group name SYSGCONS and from IP address 192 168 0 100 with subnet mask 255 255 255 0 to connect 0000 SYSG SYSGCONS 192 168 0 100 255 255 255 0 Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 108 Example 3 Define an integrated 3270 SYSG console on device address 0000 Allow clients with any terminal group name but only from IP address 192 168 0 100 to connect 0000 SYSG 192 168 0 100 Example 4 Define an integrated 3270 SYSG console on device address 0000 Allow only clients with terminal group name SYSGCONS and from IP address 192 168 0 100 to connect 0000 SYSG SYSGCONS 192 168 0 100 Example 5 Define an integrated 3270 SYSG console on device address 0000 Allow only clients with terminal group name SYSGCONS to connect 0000 SYSG SYSGCONS Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 109 5 3 Console
274. e eeeee scene eee aeeeeaaeeeeeeeseaeeesaaeeeseaeeneneeees 474 VTT2DISK utility ICE EE 476 VMIT2TAPE Utility JC DEE 476 VITZGNV Utility EE 477 LOGO GC 484 POG O SClSS EE 485 RUMECOMMANAS GC EE 493 Batch file to start tn8270 SESSIONS 00 0 0 eee ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaeeeseeaaeeeeneaaeeeeseaaes 494 HereRdr Help EE 499 SUBMIt REXX for SPE PC sees ere deed an Ae edad ete 500 The Heresub Perl Scriptie uniaan a a a e i a aa 501 Sample Syntax Description 513 Sampl Syntax Diagram ed iniiai aide en aa ENEE e 514 Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 15 Tables Table 1 Hercules System Parameters nsen nsen nnen nnnnn 23 Table 2 Hercules Device Definitions AA 24 Table 3 Supported codepage MAPPINGS cceeececeeeceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeceaeeeeaaeceeeeeceaeeeseaeseeaeeseeeeeseaeeesiaeeseaeeseaes 45 Table 4 Process Priority CONVErSIONS civic ieseni es tetens SEENEN ENEE DREES EAR ee ive ea aaa thee 102 Table 5 Thread Priority Conversions isisi tiana eaaa e a a aa ae aa aaa aai a ia aaaas 103 Table 6 Default GU Type Seinien deed a aye en ie E eee 148 Table 7 Normal Cursor handling sucer enine a E r a E NE N E 157 Table 8 Extended cursor handlmg A 158 Table 9 Message prefix Oovenlew naana 158 Table 10 Hercules Console Commands sorted alphabetically cc ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeseeeeseaeeeeeeees 165 Table 11 Hercules Console Commands grouped by functionality cccccceee
275. e in a five second interval to automatically detect when a tape is mounted YES is equivalent with SCSIMOUNT 5 n A value from 1 to 99 seconds inclusive enables this option and causes periodic queries of the SCSI tape drive to automatically detect if a tape is mounted 4 5 4 Examples Example 1 Enable automatic detection of SCSI tape mounts and set the periodic queries of the SCSI tape drive to a 30 seconds interval AUTO_SCSI_MOUNT 30 Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 37 4 6 CCKD Compressed CKD DASD options 4 6 1 Function The CCKD configuration statement is used to alter CCKD processing The CCKD configuration statement supports the same options as the CCKD console command 4 6 2 Syntax Descriptive CCKD option value option value option value where option can be CoMP 1 n COMPPARM 1 ai RA 2 n RAQ 4 RAT 2 WR 2 7 GCINT i GCPARM n NOSTRESS 0 ge FREEPEND 1 ny 1 n n 10 0 FSYNC TRACE LINUXNULL 0 i 1 GCSTART 0 1 0 0 Diagram r gt ENN J option vatue i Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 38 com E AER 1 COMPPARM 1 a ee e aa i Sq a a 2 ey FW 2 GCINT EE 10 oe cael GCPARM 8 EES NOSTRESS 9 E FREEPEND em mm FSYNC 8 TATA TRACE EE g ee LINUXNULL S
276. e itself contains quotes then the command line must be enclosed in apostrophes in stead of quotes This optional parameter specifies that carriage return line feed sequences are written at the end of each line If the CRLF argument is not specified then line feeds only are written at the end of each line This argument specifies that the output file will not be cleared to zero bytes when it is opened If NOCLEAR is not specified then any previous content of the file is destroyed when the file is opened for output SOCKDEYV indicates that the line printer is a socket device wherein the filename is actually a socket specification instead of a device filename When used there must only be one filename specified in the form port or host port The device then accepts remote connections on the given TCP IP port and writes data to the socket instead to a device file This allows automatic remote spooling of line printer data The sockdev option is mutually exclusive with all other printer options like CRLF etc and must be specified alone 5 7 4 Examples Example 1 Define a 1403 line printer device on device address 000E The printed output has to be written to the file D A PRT PRT1 TXT with carriage return line feed sequences at the end of each line Any existing output in the file has to be kept when the file is opened for output OOOE 1403 D PRT PRT1 TXTI CRLF NOCLEAR Example 2 Define a 3211 line printer device on device
277. e local instance is the server for that device and the remote instances are the clients It is possible that each instance acts as both a client and a server If a local instance declares a device as remote on another instance and on this remote instance the device is defined again as remote on a third instance then the original instance will have to hop through this second instance to get to the real device It is not necessary to IPL an operating system on the device server Any number of Hercules instances can act as a server in a HERCPLEX When SHRDPORT is specified in the Hercules configuration the thread shared_server is started at the end of Hercules initialization If Shared Device Support is requested on a device statement then the Her cules instances cannot initialize these devices until the server is started on each system In this case the device trying to access a server gets the connecting bit set on in the DEVBLK and the device still needs to initialize After the shared server is started a thread is attached for each device that is connecting to complete the connection the device init handler 9 2 Caching Cached records i e CKD tracks or FBA blocks are kept independently on both the client and server sides Whenever the client issues a START request to initiate a channel program the server will return a list of records to purge from the clients cache These will have been updated by other clients since the last START req
278. e mounted on a SCSI tape drive If the input file is a SCSI tape it is read and processed until physical EOD end of data is reached That is it does not stop whenever multiple tapemarks or filemarks are read rather it continues processing until the SCSI tape drive says there is no more data on the tape The resulting AWSTAPE output disk file may be specified for the filename on a Hercules tape device con figuration statement It can then be used in order for the Hercules guest O S to read the exact same data without having a SCSI tape drive physically attached to the host system This allows you to easily transfer SCSI tape data to other systems that may not have SCSI tape drives attached to them The possible return codes and their meaning are 0 oO ON Oa P OO zech ek eek GO N O Successful completion Invalid arguments or no arguments given Unable to open SCSI tape drive device file Unable to open AWSTAPE disk file Unrecoverable UO error setting variable length block processing for SCSI tape device Unrecoverable I O error rewinding SCSI tape device Unrecoverable UO error obtaining status of SCSI device Unrecoverable UO error reading block header from AWSTAPE disk file Unrecoverable UO error reading data block AWSTAPE block size too large Unrecoverable I O error writing tapemark Unrecoverable UO error writing block header to AWSTAPE disk file Unrecoverable UO error writing data block 8 21 2 Syntax
279. e one of the following c list the member s as card images a list the member s in ASCII If no arguments are given the program displays help text and exits Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 392 8 8 4 Examples Example 1 Create a member list of PDS SYS1 PARMLIB on volume MVSRES CCKD DASDCAT i D MVS DASD MVSRES CCKD SYS1 PARMLIB Example 2 Print member IEASLP0O from PDS SYS1 PARMLIB on volume MVSRES CCKD as card images DASDCAT i D MVS DASD MVSRES CCKD SYS1 PARMLIB IEASLPOO c Example 3 Print all members from PDS SYS1 PARMLIB on volume MVSRES CCKD as card images DASDCAT i D MVS DASD MVSRES CCKD SYS1 PARMLIB c 8 8 5 Sample Utility Output Sample 1 Create a member list of PDS SYS1 PARMLIB on volume MVSRES CCKD D Hercules gt dasdcat i D MVS DASD MVSRES CCKD SYS1 PARMLIB Hercules DASD cat program Version 3 05 c Copyright 1999 2006 by Roger Bowler Jan Jaeger and others commnd00 gtfparm ieaabd00 ieaapf00 ieabld00 ieadmp00 lnklst00 mvikey00 rpfkey00 smfprm00 tsokey00 vatlst00 Figure 205 DASDCAT utility output create PDS member list Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 393 Sample 2 Print member IEAIPSOO from PDS SYS1 PARMLIB on volume MVSRES CCKD as card images S SC ST Si S SA E SC Si Rf S SA S GE SC Si D Hercules gt dasdcat i D MVS
280. e sssi E AAAA T 155 6 3 Using the ee te EE 156 CR Ee Bel S P E A ESAE T E E S N E TTE 158 6 5 Hercules Console Commands sorted alphabetically ccccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeesnaeeeeeeeeaees 161 6 6 Hercules Console Commands grouped by funchtonaltv e 166 7 Console Command Descriotions stne tttnstisstinstinttnastnnnt tnnt nnnnnnnnnn nenun nn nann nnna 172 7 1 Imessage SCP priority message ssesesesesesesressrnssrnsstrssirsstnsstnsstnsstnnstenstensrensrensnnnsnnnnnennn nnne 172 7 2 or Log comment tO syslog ssseesssseessrresssrrssssrnesrnnnesrennennnnnnntnnnnnnnnnnnttannntnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnna 173 lao reply SCP eru E EE 174 ZA List all commands command specific help cccccceeeeeceeeeeceeeeeeeaeeeeeeeseeeeeseaeeesnaeeeeeeeeeaees 175 7 5 AEA Display AEA absolute effective address tables ccccceceeeeeeececeeeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaees 177 7 6 AIA List AIA absolute instruction address Teldel 178 Z AR Display access registers eioen ekan rreri i arae i airas aeaee n der eein ae ee 179 7 8 ARCHMODE Set architecture mode 180 9 ATTACH Gontigure leie aeia a a a a aaa Edge A veal 182 7 10 AUTOMOUNT Show or update allowable tape automount directories cceeeeeeeeeeees 184 7 11 AUTO GC MOUNT Automatic SCSI tape mountel nsen nene 186 7 12 BEE te kt a ees 4 ode de ac anit R A OAR Ge 188 7 13 B Set breakpoint s a a a a aE aAA ES 189 7 14 B Delete breakpoi
281. e then all devices will have identical characteristics All devices defined as a group must be defined on a single channel A channel is defined as a continuous group of Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 25 256 or hexadecimal 100 devices For example devices 0010 and 0020 are on the same channel whereas devices 0100 and 0210 are not on the same channel The devnum itself is either a 1 to 4 digit hexadecimal number in the range 0000 to FFFF for ESA 390 or 0000 to OFFF for S 370 The device number uniquely identifies each device to the operating system devtype is the device type argumeni s is a list of parameters depending on the device type These parameters are explained in the sections that describe each device type Examples 0120 0230 16 0583 0587 3 6 Sample Configuration File 3380 mvsv5r 120 3270 GROUP1 192 168 100 0 255 255 255 0 3420 maxsizeM 170 eotmargin 131072 The following figure shows a real example of a Hercules configuration file used for running the MVS 3 8J operating system Please note that not all possible parameter and definitions are contained in this sample Q PUMODEL PUSERIAL PUVERID PARNAME ODEL LANT UFACTURER SIZE DSIZE PAGE PORT CPU VEC RCHMODE LOADPARM SYSEPOCH ee te EI SGD SCY O Vv D o J H E za G gt Zz GG OO S G Description MaxShutdownSecs 60 Hercules Emulator Control file MVS V3 8J S
282. e virtual storage at address x 00010000 to x FFFFFFFF 05 58 33 728 00000C24 v 00010000 FFFFFFFF 05 58 33 728 00000C24 V 00010000 primary R 00010000 05 58 33 728 00000C24 V 00010000 K 06 FFFFFFFF 5820901C 47F0A1F0 91802003 0 03 Figure 197 V command alter virtual storage Example 3 Display virtual storage from address x 00010000 to adress x 00010100 05 59 14 447 00000C24 v 00010000 00010100 05 59 14 447 00000C24 V 00010000 primary R 00010000 05 59 14 447 00000C24 V 00010000 K 06 FFFFFFFF 5820901C 47F0A1F0 91802003 0 03 05 59 14 447 00000C24 V 00010010 K 06 47E0A1EC 58202004 47F0A1F0 96803200 0 00 05 59 14 447 00000C24 V 00010020 K 06 91803200 4770A1FE 12224770 A1DC5850 j Medics 8 05 59 14 447 00000C24 V 00010030 K 06 30201FCC 195C4770 A01C50C0 30245820 Rem Sel 05 59 14 447 00000C24 V 00010040 K 06 30089140 320047E0 A28441B0 202C58D0 j sd 05 59 14 447 00000C24 V 00010050 K 06 02FC98CD D19005ED 58C031F4 12CC4780 q J 4 05 59 14 447 00000C24 V 00010060 K 06 A24E9120 300047E0 A2424160 203047F0 s j Ve D 05 59 14 447 00000C24 V 00010070 K 06 A2464160 20485870 31F445E0 A2E458CO s 4 sU Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 376 05 59 14 447 00000C24 V 00010080 K 06 31F812CC 4780A262 187C4160 203045E0 8 s 05 59 14 447 00000C24 V 00010090 K 06 A2E458C0 31FC12CC 4780A276 187C4160 sU Sea Bis 0
283. ea that is to be displayed or altered length Length of the storage area that is to be displayed The value of en has to be given in hexadecimal If the length is omitted then 64 bytes of real storage are displayed by default value Value is a hex string of up to 32 pairs of digits 32 bytes which will be written to the real storage address given by the addr parameter After altering the storage 16 bytes of real storage starting at addr are displayed 7 80 4 Examples Example 1 Display 256 bytes of real storage starting from location x 00000000 1 00 58 171 00000FC4 r 00000000 ff 1 00 58 171 OO0000FC4 R 00000000 K 0E 040C0000 81080278 00000000 00000000 a 1 00 58 171 00000FC4 R 00000010 K 0E 00FC7FCO 00000000 070C0000 81412E10 a 1 00 58 171 00000FC4 R 00000020 K 0E 070C0000 80FD9ABO 070C2000 00047BB4 06 L 1 00 58 171 00000FC4 R 00000030 K 0E 00000000 00000000 070C2000 810C7C90 a 1 00 58 171 00000FC4 R 00000040 K 0E 00000000 00000000 00000000 OOFC7FCO eeee DI 1 00 58 171 00000FC4 R 00000050 K 0E 00000000 00000000 O40C0000 81398AF8 asa 1 00 58 171 00000FC4 R 00000060 K 0E 040C0000 80FFBA80 00080000 8F61D880 Q Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 306 00 58 171 00000FC4 R 00000070 K 0E 00080000 8F61E968 040C0000 813A7F80 00 58 171 00000FC4 R 00000080 K 0E 00000000 00002401
284. ead Default is a nice value of 15 which means a low priority such that I O can be scheduled and completed in favour of CPU cycles On multi CPU systems a real CPU can be dedicated to Hercules by giving the CPU thread a very high dispatching priority 20 Caution CPUPRIO should not have a higher dispatching priority than the TOD clock and timer thread 4 11 2 Syntax Descriptive CPUPRIO 15 on Diagram SU A nn 4 11 3 Parameter nn This value specifies the priority for the CPU thread For details on the priority values see section 4 57 Process and Thread Priorities The default is 15 4 11 4 Examples Example 1 Give the CPU thread a very high dispatching priority of 20 CPUPRIO 20 Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 49 4 12 CPUSERIAL CPU serial number 4 12 1 Function CPUSERIAL specifies the 6 hexadecimal digit CPU serial number stored by the STIDP instruction 4 12 2 Syntax Descriptive CPUSERIAL 900001 serial Diagram gt gt CPUSERIAL EE 000001 Sg ee serial 4 12 3 Parameter serial Any valid 6 digit hexadecimal CPU serial number The default serial number is 000001 4 12 4 Examples Example 1 Set the CPU serial number to 001963 CPUSERIAL 001963 Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 50 4 13 CPUVERID CPU version code 4 13 1 Function CPUVERID specifies the 2 hexadecimal digit CPU version code stored by th
285. eading Syntax Diagrams All syntax diagrams in this book configuration statements console commands and utilities use a com mon structure as described in the following table Symbol Description Lat This symbol indicates the beginning of a syntax diagram This symbol indicates the end of a syntax diagram This symbol indicates that the syntax diagram is continued on the next line This symbol indicates that the syntax diagram is a continuation from the pre vious line required element aa optional_choice a required choice _1 required_choice_2 required choice 3 A required element keyword or variable appears on the main path of the hori zontal line You must specify this ele ment An optional element keyword or vari able appears below the main path of the horizontal line You may or may not specify this element A required choice keyword or variable appears vertically stacked in the main path of the horizontal line You must choose one of the available options Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 510 Symbol optional_choice_2 optional_choice_3 PARM option 1 option 2 option 2 2 option_3 Description An optional choice keyword or variable appears vertically stacked below the main path of the horizontal line You may choose one of the available options A keyword with options Only one of the available
286. ecoverable if the current image has not yet been written to the physical disk By default the value is set to 1 which means that if FSYNC is specified then the value is 1 otherwise it is 2 If 0 is specified then freed space is immediately available for new allocations The default is 1 You can specify a number from 1 to 4 FSYNC n Enables or disables FSYNC When FSYNC is enabled then the disk emulation file is syn chronized with the physical hard disk at the end of a garbage collection interval no more often than 5 seconds though This means that if FREEPEND is non zero and a catastro phic error occurs the emulated disks should be recovered coherently However FSYNC may cause performance degradation depending on the host operating system and or the host operating system level The default is 0 fsync disabled you can specify 0 dis able FSYNC or 1 enable FSYNC TRACE n Specifies the number of CCKD trace entries You would normally specify a non zero value when debugging or capturing a problem in CCKD code When the problem occurs you should enter the k Hercules console command which will print the trace table entries The default is 0 You can specify a number between 0 and 200000 Each trace entry represents 128 bytes Normally for debugging it is recommended to use 100000 LINUXNULLEn If set to 1 then tracks written to 3390 CCKD volumes that were initialized with the linux option will be checked if they are null th
287. ed program product operating systems is detected RESTRICTED is the default LICENSED Setting PAMPRDOS to LICENSED will allow you to run licensed program product ope rating systems normally This parameter has no effect on Linux 390 Linux for z Series or any 370 mode operating system If you are running Hercules under the Windows GUI a pop up window appears during startup which must be acknowledged before the startup continuous 4 44 4 Examples Example 1 Allow licensed program product operating systems to run normally PGMPRDOS LICENSED Example 2 Disallow licensed program product operating systems to run PGMPRDOS RESTRICTED Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 89 4 45 PLANT Plant name returned by STSI instruction 4 45 1 Function PLANT specifies the plant name returned by the STSI instruction The default plant name is ZZ 4 45 2 Syntax Descriptive PLANT ZZ name Diagram name 4 45 3 Parameter name Any name with a maximum length of four characters If the PLANT system parameter is not specified in the configuration file then the default name is ZZ 4 45 4 Examples Example 1 Specify HERC as the plant name returned by the STSI instruction PLANT HERC Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 90 4 46 SCLPROOT SCLP base directory 4 46 1 Function The SCLPROOT configuration statement sets the SCLP base directory If a
288. ed DASDISUP which can be run from the Unix or Windows command line after running DASDLOAD and fixes the XCTL tables Note Do not use this procedure except on OS 360 IPL volumes other operating systems do not have XCTL tables 8 12 2 Syntax Descriptive DASDISUP outfile SF shadowfi le Diagram DASDISUP outfi e RE EE SF shadowfi e 8 12 3 Parameter outfile The name of the OS 360 IPL volume to be updated shadowfile The optional name of the associated shadow DASD file 8 12 4 Examples Example 1 Fix the XCTL tables in SVCLIB on volume OS36IP 148 DASDISUP D MVS DASD OS36IP 148 Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 403 8 12 5 Sample Utility Output Sample 1 Fix the XCTL tables in SVCLIB on volume OS36IP 148 D HERCULES gt dasdisup D MVS DASD OS36IP 148 c Copyrig CDSO06W CDSOO06W CDSOO7W CDSO002I CDSO10I1 CDSO10I CDSO10I CDSO10I1 ember IGGO1 ember IGGO1 ember IGGO1 ember IGG01 ember IGG01 ember IGG01 ember IGG01 Hercules IEHIOSUP program ht 1999 2005 by 9PZ 9V6 9V6 9PX 9PY 9PZ 9V6 Version 3 05 Roger Bowler Jan Jaeger and others is not single text record is not single text record size 0A20 exceeds X 7F8 bytes End of directory 4 members selected skipped skipped skipped skipped Figure 211 DASDISUP utility output Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 404 8 13 DASDLOA
289. ed0 00000ed0 00000ed0 00000ed0 00000ed0 00000ed0 00000ed0 00000ed0 00000ed0 00000ed0 00000ed0 00000ed0 00000ed0 00000ed0 00000ed0 00000ed0 00000ed0 00000ed0 00000ed0 00000ed0 00000ed0 00000ed0 lock before lock after unlock STSCH lock before lock after unlock SSCH lock before af unlock LOCK ter before af LOCK lock ter unlock lock before lock after lock before lock after unlock unlock lock before lock after lock before lock after unlock unlock lock before lock after lock before lock after unlock unlock lock before lock after lock before lock after unlock unlock lock before lock after before af unlock lock lock ter lock before lock after lock lock before after unlock unlock 007c3684 007c3684 007c3684 00010013 0 12c0c88 01 01 2c0c88 2c0c88 00010013 0 0 0 0 0 0 12c0c88 12c0c88 12c0c88 12c0c88 12c0c88 12c0c88 12c194c 01 2c194c 004bd998 004bd998 004bd998 012c194c 012c194c 012c194c 004bd998 004bd998 004bd998 012c194c 012c0c88 012c0c88 007c368c 007c368c 007c368c 012c0c88 007c3684 007c3684 007c368c 007c368c 007c368c 007c3684 007c3684 007c3684 007c368c 007c368c 007c368c 012c0c88 012c0c88 007c368c 007c368c 007c368c 012c0c88 00000000 00000000 00000000 000320c0 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000470 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
290. ee section 4 57 Process and Thread Priorities The default for TODPRIO is 20 4 52 4 Examples Example 1 Set the priority of the TOD clock and the timer threads to 20 TODPRIO 20 Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 97 4 53 TRACEOPT Instruction trace display option 4 53 1 Function TRACEOPT sets the Hercules instruction tracing display option In addition to the TRACEOPT configu ration file statement there is also a corresponding TRACEOPT console command to dynamically display and or update the current setting at any time 4 53 2 Syntax Descriptive TRACEOPT TRADITIONAL REGSFIRST NOREGS Diagram p gt gt TRACEOPT TRADITIONAL lt Leier NOREGS 4 53 3 Parameter TRADITIONAL TRADITIONAL the default displays the registers following the instruction about to be executed such that pressing enter to execute the displayed instruction then shows the next instruction to be executed followed by the updated registers display REGSFIRST MREGSFIRST displays the current register contents followed by the instruction about to be executed such that pressing enter to execute the displayed instruction then shows the updated registers followed by the next instruction to be executed NOREGS NOREGS suppresses the registers display altogether and shows just the instruction to be executed 4 53 4 Examples Example 1 Set the tracing display option to display the registers follow
291. eeeeaeeeeaeeseeeeeceaeeeeaaeseeaeeseeeeeseaeeeeaeeeeneeeed 509 Table 32 Reading Syntax Diagrams nnen 512 Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 16 1 Preface 1 1 Edition information This edition applies to the Hercules S 370 ESA 390 and z Architecture Emulator Release 3 11 0 and to all subsequent versions releases and modifications until otherwise indicated in new editions Make sure you are using the correct edition for the level of software you are using 1 2 What this book is about This book is a guide for using and operating the Hercules Emulator and related additional products both required and optional For guidance in installation or debugging Hercules or for a general overview additional manuals are available Please note that some information can be found in more than one manual This redundancy is not inten ded to unnecessarily expand the manuals rather to help find all necessary information in one place 1 3 Who should read this book This book is mainly intended for people who are responsible for operating the Hercules Emulator It may also be useful if you are responsible for installing the Hercules Emulator 1 4 What you need to know to understand this book To understand this book you should be familiar using software under the Linux Windows Linux and or Mac OS X operating systems You should also have experience with Linux command shells or native DOS Microsoft Disk Operating System and the Mic
292. eeeeeaeeesaeeeeaeeeeeeeeaas 84 4 41 OSTAILOR Intended operating system c ccceccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaeeseneeeseaeeesaeeeeeeeseeeeess 85 4 42 PANRATE Panel refres Nir ate ctiecteatterectvctvenat E RTA ENE ttenee tae AE TE EE A Shaan 87 4 43 PANTITLE Hercules console window le 88 4 44 PGMPRDOS LPP license setting c ccccseeeesceceeeeeceeeeeaaeeeeeeesaeeesaaeeeeaaeseaeeeseaeeesaeeeeneeseaees 89 4 45 PLANT Plant name returned by STSI instruction ccccceeeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseaeeesaeeseneeesaees 90 4 46 SCLPROOT SCLP base directory 0 cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee scenes eeaeeeseaeeeeaeeeeeeeeseaeeesaeeeeaeeseeeeess 91 4 47 SHCMDOPT Shell command option 92 4 48 SHRDPORT Shared device Server port 93 4 49 SYSEPOCH Base date for TOD clock 94 4 50 TIMERINT Internal timer update interval 22 eecceeeeseeeeeenneeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaas 95 4 51 TODDRAG TOD clock drag fator sssccsssccieccesszcessniteszaccsetecrctietseacceuaccagnittntgeceeeaectigeasenennsteaans 96 4 52 TODPRIO Timer thread process pDriorftv 97 4 53 TRACEOPT Instruction trace display option 98 4 54 TZOFFSET TOD clock offset from GMT 99 4 55 XPNDSIZE Expanded storage in M 100 4 56 YROFFSET TOD clock offset from actual date 101 4 57 Process and Thread Priorities cceeeecceceesecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeaaeeeseeeeeeseeeeneeeeeseneees 102 5 Device Definition DE
293. eeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeaeeeeaeeseeeeeseaeessaeeeeeeeee 281 MSGHELD command release messages 282 MSGNOH COMMANG BT 283 OSTAILOR command display intended operating system 285 OSTAILOR command specify intended operating system 285 PANRATE command list Current value ceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeseaeeeeeseeeaeeeseenaeees 286 PANRATE command Set new value 0 00 0 ceeececeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeseeeeeeesaeeeeeseneaeeeseeeaeens 287 PGMTRACE command display settings eeen tsn nesr netnnnsnnesrnnsnnsrnnrnssrnnnnn 288 PGMTRACE command change settings ccccccseeeeeeeeceeeeeseeeeeaaeeeeeeeseeeesaeessaeeeeeeeee 289 PRiCOMIMANG E 290 PSW command display PSW cccccceeesceeeeeeeceeeeeeeaeeeeaeeseeeeeseaeeeeaaesgeeeeseeeeesaeeetaeseeeeeees 293 PSW command modify DW 293 PSW command modify DW 294 PTT command display trace options set options and start racer 296 PTT command display trace entries eccceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeaeens 298 PTT command start trace and issue automatic deplav ececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 298 PWD command ET 299 OD COMMANA EE 301 QUIET commands Eed Eed Ee 303 QUITE elen Lu WEE 305 R command display real storage e ce eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeesaeeeeeseeeeeeseneaeeeeeeeaeees 307 R command alter real storage eeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeseaeeeeesaeeeeeseeeeeeseeeaeeeenena
294. eeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 171 Tablest2 Sense Eegeregie eel A eed Pe teed te eegen ee 301 Table 13 Read Device Characteristics ccccceccceceeceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeaeeeeaeeseeeeeseaeeeeeaesseeeeseneeesoaeeesaeeeeneeee 302 Table 14 Read Configuration Data 302 Table 15 DASD image file Maintenance utilites eee eeeeee cece ee eeeeeeeeeeceeeee eae eesaaeeeeaeeseeeeseaeeseaeeeeneeees 379 Table 16 TAPE file maintenance utiles 380 Table 17 Miscellaneous utilities AA 380 Table 18 Third party ll 380 Table 19 Mainframe utilities usech deene ENEE eene 381 Table 20 Sample Control Files 0 cccccccsceeesceceeeeeceaeeeeeaeseeeeeccaeeeceaeseeaaeseeeeceaeeeeaaeseeaeeseeeeseaeeesaesseneeee 452 Table 21 HercPrt PDF and RTF Options cc ccceeceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeseeeeeceaeeeseaeeseaeeseeeeeseaeessaeseeneeees 456 Table 22 HercPrt ASA Control Characters and ASCII Equivalent ccccceseeeeeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeneeeee 459 Table 23 Supported CKD DASD Devices A 503 Table 24 Supported FBA DASD Devices A 504 Table 25 Correct CPU configuration example 71 506 Table 26 Correct CPU configuration example 21 506 Table 27 Correct CPU configuration example 2 507 Table 28 Correct CPU configuration example AN 507 Table 29 Correct CPU configuration example Pi 508 Table 30 Incorrect CPU configuration example GI 508 Table 31 Reading Syntax Descriptions cccceccceceeceeeeeeeeee cee
295. eeeess 280 MSGHLD Display or set timeout of held messages 281 MSGNOH Display message on console like VM but without header 283 OSTAILOR Specify intended operating system 284 PANRATE Display or set console refresh rate ceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneaeeeseeeaees 286 PGMTRACE Trace program interrupts ccccccceececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeseaeeseeeeseeeeesaeeseaeeeeneeeaas 288 PR Display di de ENEE 290 PSCP Send system control program priority message 291 PSW Display or alter program status word 292 Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 6 7 75 PTT Set display pthread trace cccecccecesceeneeceeeeeceaeeeeaeeseeeeeceaeeeseaeeseaeeseeeesaeeseeeeeeeeeseas 295 7 76 PWD Print working GireCtory eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeseaeeeeeseaeeeeeseaeeeeeseeeeeeseneeeeeeeeaaees 299 7 77 OD Query DAS D izes 2 2 ateet ee Eege Ee ebe 300 7 78 QUIET Toggle automatic refresh of console display data 303 7 79 QUIT Terminate the emulator cccccceeececeeeee cece eeeeaeeeeaeeseeeeceaeeesaaeseeaeeseaeeesaeeesaeeseneeeeaees 304 7 80 R Display or alter real Storage enee e E test edi ey A E TAARE TTA E EAEE 306 7 81 RESTART Generate restart Imterrupt nent 308 7 82 RESUME Resume Hercules rri enen aiaa a a eaan a aa dE ASE AE e Eara 309 7 83 RMMOD Delete a module eeccceeececeeeceeeeeeeeneeceeeeeceaeeeeaaeegaeeeceaeeeeaaeseeaeeseaeeesaeeseaaesseneesaa
296. eees 307 RESTART CGotnmapg enee Rees ege chats ec REES pasia da RSR Eeer 308 RESUME commands ent Ate wate teal hat ei te ee 310 RMMOD COMIMANG ME 311 Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 12 Figure 137 Figure 138 Figure 139 Figure 140 Figure 141 Figure 142 Figure 143 Figure 144 Figure 145 Figure 146 Figure 147 Figure 148 Figure 149 Figure 150 Figure 151 Figure 152 Figure 153 Figure 154 Figure 155 Figure 156 Figure 157 Figure 158 Figure 159 Figure 160 Figure 161 Figure 162 Figure 163 Figure 164 Figure 165 Figure 166 Figure 167 Figure 168 Figure 169 Figure 170 Figure 171 Figure 172 Figure 173 Figure 174 Figure 175 Figure 176 Figure 177 Figure 178 Figure 179 Figure 180 Figure 181 Figure 182 ee ul ET WEE 313 S GOMIMAMG WEE 315 Sy COMMMEANG PRATER ths 1 E T E alonceses A E E AE E 316 e elle EE EE Ee 317 S GEV COMMANG ssesck ices a Mat e a eegen Eesen eegen ate ET 319 S2 dev coOmMaAnd EEN 320 SAVECORE command Save specific area ccccccceceeeceeeeeeeeeeeceaeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeaeeeseaeeesaeennees 322 SAVECORE command save from begin to end 322 SCLPROOT command display directory c cceeeeecseeeeeeeceeeeeceaeeeseaeeeeeeeseaeeesaeeeeaaeeeeeees 323 SCLPROOT command Set directorm 324 SGPCOMMANG EE 325 SGRIPT command EE 326 SCSIMOUNT commande 328 wo E een EI TE 329 SE sCOMIMAN WEE 331 SF NOMERGE Command aiiai egene 331 SEC
297. eeseeeeeeeeeeaas 63 4 22 HTIPPORT HTTP server por dee raaa anaa de ea e Ed Ea a Raa aat 64 4 23 HTTPROOT HTTP server root directorm 66 4 24 IGNORE Ignore subsequent INCLUDE erors 67 4 25 INCLUDE Include configuration Te 68 4 26 IODELAY I O interrupt wait time LINUX ccceeeececeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee eeeeaeeeeaeeseaeeesaeeesaeeeeneeseaees 69 4 27 LDMOD Additional dynamic load modules tenets sae eeeeaeeeeeeeseaeeesaeeeeaaeeeeeeeeaas 70 4 28 LEGACYSENSEID SENSE ID CCW GNEA Teaturel 71 4 29 LOADPARM IPL Garameier ree oianrteaopaind donani opada aupa api addien saidara ihia oaa t aidi 72 4 30 EOGOPT Log Options EE 73 4 31 LPARNAME LPAR name returned by DIAG X 204 ooo ceececececeeeeeceneeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaaeseeeeeeaas 74 4 32 LPARNUM LPAR identification number 75 4 33 MAINSIZE Main storage in M 76 4 34 MANUFACTURER Manufacturer name returned by STSI Imstructon 77 4 35 MAXCPU Maximum number Of CPUS ssssesseesseessiesseessrissrnssrnssnnstrnssrnsrnstnsnnsrnssrnnsrnssrnnnns 78 4 36 MODEL Model names returned by STSI metructon 80 4 37 MODPATH Dynamic load module path 81 4 38 MOUNTED_TAPE_REINIT Control tape initialization 0 ecccececceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 82 4 39 NUMCPU Number of emulated CPUS 0 c ccceccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeceaeeeeaaeseeeeeseaeeesaeeseaaeeeeeeesaas 83 4 40 NUMVEC Number of vector facilities ccecceecececeneeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeaeeeeaaesee
298. efix for sending input to the device The default command prefix is All integrated devices must use a different com mand prefix To send a logon command to a 1052 C or 3215 C enter logon on the Hercules console 5 4 2 Syntax Descriptive devaddr devtype prefix Diagram devaddr devtype cot nnn prefix 5 4 3 Parameter devaddr This is the device address devtype This is the device type Valid terminal device types are 1052 C and 3215 C prefix This is the command prefix for the device The default command prefix is All devices must use a different command prefix 5 4 4 Examples Example 1 Define a 3215 C integrated console printer keyboard device on device address 0009 Specify as command prefix 0009 3215 C Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 113 5 5 Card Reader Devices 5 5 1 Function The card reader device statements are used to define card readers to the Hercules configuration The argument specifies a list of file names containing card images Additional arguments can be defined after the file names 5 5 2 Syntax Descriptive devaddr devtype filename filename SOCKDEV EOF INTRQ MULTIFILE EBCDIC AUTOPAD ASCII TRUNC Diagram devaddr devtype EE SOCKDEV EOF l Re INTRO el KS MULTIFILE Se lt EBCDIC ASCII AUTOPAD TRUNC 5 5 3 Parameter devaddr This is the device address
299. er Step Tooke Hercules System Log Hercules Version 3 07 c Copyright 1999 2010 by Roger Bowler Jan Jaeger and others IPL Built on Mar 23 2010 at 01 41 44 Build information Windows MSVC build for AMD6 4 Modes 5 370 ESA 390 z Arch Debugging Max CPU Engines 8 Using fthreads instead of pthreads isters Dynamic loading support Storage Using shared libraries Miscellaneous HTTP Server support NA No SIGABEND handler Regular Expressions support Automatic Operator support Machine dependent assists cmpxchgi cmpxchg4 cmpxchg8 Running on GOOFY Windows_NT 6 1 AMD64 MP 8 Configuration HHCHDO18I Loadable module directory is hercules Crypto module loaded c Copyright Bernard van der Helm 2003 2010 CPU Active Message Security Assist Message Security Assist Extension 1 Message Security Assist Extension 2 HHCCFO77I Engine 0 set to type 0 CP Registers HHCCFO77I Engine 1 set to type 0 CP HHCCFO77I Engine 2 set to type 0 CP GPRs HHCCFO77I Engine 3 set to type 0 CP CRs HHCCFO8iI D MVS CONF MVS38J CONF Will ignore include errors HHCPN197I Log option set TIMESTAMP PSW HHCHTOO1I HTTP listener thread started tid O00000A7C pid 3900 HHCHTO13I Using HTTPROOT directory D Hercules html HHCCFO20W Vector Facility support not configured Information HHCHTOO6I Waiting for HTTP requests on port 8089 HHCCFO6SI Hercules tid 00000A04 pid 3900 pgid 3900 priority 0 HHCSDOO4I Device 000E bound to socket 192 168 0 101 14031 HHCSD
300. er of trace entries to be kept 7 75 4 Examples Example 1 Display the current defaults then set the pthread trace options and start the trace 2009 03 13 10 33 33 359 000003BC ptt 2009 03 13 10 33 33 359 000003BC HHCPTOO3I ptt lock tod wrap to 0 0 2009 03 13 10 33 33 359 000003BC ptt prog inter signal io threads logger nowrap 10000 Figure 125 PTT command display trace options set options and start trace Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 296 Example 2 Display the pthread trace entries b FP SP SP BP A A SP A HB A BP A A SP SP A B HB HB BP SP BB BB BSB BB BP HB BP SB SP B BB BSB HB HB BP SB BP BS B BSB HB HB BP BSB B BB B SA 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 ptt 00000ed0 00000ed0 00000ed0 00000ed0 00000ed0 00000ed0 00000ed0 00000ed0 00000ed0 00000ed0 00000ed0 00000ed0 00000ed0 00000ed0 00000ed0 00000ed0 00000ed0 00000ed0 00000ed0 00000ed0 00000ed0 00000ed0 00000ed0 00000ed0 00000ed0 00000ed0 00000ed0 00000
301. er than to echo it at the console 7 2 2 Syntax Descriptive anytext or anytext Diagram gt gt anytext E or x anytext E 7 2 38 Parameter anytext The text that has to be displayed on the Hercules system log 7 2 4 Examples Example 1 Log a text string to the syslog 09 09 34 781 OO0000FC4 Comment routed to Hercules system log Figure 9 Log comment command Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 173 7 3 reply SCP command 7 3 1 Function The reply SCP command is used to give a reply to a system control program i e the guest operating system running under Hercules message To reply to a SCP message that gets issued to the Hercules console prefix the reply with a period dot 7 3 2 Syntax Descriptive reply Diagram reply gt L 7 3 3 Parameter reply The reply that will be routed to the system control program running under the Hercules Emulator 7 3 4 Examples Example 1 Reply to message IGGN504A 2007 06 30 09 09 34 781 OO0000FC4 IGGN504A SPECIFY UNIT FOR CATALOG MVS MASTER ON MVSRES 2007 06 30 09 10 04 390 O00000FC4 r 00 0148 2007 06 30 09 10 04 406 O00000FC4 HHCCP041I SYSCONS interface active 2007 06 30 09 10 04 406 O00000FC4 IEE600I REPLY TO 00 IS 0148 Figure 10 SCP command Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 174 ZA 7 4 1 Function The c
302. es The following table shows utilities used for miscellaneous functions DMAP2HRC P 390 DEVMAP conversion program Table 17 Miscellaneous utilities 8 1 4 Third Party Utilities The following table shows third party utilities used for various functions PRTPUB Mainframe print publishing program Table 18 Third party utilities Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 380 8 1 5 Mainframe Utilities The utilities according to the next table will run on the mainframe and provide various functionality that is useful for Hercules users AWSSL AWS virtual tape utility AWSUTIL AWS format tape file generation utility RAWSTAPE Reverse AWSTAPE utility VTTS Virtual tape transportation system Table 19 Mainframe utilities Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 381 8 2 CCKDCDSK CCKD DASD file integrity verification recovery and repair utility 8 2 1 Function The CCKDCDSK utility performs compressed or shadowed CKD DASD emulation file integrity verification and recovery and repair Calling the utility without any arguments will display a help information 8 2 2 Syntax Descriptive CCKDCDSK option option filename Diagram gt gt CCKDCDSK Tea filename gt lt option 8 2 3 Parameter Options V Display version information and exit f Force check even if OPENED bit is on ro Open the DASD file read on
303. es to be placed in the label Selects the utility IEBCOPY or IDCAMS to be called to stage the input dataset prior to insertion into the virtual tape If UNLOAD IDCAMS is selected then the TYPE value specifies the method EXPORT or REPRO to be used to stage the dataset prior to insertion into the virtual tape 8 28 6 Samples Sample 1 Create an AWS virtual tape from several input datasets inout DDs VIRTTAPE EXEC STEPLIB DD AWSPRINT DD myddnaml DD myddnam2 DD AWSFILE DD PGM AWSSL DSN your loadlib DISP SHR SYSOUT DSN your filel DISP SHR DSN your file2 DISP SHR DSN volser aws DISP NEW CATLG DELE SPACI H H E E your_space_parms DCB your_DCB_parms AWSCNTL DD AWSVOL VOLSER mytape COMPRESS 0 AWSPUT INDSN your first dataset AWSPUT INDSN your second dataset UNLOAD IEBCOPY AWSPUT INDD myddnaml AWSPUT INDD myddnaml UNLOAD IEBCOPY Figure 233 AWSSL JCL Create AWS virtual tape Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 470 Sample 2 Create datasets from files on an AWS virtual tape VIRTTAPE EXEC PGM AWSSL STEPLIB AWSPRINT myddnaml ff myddnam2 AWSFILE AWSCNTL DD DSN your loadlib DISP SHR DD SYSOUT DD DSN my filel DISP NEW CATLG DELETE SPACE your_space_parms DCB y
304. es that there is no timeout Specifies the number of milliseconds before terminating a POLL on a timeout when no ACK or NACK sequence is received A value of zero means the POLL ends immediately 1 specifies that there is no timeout Specifies the number of milliseconds before terminating an ENABLE operation on a timeout The timeout applies when DIAL NO DIAL IN or DIAL INOUT is specified the outgoing TCP call fails DIAL NO and there is no previously or currently established TCP connection for this line When DIAL NO is specified the timeout defaults to 10 seconds for DIAL IN or DIAL INOUT the timeout defaults to 1 meaning there is no timeout Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 151 5 12 4 Examples Example 1 Define 2703 BSC emulation line on device address 0023 The outgoing connection should be attempted as soon as an ENABLE CCW is expected incoming connections should always be accepted DIAL NO The IP address to listen on is 127 0 0 1 with port 3780 The remote port to which to direct a TCP connec tion is 3781 0023 2703 DIAL NO LHOST LOCALHOST LPORT 3780 RPORT 3781 Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 152 6 Hercules Console 6 1 Hercules Hardware Console Various aspects of Hercules can be controlled with console commands These commands are entered from the command line of the Hercules hardware management console HMC The Hercules hardware management cons
305. etail The configuration statements that define the emulated CPUs are e ENGINES Processor engine type e MAXCPU Maximum number of CPUs e NUMCPU Number of emulated CPUs B 1 General Explanations and Rules The ENGINES parameter specifies the type of engine for each emulated processor valid types are CP AP IP or IL MAXCPU specifies the maximum number of installed processor engines whereas NUMCPU defines the number of emulated processor engines that are configured online at IML time The ENGINES statement specifies any mixture of CPU types up to MAXCPU the maximum number of in stalled processors NUMCPU configures the processor engines in the order that they are specified on the ENGINES statement NUMCPU must be less than or equal to MAXCPU If NUMCPU is larger than MAXCPU then an error message is issued during the processing of the Hercules configuration file If it is less than MAXCPU then the remaining engines can be configured online later by the operating system B 1 Examples Some examples show the cooperation of these statements and the resulting configurations In the tables the following abbreviations and colours are used CPUs and status CP CPU of type CP specified IP CPU of type IP specified AP CPU of type AP specified D CPU got its type by default O CPU is taken online F CPU is taken offline Colours XX Green Resulting configuration as expected Yellow Resulting configuration may or may be not as
306. expected defaults or ignored engines Red Resulting configuration is in error The Hercules configuration file must be corrected XX XX Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 505 Example 1 ENGINES CP CP CP AP IP IP CP CP AXCPU 8 UMCPU 8 All CPUs are configured online with the type defined NUMCPU ENGINES CP CP CP AP IP IP CP CP CPU type CP CP CP AP IP IP CP CP Status O O O O O O O O Table 25 Correct CPU configuration example 1 Example 2 ENGINES CP CP CP AP IP IP CP CP AXCPU 8 NUMCPU 4 All CPUs are defined with the specified type and the first four CPUs are taken online The rest of the CPUs are taken offline CPU and State CPU1 CPU2 CPU3 CPU4 CPU5 CPU 6 CPU 8 3 5 6 7 8 MAXCPU 1 2 4 NUMCPU 1 2 3 4 SC SCH ENGINES CP CP CP AP IP IP CP CP CPU type CP CP CP AP IP IP CP CP Status O O O O F F F F Table 26 Correct CPU configuration example 2 Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 506 Example 3 ENGINES CP CP CP AP IP IP CP CP AXCPU 6 NUMCPU 4 All CPUs up to the number of MAXCPU are defined with their specified type Four CPUs as specified in NUMCPU are taken online the other two CPUs are taken offline Please note that the two excess CPUs that are specified in the ENGINES are ignored because MAXCPU is set only to six engines
307. eyword string The character string max 64 bytes to be passed to the IPL command processor The e string will be loaded into the low order 32 bits of the GPRs 4 characters per Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 258 7 51 4 Examples Example 1 IPL clear from device 0148 iplc 0148 HHCCP048I 0011 CCW 03000000 20000001 gt 040C0000 0001CEFA 00000000 00000000 0 2 HHCCPO75I 0011 Stat 0200 Count 0001 HHCCPO76I 0011 Sense 40000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 HHCCPO77I 0011 Sense INTREQ HHCCP048I 00C1 CCW 03000000 20000001 gt 040C0000 0001CEFA 00000000 00000000 002 HHCCPO75I 00C1 Stat 0200 Count 0001 HHCCPO76I 00C1 Sense 40000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 HHCCPO77I 00C1 Sense INTREQ HHCCP048I 00C2 CCW 03000000 20000001 gt 040C0000 0001CEFA 00000000 00000000 008 HHCCPO75I 00C2 Stat 0200 Count 0001 HHCCPO76I 00C2 Sense 40000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 HHCCPO771I 00C2 Sense INTREQ HHCCPO75I 00C3 Stat 0200 Count 0001 HHCCPO76I 00C3 Sense 40000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 HHCCPO77I 00C3 Sense INTREQ HHCCP048I 00C4 CCW 03000000 20000001 gt 040C0000 0001CEFA 00000000 00000000 0 HHCCPO75I 00C4 Stat 0200 Count 0001 HHCCPO76I 00C4 Sense 40000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 HHCCPO77I 00C4 Sense INTREQ HHCCP048I 00C5 CCW 03000000 20000001 gt 040C0000 0001CEFA 0000
308. f configfile r rcfile Diagram gt gt HerculesStudio WER FE eee f configfile p es r rcfile SS 11 3 2 Parameter f configfile This is the name of a configuration file If the Hercules Studio is started with the name of a configuration file then it will automatically power on Hercules once the Hercules Studio itself is started This is called the Auto Power On feature When using this feature in conjunction with a Hercules RC run commands file it is possible to totally automate Hercules startup and IPL Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 488 f rcfile This is the name of an optional RC run commands file This file contains Hercules console commands that are issued exactly as if the commands were entered from the Hercules system console 11 3 3 Examples Example 1 Start Hercules Studio using the configuration file mvs38j cnf and the run commands file autoipl rc HerculesStudio f mvs38j cnf r autoipl rc Page 489 Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide 12 The Run Commands File hercules rc 12 1 Function Hercules supports the ability to have console commands automatically executed at startup via the run Commande file If the run commands file is found to exist when Hercules starts then each line of the file is read and interpreted as a console command exactly as if the command were entered from the HMC sys tem console The default file
309. f type IL AP Specifies a processor engine of type AP IP Specifies a processor engine of type IP Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 60 4 19 4 Examples Example 1 Specify 4 engines of type CP 2 engines of type AP and 2 engines of type IP ENGINES CP CP CP CP AP AP IP IP or ENGINES 4 CP 2 AP 2 IP Example 2 Specify 4 engines of type CP 1 engine of type AP 1 engine of type IP and 2 engines of type IL ENGINES CP CP CP CP AP IP IL IL or ENGINES 4 CP AP IP 2 IL Example 3 Specify 3 engines of type CP and 1 engines of type IL ENGINES CP CP CP IL or ENGINES 3 CP IL Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 61 4 20 HERCLOGO Hercules 3270 logo 4 20 1 Function HERCLOGO specifies the logo text file which defines a welcome screen that is presented when a TN83270 terminal connects to a Hercules 3270 device For details on how to code the Hercules logo file see section 10 Hercules 3270 Logo 4 20 2 Syntax Descriptive HERCLOGO f7 ename Diagram HERCLOGO filename r 4 20 3 Parameter filename The name of a logo text file in the current Hercules directory 4 20 4 Examples Example 1 Use the logo text file HERCLOGO txt for the welcome screen HERCLOGO HERCLOGO TXT Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 62 4 21 HERCPRIO Hercules process prio
310. file sfd Display shadow file statistics sfk Perform a chkdsk on the active shadow file t dev Turn CCW tracing on off s dev Turn CCW stepping on off t CKD Turn CKD_KEY tracing on off f addr Mark frames usable unusable Table 11 Hercules Console Commands grouped by functionality Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 171 7 Console Command Descriptions 7 1 message SCP priority message 7 1 1 Function The message SCP command is used to enter a system control program i e guest operating system priority command on the hercules console The command to be issued has to be prefixed with an excla mation point This command is similar to the reply command It is up to the operating system to differentiate between them 7 1 2 Syntax Descriptive prio_msg Diagram prio_nessage _ _ __ Y YY Y Y gt 7 1 3 Parameter prio_msg The priority message that will be routed to the system control program running under the Hercules Emulator 7 1 4 Examples For a similar sample please see the reply command Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 172 7 2 or Log comment to syslog 7 2 1 Function The hash or asterisk simply provide a convenient way of entering comments into the Hercules console log with no other effect The comment is not processed in any way oth
311. file and enter the changes there o Please note that the options Feedholes Compression and Columns as well as all those related to the Green Bar are not supported for RTF but only to PDF files Paper Size Paper Width Paper Height Green Bar Orientation Font Size Lines per Inch Columns Horizontal Margin Feed Holes Compressed Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide This drop down allows to choose one of several predefined paper sizes The pre defined paper sizes are US Fan Fold US Compact Fan Fold US Letter ISO A3 ISO A4 ISO B4 ISO B4 Extra and ISO C3 Enter here the desired custom form width in either fractional inches the default or whole millimetres To specify millimetres append mm to the size e g 210mm Enter here the desired custom form height in either fractional inches the default or whole millimetres To specify millimetres append mm to the size e g 297mm This dropdown is to select the desired green bar colour or a custom colour using the RRGGBB format Chose No for no green bar or Outline for an uncoloured transparent green bar Note The green bar option is ignored for RTF output Choose the desired paper orientation either portrait or landscape Use this dropdown to choose the desired font size from the list of available sizes Available font sizes are 9pt 10pt 11pt and 12pt Any size may be
312. file begins with lt HTML gt lt PRE gt and ends with lt PRE gt lt HTML gt This parameter is case sensitive must be uppercase If specified then formfeed characters are not translated to page break lines This is useful primarily for processing the published data after it is published e g sending it to a real printer etc This argument must be in upper case When NOPB is specified formfeed characters are still bracketed with newlines to keep the maximum output record size consistent 8 27 4 Examples Example 1 Publish the print output from print file PRT1 TXT and create a Word document named PRT1 DOC with carriage return line feeds and do not translate formfeed characters to page break lines D HERCUELS PRTPUB D MVS PRT PRT1 TXT D MVS PRT PRT1 DOC CRLF NOPB Example 2 Publish the print output from print file PRT2 TXT and create a HTML document named PRT2 HTML with carriage return line feeds D HERCUL ES PRTPUB D MVS PRT PRT2 TXT D MVS PRT PRT2 HTML CRLF HTML Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 465 Example 3 Publish the print output from print file PRTOOE TXT and create a HTML file called PUBL HTML with carriage retun line feeds The input file s size at the time of the previous run should be kept in file PRTOOE SIZ The polling interval to check the file size is 10 seconds The maximum number of lines that should be published is 1000 echo off LOOP prtp
313. file if it already exists D HERCULES gt DASDCONV r lfs D MVS DASD MVSRES GZ D MVS DASD MVSRES CKD Hercules DASD CKD image conversion program Version 3 05 c Copyright 1999 2005 by Roger Bowler Jan Jaeger and others Converting 3390 volume MVSRES 3339 cyls 15 trks cyl 56832 bytes track 3339 cylinders successfully written to file MVSRES ckd DASD conversion successfully completed Figure 208 DASDCONV utility output Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 397 8 10 DASDCOPY Copy DASD file to another DASD file 8 10 1 Function The DASDCOPY utility is used to copy a DASD image file to another DASD image file 8 10 2 Syntax Descriptive DASDCOPY option option infile SF shadowfile outfile Diagram PE ol ENEN 1 E n nn option SF shadowfi le 8 10 3 Parameter Options V Display version information and help text h Display usage summary and quit q Quiet mode do not display status r Replace the output file if it already exists Z Compress output using zlib default bz2 Compress output using bzip2 0 Do not compress output 0 zero biks n Size of output FBA file cyls n Size of output CKD file a Output CKD file will have alternate cylinders Ifs Output CKD file will be a single file even if it exceeds 2 GB in size o type Output file type CKD CCKD FBA CFBA Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 398 Arguments i
314. filename Job accounting fields are defined in the FieldNames section and their values are extracted directly from the job separator page and saved for use by the OutputFile section s Names entry Each percent sign enclosed string within the Names value is substituted with one of the defined job accounting field values If for example have the following job accounting field defined in your FieldNames section and the con tents of the job separator Dages 58th line happens to be a Names setting of Job JOBNAME ixt then this would result in the spooled report file being named Job FOOBAR txt Please note that Windows filenames cannot have any characters in them whose integer representation is within the range of O through 31 i e x 00 to x 1F nor can they contain any of the following reserved cha racters lt gt i Further note that the length of a file s complete path specification cannot exceed the standard Windows operating system path length restriction of 260 characters total so try to limit your output filename to the minimum needed while still ensuring that the resulting names remain different from one another After constructing an initial output filename based on your defined Names value which should be con sidered only a template HercPrt then applies further string and character translations as defined in the Translations section before attempting to rename the file to its final name If during the c
315. foo bat is sh startgui foo bat 7 99 2 Syntax Descriptive SH STARTGUI command arg arg Diagram eae ene arg 7 99 3 Parameter STARTGUI STARTGUI must be used if the command passed to the shell either directly or indirectly starts a Windows graphical user interface non command line program command The command that is to be passed to the shell arg These are the parameters passed to the command Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 337 7 99 4 Examples Example 1 Display the current working directory through the shell command DIR 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 OV OF ER en OS OY OF OP Ep E e Em OY OO Se OY OF en En OY em e Ep Ep e ER 256 PDOs 1 56 1 56 15 6 256 56 256 256 256 1 56 1 56 256 556 256 256 1 56 1 56 1 56 256 356 256 56 256 r56 1 56 140 156 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 x265 265 265 265 265 265 265 s265 265 a269 265 265 265 i265 265 265 sh dir Command started process id 00000550 00000550 Volume in drive D is DATA 00000550 Volume Serial N
316. for details except that it loads a text deck file with TXT and END 80 byte records i e an object deck 7 56 2 Syntax Descriptive LOADTEXT filename address Diagram LOADTEXT filename We Ee cif es address 7 56 3 Parameter filename This argument specifies the file name and optionally the path of the file from which the text deck will be loaded address Address specifies the start address of the real storage to where the saved text deck file will be loaded 7 56 4 Examples See LOADCORE command for similar examples Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 266 7 57 LOG Direct log output 7 57 1 Function The LOG command lets you redirect the log output to another destination 7 57 2 Syntax Descriptive LOG newfi e Diagram LOG newfile i q RTTT 7 57 3 Parameter newfile The file name and optionally the path to which the log output has to be written to 7 57 4 Examples Example 1 Redirect the log output to a new log file destination 2007 06 30 15 53 03 343 O0000008E log d mvs log newlog txt 2007 06 30 15 53 03 343 0000008E HHCLGO18I log switched to d mvs log newlog txt Figure 98 LOG command Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 267 7 58 LOGOPT Change log options 7 58 1 Function The LOGOPT command lets you change the logging options TIMESTAMP inserts
317. for example the count value is ignored and cannot be changed from its default value of 10 Other systems may ignore one or more or all three values and use platform defaults instead This is entirely system dependent Check you system s documentation for details regarding which values can be changed and which cannot as well as how to adjust your system s default values 7 22 2 Syntax Descriptive CONKPALV 7d e intv count Diagram CONKPALV jd e intv count _ _ 7 22 3 Parameter idle The idle value specifies the timeout value in seconds with no activity until the first keep alive probe is sent The default for the idle value is 3 seconds intv The intv value specifies the interval in seconds between the probes when no acknow ledgement is received from the previous one The default for the intv value is 1 second Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 207 count The count value specifies the number of unacknowledged keep alive packets sent before the connection is considered to have failed The default value for the count value is 9 for non Windows platforms and 10 for Windows systems Note On Windows platforms the count value is ignored and cannot be changed from its default value of 10 7 22 4 Examples Example 1 Set the TCP IP keep alive settings to 5 seconds idle time 3 seconds interval between the probes and disconnect after 15 consecutive failed probes
318. fset 0x3096 len 104 00000AE0 HHCCU301I OAEO file trk 7 recovered offset 0x30fe len 924 00000AE0 HHCCU301I OAEO file l trk 34079 recovered offset 0x349a len 210 00000AE0 HHCCU301I OAEO file l trk 34048 recovered offset 0x356c len 769 00000AE0 HHCCU301I OAEO file 1 trk 34081 recovered offset 0x386d len 142 00000AE0 HHCCU301I OAEO file l trk 34080 recovered offset 0x38fb len 765 00000AE0 HHCCU301I OAEO file 1 trk 34082 recovered offset Ox3bf8 len 105 00000AE0 HHCCU301I OAEO file 1 trk 34078 recovered offset O0x3c61 len 349 00000AE0 HHCCU301I OAEO file l trk 34045 recovered offset Ox3dbe len 125 00000AE0 HHCCU301I OAEO file l trk 34046 recovered offset O0x3e3b len 349 00000AE0 HHCCU301I OAEO file l trk 34075 recovered offset 0x3f98 len 279 00000AE0 HHCCU301I OAEO file 1 trk 34084 recovered offset 0x40af len 341 00000AE0 HHCCU301I OAEO file 1l trk 34085 recovered offset 0x4204 len 341 00000AE0 HHCCU301I OAEO file l trk 34049 recovered offset 0x4359 len 143 00000AE0 HHCCU301I OAEO file l trk 34083 recovered offset 0x43e8 len 631 00000AE0 HHCCU301I OAEO file l trk 34086 recovered offset 0x465f len 340 00000AE0 HHCCU301I OAEO file trk 34088 recovered offset 0x47b3 len 339 00000AE0 HHCCU301I OAEO file trk 34103 recovered offset 0x4906 len 292 00000AE0 HHCCU301I OAEO file trk 34089 recovered offset O0x4a2a len 339 00000AE0 HHCCU301I OAEO file l trk 34090 recovered offset O0x4b7d len 340 00000AE0 HHCCU301I OAEO file l
319. functions see below functions LOAD Load media UNLOAD Unload media LOCK Lock media UNLOCK Unlock media REWIND Rewind tape RUN Rewind and unload tape READ Read readsize blocks Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 441 WRITE WTM FSF FSR BSF BSR READPOS LOCATE ERG COMP ECC MARGIN STATUS ASCII EBCDIC DUMP ERASE HELP or EXIT or QUIT arguments readsize writesize count blockid Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Write writesize blocks Write count tapemark s Forward space count file s Forward space count block s Backward space count file s Backward space count block s Read blockid Locate blockid Erase gap Set compression on or off Set ECC on or off Set EOT margin margin Display status Set ASCII data block display mode Set EBCDIC data block display mode Display data block at offset offsef in length length Erase entire tape data security erase Display usage information Exit program Specifies the number of blocks to read readsize must be a value from 0 to 65535 A value of 0 which is the default means all blocks whereas any other number specifies the actual count of blocks to read Specifies the number of blocks to write writesize must be a value from 0 to 65535 A value of 0 which is the default means random whereas any other number spe cifies the actual
320. g SUDStringS eccccescceceseeeseeeeeceeeeeececeaeseeacessaeaesaeeeeaaesseaaesaaaeseaeeeesaesseaaeseeeaeenaees 496 13 5 LIMITATIONS nta E E eee tele A AE lt nee vegeta tte 496 13 6 EA E E e TAE E A egen EENS AER ee td eyed TE 496 14 Submitting Jobs via the Socket Header 498 14 1 Socket Reader Basics pniti hoen an i n eal a i eege 498 14 2 Submitting Jobs from Windows eee eeeeaeeeeaeeseeeeeceaeeesaaeseeaeeseeeeeseaeeseaeeeeneeseaees 499 14 3 Submitting Jobs from UniX uerg Meester a aa de 500 Appendix A Supported DASD Device Types cccccceeseeceeeeeceeeeecaeeeeeeeceeeeseaeeesaaesseeeeseaeeesaeeseaaeeeneeeeeas 502 Appendix B Configuration of Emulated CPUS ee ee eceeeeeeeeeneeeaeeeeesaaecaeeaeseaeseaeseaeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeeenaes 505 B 1 General Explanations and PHules sense ceaeeseaaeseeeeeseeeeeaeeeeeeseeeeess 505 BI Examples vince deene iit Leet ie ee ee te a 505 tele en EE 509 C 1 Reading Syntax Descriptions ienn aeia aaae aa a aa a aa aa aan aaa aa a Seea a aiaa 509 IER Reading Syntax RI re TE LEE 510 C 3 Sample Syntax Description 512 C 4 Sample Syntax Diaoram 513 Appendix Ri 515 Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 9 Figures Figure 1 Figure 2 Figure 3 Figure 4 Figure 5 Figure 6 Figure 7 Figure 8 Figure 9 Figure 10 Figure 11 Figure 12 Figure 13 Figure 14 Figure 15 Figure 16 Figure 17 Figure 18 Figure 19 Figure 20 Figure 21 Figure 22 Figure 23 Figure 24 Figure
321. g on off timerint Display or set timers update interval tlb Display TLB tables toddrag Display or set TOD clock drag factor traceopt Instruction trace display option tt32 Control query CTCI WIN functionality u Disassemble storage uptime Display Hercules Emulator uptime Vv Display or alter virtual storage version Display version information Table 10 Hercules Console Commands sorted alphabetically Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 165 6 6 Hercules Console Commands grouped by functionality The next table shows an overview of the valid Hercules console commands that can be entered in the control panel Hercules console display In this table the commands are grouped by functionality help List all commands command specific help List all commands command specific help alias for help Log comment to syslog Log comment to syslog message Display message on console like VM msg Display message on console like VM msgnoh Display message on console like VM but without header quiet Toggle automatic refresh of console display data hst History of commands hao Hercules Automatic Operator HAO log Direct log output logopt Change log options uptime Display Hercules Emulator uptime version Display version information quit Terminate the emulator exit Synonym for quit cpu Define target CPU for console displ
322. g system is provided in the util subdirectory of the distributed source code 5 8 7 Basic ACF Automatic Cartridge Feeder Support 5 8 7 1 Function The ACF Automatic Cartridge Feeder is a feature on cartridge type tape drives 3480 3490 etc that automatically loads a new tape when a tape is removed ejected from the drive There is no real control over this functionality by the host as the device just keeps on feeding tapes one after the other Although the ACF features is unique to catridge type tape systems the emulation accepts to use the same technique for emulated 1 2 inch tapes reel drives as well ACF is supported through a file that contains a list of files emulated tapes or catridges that will be loaded one after the other To manually reset the ACF to the top of the stack the DEVINIT panel command can be used to reload the ACF feature Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 132 5 8 7 2 Syntax Descriptive devaddr devtype filename arguments Diagram devaddr devtype filename 8 i gt lt Ke arguments i 5 8 7 3 Parameter devaddr devtype filename arguments This is the device address This is the device type Valid device types are 3410 3420 3422 3430 3480 3490 8809 and 9347 The filename without the prefixing contains a list of files that will be loaded one after the other The filenames contained in the file list cannot
323. gh the TAPEMAP utility does display the same data as the HETMAP utility the output is formatted in a totally different way TAPEMAP produces correct output only for an AWS format tape Use of TAPEMAP with any tape format other than AWS produces unpredictable results Do not use it for HET tapes The HETMAP program displays information about both AWS and HET tapes and should be used instead of TAPEMAP 8 22 2 Syntax Descriptive TAPEMAP filename Diagram gt gt TAPEMAP filename gt lt 8 22 3 Parameter filename The name and optionally path of the AWS tape whose header data is to be displayed 8 22 4 Examples Example 1 Print map of an AWS tape file TAPEMAP D MVS TAPE T38321A AWS Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 433 8 22 5 Sample Utility Output Sample 1 Print map of an AWS tape file D Hercules gt tapemap G MVS TAPE 38321A AWS Jan Jaeger and others max 800 max 6272 max 800 max 800 max 800 max 800 max 800 max 800 max 640 max 800 max 800 Hercules tape map program Version 3 0 7 c Copyright 1999 2009 by Roger Bowler File 1 Blocks 614 block size min 800 File 2 Blocks 38 block size min 6272 File 3 Blocks 90 block size min 160 File 4 Blocks 29 block size min 720 File 5 Blocks 113 block size min 80 File 6 Blocks 1581 block size min 800 File 7 Blocks 597 block size min 160 File 8 Blocks 181 bloc
324. gine 3 set to type CCP D MUS CONF MUS38J CONF Will ignore include errors Log option set TIMESTAMP HTTP listener thread started tid 6606B7C pid 3984 Using HTTPROOT directory D Hercules html Vector Facility support not configured Waiting for HTTP requests on port 8089 Hercules tid 6066F74 pid 3984 Device E bound to socket 192 168 6 161 14631 Socketdevice listener thread started Device F bound to socket 192 168 6 161 14632 Console connection thread started Waiting for console connection on port 3278 D MUS DASD SORT CCKD cyls 266 heads 26 tracks 4666 D MUS DASD SORTG 1 CCKD cyls 206 heads 26 tracks 4606 D MUS DASD SORTG 2 CCKD cyls 20 3 heads 20 tracks 4666 D MUS DASD SORTG3 CCKD cyls 206 heads 26 tracks 4666 D MUS DASD SORT 4 CCKD cyls 266 heads 26 tracks 4666 D MUS DASD SORT S CCKD cyls 266 heads 26 tracks 4606 and others Jan Jaeger HCCF 771 HCCFO 71 HCCF 71 HCCFO 71 HCCF 81I HCPN1971I HCHT 11 HCHT 131 ALEN SEU HCHT 4861 HCCF 651 HCS DAH4I ASSUR HCS D841 HCTE 1 I HCT E003 I HCDAG2GI HCDAG2GI HCDAG2GI HCDAG2GI HCDAG2GI HCDAG2GI pgid 3984 priority HCDAG2GI HCDAG2GI HCDAG2GI HCDAG2GI HCDAG2GI HCDAG2GI HCDAG2HI HCDAG2GI D MUS DASD WORKGG CCKD D MUS DASD WORKG 1 CCKD D MUS DASD PRDGOB CCKD D MUS DASD PRDOG1 CCKD D MUS DASD PRDGH2 CCKD D MUS DASD PRDOG3 CCKD D MUS DASD MUSRES CCKD D MUS DASD MUSDLB CCKD cyls 555 cy
325. h the Shared Device Server is listening If the port number is omitted then the default port 3990 is used rem_devnum This is the device address of the device on the remote Hercules instance If the remote device address is omitted then the default is the current device number on the local system COMP n This keyword requests that the data has to be transferred compressed between the client and the server The argument n specifies the compression level 1 9 A value closer to 1 means less compression but also less processor time to perform the compression A value closer to 9 means the data is compressed more but also more processor time is required to compress the data Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 479 9 4 3 Examples Example 1 There is a shared device server on the local host listening on port 3990 and we want to use its 0100 device as our 0100 device The device statement will look like this 0100 3390 localhost 3990 0100 Because the default port number is actually 3990 and the default remote device address is the same as the local device number the above statement providing we do not have actually a file named localhost could be shortened as follows 0100 3390 localhost Example 2 Device sharing can also be split between multiple instances For example suppose the following device definitions and system parameter for instance A SHRDPORT 3990 0100 3390 localhost 3991 0101 3390 mvscat d
326. hat READONLY 0 does not override the host system file permission settings for the underlying AWS or HET file If the AWS or HET file is marked read only the tape will be mounted read only despite specification of READONLY 0 RO NORING Specifies that the tape is mounted read only without a write ring or with the cartridge protect switch set to write protect RO and NORING are equivalent to READONLY 1 RW RING Specifies that the tape should be mounted read write if possible RW and RING are equivalent to READONLY 0 This is the default if RO NORING or READONLY 1 is not specified Note that RW and RING do not override the host system file permission set tings for the underlying AWS or HET file If the AWS or HET file is marked read only the tape will be mounted read only despite specification of RW or RING DEONIRQ n Specifies whether a device end is presented if intervention is required during tape motion A parameter of 1 selects this option a parameter of 0 turns it off NOAUTOMOUNT Indicates that support for guest initiated automatic tape volume mounting is to always be disabled for this tape device Automatic guest tape mount support is automatically globally enabled for all virtual non SCSI tape devices by default whenever an allowable automount directory is defined via the AUTOMOUNT configuration file statement or the automount console command The NOAUTOMOUNT option allows you to specifically disable such support for a given device
327. he HTTP server The userid and password have to be coded after the AUTH parameter userid The userid can be any valid string password The password can be any valid string 4 22 4 Examples Example 1 Set the port number on which the HTTP server will listen to 8081 and specify that authorization is required to access the HTTP server The userid should be UID0001 and the password should be PSWD0001 HTTPPORT 8081 AUTH UIDO0001 PSWDOOO1 Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 64 Example 2 Set the port number on which the HTTP server will listen to 80 and specify that no authorization is required to access the HTTP server HTTPPORT 80 NOAUTH Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 65 4 23 HTTPROOT HTTP server root directory 4 23 1 Function HTTPROOT specifies the full path of the root directory where the HTTP servers files reside If this parameter is not specified the default value for Win32 builds of Hercules is the directory where the Hercules executables themselves reside For non Win32 builds it is the directory specified as the default package installation directory when the Hercules executables were built This can vary depending on how the Hercules package was built it is commonly usr local share hercules 4 23 2 Syntax Descriptive HTTPROOT path Diagram gt gt HTTPROOT path 4 4 23 3 Parameter path The full path of the root directory where
328. he device for which the CCW tracing is to be turned on or off The plus sign turns on the CCW tracing for the given device The plus sign must imme diately follow the T command without an intervening blank The minus sign turns off the CCW tracing for the given device The minus sign must immediately follow the T command without an intervening blank 7 117 4 Examples Example 1 Turn on the CCW tracing for device 0148 t 0148 HHCPN136I CCW tracing is now on for device 0148 0148 start i o file 0 bufcur 1 cache 1 HHCCP048I 0148 CCW 02000000 60000018 gt 02000000 60000018 00000000 00000000 0148 HHCDAO38I seeking to cyl 0 head 0 0148 read trk 0 asynchronous Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 360 148 0 rdtrk 148 0 rdtrk 0 148 0 rdtrk 0 148 trk 0 rea 148 file 0 12 148 f1il 148 12 148 f1il 148 fil ca 148 fil 12 0 0 0 0 0 0 re 0 0 0 0 0148 file 0 fd 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ca fd ooo oO Oo Oro amp oO CS 148 0 rdtrk 0 148 uncompress 148 newbuf mal 148 uncompress 148 validating 148 read trk 148 HHCDA0411 148 HHCDA0431 148 HHCDA0431 148 HCDAO45I1 HHCCPO75I 0148 HHCCPO048I 0148 0148 HHCDA0411 0148 HHCDA0431 0148 HHCDA045I O CH 0148 HHCDA0411 0148 HHCDA043I1 HHCCPO75I 0148 HHCCP048I 0148 HHCCP048I 0148 148 HHCDA0411 148 HHCDA0431 HHCCPO75I 0148 HHCCP048I 0148 HHCCP048I 0148
329. hese additional two CPUs are also taken online through the NUMCPU statement CPU and State CPU1 CPU2 cPu3 CPU4 CPUS CPU6 CPU 8 3 5 6 ex a MAXCPU 1 2 4 NUMCPU 1 2 3 4 5 6 ENGINES CP CP AP IP SC cs SH SC CPU type CP CP AP IP CP D CP D BE aos Status O O O O O O E ds Table 29 Correct CPU configuration example 5 Example 6 ENGINES CP CP AP IP AXCPU 6 UMCPU 8 This configuration leads to an error While the first four CPUs would be taken online with their specified types and the next two CPUs would be of type CP per default and be taken offline the excess engines from NUMCPU compared against MAXCPU lead to an error message and a failing configuration CPU and State CPU1 cPU2 CPU3 CPU4 CPUS CPUG CPU 8 3 5 6 MAXCPU 1 2 4 NUMCPU 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ENGINES CP CP AP IP Be SE SE E CPU type CP CP AP IP CP D CP D CP D CP D Status O O O O O O F F Table 30 Incorrect CPU configuration example 6 Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 508 Appendix C Syntax This book uses two kinds of describing the syntax of configuration statements console commands and utilities These are e Syntax descriptions e Syntax diagrams C 1 Reading Syntax Descriptions All syntax descriptions in this book configuration statements console commands and utilites use a com mon structure as descri
330. ian program it swaps the byte order of a CCKD file 8 5 2 Syntax Descriptive CCKDSWAP f7 ename Diagram gt gt CCKDSWAP Filename TT x 8 5 3 Parameter filename Name of CCKD DASD image file to have its byte order swapped 8 5 4 Examples Example 1 Swap byte order for a CCKD DASD image file CCKDSWAP D MVS DASD MVSRES CCKD 8 5 5 Sample Utility Output Sample 1 Swap byte order for a CCKD DASD image file D HERCULES gt cckdswap D MVS DASD MVSRES CCKD Hercules cckd swap endian program Version 3 05 c Copyright 1999 2005 by Roger Bowler Jan Jaeger and others cckdswap D MVS DASD MVSRES CCKD changed from little endian to big endian Figure 204 CCKDSWAP utility output Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 389 8 6 CKD2CCKD Copy CKD DASD file to CCKD DASD file 8 6 1 Function The CKD2CCKD is used to copy convert an uncompressed CKD DASD file to a compressed CCKD DASD file This utility is obsolete it is replaced through the DASDCOPY utility which performs the same and additional functions For details see DASDCOPY utility 8 6 2 Syntax See DASDCOPY utility 8 6 3 Parameter See DASDCOPY utility 8 6 4 Examples See DASDCOPY utility 8 6 5 Sample Utility Output See DASDCOPY utility Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 390 8 7 CCKD2CKD Copy CCKD DASD file to CKD DASD file 8 7 1 Function The CCKD2CKD is used to copy
331. ids 0580 3420 dev nst0O blkid 32 5 8 2 Optical Media Attach OMA virtual files 5 8 2 1 Function OMA device statements are used to define Optical Media Attach OMA virtual files to the Hercules configuration OMA virtual files are read only files which normally reside on CDROM OMA virtual tapes consist of one CDROM file corresponding to each physical file of the emulated tape An ASCII text file called the Tape Descriptor File TDF specifies the names of the files which make up the virtual tape The argument specifies the name of the tape descriptor file Each file on the virtual tape can be in one of the following three formats TEXT TEXT files consist of variable length ASCII records delimited by carriage return line feed CRLF sequences at the end of each record Each record is translated to EBCDIC and presented to the program as one physical tape block FIXED nnnnn_ FIXED files consist of fixed length EBCDIC blocks of the specified length nnnnn HEADERS HEADERS files consist of variable length EBCDIC blocks Each block is preceded by a 12 byte header If you have any IBM manuals in BookManager format on CDROM you can see some examples of TDF files in the TAPES directory on the CDROM Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 122 5 8 2 2 Syntax Descriptive devaddr devtype tdf Diagram devaddr devtype tdf _T t 5 8 2 3 Parameter devaddr This is the devic
332. idth 62 OutputFile Name SUSERID _SJOBNAME S_SJOBID _SPRINTDATE _ SPRINTTIME S pdf Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 460 Translations Chars lt gt 2 gt Charst t _ Strings 6 Stringl Stringl String2 String2 String3 String3 _ String4 String4 String5 Sstrings String6 PRT1 String6 000E PDF PaperSize USFanFold Orientation Landscape HorzMargin 0 25 FeedHoles Yes GreenBar Yes BarColor Green LPI 6 FontSize 12 Columns 0 Compress Yes Figure 231 Job Seperator Control File Sample Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 461 The second sample shows a page from a report created through HercPrt using the predefined job sepa rator control file for MVS 3 8J JOBID JOBO5860 JOB NAME PAYROLL USER ID IBMUSER SYSOUT CLASS P OUTPUT GROUP 1 1 1 TITLE DESTINATION LOCAL NAME IBM USER ROOM IBM BUILDING DEPARTMENT ADDRESS PRINT TIME 22 23 30 PRINT DATE 20 JUN 2011 PRINTER NAME PRT2 SYSTEM P390 START START START START START START START START START START START START START START START START DER eee tee eet eee PPPPPPPPPPP AAAAAAAAAA YY YY RRRRRRRRRRR 000000000000 LL LL PPPPPPPPPPPP AAAAAAAAAAAA YY YY RRRRRRRRRRRR 000000000000 LL L
333. ied then STIDP stores a format 1 CPU ID 7 60 4 Examples Example 1 Set LPARNUM to 21 2009 03 31 23 34 30 402 00000708 lparnum 21 Figure 102 LPARNUM command set LPARNUM Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 270 Example 2 Display LPARNUM 2009 03 31 23 34 33 402 00000708 lparnum 2009 03 31 23 34 33 402 00000708 HHCPNO60I LPAR number 21 Figure 103 LPARNUM command display LPARNUM Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 271 7 61 LSDEP List module dependencies 7 61 1 Function This function lists the Hercules module dependencies 7 61 2 Syntax Descriptive LSDEP Diagram LSDEP TTT 4 7 61 3 Parameter None 7 61 4 Examples Example 1 List the module dependencies 2007 06 30 14 24 39 637 O0000FC4 1lsdep 2007 06 30 14 24 39 637 O0000FC4 dependency HERCULES version 3 03 size 5 2007 06 30 14 24 39 637 00000FC4 dependency REGS version 3 03 size 38376 2007 06 30 14 24 39 637 O0000FC4 dependency DEVBLK version 3 03 size 1664 2007 06 30 14 24 39 637 O0000FC4 dependency SYSBLK version 3 03 size 39440 2007 06 30 14 24 39 637 00000FC4 dependency WEBBLK version 2 17 size 24 Figure 104 LSDEP command Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 272 7 62 LSMOD List dynamic modules 7 62 1 Function The LSMOD command lists all the loaded Hercules dynamic modules and shows details for each mod
334. ified e f the columns option is specified then each line is either squished or stretched in an attempt to fit exactly that number of columns of print onto each print line usually resulting in a very ugly looking report For best results it is recommended you not specify the option or specify it as 0 zero for the default horizontal pitch of 10 characters per inch 8 26 9 3 ASA Characters and their ASCII Equivalents Unless the a ASA option is specified each line of the text input file that ends with a CR carriage return will cause that line to be overlaid with the text from the next one Each line which ends with a LF line feed or new line NL character causes a skip to the next line after that line is printed Skips to new pages only occur whenever a FF form feed character is encountered If the a ASA option is specified then each line of the input file is expected to start with an ASA ANSI carriage control character which identifies the action to be taken before that line is printed Lines starting with a 1 cause a skip to the top of a new page before printing the line Lines starting with a blank cause a skip to a new line to occur before that line is printed A causes no spacing to occur thereby causing the line to overlay the previous one 0 skips two lines before printing and skips three lines before printing ASA Character Action to take before printing ASCII Equivalent 1 Advance to next pag
335. iguration file The following table shows an overview of all valid devices Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 23 3270 3278 Local non SNA 3270 display or TN3270 client connection printer SYSG Integrated 3270 SYSG console TN3270 client connection 1052 3215 Console printer keyboards Telnet client connection 1052 C 3215 C 1442 2501 3505 Integrated console printer keyboards Card readers Integrated on Hercules console Disk file s ASCII or EBCDIC 3525 Card punch Disk file ASCII or EBCDIC 1403 3211 3410 3420 3422 3430 3480 3490 3590 9347 8809 Line printers Tape drives Disk file ASCII Disk file CD ROM or SCSI tape 3088 Channel to Channel Adapter CTCT driver CTCI Channel to Channel link to host CTCI TUN TAP driver TCP IP stack LCS IBM 2216 router LCS LAN channel station IBM 3172 running ICP IBM 8232 LCS device TUN TAP driver LCS3172 driver of a P 390 IBM Open Systems Adapter OSA 3310 3370 9313 9332 FBA direct access storage Disk file 9335 9336 0671 devices 2305 2311 2314 3330 CKD direct access storage Disk file 3340 3350 3375 3380 devices 3390 9345 2703 Communication line TCP socket Table 2 Hercules Device Definitions 3 4 Coding Rules There are only a few rules for creating configuration files The file must be an ASCII text file Blank lines or lines beg
336. ilable configuration pages from the HercPrt application the Program Options page TS HercPrt64 Printerl arna Program Options PDF Options Options Printer ID Printer 1 e IP Address 192 168 0 101 Port Number 14031 Control File D MVS CONF MVS_PRINTER 1 INI Spooler Dir D MVS PRINTER Automatic Reconnect V Automatically keep retrying to connect if connection is lost Wait 30 seconds between reconnect attempts Stay hidden in system tray even when connection is lost Notify me of connection status change via popup balloon Status Not connected Figure 229 HercPrt Program Options Page On the Program Options page you can configure the following Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 447 Printer ID IP Address Port Number Control File Spooler Dir Automatic Reconnect Wait Seconds Stay Hidden Notify Me Status Connect Disconnect Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide This field is used to enter a descriptive name for the Hercules printer you are defi ning The value can be anything that uniquely identifies the printer being defined If you already have some printers defined you can select one of these previously de fined printers from the dropdown list to automatically populate the remaining con trols with the values for the chosen printer This must be the IP address where your Hercules printer is lis
337. ile will be discarded instead of being committed FORCE The FORCE parameter is used when doing a merge to a base file that is read only because the ro option was specified on the device configuration statement Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 330 7 95 4 Examples Example 1 Remove a shadow file with backwards merge i e commit all of the changes updates 00000FC4 sf 0148 00000FC4 HHCCD181I 0148 shadow file 1 successfully merged 00000FC4 HHCCD2101 size free nbr st reads writes l2reads hits switches 00000FC4 HHCCD2111 readaheads misses OOQO00FC4 i OO A AA 00000FC4 HHCCD213I 324634239 6 22 4296 1134 45 4395 7267 00000FC4 HHCCD2141I 1426 126 00000FC4 HHCCD215I D MVS DASD MVSRES CCKD 00000FC4 HHCCD216I 0 324634239 6 22 rw 4053 0 45 00000FC4 HHCCD217I D MVS DASD MVSRES_ 148 Figure 151 SF command Example 2 Remove a shadow file without backwards merge i e discard all of the changes updates 00000FC4 sf 0148 nomerge 00000FC4 HHCCD181I 0148 shadow file 1 successfully removed 00000FC4 HHCCD2101 size free nbr st reads writes 12reads hits switches 00000FC4 HHCCD2111 readaheads misses OOQO0OFC4 HHCCD21 21 pAs SASr Sg A A 00000FC4 HHCCD213I 324634239 6 22 4329 1118 45 4376 7268 00000FC4 HHCCD2141I 1440 140 00000FC4 HHCCD215I D MVS DASD MVSRES CCKD 00000FC4 HHCCD216I 0 324634239 6 22 rw 4061 0 45 00000FC4 HHCCD217I D MVS DASD MVSRES_ 148
338. iles A control file enables HercPrt to split the printouts on job separator page boundaries and name the file according the the actual job accounting field values 5 7 2 Syntax Descriptive devaddr devtype filename CRLF NOCLEAR or devaddr devtype host port SOCKDEV Diagram devaddr devtype filename pills ee or CLRF a L wer l or devaddr devtype a port SOCKDEV ba host Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 118 5 7 3 Parameter devaddr devtype filename CRLF NOCLEAR SOCKDEV This is the device address This is the device type Valid printer types are 1403 and 3211 The name and optionally the path of the printer file or the print to pipe command line If the filename begins with the vertical bar pipe character then it is removed and the remainder of the filename is interpreted as a command line the name of a program or batch file followed by any necessary arguments to which to pipe the printer output to This is known as the print to pipe feature All printer output is then sent to the piped pro gram s stdin input and all of the piped program s stdout and stderr output is piped back to Hercules for displaying on the hardware console If the print to pipe command line contains arguments then quotes must be placed around the entire filename string including the vertical bar If the print to pipe command lin
339. ils on how to customize a logofile see chapter 10 p dyndir This is the directory from which dynamic modules are to be loaded The default depends on the host platform on which Hercules is being run This option overrides the default I dynmod This is the name of an additional dynamic load module to be loaded at startup More than one additional module may be specified although each must be preceded with the option Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 486 gt logfile This is an optional log file which will receive a copy of all messages displayed on the control panel 11 1 3 Examples Example 1 Start Hercules with the configuration file D MVS CONF MVS38J CONF and write all messages to the log file DA AMVS LOGS HERCULES LOG HERCULES f D MVS CONF MVS38J CONF gt D MVS LOGS HERCULES LOG Example 2 Start Hercules with the configuration file D S390 CONF ZLINUX CNF and with a logofile called ZLINUX_Logo txt HERCULES f D S390 CONF ZLINUX CNF b zLINUX_Logo txt 11 2 Starting Hercules with the Windows GUI The Windows GUI can be started by just clicking on the GUI icon Then all necessary settings required to start Hercules can be specified using the GUI itself Alternatively the Windows GUI may also be manually started from a Windows Command Prompt or can be started by calling a batch file which is the preferred way of these two o
340. ilure fsync will ensure your data on disk is coherent However fsync may cause a noticeable performance degradation Note that an fsync will not be performed more often than every 5 seconds 7 16 4 Examples Example 1 Display the CCKD help panel There is no specific CCKD help command The CCKD command without argument will present the list of available options esch O A Sa Dd eo Sa zl zl Sal od al el Sd ERT GA Am Sp Ent ER At ER ER Am SP En AH St ER ER 9 SP 236 796 0000008E cckd 236 796 0000008E cckd command parameters 236 796 0000008E help Display help message 236 796 0000008E stats Display cckd statistics 236 796 0000008E opts Display cckd options 236 796 0000008E comp lt n gt Override compression Cal se 29 236 796 0000008E compparm lt n gt Override compression parm CG oe SI 236 796 0000008E ra lt n gt Set number readahead threads E el 236 796 0000008E raq lt n gt Set readahead queue size 0 16 236 796 0000008E rat lt n gt Set number tracks to read ahead 0 16 236 796 0000008E wr lt n gt Set number writer threads Che By 236 796 0000008E gcint lt n gt Set garbage collector interval sec E 44 S 36 796 0000008E gcparm lt n gt Set garbage collector parameter 8 8 236 796 0000008E least agressive most aggressive 236 796 0000008E nostress lt n gt 1 Disable stress writes 236 796 0000008E freepend lt n gt Set free pending cycles 1 2s 4 236 796 0000008E fsync lt
341. imary quantity sec This is the space allocation secondary quantity dir This is the number of directory blocks dsorg This specifies the dataset organization PS PO DA or IS recfm This is the record format F FB FBS V VB VBS or U Irecl This is the logical record length blksize This is the block size keylen This is the key length Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 407 All parameters except the dsname and method are optional Defaults of zero are supplied for DCB parameters For datasets loaded with the XMIT method the DCB parameters are taken from the unloaded PDS minimum space allocation required to load the dataset is used unless a larger quantity is specified If space allocation is omitted the default is TRK 1 00 If CYL is specified without any primary quantity then the default allocation is 1 cylinder or the minimum number of cylinders required to load the dataset whichever is larger 8 13 5 Examples Example 1 Create a 2314 volume in a file called SYSRES 230 using the control file SYSRES PLF with message level 2 DASDLOAD SYSRES PLF SYSRES230 2 The corresponding control file SYSRES PLF looks like the following Pack layout file for MFT system residence volume sysres 2314 ieaipl00 rdr sysl parmlib xmit cdrom os360 reslibs parmlib xmi sysl imagelib xmit cdrom os360 reslibs imagelib xmi sysctlg cvol trk 1 0 0 ps fC 256 256 8 sysvtoc vtoc Ek 35 sysl logrec
342. immediate test_under_mask branch_on_condition_register load_multiple load_multiple branch_on_condition_register branch_on_count compare_logical branch_on_condition load_halfword and compare_logical_register branch_on_condition store_control store_control and_character or_character load_control store_then_or_system_mask store_then_and_system_mask store_control or_character load_control branch_on_condition Figure 193 U command Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 373 7 124 UPTIME Display Hercules Emulator uptime 7 124 1 Function The UPTIME console command displays how long the Hercules Emulator has been running 7 124 2 Syntax Descriptive UPTIME Diagram EE 7 124 3 Parameter None 7 124 4 Examples Example 1 Display how long the Hercules Emulator has been running so far uptime lt 1 day 2009 06 15 01 02 53 500 00000C54 uptime 2009 06 15 01 02 53 500 00000C54 Hercules has been up for 06 33 12 Figure 194 UPTIME command uptime lt 1 day Example 2 Display how long the Hercules Emulator has been running so far uptime gt 1 week 2009 06 15 01 02 53 500 00000C54 uptime 2009 06 15 01 02 53 500 00000C54 Hercules has been up for 3 weeks 5 days 16 48 15 Figure 195 UPTIME command uptime gt 1 week Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 374 7 125 V Display or alter vir
343. in the command input area Otherwise behaves like as described in the previous table If the cursor is outside the command input area moves cursor to the end of End the input in the command input area Otherwise behaves like as described in the previous table Table 8 Extended cursor handling 6 4 Log formats The appearance of the log in terms of prefixing the messages is dependent on the used environment The most flexible ways of prefixing the messages is given when running Hercules using the WinGUI Running Hercules with the native console gives only limited options The following table show an overview of the log options depending on the Hercules version used Message Prefix Native Hercules Console Hercules with WinGUI Date No Yes Time Yes Yes Process ID No Yes Prefix es visible on console No Yes Prefix es visible on hardcopy log Yes Yes Table 9 Message prefix overview Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 158 Most of the console command examples in this book are made using the WinGUI as described below In some examples the log options have been reduced to fit one log line into the example boxes in the manual 6 4 1 Hercules Console Using Hercules under Linux Mac OS or Windows without WinGUI lets you prefix the consol messages with a timestamp The difference between these options is shown in the next figure Switching the option can be done with the logopt conso
344. ing e As seen by the guest operating system the TOD clock will appear to jump a large value Some guests may not cope very well with this For example some guests may be dismayed because certain interrupts will occur way past its due time Also for S 370 an interval timer interrupt may be lost if the guest is interrupted for more than half the Interval Timer wrap time around 8 hours e Although some effort has been put in order to make this as transparent as possible that is it should appear to the guest operating system that the STOP key was pressed for a large amount of time some state information may be missed Some guest operating systems will fare better if the suspend state is prepared first For MVS as an example it seems to help when a QUIESCE command and a SYSTEM RESTART manual operation are issued prior to suspend the system 7 82 2 Syntax Descriptive RESUME Diagram RESUME_ H_____111111111111 lt Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 309 7 82 3 Parameter None 7 82 4 Examples Example 1 Resume a Hercules session 229 921 00000FC4 resume 229 921 00000FC4 HHCCPOO8I 229 921 00000FC4 HHCCPOO8I 329 921 00000FC4 HHCSROO1I 229 937 00000FC4 HHCTTOO3I CPU0000 thread ended tid 00000C24 pid 4056 C R T 31 187 00000FC4 HHCCP002I CPU0000 thread started tid 00000EAC pid 4056 priority 0 E ZE C C PU0001 thread ended tid 0000044C pid 4056 esuming suspen
345. ing the instruction about to be executed TRACEOPT TRADITIONAL Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 98 4 54 TZOFFSET TOD clock offset from GMT 4 54 1 Function TZOFFSET is used to define the offset of the TOD clock from the current system time For GMT use the default value 0000 For timezones west of Greenwich specifiy a negative value example 0500 for US Eastern Standard Time 0800 for US Pacific Standard Time For timezones east of Greenwich specifiy a positive value example 0100 for Central European Time 0930 for South Australian Time 4 54 2 Syntax Descriptive TZOFFSET 0000 hAmm Apel Diagram gt gt TZOFFSET 0000 lt hhmm hhmm 4 54 3 Parameter 0000 GMT time 0000 is the default value Please note that this is also the correct setting if your system time the time of the operating system on which Hercules is running is set to local time rather than GMT hhmm Use a positive time in hours and minutes for timezones east of Greenwich hhmm Use a negative time in hours and minutes for timezones west of Greenwich 4 54 4 Examples Example 1 Set the offset of the TOD clock from the current system time to Central European Time TZOFFSET 0100 Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 99 4 55 XPNDSIZE Expanded storage in MB 4 55 1 Function Specifies the expanded storage size in megabytes 4 55 2 Syntax Descriptiv
346. inning with a hash sign or an asterisk are treated as comments and are not checked The system parameters may appear in any order but must precede all device definitions Each system parameter must be specified on a separate line The device records may also appear in any order but must follow the system parameters There must be one device definition for each I O device or for each group of identical I O devices Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 24 3 5 Record Format The following sections describe the format of the Hercules configuration file records The format is slightly different between system parameters and device definitions 3 5 1 Format of the system parameters The record format of the system parameters is as follows system parameter argument where system parameter is the name of the system parameter argument is the value assigned to the system parameter Examples CPUMODEL 3090 HTTPROOT usr local share hercules PANRATE FAST 3 5 2 Format of the device definitions The format of device definition is as follows devnum s devtype argument s where devnum s is either a single devnum see details below a range of devnums separated by a dash 71 a count of devnums seperated by a dot or a comma separated list of devnums Examples include e 0200 0210 e 0300 10 e 0400 0410 e 0100 0110 011F If devnums specifies more than one devic
347. interruption code 7 71 2 Syntax Descriptive PGMTRACE 7ntcode Diagram PGMTRACE lt Ltr intcode a 7 71 3 Parameter intcode intcode specifies the interruption code for which trace information is to be written to the Hercules log or for which the trace information is to be stopped Intcode has to be a valid program interruption code in the range from 0x01 to 0x40 A minus sign directly preceeding the intcode parameter stops tracing for that particular interruption code 7 71 4 Examples Example 1 Display the current program interruption trace settings 12 24 28 718 00000FC4 pgmtrace 12 24 28 718 00000FC4 Tracing suppressed otherwise tracing enabled 12 24 28 718 00000FC4 0000000000000001111111111111111222222222222222233333333333333334 12 24 28 718 00000FC4 123456789ABCDEF0123456789ABCDEF0123456789ABCDEF0123456789ABCDEF0 12 24 28 718 00000FC4 GE SE x x ZS ERTS Ke oe 4 Figure 119 PGMTRACE command display settings Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 288 Example 2 Change the current program interruption trace settings 12 T2 12 12 12 12 224 224 224 224 224 224 37 41 41 41 41 41 RER 265 265 265 265 265 00000FC4 00000FC4 00000FC4 00000FC4 00000FC4 00000FC4 pgmtrace 04 pgmtrace Tracing suppressed otherwise tracing enabled 0000000000000001111111111111111222222222222222233333333333333334 12345
348. ions when running more than one instance of Hercules on the same machine The option takes effect only when the Hercules console is displayed on an xterm terminal commonly used on Unix systems or in a Windows command prompt window Note that this option has no effect when Hercules is run under the control of the Hercules Windows GUI since Hercules s console window is hidden in favour of using the GUI s window instead 4 43 2 Syntax Descriptive PANTITLE text text text text Diagram gt gt PANTITLE e SET text SE E text text text 4 43 3 Parameter text Specifies the optional console window title bar string to be used If the value contains any blanks it must be enclosed within double quotes 4 43 4 Examples Example 1 Set the console window title bar string to Hercules Emulator HMC PANTITLE Hercules Emulator HMC Example 2 Set the console window title bar string to Hercules PANTITLE Hercules Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 88 4 44 PGMPRDOS LPP license setting 4 44 1 Function PGMPRDOS specifies whether or not Hercules will run licensed program product LPP ESA or z Architecture operating systems 4 44 2 Syntax Descriptive PGMPRDOS RESTRICTED LICENSED Diagram p gt gt PGMPRDOS ee eee lt LICENSED 4 44 3 Parameter RESTRICTED When PGMPRDOS is set to RESTRICTED Hercules will stop all CPUs when a licens
349. is This is the default With this option a thread is created to service an I O request for a device if one does not already exist When the I O is complete the thread enters an idle state waiting for new work If a new I O request for the device arrives before the timeout period expires the existing thread will be reused The timeout value is currently hard coded at 5 minutes Note that this option can cause one thread or possibly more to be created for each de vice in your configuration Specifying 0 means there is no limit to the number of threads that can be created Specifiy 1 to cause one time only temporary threads to be created to service each I O request to a device Once the I O request is complete the thread exits Subsequent I Os to the same device will cause another worker thread to be created again Specifiy a value from 1 to n to set an upper limit to the number of threads that can be created to service any I O request to any device Like the 0 option each thread once finished servicing an I O request enters an idle state If a new request arrives before the timeout period expires the thread is reused If all threads are busy when a new I O request arrives a new thread is created only if the specified maximum number of threads have not yet been reached If the specified maximum number of threads already has been reached then the I O request is placed in a queue and will be serviced by the first available thread eg b
350. is virtual tapes as the MVS system looking at these files thinks that they really are tapes There are programs like AWSUTIL which can read real tapes and create virtual tapes from them These virtual tapes can be loaded on a Hercules system somewhere and be read as a tape VTT2DISK performs this function also by reading a real tape and producing an FB 80 folded AWS format tape as an MVS disk file While reading the tape the VIT2DISK program produces a lot of statistics about the tape The advantage of the VIT2DISK program is that it can be run on mainframe based MVS sys tems that cannot normally produce AWS format virtual tapes Another issue is encountered when transferring data in the other direction Suppose you have an MVS system that cannot read a tape in AWS format Most MVS systems which are not P 390 or Hercules machines are in this position For these you have to convert an AWS virtual tape disk file to some format that the MVS system can convert into a REAL tape That is the purpose of the VTT2TAPE program 8 31 2 Control Statements The VTT2DISK program allows the following keywords via the SYSIN DD Statement CHUNKSIZE nnnn Specifies the chunksize Any chunksize up to the limit of 65535 bytes is allowed If not specified the default is 65535 bytes NEWVOL volser This keyword changes the VOLSER on VOL1 label to volser READ The READ keyword produces a read only run no AWSOUT is created Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Refere
351. is written for use in subsequent runs The file contains a number in binary form It cannot be directly edited If this parameter is not specified then the publishing is always done regardless of the file s size The polling interval for use with the size file If this argument is specified it must be a positive integer and it indicates a number of seconds between file size checks In this mode if the input file s size has not changed since the last invocation based on the size stored in the size file the program goes into polling mode where it continually checks the size every interval seconds until a change is detected and then continues processing If Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 464 taillines CRLF HTML NOPB this argument is not given the default behavior is to return with a return code of 4 when the input file s size has not changed Using this argument can improve the efficiency of simple polling in cases where nothing else is to be done on each polling interval This is because it does not require the program to be invoked arguments to be processed etc on each polling interval If no size file is specified this argument is checked for syntax but otherwise ignored The number of lines that should be published If the input file contains more than the given number of lines then only the last lt tail lines gt lines are published If this parameter is not specified the entire file is published This nu
352. ite off Oxfba543c len 372 127 0 trk 32512 write_l2ent Oxfba543c 372 372 5 write off Ox3ff10 len 8 ffset fb840a4 len 372 size 372 126 232 trk 32488 read_l2ent 0x3f710 0 read_12 126 active 0 127 110 ache 109 hit 126 232 trk 32488 read_l2ent O0xfb84218 373 373 trk 32488 at pos Oxfb84218 len 373 32488 write_trkimg len 373 buf 08B156EA 010875000d file 0 read_12 126 active 0 126 109 file 0 trk get_space l get_space f file 0 Tat file 0 12 file 0 fd gt rel_Sspace o 32488 write_trkimg oldl2 Oxfb84218 373 373 en 373 largest 16077451 flags 0x01 ound Oxfba55b0 len 373 size 373 5 write off Oxfba55b0 len 373 126 232 trk 32488 write_l2ent Oxfba55b0 373 373 5 write off Ox3fe50 len 8 ffset fb84218 len 373 size 373 Figure 93 K command Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 261 7 53 LDMOD Load a module 7 53 1 Function The LDMOD command loads a module 7 53 2 Syntax Descriptive LDMOD modu e Diagram gt gt LDMOD module 1111 gt lt 7 53 3 Parameter module The name of the module that has to be loaded 7 53 4 Examples Example 1 Load module dyncrypt 10 TOs 10 10 32 250 33 7333 33 50 50 50 078 0000008E ldmod dyncrypt 078 0000008E HHCHD100I Loading dyncrypt 093 0000008E Crypto module loaded c Copyright Bernard van der Helm 2003 2005 093 O0000008E HHCHD
353. ity default 8 TODPRIO 20 Timer thread process priority TIMERINT DEFAULT Internal timers update interval HTTPROOT D Hercules html HTTP server root directory HTTPPORT 8081 AUTH p390 fzrx6v HTTP server port authorization required SHRDPORT 3990 Shared devcice server port DEFSYM DASDPATH D MVS DASD Define path for DASD devices Device Definitions Card Readers 000C 3505 D MVS JCL DUMMY JCL eof ascii trunc Card Punches 000D 3525 D MVS PCH pch00d txt ascii crlf Line Printers 000E 1403 D MVS PRT prt00e txt crlf 000F 1403 D MVS PRT prt00f txt crlf 030E 1403 D MVS LOG hardcopy log crlf Display Terminals 0010 3270 e 192 168 0 100 0011 3270 K 192 168 0 100 00CO 3270 i 192 168 0 100 00C1 3270 e 192 168 0 100 00C2 3270 192 168 0 100 00C3 3270 192 168 0 200 00c4 3270 192 168 0 200 DOC 3270 S 192 168 0 200 00C6 3270 E Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 27 00C7 3270 8 DASD Devices 0130 2314 0131 2314 0132 2314 0133 2314 0134 2314 0135 2314 0140 3350 0141 3350 0142 3350 0143 3350 0144 3350 0145 3350 0148 3350 0149 3350 0160 3340 0161 3340 0240 3350 0241 3350 0242 3350 0243 3350 0248 3350 0249 3350 024A 3350 024B 3350 0340 3350 0341 3350 0342 3350 0343 3350 0344 3350 0345 3350 0348 3350 0349 3350 034A 3350 034B 3350 TAPE Devices 0480 3420 0481 3420 0482 3420 b 0483 3420 S DD D DD DD DD DD DD DD DD
354. ity is used to convert HDR 30 CKD image files or compressed gz image files to the AWSCKD format that is used by the Hercules Emulator The gz compressed format was recently used by IBM to ship the ADCD DASD image files for the FLEX ES emulator 8 9 2 Syntax Descriptive DASDCONV option option infile outfile Diagram S gine option outfile E 8 9 3 Parameter Options r Replace the output file if it already exists Ifs Output CKD file will be a single file even if it exceeds 2 GB in size q The q quiet option suppresses the progress messages Arguments infile The name and optionally path of the input HDR 30 CKD image file or the name of the compressed gz image file If the hyphen is specified instead of a filename then DASDCONV reads from stdin This gives the possibility of piping the output from gunzip in the case that DASDCONV was generated without gzip support outfile The name of the AWSCKD image file to be created Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 396 8 9 4 Examples Example 1 Convert a gz compressed DASD image file to AWSCKD format Create a large file gt 2 GB and replace the output file if it already exists DASDCONV r lfs D MVS DASD MVSRES GZ D MVS DASD MVSRES CKD 8 9 5 Sample Utility Output Sample 1 Convert a gz compressed DASD image file to AWSCKD format Create a large file gt 2 GB and replace the output
355. ity output Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 436 8 24 DMAP2HRC P 390 DEVMAP conversion program 8 24 1 Function The P 390 DEVMAP to Hercules conversion program reads an IBM P 390 device map file extracts the device definitions and writes these as a valid Hercules configuration file to the standard output 8 24 2 Syntax Descriptive DMAP2HRC 7 ename Diagram gt gt DMAP2ZHRC filename ___ YY I I XIXYY 8 24 3 Parameter filename The name of the DEVMAP input file containing P 390 device statements 8 24 4 Examples Example 1 Convert the P 390 DEVMAP file DEVMAP DVC to a Hercules configuration file named HERCULES CNF D HERCULES DMAP2HRC D S390 CONF DEVMAP DVC gt D S390 CONF HERCULES CNE 8 24 5 Sample Utility Output With the exception of error messages if any the utility does not produce any screen output Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 437 8 25 FTAPE SCSI Tape Test Utility 8 25 1 Function FTAPE is a command line utility that allows to easily test the proper functioning of a Windows SCSI attached tape drive to make sure it s working properly before trying to add it to the Hercules device configuration It supports functions like read and write random or fixed sized blocks of random data fast forward to the next or previous tape mark back space and forward space blocks write tape mark
356. k 012c0c88 00000000 io c 694 04 07 509786 0 14 04 35 00000ed0 SSCH 00010013 00000450 io c 516 04 07 509790 00000ac4 14 04 35 00000ed0 lock before 012c0c88 00000000 channel c 2199 14 04 07 509792 14 04 35 00000ed0 lock after 12c0c88 00000000 channel c 2199 14 04 07 509793 0 14 04 35 00000ed0 unlock 12c0c88 00000000 channel c 2297 14 04 07 509795 0 14 04 35 00000ed0 lock before 12c0c88 00000000 channel c 2430 14 04 07 509798 14 04 35 00000ed0 lock after 12c0c88 00000000 channel c 2430 14 04 07 509799 0 14 04 35 00000ed0 unlock 12c0c88 00000000 channel c 2460 14 04 07 509801 0 14 1 14 d 14 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Figure 126 PTT command display trace entries Example 3 Set the pthread trace options start the trace and issue automatic display of the trace entries after 2 minutes 2009 03 13 10 48 25 248 000003BC ptt prog inter signal io threads logger nowrap to 120 10000 Figure 127 PTT command start trace and issue automatic display Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 298 7 76 PWD Print working directory 7 76 1 Function The PWD command prints the current working directory 7 76 2 Syntax Descriptive PWD Diagram DND A TTT 7 76 3 Parameter None 7 76 4 Examples Example 1 Print the current working directory 2007 08 23 00 50 46 859 00000B54 pwd 2007 08 23 00 50 46 859 00000B54 D Hercules Figure 128 PWD command Hercules Emulator V3 11
357. k size min 320 File 9 Blocks 126 block size min 640 File 10 Blocks 11 block size min 560 File 11 Blocks 512 block size min 800 File 12 Blocks 0 block size min 0 max 0 End of tape Figure 226 TAPEMAP utility output map AWS tape file Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 434 8 23 TAPESPLT Split an AWS tape file 8 23 1 Function The TAPESPLT utility allows it to split an AWSTAPE file into a new AWSTAPE file The number of the files to be copied defines the split point 8 23 2 Syntax Descriptive TAPESPLT 7nfil e outfile count Diagram TAPESPLT infi e outfile count Y Y 8 23 3 Parameter infile The name of the input AWSTAPE disk file outfile The name of the output AWSTAPE disk file count The number of files that have to be copied to the output file 8 23 4 Examples Example 1 Copy the first three files from AWSTAPE file TOLDTAP AWS to the new AWSTAPE file TNEWTAP AWS TAPESPLT D MVS TAPE TOLDTAP AWS D MVS TAPE TNEWTAP AWS 8 23 5 Sample Utility Output Sample 1 Copy the first 10 files from AWSTAPE file T38321A AWS to T4352AA AWS D HERCULES gt tapesplt D MVS TAPE T38321A AWS D MVS TAPE T4352AA AWS 10 Hercules tape split program Version 3 05 c Copyright 1999 2005 by Roger Bowler Jan Jaeger and others Writing output file D MVS TAPE T4352AA AWS VOL138321A Hercules Emula
358. l exception messages to be logged OSTAILOR NULL Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 86 4 42 PANRATE Panel refresh rate 4 42 1 Function PANRATE defines the rate in milliseconds at which the Hercules hardware console HMC will be refreshed Please be aware that the panel refresh rate can reduce overall Hercules performance if PANRATE is set to fast 4 42 2 Syntax Descriptive PANRATE SLOW FAST rate Diagram gt gt PANRATE SLOW lt E p rate 4 42 3 Parameter SLOW SLOW is a synonym for a Hercules hardware console refresh rate of 500 milliseconds This is also the default if PANRATE is not specified FAST FAST is a synonym for a Hercules hardware console refresh rate of 50 milliseconds rate Any value between 1 10 and 5000 milliseconds A value less than the Linux system clock tick interval 10 on Intel platforms 1 on Alpha platforms or a value of more than 5000 will be rejected 4 42 4 Examples Example 1 Set the panel refresh rate to 1 second PANRATE 1000 Example 2 Set the panel refresh rate to 50 milliseconds PANRATE FAST Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 87 4 43 PANTITLE Hercules console window title 4 43 1 Function PANTITLE specifies an optional console window title bar string to be used in place of the default supplied by the windowing system This option allows one to distinguish between different Hercules sess
359. l interrupt the virtual INTERRUPT key is pressed 7 36 2 Syntax Descriptive EXT Diagram gt gt EXT A Ft 7 36 3 Parameter None 7 36 4 Examples Example 1 Generate an external interrupt 2007 06 30 15 30 01 015 00000FC4 ext 2007 06 30 15 30 01 015 O0000FC4 HHCPNO50I Interrupt key depressed Figure 67 EXT command Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 234 7 37 F Mark frames usable or unusable 7 37 1 Function The F command is used to mark storage frames as usable or unusable 7 37 2 Syntax Descriptive F addr Diagram Ree ae ee ce 7 37 3 Parameter Mark storage frame as usable Mark storage frame as unusable addr The address of the storage frame that has to be marked usable or unusable 7 37 4 Examples Example 1 Mark frame at address x 01000000 as unusable 2007 06 30 14 13 14 265 0000073C f 01000000 2007 06 30 14 13 14 265 0000073C HHCPN1311I Frame 01000000 marked unusable Figure 68 F command Example 2 Mark frame at address x 01000000 as usable 2007 06 30 14 13 25 390 0000073C f 01000000 2007 06 30 14 13 25 390 0000073C HHCPN1311I Frame 01000000 marked usable Figure 69 F command Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 235 7 38 FPC Display floating point control register 7 38 1 Function The FPC command displays the content of the floating point
360. last card in the file 000C 1442 D JCL JCL TXT EBCDIC AUTOPAD INTRO Example 3 Define a 2501 card reader device on device address 000C The card reader is a socket device accepting remote connections from address 127 0 0 1 port 2501 The file contains variable length lines of ASCII characters delimited by line feed or carriage return line feed sequences at the end of each line Lines longer than 80 bytes have to be truncated and a unit exception status has to be presented after reading the last card in the file 000C 2501 127 0 0 1 2501 SOCKDEV ASCII TRUNC EOF Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 115 5 6 Card Punch Devices 5 6 1 Function The card punch statement defines a card punch device to the Hercules configuration The argument specifies the name of the file to which the punched output will be written Additional arguments may be specified after the filename 5 6 2 Syntax Descriptive devaddr devtype filename ASCII CRLF NOCLEAR Diagram devaddr devtype filename a ASCII EE OF CLRF NOCLEAR 5 6 3 Parameter devaddr This is the device address devtype This is the device type A valid card punch type is 3525 filename The name and optionally the path of the card punch file ASCII ASCII specifies that the file will be written as variable length lines of ASCII characters delimited by line feeds or carriage return line feed sequences Trailing blanks are
361. ld messages without having to wait for the timeout period to expire 7 67 2 Syntax Descriptive MSGHLD nnn INFO CLEAR Diagram gt gt MSGHOLD nnn lt INFO CLEAR 7 67 3 Parameter nnn This value specifies the new timeout value of held messages in seconds INFO Display the current message held time setting CLEAR Release the held messages immediately 7 67 4 Examples Example 1 Set the new timeout interval for held messages to 30 seconds 2009 01 08 09 09 34 781 00000CA0 msghld 30 2009 01 08 09 09 34 781 00000CA0 Current message held time is set to 30 seconds Figure 112 MSGHELD command set new interval Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 281 Example 2 Release all held messages 2009 01 08 09 10 38 241 00000CA0 msghld clear 2009 01 08 09 10 38 241 00000CA0 Held messages cleared Figure 113 MSGHELD command release messages Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 282 7 68 MSGNOH Display message on console like VM but without header 7 68 1 Function The MSGNOH command is actually a VM CP command It is used to transmit message text to the virtual console of other active users without the standard MESSAGE command header However some pro grammers also use this command as a simplified way to display messages on the own virtual machine console by using MSGNOH lt message text gt So basically all the MSGNOH co
362. le will not be truncated regardless of the strictsize setting This affects any write that starts below the limit but that would extend beyond the limit The STRICTSIZE parameter only affects compressed HET files On AWS tapes the limit is always enforced but the file is not truncated the write does not occur because first AWS tapes are never truncated and second the effects of the write are known in ad vance Regardless of strictsize any write operation Write Write TM will return a Unit Check with Equipment Check to the program if the file size exceeds the predefined limit If STRICTSIZE is 0 the write will actually have been performed on the tape file When STRICTSIZE is set to 1 the file will be truncated on the preceeding tape block boun dary Care must be taken that regardless of the STRICTSIZE setting the tape may become unusable for the guest program should such an event occur absence of a Tape Mark for example This option has no effect if maxsize is 0 The default is O do not truncate Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 128 The remaining parameters are described in section 5 8 6 Common parameters for AWS HET and FakeTape virtual files 5 8 4 4 Examples Example 1 Define a 3490 tape device on device address 0580 The tape device is a HET virtual file with name RO674A HET located in path S390 TAPES BZIP2 compression has to be turned on at a level of 9 best comp
363. le command or can be set at startup time through the logopt system parameter Please note that the console itself does not show the timestamp independent of the logopt settings Only the hardcopy log does show the timestamp logopt no HCPN1971 pr timestamp Log option set NOTIMESTAMP H g E E e E E Cc 2 2 2 Zot 23 23 23s 23 23 23 233 PU0000 PU0000 PU0000 PU0000 PU0000 PU0000 PU0000 PU0000 3 01 32 3701732 3 01 36 R0 0000000000000000 R2 0000000000000000 R4 0000000000000000 R6 0000000000000000 R8 0000000000000000 RA 0000000000000000 RC 0000000000000000 RE 0000000000000000 logopt timestamp pr R1 0000000000000000 R3 0000000000000000 R5 0000000000000000 R7 0000000000000000 R9I 0000000000000000 RB 0000000000000000 RD 0000000000000000 HCPN197I Log option set RF 0000000000000000 TIMESTAMP oO OO Oo OC oS oOo So 3 1336 236 13 6 236 236 36 356 1336 H g CPU0000 CPU0000 CPU0000 CPU0000 CPU0000 CPU0000 CPU0000 CPU0000 RO 0000000000000000 R2 0000000000000000 R4 0000000000000000 R6 0000000000000000 R8 0000000000000000 RA 0000000000000000 RC 0000000000000000 RE 0000000000000000 R1 0000000000000000 R3 0000000000000000 R5 0000000000000000 R7 0000000000000000 R9 0000000000000000 RB 0000000000000000 RD 0000000000000000 RF 0000000000000000 Figure 6 Message prefixing using the native Hercules c
364. les Emulator User Reference Guide ccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeaaeeeeeeeseeeeseaeeetaeeneneessaees 20 2 4 Hercules Emulator Messages and Codes cc ccccccceeeeeeeeneeceeeeeceaeeeeeaeeeeaeeseeeeeseaeeesnaeeteneeseaees 20 2 5 Hercules Emulator Reference SUMMAry ccccccceeeceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeceaeeeeaaeeeeneeseeeesaeeesaeeseneeseaees 20 3 Hercules Configuration File 21 BA gt The Configuration Filerna ta ockybeetecwactadsdesepuadasachsdoebovuhcapedasQedsaesnedesedate ed deeded 21 3 2 System Parameters teen een a eel ti aii teenth ESO 21 3 3 Device DerinitionSs sci E E E O A EA E E S E TAE 23 S Eo oie AmE E E A EES E A E 24 35 Record Formal eege aAA EREE NENES E TAE AAEN AEEA EES E ie Raia 25 3 6 Sample Configuration File 26 E ul eEETOe E LEE 29 3 8 Enhanced Symbol Substitution cccccccecceeeceeeeeeeceeeeeceaeeeeaeeseeeeecaeeseaaeeseaeeseeeeseaeessaeeseneeseaees 30 4 System Parameter Descriptions ese tsntttntttnttnttnntn ntn netn neen nstnnstnnstnnnennssenssennnnn nnns 32 AA HOF COMMENTHINGS eri facese es wesc ud saesen sad 08d ca och ys che evar cd vvavbaatavushed cand es dhe cpedaed dea sack EES ege ee 32 4 2 ARCHMODE Initial architecture mode 33 4 3 ASN_AND_LX_REUSE ALRF ESAME ASN and LX REUSE feature 34 4 4 AUTOMOUNT Tape automount root directory ceeecceeeeeeeeeceeeee cee eeeeaeeeeeeeseeeesaeeesaeeteneeenaees 35 4 5 AUTO_SCSI_MOUNT Automatic SCSI tape moumte e 3
365. list Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 243 Example 4 Delete rule at index 0 2007 06 20 16 54 31 625 O0000FC4 hao del 0 2007 06 20 16 54 31 625 00000FC4 HHCAOO25I Rule at index 0 succesfully deleted Figure 79 HAO command del Example 5 Delete all rules stop Hercules Automatic Operator 2007 06 20 16 54 31 625 00000FC4 hao clear 2007 06 20 16 54 31 625 00000FC4 HHCAO022T All automatic operation rules cleared Figure 80 HAO command clear Example 6 Sample of automatic execution of a command triggerred via the use of an unknown console command as defined in example 1 and 2 2007 06 20 16 54 31 625 00000FC4 offload 2007 06 20 16 54 31 625 00000FC4 HHCPN139E Command offload not found enter for list 2007 06 20 16 54 31 625 00000FC4 HHCAO003I Firing command 2007 06 20 16 54 31 625 00000FC4 2007 06 20 16 54 31 625 00000FC4 HHCPN140I Valid panel commands are 2007 06 20 16 54 31 625 00000FC4 Figure 81 HAO fired command Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 244 7 43 HELP List all commands command specific help 7 43 1 Function The HELP command displays additional information for specific Hercules console commands if extra information is available If the command has additional help text it will be displayed HELP without para meter lists all available commands see also command The help text is usually limited to ex
366. ll create these spooled print files in whatever directory you choose using your specified options Several HercPrt instances can be run simultaneously each spooling a different Hercules line printer for either the same instance or a completely different instance of Hercules The options used for each printer are saved under a user specific printer ID so that the same options can easily be specified the next time HercPrt is run by simply selecting the desired printer ID from a provided list of previously defined printer IDs The main dialog user interface is fully resizable and can be completely hidden minimized to the system tray area for minimal interference with normal Windows use Automatic connection and reconnection sup port with a user configurable delay between retries is provided as well as complete control over the dis play of popup balloon tooltips used to notify the user of either incoming print output or loss of connectivity 8 26 2 Installation The installation of HercPrt is beyond the scope of this manual For detailed instructions on installing HercPrt on a Windows system please see the Hercules Installation Guide 8 26 3 Hercules Configuration HercPrt is designed to receive text output from a Hercules socket device sockdev line printer In order to use HercPrt with Hercules a sockdev printer must first be added to the Hercules configuration A Hercules socket printer definition looks similar to the fol
367. lled processor engines The value of MAXCPU can not exceed the value of MAX_CPU_ENGINES If MAXCPU is not specified in the configuration file then the default value is the value of MAX_CPU_ENGINES Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 78 4 35 4 Examples Example 1 Set the maximum number of installed processor engines to 8 MAXCPU 8 Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 79 4 36 MODEL Model names returned by STSI instruction 4 36 1 Function MODEL specifies the model names returned by the STSI instruction If two operands are supplied the first is the hardware model name CPC ND model and the second is the capacity model name CPC SI model If only one operand is supplied it is used as both the hardware model name and the capacity model name The optional third and fourth operands specify the permanent capacity model name and the temporary capacity model name respectively The default model name is EMULATOR 4 36 2 Syntax Descriptive MODEL EMULATOR hardware model capacity_model perm_capacity_model temp_capacity_model Diagram p gt gt MODEL e EMULATOR aa hae ae hardware_mode capacity model KEE a i eaa a KEE perm_capacity_model temp_capacity_mode 4 36 3 Parameter hardware_model This specifies the hardware model name This can be any name with a maximum length of 16 characters If the MODEL system parameter is not specified in the configuration file
368. llows the hercifc program to create a network route for this specific virtual adapter Please note that it is not necessary to include point to point routes for each IP address in the table This is done automatically by the emulation module The read write devices can be swapped by coding the odd address of the even odd pair in the OAT Up to 4 virtual relative adapters 00 03 are currently supported If no Address Translation file is specified the emulation module will create the following An ethernet adapter port 0 for TCP IP traffic only Two device addresses devnum and devnum 1 5 9 5 5 Examples Example 1 Define LCS LAN Channel Station emulation adapters on device addresses 0440 and 0441 The name of the TUN TAP special character device is dev net tun The IP address of the Hercules guest OS side is 192 168 200 2 0440 2 LCS n dev net tun 192 168 200 2 Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 142 5 9 6 VMNET Channel to Channel link via SLIP VMNET 5 9 6 1 Function If the emulation mode is not specified on the configuration statement it is assumed to be a point to point link to the driving system s TCP IP stack using Willem Konynenberg s VMNET package This provides the same function as the CTCI mode of operation except that it uses a virtual SLIP interface instead of the TUN TAP driver Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 143 5 10 FBA DASD Devices 5 10 1 Fun
369. lock Length 1 g File 1 Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 425 Blocks in Blocksize ax Blocksize Uncompressed bytes in Blocksize Comp ax Blocksize Comp Compressed bytes File Blocks in Blocksize ax Blocksize Uncompressed bytes in Blocksize Comp ax Blocksize Comp Compressed bytes Label Dataset ID Volume Serial Volume Sequence Dataset Sequence GDG Number GDG Version Creation Date Expiration Date Dataset Security Block Count Low System Code Block Count High Label Record Format Block Size Record Length Density Dataset Position Job Step ID Recording Technique Control Character Block Attribute Device Serial Checkpoint ID Large Block Length File Blocks Min Blocksize Max Blocksize Uncompressed bytes 80 80 240 23 68 2 196 20 19060 2907140 20 4739 579020 EOF1 RPF INST SRPFASM RPF142 0001 0001 74186 00000 Wett 000196 IBM OS VS 370 EOF2 Wt 19060 19056 W vn HERCO1 UNLOAD to 20001 L 80 160 Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 426 in Blocksize Comp ax Blocksize Comp Compressed bytes File Blocks in Blocksize ax Blocksize Uncompressed bytes in Blocksize Comp ax Blocksize Comp Compressed bytes Summary Files Blocks Uncompressed bytes Compressed bytes Reduction 54 73 127 OY E E 3
370. lowing device definition statement OOOE 1403 192 168 0 100 14031 sockdev The value 192 168 0 100 14031 is the TCP IP address and the port number at which the Hercules socket printer will listen for incoming connections The IP address is typically the IP address of the Windows system where HercPrt is running on and the port number can be any value from 1024 to 65535 Note that Hercules socket printers do not support any other options besides sockdev the clrf and no clear options for example are invalid when defining a socket printer For details on how to define printers in a Hercules configuration file please see the Hercules User Reference manual Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 446 When Hercules is powered on the socket printer begins listening for incoming connections on the IP ad dress and port number that are assigned to it When you start HercPrt you define a printer at the same IP address and the same port number and click the connect button HercPrt should then establish a connection to that Hercules printer and immediately begins spooling re ports from this printer if any are available Whether any reports are available or not on a given printer as well as how to print them depends on the guest operating system and associated spooler running under Hercules and is beyond the scope of this manual 8 26 4 Program Options Page The following figure shows the first of two ava
371. ls 555 cyls 566 cyls 566 cyls 566 cyls 566 cyls 566 cyls 555 heads 38 heads 38 heads 36 heads 38 heads 38 heads 38 heads 38 heads 38 tracks 16656 tracks 16656 tracks 16866 tracks 168660 tracks 16866 tracks 168606 tracks 16866 tracks 1665 2663 2616 H tid 64606C48 pid 3984 tid 6666G6E5S pid 3984 trklen 7686 trklen 7686 trklen 7686 trklen 7686 trklen 7686 trklen 7686 trklen 1945 trklen 1 945 trklen 1945 trklen 1 945 trklen 1945 trklen 1 945 trklen 1945 trklen 1 94U Figure 3 Hercules Hardware Console Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 154 Hercules Emulator HMC MVS V3 8 Ass gnment D MUS READER DUMMY 0 101 14032 MUS7 LOG hardcopy 192 168 6 161 192 168 6 161 192 168 6 161 192 168 6 161 192 168 6 161 192 168 6 161 192 168 6 161 192 168 6 161 192 168 6 161 KXEKKKKKKKS Ge Ek e Let Tie MUS DASD SORTG O MUS DASD SORT 1 MUS DASD SORT 2 MUS DASD SORTG 3 MUS DASD SORTO 4 MUS DASD SORTO S MUS DASD WORKGBG MUS DASD WORKG 1 MUS DASD PRDOGB MUS DASD PRDG G1 MUS DASD PRDOE2 MUS DASD PRDG G3 MUS DASD MUSRES MUS DASD MUSDLB MUS DAS D PAGE S MUS DASD PAGE 1 MUS DASD PU BOOB MUS DASD PUBGG1 MUS DASD PUBGE2 MUS DASD PUBGG3 MUS DASD SYS 608 MUS DASD SYS 081 MUS DASD SYS 482 MUS DASD SYS 683 MUS DASD CBT G66
372. lue used when reading a tape with bypass label processing BLP Thus on a labeled tape file 1 will always be the VOL1 record Run RAWSTAPE with SYSUT1 pointing to AWS input file and SYSUT2 to the output file for example copying a standalone dump tape 8 30 2 Examples The following example copies an AWS tape format dataset back to a blocked OS dataset CONVERT EXEC PGM RAWSTAPE PARM 3 STEPLIB DD DSN IBMUSER LOAD DISP SHR SYSUDUMP DD SYSOUT SYSUTI1 DD DISP SHR DSN IBMUSER SADUMP AWS SYSUT2 DD DSN IBMUSER SADUMP DISP NEW CATLG UNIT SYSALLDA SPACE TRK 1200 RLSE Figure 236 RAWSTAPE utility JCL After the previous example the IBMUSER SADUMP contains the correct data but still has invalid DCB parameters in the DSCB these can be corrected with IEBGENER as following SETDCB EXEC PGM IEBGENER SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT SYSIN DD DUMMY SYSUT1 DD DUMMY DCB DSORG PS RECFM FBS LRECL 4160 BLKSIZE 29120 N SYSUT DD DISP MOD DCB SYSUT1 DSN IBMUSER SADUMP Figure 237 IEBGENER JCL for RAWSTAPE utility Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 474 8 31 VTTS Virtual tape transportation system The programs presented in this section are part of the VTTS Virtual tape transportation system and are copyrighted and owned by Sam Golob however the programs on CBTTAPE
373. ly no repairs are done level The level of checking that is to be performed The higher the level the longer the integrity check takes The level is any number from 1 4 Level 1 performs a minimal check Device headers are verified free space is verified primary lookup table and secondary lookup tables are verified Level 2 performs a normal check These are the same checks as in level 1 plus all 5 byte track headers are verified Level 3 performs the maximum checking These are the same checks as in level 1 plus all track images are read uncompressed and verified Level 4 recovers everything Arguments filename Name of the CCKD DASD image file to be checked Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 382 8 2 4 Examples Example 1 Perform a minimal checking of a CCKD DASD file without doing any repairs CCKDCDSK 0 ro D MVS DASD MVSRES CCKD Example 2 Perform a maximum level check and repair of a CCKD DASD file and force the check even the OPENED bit is set on CCKDCDSK r f D MVS DASD MVSRES CCKD 8 2 5 Sample Utility Output Sample 1 Perform a maximum level check and repair of a CCKD DASD file and force the check even the OPENED bit is set on D HERCULES gt cckdcdsk 3 ro D MVS DASD MVSRES CCKD size 301956072 used 301956072 free 0 imbed D first 0x0 number 0 Figure 201 CCKDCDSK utility output Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 383 8 3 CCKDCOMP CCKD DASD
374. map t D MVS TAPE RPF142 HET VOL1RPF1420 HDR1IRPF INST SRPFAS HDR2V190601905640HE File 1 Blocks 3 b File 2 Blocks 196 EOF1RPF INST SRPFAS EOF2V190601905640HE File 3 Blocks 2 b HDR1IRPF INST SRPFOB HDR2V031400313640HE File 4 Blocks 2 b File 5 Blocks 126 EOF1RPF INST SRPFOB EOF2V031400313640HE File 6 Blocks 2 b HDR1IRPF INST SRPFHE HDR2V190601905640HE File 7 Blocks 2 b File 8 Blocks 8 b EOF1RPF INST SRPFHE EOF2V190601905640HE File 9 Blocks 2 b HDR1IRPF INST SRPFLO HDR2V190891908540HE File 10 Blocks 2 File 11 Blocks 55 EOF1RPF INST SRPFLO EOF2V190891908540HE File 12 Blocks 2 HDR1IRPF INST CNTL HDR2V190601905640HE File 13 Blocks 2 File 14 Blocks 19 EOFIRPF INST CNTL EOF2V190601905640HE File 15 Blocks 2 File 16 Blocks 0 End of tape Figure 223 HETMAP utility output TAPEMAP compatible output Hercules Emulator V3 11 RPF14200010001 RCO1 UNLOAD block size min 20 RPF14200010001 RCO1 UNLOAD J RPF14200010002 RCO1 UNLOAD lock size min 80 max 80 block size min 60 J RPF14200010002 RCO1 UNLOAD LPRPF14200010003 RCO1 UNLOAD LPRPF14200010003 RC01 UNLOAD ADRPF14200010004 RC01 UNLOAD block size min 80 block size min 20 ADRPF14200010004 RC01 UNLOAD block size min 80 RPF14200010005 RC01 UNLOAD block size min 80 block size min 60 RPF14200010005 RC01 UNLOAD block size min 80 lock size min 80
375. max 80 lock size min 80 max 80 Hercules HET and AWS tape map program Version 3 0 7 c Copyright 1999 2009 by Roger Bowler Jan Jaeger and others 74186 000000000000IBM S 30001 lock size min 80 max 80 max 19060 74186 000000000196IBM S 30001 74186 000000000000IBM S 30001 max 3140 74186 000000000126IBM S 30001 74186 000000000000IBM S 30001 lock size min 80 max 80 lock size min 60 max 11232 74186 000000000008IBM S 30001 lock size min 80 max 80 74186 000000000000IBM S 30001 max 80 max 18864 74186 000000000055IBM S 30001 max 80 74186 000000000000IBM S 30001 max 80 max 10672 74186 000000000019IBM S 30001 max 80 block size min 0 max 0 User Reference Guide OS VS OS VS OS VS OS VS OS VS OS VS OS VS OS VS OS VS OS VS 370 370 370 370 370 370 370 370 370 370 Page 428 8 20 HETUPD Update and or copy an AWS or HET tape file 8 20 1 Function The HETUPD utility updates and or copies emulated tape files 8 20 2 Syntax Descriptive HETUPD option option source destination Diagram gt gt HETUPD source S option Ys eka Sie 2 destination 8 20 3 Parameter Options 1 9 Compression level 1 compress fast 9 compress best b Use bzlib compression c n Set chunk size to n d Decompress source tape file h Display usage summary help text r Rechunk tape file S Strict
376. mber gives the number of printed lines published including page separators Note that the number may be off by one in either direction If the final character of the file is a formfeed then a trailing page separator is always output which can add an extra line in some cases By the same token if the tail is broken on a formfeed character then the entire formfeed which counts as two line breaks is skipped resulting in one fewer line of output If this argument is ONLY in all caps then the size file must also be specified In that case the program translates only the part of the printer file that is new since the prior invocation unless the new size is smaller than the old size in which case the whole file is translated The purpose of this feature is to allow this program to be used as a sort of spool writer in conjunction with scripts that do something interesting with the incremental output such as print it to a printer In this mode empty output files are not produced If the output is zero length and ONLY is specified the program terminates with a return code of 4 If specified then all linefeeds in the source file are translated to CR LF pairs and CR LF is used as the terminator for the page break line If not specified no linefeed translation is done and the page break line is terminated with a newline character This parameter is case sensitive must be uppercase If specified then HTML tags are added to the published output file The
377. meter path This specifies the new path The path can be specified absolute D S390 DASD or relative to the current path DASD 7 17 4 Examples Example 1 Change the current directory absolute path 14 22 01 091 00000FC4 cd D S390 14 22 01 091 00000FC4 D S390 Figure 32 CD command absolute path Example 2 Change the current directory relative path 14 22 55 084 00000FC4 cd DASD 14 22 55 084 00000FC4 D S390 DASD Figure 33 CD command relative path Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 199 7 18 CF Configure CPU online or offline 7 18 1 Function The CF command is used to place a CPU online or offline The number of the CPU to be taken online or offline has to be specified first with the CPU command refer to the CPU command for further informa tion If the CF command is issued without a parameter the actual status of the CPU is displayed Use the CFALL command to display the status of all CPUs or to configure all CPUs online or offline 7 18 2 Syntax Descriptive CF ON OFF Diagram gt gt CF lt ON OFF 7 18 3 Parameter ON Place the specified CPU online OFF Place the specified CPU offline 7 18 4 Examples Example 1 Display the actual status of CPU 1 2007 06 30 14 12 38 531 00000FC4 cpu 1 2007 06 30 14 12 42 796 00000FC4 cf 2007 06 30 14 12 42 796 00000FC4 HHCPN152I CPU0001 online Figure 34 C
378. ming tn3270 client 5 2 2 Syntax Descriptive devaddr SYSG groupname sl ipaddr mask Diagram p gt devaddr SYSG RHY_ TS lt groupname ipaddr mask 5 2 3 Parameter devaddr This is the device address In the case of the integrated 3270 SYSG console this address is ignored SYSG This is the device type The only valid device type is SYSG groupname If aterminal group name is given on the device statement then a device type suffix with this group name can be used to indicate that a device in this group is to be used Ifa group name is specified as a terminal type suffix e g IBM 3278 GROUPNAME and there are no devices defined with that group name or no available devices remaining in that group then the connection is rejected If no group name is specified as a terminal type suffix then the connection will only be eligible to terminal devices which also have no group name specified Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 107 ipaddr mask The terminal group name should be 1 8 alphanumeric characters in length the first cha racter being alphabetic and it should not be a hexadecimal number Upper and lower case letters in the group name are considered to be equivalent The asterisk is used to indicate any terminal group name It may be omitted if there are no additional arguments following the group name If an IP address and optionally mask is specified and there is no specific grou
379. mmand does is to display a message on the Hercules console like the MESSAGE and MSG commands but without VM like headers Therefore the MSGNOH command is not really intended to be used directly from the Hercules console as shown in the example below although it does not hurt doing so See also the MESSAGE and MSG commands in this manual 7 68 2 Syntax Descriptive MSGNOH parms Diagram MSGNOH paras 4 7 68 3 Parameter parms parms specifies the required and optional parameters as described in IBM s VM CP Commands and Utilities Reference manual 7 68 4 Examples Example 1 Display a message on the own virtual machine console 18 24 19 msgnoh transmitted message to VM console 18 24 19 transmitted message to VM console Figure 114 MSGNOH command Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 283 7 69 OSTAILOR Specify intended operating system 7 69 1 Function The OSTAILOR command lets you display or re specify the intended operating system The effect of this parameter is to reduce control panel message traffic by selectively suppressing trace messages for program checks which are considered normal in the specified environment The argument QUIET suppresses all exception messages whereas the argument NULL suppresses none of them The other options do suppress some messages and do not supress other messages depending on the specified operating system 7 69 2 Syntax
380. mpty scrolls the message area to the bottom Page Up Scrolls the message area up one screen Page Down Scrolls the message area down one screen Up arrow Recalls the previous command into the input area Down arrow Recalls the next command into the input area Right arrow Moves cursor to the next character of the input area Left arrow Moves cursor to the previous character of the input area Ctrl Up arrow Scrolls the message area up one line Ctrl Down arrow Scrolls the message area down one line Ctrl Home Scrolls the message area to the top Ctrl End Scrolls the message area to the bottom Table 7 Normal cursor handling Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 157 6 3 2 Extended cursor handling The following additional keyboard functions are effective when the Hercules Extended Cursor Handling feature OPTION_EXTCURS is activated at compile time At present this feature is activated on the Windows platform only Extended cursor handling Alt Up arrow Moves cursor up one row Alt Down arrow Moves cursor down one row Alt Right arrow Moves cursor right one column Alt Left arrow Moves cursor left one column If the cursor is outside the command input area moves cursor to the start of Tab the input in the command input area Otherwise behaves like as described in the previous table If the cursor is outside the command input area moves cursor to the start of Home the input
381. mulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 246 7 44 HERC Send Hercules command 7 44 1 Function The HERC command sends a command in any CMDTGT mode to the Hercules Emulator See also CMDTGT SCP and PSCP commands 7 44 2 Syntax Descriptive HERC cmd Diagram kk HERC Pe tee oe eee cmd 7 44 3 Parameter cmd This is the command to be sent to the Hercules Emulator 7 44 4 Examples Example 1 Send a Hercules command in SCP or PSCP command target mode 2008 08 30 09 10 04 390 00000FC4 herc psw 2008 08 30 09 10 04 390 00000FC4 psw sm 00 pk 0 cmwp 0 as pri cc 0 pm 0 am 24 ia 0 2008 08 30 09 10 04 390 00000FC4 PSW 00000000 00000000 Figure 84 HERC command Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 247 7 45 HERCLOGO Read new logo file 7 45 1 Function The HERCLOGO command loads a new logo file for 3270 terminal sessions For details on how to code the logo file see chapter 10 7 45 2 Syntax Descriptive HERCLOGO 7 7ename Diagram gt gt HERCLOGO lt filename 7 45 3 Parameter filename The filename of a logo text file located in the current Hercules directory that will be loaded If no filename is specified the built in logo is used instead 7 45 4 Examples Example 1 Load a new logo file 2007 06 30 12 45 53 859 00000FC4 herclogo herclogo txt Figure 85 HERCLOGO command Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guid
382. n TODDRAG specifies the TOD clock drag factor This parameter can be used to slow down or speed up the TOD clock by a factor of nn A significant slowdown can improve the performance of some operating systems which consume significant amounts of CPU time processing timer interrupts A drag factor of 2 0 slows down the clock by 50 a drag factor of 0 5 doubles the speed of the clock a drag factor of 1 01 slows down the clock by 1 and 0 99 speeds up the clock by 1 4 51 2 Syntax Descriptive TODDRAG 1 000000 factor Diagram gt gt TODDRAG 1 000000 lt L actor 4 51 3 Parameter factor The factor by which the TOD clock will be slowed down or sped up The default factor is 1 000000 4 51 4 Examples Example 1 Slow down the TOD clock by 50 TODDRAG 2 Example 2 Double the speed of the TOD clock TODDRAG 0 5 Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 96 4 52 TODPRIO Timer thread process priority 4 52 1 Function With this parameter you can specify the priority of the TOD clock and the timer threads Caution TODPRIO should be given a dispatching priority equal to or higher than any other thread CPUPRIO DEVPRIO HERCPRIO within Hercules 4 52 2 Syntax Descriptive TODPRIO 20 mn Diagram gt gt TODPRIO H E DEE nn 4 52 3 Parameter nn This value specifies the priority of the TOD clock and the timer thread For details on the priority values s
383. n CKD_KEY tracing on off mark frames unusable usable Figure 11 command Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 176 7 5 AEA Display AEA absolute effective address tables 7 5 1 Function Display the Hercules AEA tables The AEA table is an address lookup accelerator which saves absolute data addresses for further lookups to eliminate the calls to logical_to_main This shortens the translation path length 7 5 2 Syntax Descriptive AEA Diagram gt gt AEA A nHKVTVIC_ 7 5 3 Parameter None 7 5 4 Examples Example 1 Display the AEA tables 238 731 00000FC4 aea 38 731 00000FC4 aea mode Primary 38 731 00000FC4 aea ar Od 07 01 1 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 OT O01 O01 O01 O01 O1 OT 238 731 O00000FC4 aea common 0 001 0 0 0 0 001 0 0 0 0 001 0 0 238 731 O0000FC4 aea cr 1 000000003fffe07f 38 731 00000FC4 cr 7 000000003fffe07f 1 38 731 00000FC4 cr 13 000000003fffe07f 38 731 00000FC4 cr r O0O0000000ffffffff Sos BS 8B BB ws N N N NB NY NY NY LHD Figure 12 AEA command Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 177 7 6 AIA List AIA absolute instruction address fields 7 6 1 Function Display the Hercules AIA fields The AIA fields are an instruction fetch accelerator which save absolute instruction addresses for further lookups to shorten the translation path length 7 6 2 Syntax Descriptive AIA Diagr
384. n gt 1 Enable fsync 236 796 0000008E trace lt n gt Set trace table size O 200000 Figure 28 CCKD HELP command Example 2 Display the CCKD options panel 17 51 13 453 QO00008E cckd opts 17 51 13 453 0000008E comp 1 compparm 1 ra 2 raq 4 rat 2 wr 2 gcint 10 gcparm 0 nostress 0 17 51 13 453 O0000008E freepend 1 fsync 0 trace 0 linuxnull 0 Figure 29 CCKD OPTS command Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 197 Example 3 Display the CCKD statistics panel 0000008E cckd stats 0000008E reads 344 Kbytes 5175 writes 0 Kbytes 0 0000008E readaheads 42 misses 4 syncios 337 misses 302 0000008E switches 650 12 reads 6 stress writes 0 0000008E cachehits 347 misses 303 12 hits 33 misses 6 0000008E waits EE 2 cache 0 0000008E garbage collector moves 0 Kbytes 0 Figure 30 CCKD STATS command Example 4 Set a CCKD parameter 18 23 38 187 00000B28 cckd gcint 30 18 23 38 187 00000B28 comp 1 compparm 1 ra 2 raq 4 rat 2 wr 2 gcint 30 gcparm 0 nostress 0 18 23 38 187 00000B28 freepend 1 fsync 0 trace 0 linuxnull 0 Figure 31 CCKD command set options Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 198 7 17 CD Change directory 7 17 1 Function The CD command changes the current directory 7 17 2 Syntax Descriptive CD path Diagram CD path 7 17 3 Para
385. n sequence 13 6 Examples Example 1 Issue the command i 0700 in response to the message HHCTE014I 3270 device OO1F client 127 0 0 1 connection reset The following HAO commands define the desired rule HAO TGT HHCTEO14I 3270 device 0 9A F 3 4 HAO CMD i 1 Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 496 Example 2 Use the dot matrix display of a 3480 tape unit to implement an automatic tape library please note that the first HAO command has been split over two lines to fit on the page HAO TGT HHCTAO10I 0 9A F 4 Now displays 8 2 M A Z0 9 1 6 s s HAO CMD devinit 1 D MVSTAPI ES 2 AWSTAPE Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide py Page 497 14 Submitting Jobs via the Socket Reader 14 1 Socket Reader Basics The sockdev option allows you to submit cards directly to a Hercules card reader from outside of Her cules The card reader must be defined with the sockdev keyword and either a TCP IP port number or the name of a Unix Domain Socket Then whenever you want to submit a card deck to that particular card reader you use an external program to connect to the socket and transmit the cards to the reader Socket readers were implemented by Fish based upon code originally contributed by Malcolm Beattie Socket readers are defined in the Hercules configuration like this Descriptive devnum devtype sockspec sockde
386. n specifies the support level that is reported to the operating system Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 58 4 18 4 Examples Example 1 Enable Extended Control Program Support Virtual Machine support ECPSVM YES Example 2 Enable ECPS VM support and set the level reported to the operating system to 20 ECPSVM LEVEL 20 Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 59 4 19 ENGINES Processor engine type 4 19 1 Function The ENGINES parameter specifies the type of engine for each installed processor The default engine type is CP The number of installed processor engines is determined by the MAXCPU configuration statement If the ENGINES configuration statement specifies more than MAXCPU engines the excess engines are ignored If fewer than MAXCPU engines are specified the remaining engines are set to type CP the default See the MAXCPU configuration statement for details regarding the MAX_CPU_ENGINES compile time variable For detailed explanations on the interrelationship between ENGINES MAXCPU and NUMCPU please see Appendix B Configuration of Emulated CPUs 4 19 2 Syntax Descriptive ENGINES Lon CP IL AP IP Diagram gt gt ENGINES cP 4 nn IL AP IP 4 19 3 Parameter nn This is an optional repeat count CP Specifies a processor engine of type CP This is the default IL Specifies a processor engine o
387. n table to the default CODEPAGE DEFAULT Example 2 Set the codepage conversion table to 437 500 CODEPAGE 437 500 Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 45 4 9 CONKPALV Console and telnet clients keep alive option 4 9 1 Function The CONKPALYV parameter specifies the tn3270 console and telnet clients keepalive option values that control automatic detection of disconnected tn3270 telnet client sessions This is a built in feature of TCP IP and allows detection of unresponsive TCP IP connections and not idle clients That is to say your connection will not be terminated after 3 seconds of idle time Your 3270 session can remain idle for many minutes or hours or days without any data being transmitted If the TCP IP stack at the other end of the connection not your 3270 client itself fails to respond to the internal keepalive probe packets however then it means that the TCP IP stack itself is down or there has been a physical break in the connection Thus even if your 3270 client is completely idle your system s TCP IP stack itself should still respond to the keepalive probes sent by the TCP IP stack at the Hercules end of the link If it doesn t then TCP IP will terminate the tn3270 telnet session which will cause Hercules to disconnect the terminal The three values can also be modified on demand via the conkpalv panel command which has the exact same syntax Note that the synta
388. n the DASD image file TST001 AA0 DASDSEQ ASCII D MVS DASD TST0O01 AA0 D MVS DASD SYS2 SEQ DATA 8 16 5 Sample Utility Output Sample 1 Extract and list the sequential dataset SYS2 SEQ DATA on the DASD image file TST001 AA0 D HERCULES gt dasdseg ascii D MVS DASD TSTO01 AAO SYS2 SEQ DATA dasdseq 3 05 Copyright 1999 2005 Roger Bowler Portions Copyright 2001 2005 James M Morrison dasdseq wrote 11 records to SYS2 SEQ DATA Figure 218 DASDSEQ utility output Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 419 8 17 HETGET Extract files from an AWS or HET tape file 8 17 1 Function The HETGET utility extracts a file from an AWSTAPE or HET tape file The output is in binary format and has to be displayed with an EBCDIC editor on the PC or has to be uploaded to the host operating system and opened with a mainframe editor 8 17 2 Syntax Descriptive HETGET tapefile outfile filenum Diagram HETGET tapefi e outfile fi enum gt lt 8 17 3 Parameter tapefile The name and optionally the path of the AWSTAPE or HET tape file from which a file should be extracted outfile The name and optionally the path of the file to which the extracted file will be written filenum The file number on the tape of the file to be extracted from the tape 8 17 4 Examples Example 1 Extract file number 25 from the AWSTAPE file named T001003 AWS
389. nal When the alignment is other than NONE a new line is automatically inserted after each line of text If the alignment is NONE then the text will be written without skipping to the next line Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 482 10 3 Variables It is possible to imbed substitution variables in the outgoing text Substitution is indicated by enclosing the variable name between and The Hercules version as an example can be specified by the following string VERSION The following variables are defined It is also possible to specify environment variable names e VERSION The Hercules version e HOSTNAME The host name on which Hercules is running e HOSTOS The host operating system e HOSTOSREL The release of the host operating system e HOSTOSVER The version of the host operating system e HOSTARCH The host architecture e HOSTNUMCPUS The number of host CPUs UP Uniprocessor for one CPU or MP n Multiprocessor for more than one CPUs e LPARNAME The LPAR name specified in the configuration file e CSS The logical channel subsystem set or channel set for the terminal e SUBCHAN The subchannel number for the terminal e CCUU ccuu CUU cuu Various forms of the device number of the terminal 10 4 Sample The file herclogo txt is provided in the Hercules distribution as a sample template This sample reflects the contents
390. name for the run commands file is hercules rc The default name may be overridden by setting the HERCULES_RC environment variable Except for the pause command see below each command read from the run commands file is logged to the console preceded by a gt greater than sign character Thus you can easily distinguish between console commands entered from the keyboard from those entered via the run commands file Comment lines starting with are treated as silent comments and are thus not logged to the console whereas comment lines starting with are treated as loud comments and will be logged 12 2 Run Commands File Statements There is a number of different types of commands that can be specified within a run commands file These commands are the following e herccmd any valid Hercules console command e PAUSE delay the processing of the next command e issue silent comment e issue loud comment 12 2 1 Hercules Console Commands Descriptive herccmd Diagram gt gt herccnd i teTTvA0 Y C Y811 In the run commands file any valid Hercules console command herccma can be specified This in cludes the sh shell command Each command that is read from the run commands file is logged to the console preceded by a gt greater than sign character This is to distinguish between console com mands entered manually from the keyboard from thosecommands ente
391. nce Guide Page 475 IDRCOFF This keyword turns off the data is compressed indicators in the tape labels 8 31 3 Examples Example 1 Read a tape and write it to an AWS format file J RRR KR KKK KKK KK KK k kkk k kkk k kkk k k kk k k kK k k A I RK k k KK VIT2ZDISK COPY TAPE TO DISK AWS TAPE FORMAT A J RRR KR kkk kkk kkk kkk k kkk k kkk k kkk k kkk k k kk k k kk k k k K k I k k k k k k k k k k T T AWSWRITE EXEC PGM VTT2DISK STEPLIB DD DSN your loadlib DISP SHR AWSOUT DD DSN your aws file DISP NEW CATLG DCB RECFM FB LRECL 80 BLKSIZE 27920 SPACE CYL 750 750 RLSE TAPIN DD DISP OLD UNIT 3490 VOL SER xxxxxx LABEL 1 BLP EXPDT 98000 SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT SYSFILES DD SYSOUT SYSTRAC DD SyYSOUT SYSMOVED DD SYSOUT SYSUDUMP DD SYSOUT ia 7 Figure 238 VTT2DISK utility JCL Example 2 Read an AWS format file and write it to a tape J RR RK KKK KKK KKK KK kkk k kkk k kkk I IA k k k k k k k k k k k I I k k k k k k KK T VIT2ZTAPE COPY DISK AWS TAPE FORMAT TO REAL TAPE A J EAEE kkk kkk kkk kkk kkk kkk kkk k kkk k kkk k kkk k kkk k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k I k k k k k k k k k k AWSREAD EXEC PGM VTT2TAPE STEPLIB DD DSN your loadlib DISP SHR AWSIN DD DSN your aws file DISP SHR TAPOUT DD DISP O
392. nd sets a breakpoint The argument gives an instruction address or a range of addresses where you wish to halt the execution Once the breakpoint is reached instruction execution is temporarily halted and the next instruction to be executed is displayed You may then examine registers and or storage etc To continue execution after reaching a breakpoint enter the G command The B and B commands are synonymous with the S command 7 12 2 Syntax Descriptive B addr addr addr Diagram 7 12 3 Parameter addr Instruction address or range of addresses where instruction execution is to be stopped 7 12 4 Examples Example 1 Set a breakpoint at instruction address 01000000 12 50 14 546 00000FC4 b 01000000 12 50 14 546 00000FC4 HHCPNO40I Setting breakpoint at 0000000001000000 0000000001000000 Figure 24 B command Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 188 7 13 B Set breakpoint 7 13 1 Function The B command sets a breakpoint The argument gives an instruction address or a range of addresses where you wish to halt the execution Once the breakpoint is reached instruction execution is temporarily halted and the next instruction to be executed is displayed You may then examine registers and or storage etc To continue execution after reaching a breakpoint enter the G command The B and B commands are synonymous with the S command 7
393. nel ached Subchannel Subchannel ached Subchannel ached Subchannel ached thread terminated cache misses 114 waits 0 ached cache misses 7 waits 0 detached 271 det T377 det hits misses 35 waits 0 0016 hits 0017 cacne ached cache misses 59 waits 0 ached 0028 0029 002A det 002B det 002C det 002D detached 002E det 002F det Configuration release complete Subchannel detached Subchannel detached Subchannel ached Subchannel ached Subchannel ached Subchannel Subchannel ached Subchannel ached Calling termination routines Begin shutdown sequence Calling console_shutdown console_shutdown complete Calling hdl_term Begin HDL termination sequence Calling module dyngui cleanup routine Module dyngui cleanup complete Calling module Hercules cleanup routine Module Hercules cleanup complete HDL Termination sequence complete hdl_term complete Calling logger_term logger thread terminating logger thread terminating Hercules terminated Figure 131 QUIT command Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 305 7 80 R Display or alter real storage 7 80 1 Function The R command allows you to display or alter real storage 7 80 2 Syntax Descriptive R addr addr length addr addr addr value Diagram p gt R addr lt addr length addr addr addr va lue 7 80 3 Parameter addr Address of the real storage ar
394. nfile The input DASD file shadowfile The optional name of an associated shadow DASD file outfile The output DASD file 8 10 4 Examples Example 1 Copy the compressed DASD file CCKD MVSRES CCKD to SARESX 148 uncompress it CKD file and replace an already existing file with the same name DASDCOPY r lfs D MVS DASD MVSRES CCKD D MVS DASD MVSRESX 148 Example 2 Copy the compressed DASD file CCKD MVSRES CCKD to SARESX 148 uncompress it CKD file and create 2 separate files for systems which do not support large file support DASDCOPY D MVS DASD MVSRES CCKD D MVS DASD MVSRESX 148 8 10 5 Sample Utility Output Sample 1 Copy the DASD image file MVSRES CCKD to the new DASD image file SARESX 148 Do not create a large image file gt 2 GB create two separate files instead D HERCULES gt dasdcopy D MVS DASD MVSRES CCKD D MVS DASD SARESX 148 HHCDU044I Creating 3390 volume 3339 cyls 15 trks cyl 56832 bytes track HHCDU041I 2519 cylinders successfully written to file D MVS DASD SARESX_1 148 HHCDU041I 820 cylinders successfully written to file D MVS DASD SARESX_2 148 100 50085 of 50085 HHCDCO1OI Copy successful Figure 209 DASDCOPY utility output Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 399 8 11 DASDINIT DASD image file creation 8 11 1 Function The Hercules DASD image file creation program DASDINIT is used to create an empty DASD image file 8 11 2 Synta
395. ng the the send gt receive direction InstanceA lport even gt InstanceB rport odd InstanceB lport odd lt InstanceA rport even CTCE connected Hercules instances can be hosted on either Unix or Windows platforms both sides do not need to be the same 5 9 4 2 Syntax Descriptive devaddr CTCE lport raddress rport mtu sm Diagram p gt devaddr CTCE port raddress rport gt lt mtu sin 5 9 4 3 Parameter devaddr This is the device address CTCE This specifies the device protocol type Iport Specifies the even TCP IP port on the local system raddress Specifies the TCP IP address of the remote system rport Specifies the even TCP IP port on the remote system mtu Optional MTU buffer size The default size is 32778 sml Optional small minimum for the MTU buffer size The default size is 8 5 9 4 4 Examples Example 1 Define a 3088 CTC connection with the CTCE protocol between two Hercules instances Instance A is using address 192 168 1 100 Instance B is using address 192 168 1 200 Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 139 Definitions on Hercules Instance A with IP address 192 168 1 100 0E40 CTCT 30880 192 168 1 200 30880 0E41 CTCT 30882 192 168 1 200 30882 Definitions on Hercules Instance B with IP address 192 168 1 200 0E40 CTCT 30880 192 168 1 100 30880 0E41 CTCT 30882 192 168 1 100 30882 5 9 5
396. nger device i e the cartridge loader It is no problem if the drive has one it just cannot be directly accessed by FTAPE or Hercules 8 25 2 Syntax Descriptive FTAPE f filename function where function can be LOAD UNLOAD LOCK UNLOCK REW RUN Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 438 READ size 0 WRITE size 0 WIM count FSF count FSR count BSF count BSR count READPOS LOCATE b ockid ERG COMP value 1 ECC value 1 MARGIN margin STATUS ASCII EBCDIC DUMP offset Jength ERASE HELP EXIT QUIT Diagram gt gt FTAPE ayn roe eae ord function KEE f filename where function can be m oD n UNLOAD dl c Lock cl e ock Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 439 REW El R oo 0 J wen 8 U readsize 0 J wrote fo writesize Sr count ENEE e count a e count EE eae count EES count READPOS nl LOCATE Lowa es blockid me LRG 1 cone value 1 eee 4 4 value Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 440 H ml margin STATUS e asce AANA Boc DUMP offset length ERASE S L erp i D EXIT SSES QUIT 8 25 3 Parameter filename This specifies the name of the tape device The default is Tape0 function The function that should be executed For a list of available
397. nment variable an empty string will be substituted 3 7 4 Escaping substitution recursion To specify the string without incurring substitution an additional sign should be used For example FOO will not be substituted If substitution is required but the preceding text is to contain a sign as the very last character then FOO would be specified Thus if symbol FOO contains BAR then FOO will remain FOO while FOO will become BAR Substitution is not recursive only one substitution pass is made 3 8 Enhanced Symbol Substitution Enhanced symbol substitution is an additional method for specifiying symbols It differs from the above normal symbol substitution in several important ways 3 8 1 Differences from conventional Symbol Substitution The syntax of the enhanced symbol substitution differs from conventional symbol substitution Enhanced substitution symbol names are specified using var dollar sign and brace rather than var dollar sign and parenthesis This enhanced syntax supports the specification of a default value that will be used whenever the named symbol is not otherwise defined The default value is placed within the opening and closing braces just as the symbol name is but separated from it by either a single equal sign or a colon equal sign For example specifying DASD_PATH dasd in your configuration file will result in the value of the DASD_PATH symbol or en
398. not intercept messages issued by the guest operating system to its own terminals 13 2 Defining HAO Rules To define a HAO rule enter the command HAO TGT target to define the rule s target match pattern followed by the command HAO CMD command to define the rule s associated panel command The target is a regular expression as defined by your host platform When running on Linux Hercules uses POSIX Extended Regular Expression syntax On a Windows platform regular expression support is provided by Perl Compatible Regular Expression PCRE The HAO facility can only be used if regular expression support was included in Hercules at build time The associated command is whatever valid Hercules panel command you wish to issue in response to a message being issued that matches the given target pattern 13 3 Deleting HAO Rules To delete a fully or partially defined HAO rule first use the the following command to get a list of all of the defined or partially defined rules HAO LIST nnn Where nnn is the optional number of an existing rule This gives you the list of all rules with the specified identifier or lists the rule with identifier nnn Then use the next command to delete the specific rule identi fied by the identifier nnn HAO DEL nnn Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 495 To every rule there is a number assigned as the rule is defined The rules then are subsequently iden tified by
399. nt edeeseeoegese e ge a a A A A T O 190 7 15 Elei eu ue EE 191 7 16 CCKD CCKD commande 193 7 17 CD Change directory esie iiaee narar eae a e aa aa aa eaea aa aatan 199 7 18 CF Configure CPU online or offline 200 7 19 CFALL Configure all CPUs online or offline 202 7 20 CLOCKS Display TOD clock and CPU mert 204 7 21 CMDTGT Specify the command oarget test rstrnntnnstnnssrnsrnnsrnnsrnnsrnnnns 205 7 22 CONKPALV Display alter console TCP IP keep alive settings ccccceseeeeeseeeeereeteeees 207 7 23 CPU Define target CPU for console displays and commande 209 7 24 CR Display or alter control registers ccecccececeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeecaeeeseaeeeeneeseeeescaeeseaeeneneessaees 210 7 25 CSCRIPT Cancel a running script Thread 212 7 26 CTC Enable disable debug packet tracing cccceesceceeeeeceneeeeeeeeeeneeceeeeeseaeeesaaeeeeeeessaees 213 7 27 DEFINE Rename device ca see alliance es 216 7 28 DEFSYM Define Symbol errita arnie ann aea ee aaa aaa ran endive haeteetatisleg 217 Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 5 7 29 7 30 7 31 7 32 7 33 7 34 7 35 7 36 7 37 7 38 7 39 7 40 7 41 7 42 7 43 7 44 7 45 7 46 7 47 7 48 7 49 7 50 7 51 7 52 7 53 7 54 7 55 7 56 7 57 7 58 7 59 7 60 7 61 7 62 7 63 7 64 7 65 7 66 7 67 7 68 7 69 7 70 7 71 7 72 7 73 7 74 DETACH Remove device cccccceecceceeeeeeneeceeneeceaeeeceaeeeeaaesgeeeceaeeeeaaeseeeeeseaeee
400. nts with terminal group name CONSOLE and from IP address 192 168 0 100 with subnet mask 255 255 255 0 to connect 0200 3270 CONSOLE 192 168 0 100 255 255 255 0 Example 5 Define a 3270 device on device address 0200 Allow only clients with terminal group name TSOTERM to connect 0200 3270 TSOTERM Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 106 5 2 Integrated 3270 SYSG Console 5 2 1 Function The integrated 3270 SYSG console is similar to a local non SNA 3270 device except that it is not addressed by a subchannel number and it is supported only by certain system control programs The SYSG console is defined like a 3270 device except that the device type is SYSG and the device address is ignored Only one SYSG console can be defined in a configuration Use tn3270 client software to connect to the SYSG console device via the port number specified on the CNSLPORT statement just as you would connect to a regular local non SNA 3270 device The SYSG console configuration statement recognizes optional arguments which specify group name and IP address in the same way as previously described for a local non SNA 3270 device These optional arguments provide a means to ensure that a given tn3270 client can connect directly to the SYSG con sole If the group name and IP address arguments are not specified then the SYSG console is considered to be a member of the general pool of devices eligible for connection to any inco
401. num ALL Diagram ALL n gt cre pesyg oy f 4 OFF devnum 7 26 3 Parameter ON Enables the debug packet tracing OFF Disables the debug packet tracing devnum Specifies the CTCI LCS device group s for which debug packet tracing has to be enabled or disabled ALL Enables or disables the debug packet tracing for all CTCI LCS device groups ALL is the default if no device group is specified 7 26 4 Examples Example 1 Enable the debug packet tracing for all CTCI LCS devices 2008 01 27 19 04 11 375 00000378 ctc debug on 2008 01 27 19 04 11 375 00000378 HHCPNXXXI CTC debugging now ON for all CTCI LCS device groups 2008 01 27 19 04 30 906 00000378 HHCCTO46I 0E20 Sending packet to tun0 2008 01 27 19 04 30 906 00000378 0000 4500011C 00AC0000 4001F71C COA80063 E 7 f y c 2008 01 27 19 04 30 937 00000378 0010 CO0A80065 0800E930 93363000 C1DC84EA y e Z0160 A d 2008 01 27 19 04 30 937 00000378 0020 928D5000 031181A7 7256FAF1 2C74E437 k P axrV 1 tU7 Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 213 2008 01 27 19 04 30 937 00000378 0030 2E32D6E1 OBB94DC7 32A143D1 796B4E57 20 MG2 CJykNW 2008 01 27 19 04 30 937 00000378 0040 73E431C1 OA7E75E7 746E90B1 O6DD5477 sU1A uXtn Tw 2008 01 27 19 04 30 937 00000378 0050 2CD450A1 26F97A07 44BA6191 285B7697 MP amp 9z D aj vp 2008 01 27 19 04 30 937 00000378 0060 OCC6B381 4932DA27 29903671 3AE634B7 F al2 6q
402. ole window is the panel that is active by default after starting Hercules An alternate semi graphical New Panel display showing devices registers etc is also avail able Pressing the escape key switches between the two panels The main Hercules screen contains a scrollable list of messages with a command input area and a sys tem status line at the bottom of the screen To scroll through the messages use either the Page Up or Page Down keys the Ctrl Up Arrow or Ctrl Down Arrow keys or the Home or End and or the Ctrl Home or Cirl End keys Important messages are highlighted in a different color usually red and are prevented from being scrolled off the screen for two minutes If Extended Cursor handling is available then important messages currently at the top of the screen can be removed early by moving the cursor to the line containing the message and then pressing enter Use the Insert key to switch between insert and overlay mode when typing in the command input area Use the Home and End keys to move to the first or last character of the command you are typing or the use the left right arrow keys to move to a specific character Use the Escape key to erase the input area When a command is prefixed with the command will not be redisplayed at the console This can be used in scripts and is also used internally wnen commands are to be invoked without being redisplayed at the console Pressing Escape when the command inp
403. olser Volser is the volume serial number of the newly created volume devtype This specifies the emulated device type 2311 3330 3350 3375 3380 3390 of the new volume FBA device types are not supported by the DASDLOAD program A list of Hercules supported device types and models can be found in Appendix A model This specifies the device model The model implies the size of the volume A list of Hercules supported device types and models can be found in Appendix A cyls Cyls specifies the size of the new volume in cylinders If cyls is coded as asterisk as 0 or is omitted then the deafult size for the device type and model is used Cylinders is ignored for compressed devices ipltext An optional parameter specifying the name of a file containing the IPL text which will be written to the volume The file must be in the form of an object deck containing fixed length 80 byte records in the same format as expected by IBCDASDI or ICKDSF 8 13 4 2 Dataset Statement Descriptive dsname method units pri sec dir dsorg rectm Irecl biksize keylen Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 406 Diagram p gt dsname method units pri sec dir dsorg gt gt recfm Tlrecl blksize keylen gt where dsname The name of the dataset to be created method The dataset loading method can be one of the following XMIT filen
404. omatic refresh of console display data quit Terminate the emulator r Display or alter real storage restart Generate restart interrupt resume Resume Hercules rmmod Delete a module s Instruction stepping S Instruction stepping on S Instruction stepping off s Instruction stepping query s dev Turn CCW stepping on off savecore Save a core image file sclproot Set or display SCLP base directory scp Send system control program command script Run a sequence of console commands contained in a file scsimount Automatic SCSI tape mounts synonym for AUTO_SCSI_MOUNT sf Create a new shadow file sf Remove a shadow file sfc Compress a shadow file sfd Display shadow file statistics sfk Perform a chkdsk on the active shadow file sh Shell command shrd SHRD command Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 164 sizeof Display size of structures ssd Signal Shutdown start Start CPU or printer device startall Start all CPU s stop Stop CPU or printer device stopall Stop all CPU s store Store CPU status at absolute zero suspend Suspend Hercules syncio Display syncio device statistics sysclear Issue SYSTEM CLEAR RESET manual operation sysreset Issue SYSTEM RESET manual operation t Instruction trace t Instruction trace on t Instruction trace off t Instruction trace query t CKD Turn CKD_KEY tracing on off t dev Turn CCW tracin
405. ommana A range can be specified If there is no range then the range includes all addresses S 0 eliminates the range and all addresses will be stepped With or without a given range the S command displays whether instruction stepping is on or off and the range if any The S command by itself does not activate instruction stepping Use the S command to activate instruct tion stepping 7 84 2 Syntax The S command has the following syntax Descriptive S addr addr addr addr addr length 0 Diagram D addr addr addr addr addr length 0 7 84 3 Parameter addr Specifies an address The range can be coded as addr addr or addr addr from begin address to end address or as address length from begin address for length length Specifies the length of the range 0 No range is specified or an existing range is reset Instruction stepping is active for all addresses Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 312 7 84 4 Examples Example 1 Set instruction stepping range 2009 02 15 10 06 22 432 00000FC4 s 1048576 1056768 2009 02 15 10 06 22 432 00000FC4 HHCPNO40I Instruction stepping off range 1048576 1056768 Figure 137 S command Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 313 7 85 S Instruction stepping on 7 85 1 Function This command turns on the instruction stepping After turning instruction stepping on each
406. ommand has no effect The tape must be unmounted manually since it is a real physical device and not emulated via a disk file like AWS or HEI tapes 7 65 2 Syntax Descriptive MOUNTED_TAPE_REINIT ALLOW DISALLOW Diagram gt gt MOUNTED_TAPE_REINIT lt ALLOW DISALLOW 7 65 3 Parameter ALLOW Indicates that new tapes may be mounted irrespective of wether or not there is already a tape mounted on the drive This is the default DISALLOW Prevents new tapes from being mounted if one is already mounted on the drive Before the new tape can be mounted the currently mounted tape must first to be unmounted Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 278 7 65 4 Examples Example 1 Display current tape mount settings 2009 03 07 22 20 01 328 00000D44 mounted_tape_reinit 2009 03 07 22 20 01 328 00000D44 Tape mount reinit allowed Figure 109 MOUNTED_TAPE_REINIT command display settings Example 2 Disallow tape mount reinitialization 2009 03 07 22 20 14 718 00000D44 mounted_tape_reinit disallow 2009 03 07 22 20 17 968 00000D44 mounted_tape_reinit 2009 03 07 22 20 17 968 00000D44 Tape mount reinit disallowed Figure 110 MOUNTED_TAPE_REINIT command disallow tape mount reinitialization Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 279 7 66 MSG Display message on console like VM 7 66 1 Function The MSG command is actually a VM CP command
407. ommand is an alias for the HELP command and displays additional information for specific Her cules console commands if extra information is available If the command has additional help text it will be displayed without parameter lists all available commands The help text is usually limited to explai ning the format of the command and its various required or optional parameters and is not meant to re place reading the documentation 7 4 2 Syntax List all commands command specific help Descriptive command Diagram le command 7 4 3 Parameter command The Hercules console command to which additional information is desired 7 4 4 Examples Example 1 List all valid console commands 223 oa aes Da 22 SR 223 ane aa 22s SS 22 SE nm Om Om Om Om Om Om Dm om Dm Dm un wo N N NY NY NY NY NY NY NY NH NH NM k 150 150 150 150 150 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 F28 F28 F28 F28 F28 F28 F28 F28 F28 F28 F28 F28 Command hst log logopt F28 HHCPN140I Valid panel commands are Description list all commands command specific help log comment to syslog history of commands direct log output change log options Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 175 22 SE aes 22 ane 22 223 223 Se ae
408. on e Athlon Opteron are trademarks or registered trademarks of Advanced Micro Devices AMD Inc e Xmit Manager is copyrighted by Neal Johnston Ward e FLEX ES is a registered trademark of Fundamental Software Inc e UMX Virtual Mainframe is a registered trademark of UMX Technologies Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 18 1 10 Acknowledgements The Hercules manuals would not have been possible without the assistance of many people and would like to thank all those who helped me In particular would like to thank e The Hercules developers for their documentation on various websites from which derived a great deal of information e Roger Bowler and Fish for proof reading the manuals e Loris Degoianni for allowing me to use parts of the original WinPcap documentation e Tom Brennan for allowing me to use parts of his Vista tn3270 documentation e My colleagues for working with early previews of the documentation beginning with just a few pages e Mike Cairns for reviewing and editing the manuals e Robert Allan for providing the Linux Installation part e Lutz Mader for providing the Mac OS X Installation part If anyone feels they have been forgotten on this list please let me know Peter Glanzmann Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 19 2 Related Publications 2 1 Hercules Emulator General Information The Hercules General Information manual provides you
409. on tracing range Instruction tracing is totally separate from the instruct tion stepping and breaking range With or without a range the T command displays whether tracing is on or off and the range if any The T command by itself does not activate instruction tracing Use the T command to activate instruction tracing The command T 0 eliminates the range all addresses will be traced 7 112 2 Syntax Descriptive T addr addr addr addr addr length 0 Diagram T addr addr addr addr addr length 0 7 112 3 Parameter addr Specifies an address The range can be coded as addr addr or addr addr from begin address to end address or as address length from begin address for length length Specifies the length of the range 0 No range is specified or an existing range is reset Tracing is active for all addresses 7 112 4 Examples Example 1 Set instruction tracing range 2009 02 15 10 06 22 432 00000FC4 t 1048576 1056768 2009 02 15 10 06 22 432 00000FC4 HHCPNO40I Instruction tracing off range 1048576 1056768 Figure 173 T command Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 353 7 113 T Instruction trace on 7 113 1 Function This command turns on instruction tracing A range can be specified as for the T command Instruction tracing is totally separate from the instruction stepping and breaking range After turning instruction tracing on
410. ons on the interrelationship between NUMCPU MAXCPU and ENGINES please see Appendix B Configuration of Emulated CPUs 4 39 2 Syntax Descriptive NUMCPU 1 sn Diagram nn 4 39 3 Parameter number The number of emulated CPUs NUMCPU can not exceed the value of the MAXCPU configuration statement If NUMCPU is less than MAXCPU then the remaining engines can be configured online later 4 39 4 Examples Example 1 Set the number of emulated CPUs to 4 NUMCPU 4 Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 83 4 40 NUMVEC Number of vector facilities 4 40 1 Function NUMVEC defines the number of emulated vector facilities Default is one per CPU see also the NUMCPU parameter The vector facility is only available in ESA 390 mode by default 4 40 2 Syntax Descriptive NUMVEC 0 sn Diagram gt gt NUMVEC ati ae 0 SSES nn 4 40 3 Parameter number The number of desired vector facilities 4 40 4 Examples Example 1 Set the number of emulated vector facilities to 1 NUMVEC 1 Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 84 4 41 OSTAILOR Intended operating system 4 41 1 Function OSTAILOR lets you specify the intended operating system The effect of this parameter is to reduce con trol panel message traffic by selectively suppressing trace messages for program checks which are con sidered normal in the specified environment If this sta
411. onsole 6 4 2 Hercules using the WinGUI Using the WinGUI with the Windows version of Hercules gives you the possibility to prefix all messages with the current date the current time and the process ID These prefixing options can be selected indi vidually in the Format tab of the Advanced Logging Options where they can be separately turned on or off as showed in the next figure Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 159 Log Format Every console message is by default automatically prefixed with the current time of day and the processd of the program that issued it Specify below which identifying information you wish to Issuing Process D always Issuing Process ID if needed The if needed option will only include the Process ID ff it is appropriate to do so e g whenever there are multiple processes running at the same time Figure 7 WinGUI Advanced Logging Options The logopt system parameter or console command has no effect when using the WinGUI Prefixing the messages is only influenced over the GUI settings The following figure shows the log messages using all prefixing options date time and process ID as specified above 2010 06 1 8 19 12 18 071 000008E4 HHC01416I Build information 2010 06 18 19 12 18 071 000008E4 HHCO1417I Windows MSVC build for AMD64 2010 06 18 19 12 18 071 000008E4 HHC
412. onstruction of the output filename it is detected that a file already exists with that name then 2 is appended to the generated name and that is used instead If a file with that name already exists then 3 is appended and so on all the way to 10 If a unique filename still cannot be constructed after trying 10 then a warning is issued and the file is left with its original Windows assigned temporary file name e g PRT305 tmp The filename extension of your Names value is used to determine what format the spooled file should be created in If the Name template ends with txt the output file will be in plain text format the default If it ends with html then it will be in HTML format etc Other supported filename extensions are rtf and pdf If the filename does not end with one of the supported filename extensions txt html htm rtf or pdf then the file is created in text format by default If the output filename extension is either rtf or pdf then additional file formatting options may be specified via the PDF section 8 26 8 4 Translations section The Translations section allows you to further customize your output filename by allowing you to define character and string substitutions to take place during output filename construction Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 454 8 26 8 4 1 Strings Strings Strings Each String value defines an output filename substring tha
413. oo com group hercules 390 8 27 1 Function The mainframe print publishing program was designed to be used with Hercules printing facilities Hercules emulates line printers as simple text files containing printed output This output can be viewed using a text editor or some other mechanism such as being served via a web server This PRTPUB program converts the raw printer output to a more readable form by replacing formfeed characters with line break lines converting newlines to CR LF pairs if desired for Windows viewing and placing the result in a specified file Several facilities are provided to allow for publishing the printed output in an automated way e g to a web server as follows 1 You can choose to publish the output only if the input file size has changed since the last time the program was run The file size is stored in a file for comparison on each run and the program terminates with return code 4 if the input file size has not changed since the last run This allows efficient mirroring of the printed output to a separate file on a schedule only updating the target file if the source file has changed There is also an option that permits the polling for change to be carried out in this program thus saving the resources that would otherwise be used to launch the program parse the options and so forth on each iteration 2 You can choose to publish only the last part of the printed output Hercules printer files tend to
414. option values that control automatic detection of disconnected tn3270 telnet client sessions This is a built in feature of TCP IP and allows detection of unresponsive TCP IP connections and not idle clients That is to say your connection will not be terminated after 3 seconds of idle time Your 3270 session can remain idle for many minutes or hours or days without any data being transmitted If the TCP IP stack at the other end of the connection not your 3270 client itself fails to respond to the internal keepalive probe packets however then it means that the TCP IP stack itself is down or there has been a physical break in the connection Thus even if your 3270 client is completely idle your system s TCP IP stack itself should still respond to the keepalive probes sent by the TCP IP stack at the Hercules end of the link If it doesn t then TCP IP will terminate the tn3270 telnet session which will cause Hercules to disconnect the terminal The three values can also be modified on demand via the conkpalv panel command which has the exact same syntax Note that the syntax is very unforgiving no spaces are allowed anywhere within the paren theses and each value must be separated from the other with a single comma Please also note that not all systems support being able to modify all three values That is not all values may be able to be changed and it is system dependent which values you can change and which values you cannot On Windows
415. or non Windows platforms and 10 for Windows systems Note On Windows platforms the count value is ignored and cannot be changed from its default value of 10 4 9 4 Examples Example 1 Set the tn3270 console and telnet clients keep alive option settings on a Unix platform to the following values 5 seconds of inactivity until the first keep alive probe is sent 3 seconds for the interval between the probes and to 15 unacknowledged keep alive packets sent before the connection is considered to have failed CONKPALV 5 3 15 Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 47 4 10 CPUMODEL CPU model 4 10 1 Function The CPUMODEL parameter specifies the 4 hexadecimal digit CPU model number stored by the STIDP instruction 4 10 2 Syntax Descriptive CPUMODEL 0586 model Diagram gt gt CPUMODEL oan Fe 0586 lt model 4 10 3 Parameter model Any valid 4 digit hexadecimal CPU model number A list of the valid model numbers can be found in the Hercules Windows GUI file cpu types txt The default 0586 is not a mainframe CPU model number but is related to the underlying PC architecture 4 10 4 Examples Example 1 Specify a 7490 CPU model CPUMODEL 7490 Example 2 Specify a 3090 CPU model CPUMODEL 3090 Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 48 4 11 CPUPRIO CPU thread process priority 4 11 1 Function CPUPRIO specifies the priority of the CPU thr
416. ory of commands i Generate UO attention interrupt for device iodelay Display or set UO delay value Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 162 ipending Display pending interrupts ipl IPL normal from device xxxx iplc IPL clear from device xxxx k Display CCKD internal trace Idmod Load a module loadcore Load a core image file loadparm Set IPL parameter loadtext Load a text deck file log Direct log output logopt Change log options lparname Display or set LPAR name lparnum Display or set LPAR identification number Isdep List module dependencies Ismod List dynamic modules maxrates Display maximum observed MIPS SIO rate or define new reporting interval message Display message on console like VM mounted_tape_reinit Control tape initialization msg Display message on console like VM msghlid Display or set timeout value of held messages msgnoh Display message on console like VM but without header ostailor Specify intended operating system panrate Display or set console refresh rate pgmtrace Trace program interrupts pr Display prefix register pscp Send system control program priority message psw Display or alter program status word Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 163 ptt Set display pthread trace pwd Print working directory qd Query DASD quiet Toggle aut
417. ostic purposes This code will be the source line where the error occurred so you can use it with the source listing to diagnose the cause of the failure Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 463 8 27 2 Syntax Descriptive PRTPUB jinputfile outputfile sizefile interval ta7 ines Diagram CRLF HTML NOPB PRTPUB inpufi le outpufile ra i sizefile GEES interval tail lines 3 gt CLRF W HTML ES gt GR EEN NOPB 8 27 3 Parameter The program takes a single long argument which must not contain spaces If the file paths on Windows contain spaces then the entire argument must be enclosed in quotes No spaces are allowed anywhere else whether or not quotes are used If quotes are used then they are only permitted as the first and last characters of the argument string The argument is divided into subparameters separated by commas All parameters are positional if they are omitted a comma must mark their place inputfile outputfile sizefile interval The file containing the emulated mainframe output The file to which the result is to be published The file containing the input file s size at the time of the previous run If specified this file is used to track the size of the input file only publishing when it changes The file will generally not exist the first time it is specified In that case the publishing is done and the file
418. ould otherwise consume Note The compressed option is ignored for RTF output OK Clicking the OK button validates and saves the settings and then automatically hides the dialog It is the same as clicking the Apply button followed by the x Close button Reset Clicking the Reset button causes the changes made on this panel to be discar ded resetting all values back to those defined in the PDF section of the job se parator control file Help Displays the programs help information 8 26 6 Help System Clicking the context sensitive help button turns the mouse cursor into a question mark shaped cursor indicating the system is now in context sensitive help mode Once in context sensitive help mode you can the click with the mouse on any of the dialogs controls to cause a popup help balloon tooltip to be displayed containing a brief explanation of the control you clicked on To display the full help information for the control instead of just a popup balloon tooltip then instead of clicking the button first simply press the F1 key while the control in question has the focus 8 26 7 Tray Icon Context Menu The tray icon context menu appears whenever you right click on the HercPrt system tray icon It has the following options Show Display the main dialog window This is also the default action whenever the system try icon is double clicked Connect Selecting Connect performs the same action as
419. ounted on the drive This is the default DISALLOW Prevents new tapes from being mounted if one is already mounted on the drive Before the new tape can be mounted the currently mounted tape must first to be unmounted 4 38 4 Examples Example 1 Specify that new tapes are not being mounted if one is already mounted on the drive MOUNTED_TAPE_REINIT DISALLOW Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 82 4 39 NUMCPU Number of emulated CPUs 4 39 1 Function NUMCPU specifies the number of emulated processor engines which will be configured online at startup time All processors are CP engines unless otherwise specified by the ENGINES configuration statement NUMCPU can not exceed the value of the MAXCPU configuration statement If NUMCPU is less than MAXCPU then the remaining engines can be configured online later Multiprocessor emulation works best if your host system actually has more than one physical CPU but you can still emulate multiple CPUs nevertheless even on a uniprocessor system and you might even achieve a small performance benefit when you do There is little point however in specifying NUMCPU greater than 1 unless your guest operating system running under Hercules is actually able to support multiple CPUs If you do not actually need multiprocessor emulation then setting MAX_CPU_ENGINES to 1 at compile time might even produce a slight performance advantage too For detailed explanati
420. our_DCB_parms DD DSN my file2 DISP NEW CATLG DELETE SPACE your_space_parms DCB your_DCB_parms DD DSN volser aws DISP SHR DD AWSVOL VOLSER mytape AWSGE OU AWSGE OU DD myddnaml1 INDSN your datasetl FILENO 1 SL Y DD myddnam2 INDSN your dataset2 FILENO 5 SL Y ea nn ea Figure 234 AWSSL JCL Create datasets from AWS virtual tape Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 471 8 29 AWSUTIL AWS format tape file generation utility AWSUTIL is written by Brandon Hill and is available on the CBT MVS Utilities Tape CBTTAPE at www cbttape org File 477 8 29 1 Function AWSUTIL is a comprehensive program for creating AWS format virtual tape files The program can gene rate labels and write tape marks Any dataset that can be accessed by BSAM can be copied to a virtual tape file Any real tape device can have either a single file or the entire tape copied The commands for the utility are read from the SYSIN DD statement and status and errors are written to the SYSPRINT DD statement The AWS tape image is written to SYSOUT as a VB file This file is then suitable to be copied with FTP in binary mode to any other system Any number of DD statements representing sequential data and tapes can be specified and are read via the appropriate statement in SYSIN 8 29 2 Control Statements AWSUTIL supports these SYSIN control
421. ow Normal Normal Above Normal or High class processes and a base priority of 31 for Realtime class processes 15 to 9 Highest Priority 2 points above the priority class 8 to 1 Above Normal Priority 1 point above the priority class Oto 7 Normal Normal priority for the priority class 8to 15 Below Normal Priority 1 point below the priority class 16 to 19 Lowest Priority 2 points below the priority class 20 Idle Base priority of 1 for Idle Below Normal Normal Above Normal or High class processes and a base priority of 16 for Realtime class processes Table 5 Thread Priority Conversions Caution On Windows your thread priority is interpreted differently based on your chosen process priority setting You should never modify your thread priority settings without first reviewing your chosen process priority setting Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 103 5 Device Definition Descriptions 5 1 Local non SNA 3270 Devices 5 1 1 Function The local non SNA 3270 device statements are used to define terminals to the Hercules configuration There are no required arguments for this particular device type but there are several optional arguments that may be specified To use this device a tn3270 client must connect to the host machine via the port number specified on the CNSLPORT statement A valid tn3270 device type such as IBM 3278 must be used If the tn3270 client software allows it to
422. p name desired then the asterisk must be coded to distinguish the terminal group name and the IP address arguments The optional IP address and subnet masks specify the IP address es at which client s are allowed to connect via the device address identified by the device statement This provides an additional means of specifying which device s a client tn3270 session may connect to If the IP address and mask default 255 255 255 255 if not specified of the tn3270 client attempting to connect match the IP address mask entered on the device statement then the client is eligible to connect at this device address Otherwise the client is ineligible to connect at this device address and the next available device if any for which the client is eligible to connect will be attempted If no permissible terminal devices remain terminal devices for which the client is eligible to connect or there are no more available terminal devices then the client connection is rejected The optional IP address and subnet mask may be specified in conjunction with the ter minal group argument In this case the terminal group argument must be specified ahead of the optional IP address and subnet mask arguments To specify an IP address anda subnet mask without also specifying a terminal group use an asterisk as the group name substitute or placeholder If an IP address mask are not specified then any client tn3270 session is allowed to connect to th
423. p2 COMPPARMEen Overrides the compression parameter A higher value generally means more compres RA n RAQ n RAT n WR n GCINT n GCPARM n sion at the expense of CPU and or storage The default 1 means don t override the compression parameter The value of n can be from 1 and 9 Sets the Number of read ahead threads When sequential track or block group access is detected some number RAT n of tracks or block groups are queued RAQ n to be read by one of the read ahead threads The default is 2 the value of n can be a number from 1 to 9 Sets the size of the read ahead queue When sequential track or block group access is detected some number RAT n of tracks or block groups are queued in the read ahead queue The default is 4 the value of n can be a number from 0 to 16 A value of zero disables read ahead Sets the number of tracks or block groups to read ahead when sequential track or block group access is detected The default is 2 the value of ratn can be a number from 0 to 16 A value of zero disables read ahead Sets the number of writer threads When the cache is flushed updated cache entries are marked write pending and a writer thread is signalled The writer thread compresses the track or block group and writes the compressed image to the emulation file A writer thread is CPU intensive while compressing the track or block group and I O intensive while writing the compressed image The writer thread run
424. plaining the format of the command and its various required or optional parameters and is not meant to replace reading the documentation 7 43 2 Syntax Descriptive HELP command command 7 43 3 Parameter command The Hercules console command to which additional information is desired 7 43 4 Examples Example 1 Display help for a command with additional help information OO0000FC4 help ostailor 00000FC4 Format ostailor quiet os 390 z os vm vse linux null Specifies 00000FC4 the intended operating system The effect is to reduce control panel message 00000FC4 traffic by selectively suppressing program check trace messages which are 00000FC4 considered normal in the specified environment quiet suppresses all 00000FC4 exception messages whereas null suppresses none of them The other options 00000FC4 suppress some messages and not others depending on the specified o s 00000FC4 SEE ALSO the pgmtrace command which allows you to further fine tune 00000FC4 the tracing of program interrupt exceptions Figure 82 HELP command information available Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 245 Example 2 Display help for a command without additional help information 2007 06 30 16 54 31 625 O0000FC4 help quiet 2007 06 30 16 54 31 625 00000FC4 HHCPN142I No additional help available Figure 83 HELP command no information available Hercules E
425. poolers 8 26 8 1 1 Pages The first n value of the Pages n m string specifies the number of consecutively identical end of job separator pages there are and defines the number of consecutive times in a row that all triggers must match The m value defines the number of additional end of job separator pages there are following the identical pages This parameter is needed to accommodate spoolers such as DOS VS s POWER VS spooler those separator pages are not all the same For MVS s JES2 spooler whose separator pages are all the same you should specify 2 0 whereas for DOS VS s POWER VS spooler whose separator pages are not the value 2 1 should be used instead Both values of course presume the usual two page default If your guest uses only one separator page then you should of course use 1 0 or 1 1 instead Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 452 To accommodate non standard spoolers such as VM 370 R6 which only output beginning of job separator pages but not any end of job separator pages instead it just stops printing the in TIMEOUT x format is used instead The first number n defines how many beginning of job separator pages to look for and the x in TIME OUT x defines how many seconds after which no more additional spooled output is received should indicate that the end of the print job has been reached Using a timeout value like this to indicate when the end of the print job has
426. printer device eee eee ceeeeceeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeceaeeseaeeseeeeesaeeesaeeseneeeeaees 343 7 104 STARTALL Start all CPUS aiir ia nsczad nad bernsn Sege a a fea Ta a a aa GEE ae EGES 344 7 105 STOP Stop CPU or printer device ce eeeceeececeeeeeeeeeceeeaeeeeeeeeeaeeesaaeeeeaaeseeeeeseaeeesaeeseneeeeaees 345 7106 STOPALL Stop al GREISEN aapa a a a a a aO a eA 346 7 107 STORE Store CPU status at absolute zer 347 7 108 SUSPEND Suspend Hercules sssssseseesnesirssrrssrrssirssrrssirssrrssrnsstrsstnnstnsstnnstnsstnnsnnnnnnn ttnn nt 348 7 109 SYNCIO Display SYNCIO device statistics c cccccceeeseceeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeseneeesaeeesaeeeeneeesaees 350 7 110 SYSCLEAR Issue SYSTEM CLEAR RESET manual operation esseesseesee eseese ereere 351 7 111 SYSRESET Issue SYSTEM RESET manual operation c cccceceeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeesaees 352 71412 dn tee nh Ee 353 FAIS T INStPUCTION Trace OMen ia i aa iai ii 354 GATE Tainsrochon tace A NEE 356 7 115 T Instruction trace query cecceescceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceaeeeeaaesseneecaeeesaaesseaeeseeneesaeeseaaeeseneessaees 357 7 116 T CKD Turn CKD_KEY tracing on or off 358 7 117 T dev Turn CCW tracing on or oft 360 7 118 TIMERINT Display or set timers update mtenal ee eeeeeeeeneeeeeenneeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaas 363 FATI TCB Display TCB tables EE 365 7 120 TODDRAG Display or set TOD clock drag factor
427. ptions In both cases the syntax is the same 11 2 1 Syntax Descriptive HERCGUI f configfi e Diagram gt gt HERCGUI lt f configfile 11 2 2 Parameter f configfile This is the name of a configuration file If the HercGUI is started with the name of a configuration file then the HercGUI will automatically power on Hercules once the HercGUI itself is started This is called the Auto Power On feature When using this feature in conjunction with a Hercules RC run commands file it is possible to totally automate Hercules startup and IPL Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 487 11 2 3 Examples Example 1 Start Hercules using the HercGUI with the Auto Power On feature using the configuration file DAMVS CONF MVS38J CONF HERCGUI f D MVS CONF MVS38J CONF Example 2 Start the HercGUI without a configuration file HERCGUI 11 3 Starting Hercules with the Hercules Studio The Hercules Studio can be started by navigating to the Applications gt System Tools gt Hercules Studio menu entry and selecting it from there Then all necessary settings required to start Hercules can be specified using the Hercules Studio itself Alternatively the Hercules Studio may also be manually started from a command shell or can be started by calling a script file In both cases the syntax is the same 11 3 1 Syntax Descriptive HerculesStudio
428. r V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 327 7 93 4 Examples Example 1 Enable the SCSIMOUNT option 2007 06 30 10 57 06 296 00000FC4 scsimount 30 2007 06 30 10 57 06 296 00000FC4 SCSI auto mount queries every 30 seconds when needed Figure 149 SCSIMOUNT command Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 328 7 94 SF Create a new shadow file 7 94 1 Function With the SF command a new shadow file for a certain dasd device or for all dasd devices that have shadow files is created 7 94 2 Syntax Descriptive SF device Diagram p gt DEI device lt See R 7 94 3 Parameter device This specifies the device for which a new shadow file will be created i With an asterisk it is possible to create a new shadow file for all dasd devices that have a shadow file defined in their configuration file definition statements 7 94 4 Examples Example 1 Create a new shadow file for device 0148 0O0000FC4 sf 0148 00000FC4 HHCCD162I 0148 file 1 D MVS DASD MVSRES_1 148 added 00000FC4 HHCCD210I1 size free nbr st reads writes l2reads hits switches 00000FC4 HHCCD212I 55 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 00000FC4 HHCCD213I 324636047 6 13 0 0 0 0 0 00000FC4 HHCCD215I D MVS DASD MVSRES CCKD O0000FC4 HHCCD216I 0 324634239 6 13 rd 0 0 0 O0000FC4 HHCCD218I 1 1808 0 D rw 0 0 0 Figure 150 SF command Hercule
429. rameter is omitted the current LPAR name is displayed 7 59 4 Examples Example 1 Display the current LPAR name 2009 01 15 05 58 16 781 00000FE4 lparname 2009 01 15 05 58 16 781 00000FE4 HHCPNO56I LPAR name HERCULES Figure 100 LPARNAME command display LPAR name Example 2 Define a new LPAR name 2009 01 15 05 59 24 212 00000FE4 lparname TESTLPAR 2009 01 15 05 59 24 212 00000FE4 lparname 2009 01 15 05 59 24 212 00000FE4 HHCPNO56I LPAR name TESTLPAR Figure 101 LPARNAME command define LPAR name Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 269 7 60 LPARNUM Display or set LPAR identification number 7 60 1 Function The LPARNUM console command displays or set the LPAR identification number The LPAR identifi cation number can be one or two hexadecimal digits If one digit is specified then STIDP stores a format 0O CPU ID containing the logical CPU number the LPAR number and the last four digits of the CPU serial number If two digits are specified then STIDP stores a format 1 CPU ID containing the two digit LPAR identifier followed by the last four digits of the CPU serial number 7 60 2 Syntax Descriptive LPARNUM xx Diagram XX 7 60 3 Parameter XX Specifies the one or two digit hexadecimal LPAR identification number stored by the STIDP instruction If a one digit number is specified then STIDP stores a format 0 CPU ID If a two digit number is specif
430. raphical and menu driven interface 8 1 1 DASD Utilities The following table shows the utilities that are used for DASD image file maintenance CCKDCDSK CCKD DASD file integrity verification recovery and repair utility CCKDCOMP CCKD DASD file compression utility CCKDDIAG CCKD DASD file diagnostics utility CKDSWAP CCKD DASD file swap endian program CKD2CCKD Copy CKD DASD file to CCKD DASD file CCKD2CKD Copy CCKD DASD file to CKD DASD file DASDCAT Display PDS datasets and members DASDCONV DASD image file conversion program DASDCOPY Copy DASD file to another DASD file DASDINIT DASD image file creation DASDISUP Fix XCTL tables in SVCLIB DASDLOAD DASD loader program DASDLS List datasets on a volume DASDPDSU PDS unload utility DASDSEQ Display sequential datasets Table 15 DASD image file maintenance utilites Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 379 8 1 2 TAPE Utilities The following table shows the utilities that are used for TAPE file maintenance HETGET Extract files from an AWS or HET tape file HETINIT Initialize an AWS or HET tape file HETMAP Show information about a HET or AWS tape file HETUPD Update and or copy an AWS or HET tape file TAPECOPY Copy a SCSI tape to or from an AWSTAPE disk file TAPEMAP Show information about an AWS tape file TAPESPLT Split an AWS tape file Table 16 TAPE file maintenance utilities 8 1 3 Miscellaneous Utiliti
431. rchitecture mode They describe the processor hardware that is to be emulated The Hercules runtime parameters define values that Hercules requires as an emulated environment These parameters include values like port numbers directory paths and priorities The following table shows an overview of all valid system parameters Comment line Comment line ARCHMODE Initial architecture mode ASN_AND_LX_REUSE ALRF ESAME ASN and LX REUSE feature AUTOMOUNT Tape automount root directory AUTO_SCSI_MOUNT Automatic SCSI tape mounts CCKD Compressed CKD DASD options CNSLPORT Telnet client port CODEPAGE Codepage conversion table CONKPALV Console and telnet clients keep alive option CPUMODEL CPU model CPUPRIO CPU thread process priority Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 21 CPUSERIAL CPU serial number CPUVERID CPU version code DEFSYM Define symbol DEVPRIO Device threads process priority DEVTMAX Maximum number of device threads DIAG8CMD DIAGNOSE 8 command setting ECPSVM ECPS VM support status VM ENGINES Processor engine type HERCLOGO Hercules 3270 logo HERCPRIO Hercules process priority HTTPPORT HTTP server port HTTPROOT HTTP server root directory IGNORE Ignore subsequent INCLUDE errors INCLUDE Include configuration file IODELAY I O interrupt wait time LINUX LDMOD Additional dynamic load modules LEGACYSENSEID SENSE ID CCW x E4
432. rcules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 319 Example 2 Turn off CCW stepping 2007 06 30 12 40 00 328 00000FC4 s 0148 2007 06 30 12 40 00 328 00000FC4 HHCPN137I CCW stepping is now off for device 0148 Figure 142 S dev command Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 320 7 89 SAVECORE Save a core image to a file 7 89 1 Function The SAVECORE command allows you to save a a portion of real storage in binary form to a file This command is used mainly for emulator debugging purposes A certain core snapshot can be saved and then be restored at any later time to reproduce some tests with identical real storage values Please note that you have to stop all CPUs see STOP STOPALL commands before saving the core image to a file 7 89 2 Syntax Descriptive SAVECORE filename start end Diagram p gt gt SAVECORE filename in start end 7 89 3 Parameter filename This argument specifies the file name and optionally the path of the file where the core image will be written to start Start specifies the start address of the real storage to be saved to the file filename The asterisk the default means the first byte of the first modified page as determined by the storage key changed bit end End specifies the end address of the real storage to be saved to the file filename The asterisk the default means the last
433. re 4 28 4 Examples Example 1 Specify that the SENSE ID CCW will be honored for devices that originally did not support that feature 4 EGACYSENSEID ENABLE Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 71 4 29 LOADPARM IPL parameter 4 29 1 Function This parameter specifies the eight character IPL parameter which is used by all MVS based operating systems MVS 3 8J MVS SP MVS XA MVS ESA OS 390 z OS to select the system start parameter 4 29 2 Syntax Descriptive LOADPARM 7p _parameter Diagram LOADPARM 7p _parameter ______ _ gt tr 4 29 3 Parameter ip _parameter The system parameter used for the IPL of the intended operating system The parameter is operating system dependent consult the relevant operating system documentation for details 4 29 4 Examples Example 1 Use 0A8200M1 as system parameter for the IPL of the operating system LOADPARM 0A8200M1 Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 72 4 30 LOGOPT Log options 4 30 1 Function The LOGOPT statement specifies the Hercules log options It allows to insert or suppress the time stamp in front of each log message 4 30 2 Syntax Descriptive LOGOPT TIMESTAMP TIME NOTIMESTAMP NOTIME Diagram gt gt LOGOPT TIMESTAMP TIME NOTIMESTAMP NOTIME 4 30 3 Parameter TIMESTAMP Insert a time stamp in front of each
434. re moved from each line If the ASCII argument is not specified the file is written as fixed length 80 byte EBCDIC records with no line end delimiters CRLF This optional parameter specifies that carriage return line feed sequences are written at the end of each line If the CRLF argument is not specified line feeds are only written at the end of each line NOCLEAR This argument specifies that the output file will not be cleared to zero bytes when it is opened If NOCLEAR is not specified then any previous content of the file is destroyed when the file is opened for output Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 116 5 6 4 Examples Example 1 Define a 3525 card punch device on device address 000D The punched output has to be written to the file D PCH PCH1 TXT as variable length lines of ASCII records delimited by carriage return line feed sequences Any existing output in the file has to be kept when the file is opened for output 000D 3525 D PCH PCH1 TXT ASCII CRLF NOCLEAR Example 2 Define a 3525 card punch device on device address 000D The punched output has to be written to the file D PCH PCH2 TXT as fixed length 80 byte EBCDIC records with no line end delimiters Any existing output in the file will be destroyed when the file is opened for output 000D 3525 D PCH PCH2 TXT Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 117 5 7 Line Printer Devices 5 7 1 Function The line printer device
435. re 54 Figure 55 Figure 56 Figure 57 Figure 58 Figure 59 Figure 60 Figure 61 Figure 62 Figure 63 Figure 64 Figure 65 Figure 66 Figure 67 Figure 68 Figure 69 Figure 70 Figure 71 Figure 72 Figure 73 Figure 74 Figure 75 Figure 76 Figure 77 Figure 78 Figure 79 Figure 80 Figure 81 Figure 82 Figure 83 Figure 84 Figure 85 Figure 86 Figure 87 Figure 88 Figure 89 Figure 90 CPU COMMANG sanasina heel ede Rade ed Re elie 209 CR command display Control reglsiers 210 CR command alter Control reglsier nenn nnt 211 SCRIPT COMMA WEE 212 CTC Command visi tach tiie Ne ad en ed tee ies ee 215 DEFINE COMMANG EEN 216 DEFSYM command list all svmbols eeen eesr nssr nestnnrnnsrnssrnssrnssinssrnnstnnsrnnsrnnsnnnt 217 DEFSYM command define new symbol cccsceceeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeceaeeeseaeeeeaeeseeeessaeeesnaeeeenees 218 DEFSYM command clear defined symbol cceecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeceaeeeseaeeeeaeeseeeeesaeeesaeseneees 218 DETACH Command EE 219 DEVIN T CONN e EEN 221 DEVEISTSGOM MAING enee eegenen 223 DEVTMAX command list maximum device threads A 225 DEVTMAX command set maximum device Threade A 225 DSiCOMMANG E E ETE T E eg cddelaaees 226 Subchannel Information Block 227 Path Management Control Word 227 Subchannel Status Word ivesi iieii ia aa aka eia aaa aeai ada 228 ECPSVM STATS commandi seinien ia aii aa i aa iaia aai 230 ECPSVM ENABLE Commande 231 ECPSVM LEVEL
436. red via the run commands file Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 490 Examples MAXRATES MIDNIGHT IPL 0148 12 2 2 PAUSE Descriptive PAUSE nnn Diagram PAUSE mn 2 RTT t A pause command is supported in order to introduce a brief delay before reading and processing the next line in the file The value nnn can be any number from 1 to 999 and specifies the number of seconds to delay before reading the next line Examples PAUSE 2 12 2 3 Silent Comment Descriptive comment Diagram gt coment gt Lines starting with are treated as silent comments They are intended as comments just for the run commands file itself and are thus not logged to the console That means they are are not visible when Hercules is started and the run commands file is executed Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 491 Examples This comment block will not be logged to the console 12 2 4 Loud Comment Descriptive x comment Diagram kk x coment a tI Lines starting with 7 are treated as loud comments They will be logged to the console and thus are visible when the run commands file is executed Examples This comment block will be logged to the console 12 3 Automating Hercules Startup Creative use of the run commands file can completel
437. ression 0580 3490 S390 TAPES RO674A HET COMPRESS 1 METHOD 2 LEVEL 9 5 8 5 Fake Tape virtual files 5 8 5 1 Function Fake Tape virtual files contain a complete tape in one file FakeTape files consist of variable length EBCDIC blocks Each block is preceded by a 12 byte ASCll hex character header Filemarks are re presented by a 12 byte character header with no data The FakeTape format is used by the Flex ES system from Fundamental Software Inc FSI The argument specifies the location of the FakeTape file for example ickdsf fkt FLEX ES and FakeTape are trademarks of Fundamental Software Inc 5 8 5 2 Syntax Descriptive devaddr devtype fakefile arguments where arguments are MAXSIZE n MAXSIZEK 7 0 MAXSIZEM n oul EOTMARGIN 7 READONLY 0 1 RO NORING RW RING DEONIRQ 0 1 NOAUTOMOUNT Diagram devaddr devtype ee ae Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 129 lt E arguments i where arguments are gt gt lt Loi Ki N m iT MAXSIZEK gt gt lt Loi N m de EQTMARGINen _________________________ READONLY 0 SE E S RO NORING RW RING DEONIRQ ZJE d EE 1 c NOAUTOMOUNT ____ _________ 5 8 5 3 Parameter devaddr This is the device address devtype This is the device typ
438. ression off IDRC is currently a synonym for COMPRESS but may be used in the future to control another emulated tape drive feature Therefore COMPRESS is the preferred method to turn compression on or off COMPRESS en Same as above METHOD n LEVEL n The METHOD argument allows you to specify which compression method to use A value of 1 forces the use of ZLIB compression A value of 2 forces the the use of BZIP2compression The default is 1 The LEVEL option controls the level of compression It ranges from 1 for fastest compression to 9 for best compression The default compression level is 4 CHUNKSIZE nnnnn The CHUNKSIZE option allows you to create HET files with different chunk sizes The AWSTAPE and therefore HET formats allow each tape block to be logically broken up into smaller chunks For instance if the S 3x0 application creates tapes with a block size of 27998 those blocks would be broken down into nnnnn sized chunks Al though possible it is not recommended to change the chunk size as decreasing this may reduce compression performance The range of nnnnn is from 4096 to 65535 65535 being the default STRICTSIZE n_ Upon reaching the tape file size limit depending on strictsize the tape file will or will not be truncated to enforce the maxsize limit The limit is only enforced during a write type operation If the file already exists and the program only reads the file then the fi
439. rfacing to a real BSC line The communication is emulated over a TCP connection All bytes are transferred as is except for doubling DLE in transparent mode just as over a real BSC link Emulated EIA DCD DTR CTS etc or X 21 V 11 leads C T etc are treated differently depending on the DIAL option selected The line emulates a point to point BSC link There is no point to multipoint handling 5 12 2 Syntax Descriptive devaddr devtype DIAL IN OUT INOUT NO LHOST hostname ipaddress LPORT servicename port RHOST hostname ipaddress RPORT servicename port RTO 0 1 nnn 3000 PTO 0 1 nnn 3000 ETO 1 nnn 10000 Diagram devaddr devtype DIAL IN OUT INOUT NO gt LHOST LPORT ER gt hostname fee port ipaddress gt RHOST hostname a ca RPORT De eG ar R ER ipaddress Se port RTO 3000 0 1 nnn nnn Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 150 5 12 3 Parameter devaddr devtype DIAL LHOST LPORT RHOST RPORT This is the device address This is the device type A valid device type is 2703 This specifies the call direction if any If DIAL NO is specified the TCP outgoing con nection is attempted as soon as an ENABLE CCW is executed Also in this mode an incoming connection will always be accepted If DIAL IN or INOUT is specified a TCP incoming call is a
440. rientation is count cyl 0 head 0 record 3 kl 4 dl 80 of 0 Stat 0C00 Count 0000 CCW 08004AA0 00000000 gt 31004ABE 40000005 O8004AA0 00000000 CCW 31004ABE 40000005 gt 00000000 04000000 00000000 00000000 read count orientation is count cyl 0 head 0 record 4 kl 0 dl 6170 of 0 Stat 4C00 Count 0000 CCW 06000000 20002F55 gt 00080000 8000015A 06004A98 60000060 read data 6170 bytes Stat 0C00 Count 173B gt 00080000 800005EC 40404040 FOF04040 fcur 0 cache 0 waiters 0 Figure 179 T dev command Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 361 Example 2 Turn off the CCW tracing for device 0148 2007 06 30 14 21 05 156 00000FC4 t 0148 2007 06 30 14 21 05 156 O00000FC4 HHCPN136I CCW tracing is now off for device 0148 Figure 180 T dev command Example 3 Turn on the CCW tracing for several devices 2007 06 30 14 23 15 246 00000FC4 t 0148 2007 06 30 14 23 15 246 O00000FC4 HHCPN136I CCW tracing is now on for device 0148 2007 06 30 14 23 15 246 O00000FC4 t 0561 2007 06 30 14 23 15 246 00000FC4 HHCPN136I CCW tracing is now on for device 0561 Figure 181 T dev command several devices Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 362 7 118 TIMERINT Display or set timers update interval 7 118 1 Function The TIMERINT parameter displays or sets the internal timer update interval in microseconds This para meter specifies how frequently Hercules s internal timers upda
441. riority class because a high priority class application can use nearly all available CPU time 8 to 1 Above Normal Process that has priority above the Normal class but below the High class Oto 7 Normal Process with no special scheduling needs 8to 15 Below Normal Process that has priority above the Idle class but below the Normal class 16 to 20 Low Process whose threads run only when the system is idle The threads of the process are preempted by the threads of any process running in a higher priority class An example is a screen saver The idle priority class is inherited by child pro cesses Table 4 Process Priority Conversions Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 102 Caution On Windows the value you choose for your Process Priority has a direct impact on how your Thread Priorities are interpreted You should never modify one without understanding what impact your doing so might have on the other 4 57 2 Thread Priorities On Linux Unix hosts Hercules needs to be a setuid root program to allow it to reset its dispatching priority to a high negative value i e chown root root hercules chmod s hercules For Windows the following conversions are used for translating Linux Unix thread priorities to Windows thread priorities Unix Thread Priority Windows Thread Priority Meaning 20 to 16 Time Critical Base priority of 15 for Idle Bel
442. rity 4 21 1 Function The HERCPRIO parameter specifies the process priority for Hercules Caution HERCPRIO should not have a higher dispatching priority than the TOD clock and timer thread 4 21 2 Syntax Descriptive HERCPRIO 0 on Diagram gt gt HERCPRIO EE 0 a 2 nn 4 21 3 Parameter nn This value specifies the process priority for Hercules For details on the priority values see section 4 57 Process and Thread Priorities The default is 0 4 21 4 Examples Example 1 Set the Hercules process priority to 0 HERCPRIO 0 Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 63 4 22 HTTPPORT HTTP server port 4 22 1 Function The HTTPPORT statement specifies the port number in decimal on which the HTTP server will listen If no such statement is present the argument NONE or an invalid port number is given then the HTTP server thread will not be activated 4 22 2 Syntax Descriptive HTTPPORT NONE port NOAUTH AUTH userid password Diagram gt gt HTTPPORT NONE mm J eS port a cere ee NOAUTH AUTH userid password 4 22 3 Parameter NONE This specifies that the HTTP server is not to be started port The port number must be either 80 or within the range of 1024 to 65535 inclusive NOAUTH NOAUTH indicates that no userid and password are required to access the HTTP server AUTH AUTH indicates that a userid and a password are required to access t
443. rmat 4 DSCB CCHHR 0000000601 TTR 000001 0000 00000000 00000000 00000000 04040404 0 2 0010 04040404 04040404 04040404 04040404 008 Line 0020 same as above 0030 04040404 04040404 F4000000 0603002F a EER 0040 ODOBOO00 00008001 00000D0B OOOFESA2 Vs 0050 00000030 0000322D 00000000 00000000 0 2 0060 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 02 0070 00000000 00010000 00000600 00000600 0 0080 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 0 0090 00000000 00000000 Veeeeeee HHCDLO58I Format 5 DSCB CCHHR 0000000602 TTR 000002 0000 00000000 00000000 00000000 05050505 eee eee eee 0010 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 008 Line 0020 same as above 0030 00000000 00000000 F5000000 00000000 D enecenesesens 0040 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00 Lines 0050 to 0080 same as above 0090 00000000 00000000 1 veeeeeee 0000 00000000 00000000 00000000 E2E8E2F2 SYS2 0010 4BE2C5D8 4BC4C1E3 C1404040 40404040 SEQ DATA 0020 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 0030 40404040 40404040 F1E3E2E3 FOFOF100 1TSTOO1 0040 016A002C 00000001 4000C8C5 D9C3E4D3 HERCUL c Copyright 1999 2005 by Roger Bowler Jan Jaeger and others HHCDLOO6I Creating 3390 volume TST001 15 trks cyl 56832 bytes track HHCDU044I Creating 3390 volume TST001 3339 cyls 15 trks cyl HHCDU041
444. rol register number 15 14 14 14 14 14 E OSC 22 Ge 22 33 33 33 33 559 559 559 559 33 559 00000FC4 00000FC4 00000FC4 00000FC4 00000FC4 cr 15 FFFFFFFF CPU0000 CROO 5FB1EE40 CPU0000 CR04 00010001 CPU0000 CR08 00000000 CPU0000 CR12 01984E80 CRO1 3FFFEO7F CRO5 3FFE7040 CRO9 00000000 CR13 3FFFEO7F CRO2 3F149FCO CRO6 FE000000 CR10 00000000 CR14 FF8BF15F CRO3 00000001 CRO7 3FFFEO7F CR11 00000000 CRIS FEFFEFERE Figure 47 CR command alter control register Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 211 7 25 CSCRIPT Cancel a running script thread 7 25 1 Function The CSCRIPT command will cancel the currently running script If no script is running no action is taken 7 25 2 Syntax Descriptive CSCRIPT Diagram gt gt CSCRIPRAHY_ ______ lt 7 25 3 Parameter None 7 25 4 Examples Example 1 Cancel the currently running script 2007 06 30 13 13 05 656 00000FC4 cscript Figure 48 CSCRIPT command Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 212 7 26 CTC Enable disable debug packet tracing 7 26 1 Function The CTC command enables or disables the debug packet tracing for the specified CTCI LCS device group s identified by devnum or for all CTCI LCS device group s if devnum is not specified or specified as ALL 7 26 2 Syntax Descriptive CTC DEBUG ON OFF dev
445. rosoft Windows command shell Last but not least you should be familiar with IBM mainframe environments hardware and software and the underlying ideas and concepts as Hercules emulates IBM mainframe hardware 1 5 How to use this book This book is designed as a reference for all aspects the Hercules Emulator and related products You can go through the book chapter by chapter or you can use the book as a reference for all questions regar ding the operation of Hercules 1 6 Revision Notice Hercules Release Version 3 Release 11 Modification 0 Publication Number HEUR031100 SoftCopy Name HerculesUserReference Revision Number HEUR031100 01 Date November 13 2015 Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 17 1 7 Readers Comments If you like or dislike anything of this book please send a mail or email to the address below Feel free to comment any errors or lack of clarity Please limit your comments on the information in this specific book and also include the Revision Notice just above Thank you for your help Send your comments by email to the Hercules 390 discussion group hercules 390 yahoogroups com 1 8 Legal Advice Hercules implements only the raw S 370 ESA 390 and z Architecture instruction set it does not provide any operating system facilities This means that you need to provide an operating system or standalone program which Hercules can load from an emulated disk or tape device You will have
446. rrupt not pending I O interrupt not pending Clock comparator not pending CPU timer not pending Interval timer not pending External call not pending Emergency signal not pending Machine check interrupt not pending Service signal not pending CPU interlock not held lock not held state STOPPED instcount 2139645750 siocount 52968 psw 070e0000 00000000 CPUint 00000001 State 00000001 amp Mask DFOOEE4F Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 254 4 24 05 341 00000FC4 CPU0001 Interrupt not pending 14 24 05 341 00000FC4 CPU0001 I O interrupt not pending 14 24 05 341 00000FC4 CPU0001 Clock comparator not pending 14 24 05 341 00000FC4 CPU0001 CPU timer not pending 14 24 05 341 00000FC4 CPU0001 Interval timer not pending 14 24 05 341 00000FC4 CPU0001 External call not pending 14 24 05 341 00000FC4 CPU0001 Emergency signal not pending 14 24 05 341 00000FC4 CPU0001 Machine check interrupt not pending 14 24 05 341 00000FC4 CPU0001 Service signal not pending 14 24 05 341 00000FC4 CPU0001 CPU interlock not held 14 24 05 341 00000FC4 CPU0001 lock not held 14 24 05 341 00000FC4 CPU0001 state STOPPED 14 24 05 341 00000FC4 CPU0001 instcount 1263569267 14 24 05 341 00000FC4 CPU0001 siocount 20795 14 24 05 341 00000FC4 CPU0001 psw 070e0000 00000000 14 24 05 341 00000FC4 HHCPN123I CPU0002 offline 14 24 05 341 00000FC4 HHCPN123I CPU0003 offline 14 24 05 341 00000FC4 HHC
447. rwise optional For CKD volumes which exceed 2GB such as the 3390 3 if the fs parameter is not specified the DASDINIT program will create multiple files by appending the characters 1 2 3 etc to the file name specified on the command line These characters are inserted before the first dot occurring after the last slash If there is no dot then the characters are appended to the end of the name Each file contains a whole number of cylinders Hercules CKD support recognizes the files as belonging to a single logical volume Specify the full name of just the first file in the Hercules configuration file e g filename_1 The DASDINIT program cannot create FBA volumes exceeding 2GB unless the fs parameter is specified and large file size is supported on your platform 8 11 4 Examples Example 1 Create a 3390 Model 3 with volume serial USRO01 the file s should be named USRO01 300 and place them into directory DA MVS DASD Note that the utility creates actually two files called USR001_ 1 300 and USR001_ 2 300 because no large file support is requested DASDINIT D MVS DASD USRO01 300 3390 3 USROO1 Example 2 Create the same DASD volume as in the previous example but create just one file large file suport named USR001 300 in the same directory DASDINIT lfs D MVS DASD USRO01 300 3390 3 USROO1 Example 3 Create a 3390 Model 3 with volume serial SYS3A0 and alternate cylinder s the file should be com pressed with
448. s t mtu Windows only This specifies the TunTap32 I O buffer size in KB nnnn hast to be between 16 and 1024 1 MB The default value is 64 KB This is the same as I ibuff Windows only This specifies the WinPcap device driver capture buffer size in KB nnnn hast to be between 64 and 16384 16 MB The default value is 1024 1 MB This is the same as k kbuff Specifies that debugging output has to be produced on the Hercules control panel This should normally be left unspecified This is the same as d Specifies the IP address of the guest operating system running under Hercules Identifies the host network adapter to use If the host system is configured with DHCP this should instead be the MAC address of the ethernet adapter you wish to have Her cules use to connect to the outside world If this parameter is specified using the m or dev option then the value here must be specified as 0 0 0 0 to satisfy the statement syntax 5 9 2 4 Examples Example 1 Define 3088 CTC adapters on device addresses 0E20 and 0E21 The device protocol type is CTCI Channel to Channel link to Linux TCP IP stack The IP address of the guest operating system running under Hercules is 192 168 1 99 the host IP address the network adapter to use is 192 168 1 100 Oo CH Example 2 E20 3088 CTCI 192 168 1 99 192 168 1 100 E21 3088 CTCI 192 168 1 99 192 168 1 100 Define 3088 CTC adapters on device a
449. s eat ane 22 223 223 Se 22 SE 22 22 223 Za 22 223 223 223 22r nm Om Om Om OO Dm E Dm T Dm OD OD Dm E E Dm Dm Dm OO wm Di Bh Dk SLS 51 242 1 242 1 242 ER 4261 1 42 1 LA 1 42 1 1 42 1 242 1 242 L42 l4 2x LA 1 42 1 1 42 1 242 1 242 1 242 1 1 42 1 LA 1 42 1 42 42 42 42 42 65 65 165 165 65 65 165 65 65 65 165 165 Oo o 181 181 181 181 181 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 L 00000 L 00000 L 00000 L 00000 00000 00000 L 00000 L 00000 L 00000 L 00000 F28 F28 F28 F28 F28 F28 F28 F28 F28 F28 F28 F28 F28 F28 F28 F28 F28 F28 F28 F28 F28 F28 00000F28 00000F28 00000F28 00000F28 00000F28 version quit exit cpu start stop startall stopall herclogo traceopt sftdev sf dev sf dev SEG sfd t dev s dev t CKD f adr display version information terminate the emulator synonym for quit define target cpu for panel display and commands start CPU or printer device if argument given stop CPU or printer device if argument given start all CPU s stop all CPU s Read a new hercules logo file Instruction trace display options add shadow file delete shadow file rename shadow file compress shadow files display shadow file stats turn CCW tracing on off turn CCW stepping on off tur
450. s locate blocks etc It will also display the data block it reads in either ASCII or EBCDIC to examine the data on an already existing tape It requires to already have the tape drive properly installed on the Windows system so that Windows can see it i e the SCSI adapter and SCSI tape device drivers are already installed such that device Tape0 appears in the Windows device list When Windows can see the drive and FTAPE can access it then the drive should be usable by Hercules Usually any true non ASPI SCSI Tape device driver can be used regardless of the tape drive model since all SCSI tape devices are required to support a minimum set of SCSI commands The only ex ception found is IBM s device drivers They are purposely coded to only work with their own tape drives unfortunately Also note that while you need to use a non ASPI driver in order for the drive to work with Hercules that sometimes the ASPI software that comes with a tape drive also includes a device driver for the tape drive itself such that by installing whatever ASPI software may come with the tape drive the needed non ASPI device driver also gets installed In other words some ASPI software packages include not only a control DLL that allows their software to talk to the tape drive via ASPI but also includes the necessary device driver for the tape drive itself Further note that FTAPE does not currently support doing any type of I O to the medium cha
451. s 311 7 84 S Instruction Stepping ine ia ienna a a ai 312 7 85 S Instruction stepping on 314 7 86 S Instruction stepping off 316 7 87 S Instruction stepping query sssssssessesssesssstssrsrttssrutnttnttntstnnntnnsnnnnnnssnnsnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnta 317 7 88 S dev Turn CCW stepping on or off 318 7 89 SAVECORE Save a core image to a file ceeccceceeeceeeeeceeeeeceaeeeeeaeeeeneeseeeesaeeesaaeeeeaeeseaees 321 7 90 SCLPROOT Set or display SCLP base directory cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeescaeeesaeseeeeeenaees 323 7 91 SCP Send system control program Commande 325 7 92 SCRIPT Run a sequence of commands contained in aflel anneer nene nn nenene nenene 326 7 93 SCSIMOUNT Automatic SCSI tape mounts cceeeeeeseeceeeee cee eeeeaeeeeneeseeeeseaeeesaaeeeeeeeeeaees 327 7 94 SF Create a new Shadow fiel 329 7 95 SF Remove a Shadow fei 330 7 96 SFC Compress a shadow Tel 332 7 97 SFD Display shadow file statistics cccccecececeeeceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeecaeeesaaeeeeaeeseeeescaeeesaeeseneeseaees 333 7 98 SFK Perform a chkdsk on the active Shadow el 334 7 99 SH Shell commMand orei iiin rete eile Eege a een edt ieee 337 7 100 SHRD SHRD c mmand rea sieves dare teeta a eaa a a ERUN dee 339 7 101 SIZEOF Display size of structures 0 cc ceeeeeeee cee ee eee eeeeaeeeeeeeeeaeeesaaeeeeaeeseeeesaeeesaeeeeeeeeeaees 341 7402 SSD SignalishUtdOwn TE 342 7 103 START Start CPU or
452. s Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 329 7 95 SF Remove a shadow file 7 95 1 Function The SF command removes a shadow file Depending on the MERGE NOMERGE FORCE parameter the changes are incorporated in the base file or discarded If MERGE is specified or defaulted then the contents of the current file is merged into the previous file the current file is removed and the previous file becomes the current file If NOMERGE is specified then the contents of the current file is discarded and the previous file becomes the current file However if the previous file is read only then a new shadow file is created re added and that becomes the current file The FORCE option is required when doing a merge to a base file and the base file is read only because the ro option was specified on the device configuration statement 7 95 2 Syntax Descriptive SF device MERGE NOMERGE FORCE Diagram MERGE SF device lt geme a S NOMERGE FORCE 7 95 3 Parameter device This specifies the device for which a shadow file should be deleted id With an asterisk it is possible to remove a shadow file for all dasd devices that have shadow files MERGE The MERGE parameter which is the default specifies that all changes or updates that have been made to the shadow file will be commited NOMERGE The NOMERGE parameter specifies that all changes or updates that have been made to the shadow f
453. s one nicer than the CPU thread s The default is 2 a value from 1 to 9 can be specified This is the number of seconds the garbage collector thread waits during an interval At the end of an interval the garbage collector performs space recovery flushes the cache and optionally fsyncs the emulation file However the file will not be fsynced unless at least 5 seconds have elapsed since the last synchronization FSYNC The default is 10 seconds You can specify a number between 1 and 60 A value affecting the amount of data moved during the garbage collectors space recovery routine The garbage collector determines an amount of space to move based on the ratio of free space to used space in an emulation file and on the number of free spaces in the file The garbage collector wants to reduce the free space to used space ratio and the number of free spaces Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 195 NOSTRESS n FREEPEND n FSYNC n TRACE n value LINUXNULL n GCSTART n Notes The value is logarithmic a value of 8 means moving 2 the selected value while a nega tive value similarly decreases the amount to be moved Normally 256K will be moved for a file in an interval Specifying a value of 8 can increase the amount to 64M At least 64K will be moved Specifying a large value Such as 8 may not increase the garbage collec tion efficiency correspondingly The default is 0 You can specify a number from
454. s required to open and begin reading the next file EBCDIC Specifies that the file contains fixed length 80 byte EBCDIC records with no line end delimiters ASCII Specifies that the file contains variable length lines of ASCII characters delimited by LF line feed or CRLF carriage return line feed sequences at the end of each line If neither EBCDIC or ASCII is coded then the device handler attempts to detect the for mat of the card image file when the device is first accessed Auto detection is not sup ported for socket devices and the default is ASCII if SOCKDEV is specified TRUNC With ASCII files TRUNC defines that lines longer than 80 characters are truncated instead of producing a unit check error AUTOPAD With EBCDIC files AUTOPAD defines that the file is automatically padded to a multiple of 80 bytes if necessary 5 5 4 Examples Example 1 Define a 3505 card reader device on device address 000C The name and path of the card reader file is D JCL DUMMY JCL A unit exception status has to be presented after reading the last card in the file 000C 3505 D JCL DUMMY JCL EOF Example 2 Define a 1442 card reader device on device address 000C The name and path of the card reader file is D JCL JCL TXT The file contains fixed length 80 byte EBCDIC records automatically padded to a mul tiple of 80 bytes if necessary A unit check status with intervention required sense bytes has to be pre sented after reading the
455. saeseeaaesseneesaas 219 DEVINIT Reinitialize device eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaaeeeeeseaeeeeesaeeeeeseneeeeeseneaeeeeeeeaees 220 DEVLIST List device or all devices cceeeceeeeeceeeeeceeeeeeaeeeeeeeecaeeeeaaeeeeaeeseeeesaeeeeaeeeeeeesaas 222 DEVTMAX Display or set maximum device fhreacde 224 DS Display subchanpnelt nenn nenn 226 ECPSVM ECPS VM commands 5 0 c seteisheerastea ieena anaa a aara aaa ea aimada 229 EXIT Terminate the emulator natn a En 232 EXT Generate external interrupt ccccecececeeneeceeeeecaeeeeeaeeeeeeeceaeeseaaeseeaeeseaeeeseaeseeaaesseneeeaas 234 F Mark frames usable Or UNUSADIE 0 eee eeeeee ee eeee eee eeeeeeeeeeaeeeeetaeeeeeeaeeeeeteeaeeeeeeeaees 235 FPC Display floating point Control reglster nnn 236 FPR Display floating point reglsterg 237 G Turn off instruction stepping and start CDU 239 GPR Display or alter general purpose registers ccccceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeesaeeesaaeeeeeeeeeaees 240 HAO Hercules Automatic Operator ne 242 HELP List all commands command specific help 00 0 0 eee eeeeeeceeeeeneeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaas 245 HERC Send Hercules commande 247 HERCLOGO Read new 10go fei 248 HST History of commande 249 Generate I O attention interrupt for device 20 cece cee eeeeeeceeeee sete eeeeaeeeeeeeseaeeesaaeeeeaaeeeeeeesaas 251 IODELAY Display or set I O delay value essseessessseessessssesisssss
456. ser Reference Guide Page 512 repeatable_item_n repeatable_item_n repeatable_item_n repeatable jtemn fragment_name variable_1 variable_2 fragment_name DEFAULT KEYWORD KEYWORD_1 KEYWORD 2 KEYWORD 3 KEYWORD 4 KEYWORD choice_1 choice 2 choice 3 choice 4 Figure 248 Sample Syntax Description C 4 Sample Syntax Diagram The next figure shows a sample of a complex syntax diagram It shows the same example as in the syntax description in the previous section Like in the example before it is not based on an existing system parameter or panel command It is used mainly to demonstrate the look and feel of syntax descriptions Syntax gt gt CMDNAME required_argument a optional_argument reguired_choice_l reguired_choice_2 optional_choice_l reguired_choice_3 optional_choice_2 gt REQUIRED_KEYWORD var7ab e E nae ASS rae Ol ea OPTIONAL_KEYWORD var7ab e DEFAULT_KEYWORD KEYWORD defau t_choice lt a KEYWORD_1 KEYWORD choice 1 KEYWORD 2 a inn choice 2 repeatable_item_n repeatab SE fragment_name variable 1 variable 2 gt Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 513 fragment_name DEFAULT_KEYWORD KEYWORD_1 KEYWORD 2 KEYWORD 3 KEYWORD_4 KEYWORD ES Choice choice 2 choice_3 choice_4 Figure 249 Sample Syntax Diagram Hercules
457. snsennstnnttnnntnnnnntnnsnnnsen nent 252 IPENDING Display pending interrupts c cceeeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceaeeeeeaeeeeeeeseaeeesaeeseaaeeeeneesaas 254 IPL IPL normal from device XXXX aaa EE AAA T EA 256 IPLC IPL clear from device vxanx nenn 258 K Display CCKD internal fracel cee eeeeaeeeeeeeseeeeeceaeeeeaaeseceeeseaeeeeaeeneaeeseeeeess 260 LDMOD Load a module eesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee teense ceaeeeeaaeedeeeeseaeeeceaeessaaeseeeeeseaeeeeaeeseeeeeneeess 262 LOADCORE Load a Core image file ceeecceeeeeeceneeeeaeeeeeeeceeeeeceaeeesaaeeeeeeeseaeeseaaeseeneeeeeeeess 263 LOADPARM Set IPL parameter A 264 LOADTEXT Load a text deck giel 266 LOG Direct log output 2228 tia debited NEES nelle 267 LOGOPT Change log Options cccccccceeeeeeeceeeee eee eeeaaeeeeeeeeeeeecaaeeeeaaeseeeeeseaeeseaeeseaeeeeeeees 268 LPARNAME Display or set LPAR name 269 LPARNUM Display or set LPAR identification number 270 LSDEP List module dependencies sssessisssreesrresrrssrnssirssinssinssrnssttssrnnstnnstnnstnnstnnsnnnnnnn ne 272 LSMOD List dynamic modules 273 MAXRATES Display maximum observed MIPS SIO rate or define new reporting interval 275 MESSAGE Display message on console like VM 277 MOUNTED_TAPE_REINIT Control tape initialization ecccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeees 278 MSG Display message on console like VM ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceaeeeeeeeseeeeeseaeeeeaeeseaeeee
458. specify a device type suffix e g BM 3278 GROUPNAME then the suffix can be used to connect to that specific device number if defined If no suffix is used then the tn3270 client will be connected to the first available and defined 3270 device If a specific terminal device address is specified via the device type suffix of the tn3270 client software then it must be eligible to connect at that device address or the connection is immediately rejected An alternative terminal device for which the tn3270 client might be eligible will not be automatically selected 5 1 2 Syntax Descriptive devaddr devtype groupname si ipaddr mask Diagram devaddr deve ype AHS lt groupname ipaddr mask 5 1 3 Parameter devaddr This is the device address devtype This is the device type Valid terminal device types are 3270 and 3278 groupname If aterminal group name is given on the device statement then a device type suffix with this group name can be used to indicate that a device in this group is to be used If a group name is specified as a terminal type suffix e g IBM 3278 GROUPNAME and there are no devices defined with that group name or no available devices remaining in Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 104 ipaddr mask that group then the connection is rejected If no group name is specified as a terminal type suffix then the connection will only be eligible to terminal devices which
459. st 000C 3505 000D 3525 000E 1403 000F 1403 0010 3270 0011 3270 00C0 3270 00C1 3270 00C3 3270 00C4 3270 00C5 3270 00C6 3270 00C7 3270 D D D D MVS JCL DUMMY JCL ascii eof open MVS PCH pch0O0d txt ascii crlf open MVS PRT prt00e txt crlf open MVS PRT prtO00f txt crlf open 192 168 0 101 open 192 168 192 168 192 168 192 168 101 open 101 open 101 open 101 open 20130 2314 D MVS DASD SORTO0 CCKD 200 cyls open 20131 2314 D MVS DASD SORTO1 CCKD 200 cyls open 20132 2314 D MVS DASD SORT02 CCKD 203 cyls open 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00C2 3270 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 222 2007 05 30 2007 05 30 2007 05 30 2007 05 30 2007 05 30 2007 05 30 2007 05 30 2007 05 30 2007 05 30 2007 05 30 2007 05 30 2007 05 30 2007 05 30 2007 05 30 2007 05 30 2007 05 30 2007 05 30 2007 05 30 2007 05 30 2007 05 30 2007 05 30 2007 05 30 2007 05 30 2007 05 30 2007 05 30 2007 05 30 2007 05 30 2007 05 30 2007 05 30 2007 05 30 2007 05 30 2007 05 30 2007 05 30 23 23 233 23 aa 233 233 233 23 233 23g Ee 23 233 233 aot 23 3 233 ESCH 233 233 233 e 23 3 233 wae 233 233 233 23 23 23 23 07 O7 O7 07 07 07 07 07 07 O28 07 07 07 07 07 07 07 07 07 07 07 07 07 07 07 07 07 07 07 073 07 07 07 22a 22s 22 222 4 1 222 1 222
460. stnssrnssrnssrnnsnnssrnnnrnnsnnnt 185 AUTOMOUNT command delete ent 185 AUTO_SCSI_MOUNT command display settnges 187 AUTO GC MOUNT command Set valuei 187 iw ne EE 188 B COMMANC tee el A ie Ba ae ele Ae a 189 ELE E 190 CACHE command iii siiigia arana anaia eia cantina iia dane ethene tae 192 GCKD HELP Comma DEE 197 GCKD OPES COMMANA WEEN 197 GCGOKD STATS Command DE 198 CCKD command Set Options cecccceeceeeeeeeeeeee seer eeeeaeeeeaaeseeeeesaeeeeaaeeeeeeeseeeeseaeeesaeeeeneeee 198 CD command absolute path 199 CD command Wor E H UR 199 CF command display CPU status 200 CF command configure CPU offline 201 CF command configure CPU online 201 CFALL command display status of all Ce 202 CFALL command configure all CPUS offline cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeseeeeeteaeeetaeeeeneeees 203 CFALL command configure all CPUS online 203 GLOCGKS command dee Sensee cd ia ee ua dened ae aaa anaana arap asiaa a aiian faatiaraa soed idaan e 204 CMDTGT command display current Setting cccceeeeeeeeceeeee eee eeeaeeeeneeseeeeeseaeeesaeeeeneeees 205 CMDTGT command set target to GC 206 CMDTGT command set target back to Hercules 206 GONKPALY command eier ees Leg SIS Eege eraa Siet eaaa OSAERA ene aaa a SAren tae 208 Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 10 Figure 45 Figure 46 Figure 47 Figure 48 Figure 49 Figure 50 Figure 51 Figure 52 Figure 53 Figu
461. t Check this box to automatically hide the dialog once a connection has been made and to remain hidden even during reconnect retries whenever the connection is unexpectedly lost Check this box to have the system tray icon automatically display a popup ballon whenever the connection status changes e g connecting receiving idle etc This is the current status of the remote printer connection Use this button to either connect to stop retrying to connect to or disconnect from the specified Hercules printer The connect button will be labelled Connect if HercPrt is not already connected to a Hercules printer or else will be labelled Disconnect if HercPrt is connected to a printer or in the process to connect Clicking the button when it is labelled Disconnect will immediately disconnect from the specified printer if there is already a connection or else will immediately stop re trying to connect if HercPrt is currently in the process of connecting and Automatic Reconnect is enabled Page 448 Exit Clicking this button immediately disconnects from the Hercules printer and exits the program Hide Clicking this button hides the dialog To redisplay it again double click on the sys tem try icon or right click and select Show from the appearing context menu Single clicking the try icon display a popup balloon showing the current status Help Displays the programs help information 8 26 5 PDF Options
462. t 0012 det 0013 det Console connection 0300 hits 812 Subchannel 0014 det 0310 hits 5 Subchannel 0015 0320 Subchannel 0330 Subchannel Subchannel ached Subchannel ached Subchannel ached Subchannel Subchannel ached Subchannel ached Subchannel Subchannel ached Subchannel ached Subchannel ached thread terminated cache misses 114 waits 0 ached cache misses 7 waits 0 detached 271 det T377 det hits misses 35 waits 0 0016 hits 0017 cacne ached cache misses 59 waits 0 ached 0028 0029 002A det 002B det 002C det 002D detached 002E det 002F det Configuration release complete Subchannel detached Subchannel detached Subchannel ached Subchannel ached Subchannel ached Subchannel Subchannel ached Subchannel ached Calling termination routines Begin shutdown sequence Calling console_shutdown console_shutdown complete Calling hdl_term Begin HDL termination sequence Calling module dyngui cleanup routine Module dyngui cleanup complete Calling module Hercules cleanup routine Module Hercules cleanup complete HDL Termination sequence complete hdl_term complete Calling logger_term logger thread terminating logger thread terminating Hercules terminated Figure 66 EXIT command Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 233 7 36 EXT Generate external interrupt 7 36 1 Function The EXT command generates an externa
463. t Any valid port number 4 48 4 Examples Example 1 Specify 3990 as the port used for the Shared Device Server SHRDPORT 3990 Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 93 4 49 SYSEPOCH Base date for TOD clock 4 49 1 Function Specifies the base date for the TOD clock Use the default value 1900 for all systems except OS 360 Use 1960 for OS 360 Values other than these were formerly used to offset the TOD clock by a number of years to move the date before the year 2000 for non Y2K compliant operating systems This use is de precated and support will be removed in a future release after which only values of 1900 or 1960 will be accepted 4 49 2 Syntax Descriptive SYSEPOCH 1900 1960 year years years Diagram p gt gt SYSEPOCH 1900 lt E er years years 4 49 3 Parameter year This is the base date for the TOD clock The only supported values for SYSEPOCH are currently 1900 and 1960 Any other value will produce a warning message showing the equivalent values to specify in the SYSEPOCH statement 1900 is the default years An optional year offset may be specified and will be treated as though it had been specified using the YROFFSET statement 4 49 4 Examples Example 1 Specify year 1900 as the base date for the TOD clock SYSEPOCH 1900 Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 94 4 50 TIMERINT Internal timer update interval 4 50 1 Function
464. t IODELAY value 2007 06 30 17 14 44 406 00000FC4 iodelay 2007 06 30 17 14 44 406 00000FC4 HHCPNO30I I O delay 0 Figure 88 IODELAY command display value Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 252 Example 2 Change the current IODELAY value 2007 06 30 17 15 26 218 00000FC4 iodelay 50 2007 06 30 17 15 26 218 00000FC4 HHCPNO30I I O delay 50 Figure 89 IODELAY command set value Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 253 7 49 IPENDING Display pending interrupts 7 49 1 Function The IPENDING command displays the pending interrupts for each CPU and some lock information 7 49 2 Syntax Descriptive IPENDING 7 49 3 Parameter None 7 49 4 Examples Example 1 Display pending interrupts 4 24 05 341 00000FC4 ipending 14 24 05 341 00000FC4 HHCPN123I CPU0000 14 24 05 341 00000FC4 CPU0000 14 24 05 341 00000FC4 CPU0000 14 24 05 341 00000FC4 CPU0000 14 24 05 341 00000FC4 CPU0000 14 24 05 341 00000FC4 CPU0000 14 24 05 341 00000FC4 CPU0000 14 24 05 341 00000FC4 CPU0000 14 24 05 341 00000FC4 CPU0000 14 24 05 341 00000FC4 CPU0000 14 24 05 341 00000FC4 CPU0000 14 24 05 341 00000FC4 CPU0000 14 24 05 341 00000FC4 CPU0000 14 24 05 341 00000FC4 CPU0000 14 24 05 341 00000FC4 CPU0000 14 24 05 341 00000FC4 CPU0000 4 24 05 341 00000FC4 HHCPN123I CPU0001 CPUint 00000001 State 00000001 amp Mask DFOOEE4F Inte
465. t dataset et MAKETAPE EXEC STEPLIB DD SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT DD INDATA DD INTAPE DD SYSI DD READ INDATA APEMARK APEFILE INTAPE APEMARK PGM AWSUTIL SYSOUT DISP CATLG SPAC Ka DISP SHR DSN my load library B TRK 15 15 DSN my dsname DISP SHR DSN my input sequential data DISP OLD DNS my real tape file Figure 235 AWSUTIL utility JCL Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 473 8 30 RAWSTAPE Reverse AWSTAPE utility The RAWSTAPE program is written by Jan Jaeger and is available on the CBT MVS Utilities Tape CBTTAPE at www cbttape org File 478 8 30 1 Function The RAWSTAPE utility converts an AWSTAPE file back to a blocked OS dataset such that the original blocking is restored As an AWSTAPE file does not contain DCB parameters this utility will not restore the original DCB parameters these will have to be added manually with a utility such as IEBGENER Upload the AWSTAPE file to OS 390 or z OS in binary format do not use CR LF or any other blocking feature when doing the file transfer The file must be uploaded to a RECFM U dataset either preallo cated or allocated using IND FILE BLKSIZE 4096 is reasonable but any other blocksize will work also An AWS tape file can consist of more then 1 file and as such the filenumber of the tape must be specified This filenumber is equal to the va
466. t in an empty string 4 14 2 Syntax Descriptive DEFSYM symbol value Diagram DES SO value 1 lt 4 14 3 Parameter symbol The name of a symbol value The value that is assigned to the symbol 4 14 4 Examples Example 1 Define a symbol TAPEDIR with the value nome hercules tapes DEFSYM TAPEDIR home hercules tapes Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 52 4 15 DEVPRIO Device threads process priority 4 15 1 Function This value specifies the priority of the device threads Caution DEVPRIO should not have a higher dispatching priority than the TOD clock and timer thread 4 15 2 Syntax Descriptive DEVPRIO 8 on Diagram gt gt DEVPRIO ba Ee 8 a ES nn 4 15 3 Parameter nn This value specifies the priority for the device threads For details on the priority values see section 4 57 Process and Thread Priorities The default is 8 4 15 4 Examples Example 1 Set a priority of 8 for the device threads DEVPRIO 8 Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 53 4 16 DEVTMAX Maximum number of device threads 4 16 1 Function DEVTMAX specifies the maximum number of device threads allowed 4 16 2 Syntax Descriptive DEVTMAX 0 1 1 7 Diagram 1 l n 4 16 3 Parameter 0 Specify 0 to cause an unlimited number of semi permanent threads to be created on an as needed bas
467. t is to be replaced with the string defined in the corresponding String entry where represents a digit in the range of 1 to n with n being the value defined by the preceding Strings entry The Strings value defines how many corresponding String or String entries there are The replacement strings defined by the String entries do not have to be the same length as the String entry and may even be empty to cause the substring defined in the String entry to be completely removed 8 26 8 4 2 Chars Chars The Chars value defines the replacement characters which should be used to replace the correspond ding characters defined at the same relative position in the Chars value Each character of the filename generated by the Namess entry of the OutputFile section matching one of the characters defined in the Chars value is replaced with the corresponding character defined at the same relative position in the Chars value There can only be one Chars and Chars entry but their string values which must be the same length can be as long as you wish In this way the String and Chars entries together allow you to define additional output filename transformations to take place during the construction of the final output filename String replacement is al ways performed first followed by character replacement second and a final internal character translation of Bio ee ECK E R
468. t tun which is correct for version 2 4 and above of the Linux kernel For Windows Identifies the host network adapter If your network adapter does not have a permanent static IP address assigned to it e g you use DHCP and have a dynamic IP assigned then instead of specifying an IP address as the second parameter in the de vice statement you must specify the MAC address of the adapter In this case the se cond argument hostip must be coded as 0 0 0 0 This is simply a placeholder because two IP addresses are expected to satisfy the device definition syntax dev devname This is the same as n devname s netmask This is the netmask to be configured on the link Note Since this is a point to point link netmask is meaningless from the perspective of the actual network device netmask netmask This is the same as s netmask m macaddr This is the optional hardware address of the interface in the format of either XX IXXIXXIXX XXIXX Or XX XX XX XX XX XX The default is 00 00 5E nn nn nn where the nn nn nn part is constructed from the last three octets of the specified guestip macaddr macaddr This is the same as m macaddr Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 136 t mtu mtu mtu i ibuff ibuff ibuff k kbuff kbuff kbuff d debug guestip hostip Linux only Specifies the maximum transmission unit size default 1500 bytes This is the same a
469. te thread updates the TOD clock CPU Timer and other architectural related clock and timer values The default interval is 50 microseconds which attempts to strike a reasonable balance between clock accuracy and overall host performance 7 118 2 Syntax Descriptive TIMERINT 7nterva Diagram gt gt TIMERINT a interval 7 118 3 Parameter interval Specifies the timer update interval in microseconds The minimum allowed value for the interval is 1 microsecond and the maximum is 1 000 000 microseconds one second CAUTION While a lower TIMERINT value may help increase the accuracy of the guest s TOD clock and CPU Timer values it could also have severe negative impact on the over all performance of the host operating system This is especially true when a low TIMER INT value is coupled with a high HERCPRIO and TODPRIO priority setting Exercise extreme caution when choosing your desired TIMERINT in relationship to your chosen HERCPRIO and TODPRIO priority settings 7 118 4 Examples Example 1 Display current timers update interval 2007 06 30 14 04 44 578 00000FC4 timerint 2007 06 30 14 04 44 578 00000FC4 HHCPN037I Timer update interval 50 microsecond si Figure 182 TIMERINT command list current value Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 363 Example 2 Set a new timers update interval 2007 06 30 14 04 55 296 00000FC4 timerint 100 2007 06 30 14 04 55 296
470. tement is omitted exception messages for program checks 10 11 16 and 1C are suppressed The argument QUIET suppresses all exception messages whereas the argument NULL suppresses none of them The other options do suppress some messages and do not suppress other messages depending on the specified operating system See also the PGMTRACE command which allows to further fine tune the tracing of program interrupt exceptions 4 41 2 Syntax Descriptive OSTAILOR z OS 0S 390 VM VSE LINUX OPENSOLARIS QUIET NULL Diagram gt gt OSTAILOR z 0S lt 0S 390 VM VSE LINUX OPENSOLARIS QUIET NULL 4 41 3 Parameter z OS Code z OS if you intend to run z OS OS 390 Code OS 390 if you intend to run MVS 370 MVS XA MVS ESA OS 390 VM Code VM if you intend to run VM 370 VM ESA or z VM VSE Code VSE if you intend to run VSE 370 VSE ESA or z VSE LINUX Code Linux you intend to run Linux 390 or Linux for z Series OpenSolaris Code OpenSolaris you intend to run OpenSolaris for z Series QUIET QUIET discards all exception messages NULL NULL allows all exception messages to be logged Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 85 4 41 4 Examples Example 1 Specify Linux as the intended operating system and selectively suppressing trace messages for program checks which are considered normal in the Linux environment OSTAILOR LINUX Example 2 Do not specify the intended operating system and allow al
471. tening for incoming connections This must be the port number where your Hercules printer is listening for incoming connections This is the filename of the Job Separator Control File for the printer The job sepa rator control file defines what your Hercules guest operating system s job separator pages look like and allows HercPrt to detect where one print job ends and the next print job begins This allows HercPrt to break spooled output into separate Windows files one for each printout and to name the files using information from the job accounting fields extracted from the print fields on the actual job separator page itself Click on the arrow to display a standard Windows file open dialog where you can select the job separator control file you want to use for this printer Enter here the name of the directory where you want the print files to be placed Click on the arrow to display a standard Windows file open dialog where you can select the directory for the print files of this printer Check this box to automatically retry a failed connect attempt and to automatically keep retrying to reconnect whenever the connection is unexpectedly lost This is the number of seconds to pause between the time a re connect fails and the time the re connect attempt is tried again The idea here is not to bombard the Hercules system with a steady stream of re connect attempts and to wait a short while before trying again to connec
472. tered directly via the Hercules hardware console will still work NOTE entered directly via the Hercules hardware console includes commands entered via the HTTP server facility or entered via rc run command scripts 4 47 4 Examples Example 1 Disable the programmatic execution of shell commands via the the diagnose 8 interface but allow shell commands entered directly via the Hercules hardware console SHCMDOPT NODIAG8 Example 2 Globally disable execution of shell commands SHCMDOPT DISABLE Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 92 4 48 SHRDPORT Shared device server port 4 48 1 Function SHRDPORT defines the port number in decimal on which the Shared Device Server will listen The Shared Device Server will allow other Hercules instances to access devices on this instance Currently only DASD devices may be shared The default port is 3990 If you decide to use a different port number then you must specify this port number on the device statements for the other Hercules instances If no SHRDPORT statement is present then the Shared Device Server thread will not be activated 4 48 2 Syntax Descriptive SHRDPORT 3990 port Diagram gt gt SHRDPORT 3990 lt ee 4 48 3 Parameter 3990 This is the default port for the Shared Device Server If this port number is used then the port number is not required to be coded on the device statements for other Hercules instances por
473. tering the command without any argument simply displays the current trace mode 7 121 2 Syntax Descriptive TRACEOPT TRADITIONAL REGSFIRST NOREGS Diagram gt gt TRACEOPT a TRADITIONAL REGSFIRST NOREGS 7 121 3 Parameter TRADITIONAL Displays the registers following the instruction about to be executed such that pressing enter to execute the displayed instruction then shows the next instruction to be execu ted followed by the updated registers display REGSFIRST Displays the current register contents followed by the instruction about to be executed such that pressing enter to execute the displayed instruction then shows the updated registers followed by the next instruction to be executed NOREGS Suppresses the registers display altogether and shows just the instruction to be executed Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 368 7 121 4 Examples Example 1 Display the instruction trace in traditional mode instruction followed by registers traceopt traditional HHCPN162I Hercules instruction trace displayed in traditional mode CPU0000 PSW 00080000 800005EC INST B7000444 LCTL 0 0 1092 0 CPU0000 R 00000444 K 06 01B00200 0000007F FE000000 00000001 eer CPU0000 GROO 00000000 GRO01 00000000 GRO2 00000000 GR0O3 00000000 CPU0000 GRO4 00000000 GRO5 00000000 GRO6 00000000 GRO7 00000000 CPU0000 GRO8 00000000 GRO9 00000000 GR10 00000000 GR11 00000000 CPU0000 GR12 000000
474. the bar environment variable but rather by the literal string bar followed immedia tely by the literal character Symbol names environment variable names are not case sensitive on Windows whereas they might be on other host operating systems 3 8 3 Examples 0120 3390 S DASD_PATH dasd mvsv5r 120 In the above example device 0120 will be a 3390 loaded with the DASD file from the directory specified in the environment variable DASD_PATH or if the DASD PATH environment variable is not defined the value dasd instead Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 31 4 System Parameter Descriptions 4 1 or Comment lines 4 1 1 Function The hash or asterisk symbols mark the beginning of a comment or a full comment line 4 1 2 Syntax Descriptive anything or x anything Diagram dE REENEN anything or to eae et anything 4 1 3 Parameter anything Any text following the hash or asterisk symbol 4 1 4 Examples Example 1 Add comment lines to the configuration file and add comment after the system parameter KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK System Parameters KKEKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK NUMCPU 2 Number of emulated CPUs MAINSIZE 1024 Main storage in MB Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 32 4 2 ARCHMODE Initial architecture mode 4 2 1 Function The archmode parameter specifies the ini
475. the HTTP server s files reside 4 23 4 Examples Example 1 for Unix installations Set the root directory for the HTTP servers files under a Unix system to usr local share hercules HTTPROOT usr local share hercules Example 2 for Windows installations Set the root directory for the HTTP servers files under a Windows system to D HERCULES HTML HTTPROOT D HERCULES HTML Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 66 4 24 IGNORE Ignore subsequent INCLUDE errors 4 24 1 Function This system parameter indicates that errors caused by subsequent INCLUDE statements for files which do not exist should be ignored rather than causing the Hercules startup to be aborted as it would other wise normally occur 4 24 2 Syntax Descriptive IGNORE INCLUDE_ERRORS Diagram IGNORE ANCLUDE ERRORS lt A a 4 24 3 Parameter INCLUDE_ERRORS Indicates that subsequent INCLUDE errors will be ignored 4 24 4 Examples Example 1 Specify that errors caused by subsequent INCLUDE statements should be ignored IGNORE INCLUDE_ERRORS Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 67 4 25 INCLUDE Include configuration file 4 25 1 Function An INCLUDE statement instructs the Hercules initialisation process to treat the contents of the file specified by filepath as if its contents had appeared in the configuration file at the point where the INLCUDE st
476. then the default name is EMULATOR capacity_model This specifies the capacity model name If this parameter is omitted the hard ware_model name is used as capacity_model name perm_capacity_model This optional parameter specifies the permanent capacity model name temp_capacity_model This optional parameter specifies the temporary capacity model name 4 36 4 Examples Example 1 Set the model name returned by the STSI instruction to EMULATOR MODEL EMULATOR Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 80 4 37 MODPATH Dynamic load module path 4 37 1 Function MODPATH specifies the path where dynamic load modules are loaded from If a MODPATH statement is coded then the path on the MODPATH statement is searched before the default path is searched When a relative path is specified it is interpreted as a relative path within the default search path If an absolute path is coded it is interpreted as such The default MODPATH is hercules which means modules are loaded from the directory hercules within the default LD_LIBRARY_PATH 4 37 2 Syntax Descriptive MODPATH path Diagram gt gt MODPATH path 4 4 37 3 Parameter path Path where dynamic load modules are loaded from 4 37 4 Examples Example 1 Set the path from where dynamic load modules are loaded to D HERCULES MODIFICATIONS MODPATH D HERCULES MODIFICATIONS Hercules Emulator V3
477. there are no avail Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 41 able cache entries slowing the emulated operating system A large value will also cause more pending free space to build up since free space is flushed each interval This may mean that the garbage collector space recovery routine will perform more work and the resulting emulation file may be larger e Specify fsync 1 and gcint 5 if you are seriously concerned about your data being lost due to a failure fsync will ensure your data on disk is coherent However fsync may cause a noticeable performance degradation Note that an fsync will not be performed more often than every 5 seconds 4 6 4 Examples Example 1 Set the CCKD options to use bzip2 as compression method and using maximum compression CCKD COMP 2 COMPPARM 9 Example 2 Set the CCKD options to use the default compression method as well as default compression Disable stressed writes and set the number of trace entries to 100000 CCKD COMP 1 COMPPARM 1 NOSTRESS 1 TRACE 100000 Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 42 4 7 CNSLPORT Telnet client port 4 7 1 Function The CNSLPORT parameter specifies the port number in decimal on which the telnet server will listen The statement may also have the form host port where the telnet console server will bind to the specified address 4 7 2 Syntax Descriptive CNSLPORT 3270 port host port Diagram
478. tial architecture mode 4 2 2 Syntax Descriptive ARCHMODE S 370 ESA 390 ESAME z ARCH Diagram p gt gt ARCHMODE S 370 lt ESA 390 ESAME z ARCH 4 2 3 Parameter S 370 Use S 370 for OS 360 VM 370 and MVS 3 8 ESA 390 Use ESA 390 for MVS XA MVS ESA OS 390 VM ESA VSE ESA Linux 390 and ZZSA z OS can be run until version 1 2 with ESA 390 mode without installed bimodal feature or until version 1 4 if the bimodal feature is installed ESAME Use ESAME Enterprise System Architecture Modal Extensions for z OS z VM z VSE and z Linux When ESAME is specified the machine will always be IPL ed in ESA 390 mode but the system is capable of being switched into the z Architecture mode after IPL This is handled automatically by all z Architecture operating systems z ARCH This is the same as ESAME 4 2 4 Examples Example 1 Specify ESA 390 architecture mode ARCHMODE ESA 390 Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 33 4 3 ASN AND Ly REUSE ALRF ESAME ASN and LX REUSE feature 4 3 1 Function This parameter specifies if the ASN and LX Reuse Facility is to be disabled the default or enabled The ASN_AND_LX_REUSE parameter can be abbreviated as ALRF 4 3 2 Syntax Descriptive ASN_AND_LX_REUSE DISABLE ENABLE or ALRF DISABLE ENABLE Diagram ENABLE or ALRF DISABLE p ae a ENABLE 4 3 3 Parameter DISABLE The ASN and LX Reuse Fa
479. to be performed i e TAPEVOL EXPORT etc and keywords which supply values to that function Control statement keywords may be continued to as many records as necessary Continued statements are indicated by the last keyword argument suffixed with a comma and additional keywords on the next record Additional keywords must not begin in column one 8 28 3 AWSVOL Control Statement The AWSVOL control statement supplies characteristics of the virtual tape volume including volume serial number owner and compression AWSVOL must be the first control statement specified Descriptive AWSVOL VOLSER vo ser OWNER owner COMPRESS 1 2 LEVEL 1 ol Diagram gt gt AWSVOL VOLSER vo ser i P OWNER owner COMPRESS H 0 1 2 Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 467 Lem lt L LeveL 1 Ee VOLSER volser OWNER owner COMPRESS n LEVEL n This specifies the volume serial number volser is a 1 to 6 byte argument The given owner will be included into the VOL1 owner field owner is a 1 to 10 byte argument Compression 0 no compression 1 zlib 2 bzip If COMPRESS 0 is coded then an AWS format is assumed Default is HET format with COMPRESS 1 zlib Specifies the level of compression 0 9 Default is LEVEL 1 8 28 4 AWSGET Control Statement The AWSGET control statement will supply values that are necessary to retrieve a dataset from an
480. to the actual SCSI hardware Check the manufacturer information for your particular model of SCSI attached tape drive and or use Fish s ftape Windows utility to determine whether or not this option is needed for your particular drive blkid 32 This option indicates that your SCSl attached tape drive only supports 32 bit block ids as used by 3590 drives and not the 22 bit format used by 3480 3490 drives You should only specify this option if you intend to define the drive as a model 3480 or 3490 device and then only if your actual SCSI drive uses 32 bit block ids If you define your Hercules tape drive as a model 3590 device however this option is not required as 3590 drives are already presumed to use 32 bit block ids Specifying this option on a 3480 3490 device statement will cause Hercules device emu lation logic to automatically translate the actual SCSI tape drive s 32 bit block id into 22 bit format before returning it back to the guest operating system since that is the format it expects it to be in for a model 3480 3490 drive and to translate the guest s 22 bit format block id into 32 bit format before sending it to the actual SCSI hardware since that is the format that the actual hardware requires it to be in blkid 22 The opposite of the above blkid 32 option 5 8 1 4 Examples Example 1 Define a 3420 tape device on device address 0580 The tape device is a SCSl attached tape drive which only supports 32 bit block
481. to write the opera ting system or standalone program yourself unless you possess a license from IBM to run one of their operating systems on your PC or use IBM programs and operating systems which have been placed in the public domain NOTE It is YOUR responsibility to comply with the terms of the license for the operating system you intend to run on the Hercules Emulator 1 9 Trademarks The following is a list of trademark acknowledgments and copyright notices for product and company names mentioned in this book Other product and company names in this book that are not listed below may be the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners e IBM System 370 ESA 390 z Architecture MVS OS 390 z OS VM VM ESA z VM VSE VSE ESA z VSE are trademarks or registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation IBM e Windows XP Windows Vista Windows 7 Windows 8 Windows Server 2003 Windows Server 2008 Windows Server 2012 Visual C Toolkit Visual C Express are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation e Linux is a trademark owned by Linus Torvalds The Linux Mark Institute is the exclusive licensor of the Linux trademark on behalf of its owner Linus Torvalds e WinPcap is copyrighted by NetGroup Politecnico di Torino Italy e Cygwin is copyrighted by Red Hat Inc e Vista tn3270 is copyrighted by Tom Brennan Software e Pentium XEON are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporati
482. tor V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 435 HDRIDOCLIB File 2 Blocks 16 EOF1DOCLIB HDRIRIMLIB File 5 Blocks 47 EOF1RIMLIB HDRIHOLDDATA File 8 Blocks 794 EOF 1HOLDDATA HDRIPGMDIR File 10 Blocks 2 38321A00010001 HDR2V327523273600STP321VA DOCLIB P ile 1 Blocks 3 block size min 80 block size min 20 38321A00010001 EOF2V327523273600STP321VA DOCLIB P ile 3 Blocks 2 block size min 80 38321A00010002 HDR2V327523273600STP321VA RIMLIB P ile 4 Blocks 2 block size min 80 block size min 20 38321A00010002 EOF2V327523273600STP321VA RIMLIB P File 6 Blocks 2 block size min 80 38321A00010003 HDR2F031200008000STP321VA HOLDATA P File 7 Blocks 2 block size min 80 block size min 3040 max 3 38321A00010003 EOF2F031200008000STP321VA HOLDATA P File 9 Blocks 2 block size min 80 38321A00010004 HDR2V327521065600STP321VA PGMDIR P block size min 80 00301 S 6821 max 80 max 3274 00301 S 6821 max 80 00301 E 6821 max 80 max 5140 00301 S 6821 max 80 00301 B 6821 max 80 00301 B 6821 max 80 00301 S 6821 max 80 40000000000000IBM 6 0 40000000000016IBM 6 40000000000000I1BM 6 40000000000047IBM 6 40000000000000IBM 6 120 40000000000794IBM 6 40000000000000IBM 6 OS VS OS VS OS VS OS VS OS VS OS VS OS VS 370 370 370 370 370 370 370 Figure 227 TAPESPLLT util
483. tput however it defines only the left margin and the right margin is always set to zero Additionally for RTF output print lines that extend beyond the right margin automatically wrap to the next print line whereas for PDF output they are simply truncated The vertical margin at the top of every page is fixed at 0 5 inches and cannot be changed The first print able line on a page after performing a page eject is therefore always the 4th physical line on the page when printing at 6 lines per inch or the 5th physical line if printing at 8 lines per inch even though in both cases it is still considered to be line number 1 The only way to print within the top 0 5 inches of your form is to continue printing beyond the bottom of the previous page such that your print then overflows onto the first physical line of the next page Be aware however that you cannot do this continuously That is to say your page cannot be of unlimited length When any page grows to be 500 lines long or longer a page eject is automatically forced and this behavior cannot be overridden Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 456 8 26 8 5 5 FontSize and LPI FontSize is always specified in typographic points 1 72 inches with the default being 12pt for LPI 6 Lines Per Inch and opt for LPI 8 When 8 LPI is chosen then 9pt is forced Valid font sizes are 9pt 1 Opt 11pt or 12pt The font that is used is always Courier New and cannot be changed
484. ttempting to connect match the IP address mask entered on the device statement then the client is eligible to connect at this device address Otherwise the client is ineligible to connect at this device address and the next available device if any for which the client is eligible to connect will be attempted If no permissible terminal devices remain terminal devices for which the client is eligible to connect or there are no more available terminal devices then the client connection is rejected The optional IP address and subnet mask may be specified in conjunction with the ter minal group argument In this case the terminal group argument must be specified ahead of the optional IP address and subnet mask arguments To specify an IP address and a subnet mask without also specifying a terminal group use an asterisk as the group name substitute or placeholder If an IP address mask are not specified then any client tn3270 session is allowed to connect to the device provided they are also a member of the specified terminal group if any The terminal group name must match if specified regardless of any optional IP address mask To summarize the device number suffix always takes precedence over any group name and any group name always takes precedence over any IP address mask value 5 3 4 Examples Example 1 Define a 1052 console printer keyboard device on device address 0009 0009 1052 Example 2 Define a 1052
485. tual storage 7 125 1 Function The V command displays or alters virtual storage 7 125 2 Syntax Descriptive V P S H addr addr length addr addr addr value Diagram NM addr lt P addr length S addr addr H addr value 7 125 3 Parameter addr length P S H addr addr value Address of the virtual storage area that is to be displayed or altered Length of the storage area that is to be displayed The value of len must be given in hexadecimal If the length is omitted then 64 bytes of virtual storage are displayed by default The optional P argument will force Primary translation instead of current PSW mode The optional S argument will force Secondary translation instead of current PSW mode The optional H argument will force Home translation instead of current PSW mode Address range from to of the virtual storage that is to be displayed Value is a hex string of up to 32 pairs of digits 82 bytes which are to be written to the virtual storage address given by the addr parameter After altering the storage 16 bytes of virtual storage starting at addr are displayed Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 375 7 125 4 Examples Example 1 Display 256 x FF bytes of virtual storage starting from address x 00010000 05 56 20 087 00000C24 v 00010000 ff 05 56 20 087 00000C24 V 00010000 primary R 00010000 05
486. ub prt00e txt publ html prt00e siz 10 1000 CRLF HTML if errorlevel 1 goto NOTDONE echo PRINT FILE UPDATED goto LOOP NOTDONE echo ERROR NO UPDATE DONE goto LOOP 8 27 5 Sample Utility Output With the exception of error messages if any the utility does not produce any screen output Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 466 8 28 AWSSL AWS virtual tape AWSSL is written by Reed H Petty and is available on the CBT MVS Utilities Tape CBTTAPE at www cbttape org File 585 8 28 1 Function AWSSL moves MVS OS390 etc datasets directly to from AWS and HET virtual tape files AWSSL strives to maintain compatibility with other AWS HET utilities including AWSUTIL VTTS HETUTL and the Hercules Emulator AWSSL creates AWS and HET format virtual tapes which contain one to many datasets of any record format with or without standard labels The program will also retrieve datasets from AWS HET files of any record format with the exception of spanned blocks The retrieved datasets may be reblocked if necessary If DCB attributes are omitted on the receiving dataset and if standard labels are present within the AWS structure then the DCB attributes of the receiving dataset will be defaulted to those within the HDR1 label 8 28 2 Input Parameter All input parameters are taken from control statements supplied by the AWSCNTL DD statement The statements consist of a major function
487. ue Red Yellow or custom color specified as RRGGBB HTML color value No color i e outlined transparent green bar Feedholes Uncompressed PDF output Default is compressed Columns 0 255 Default is 0 see notes e All PDF options are ignored when the output file is rtf and not pdf e The i switch is required in order to support specifying all options in any order Options may pre cede the name of the input file or follow it or both but the i switch is required to identify the name of the actual input file Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 458 e If o is not specified the output file is named the same name as the input file but with a PDF file extension If you wish convert your file to RTF instead of PDF then you MUST use the o option to specify an output name ending with the RTF file extension e The default paper size is US Standard Fanfold 13 875 x 11 Custom sizes should be specified in fractional inches or whole millimeters To specify millimeters append mm to your specified size e g 287mm e The top margin size is fixed at 0 5 inches and cannot be changed e Do not include the width of the feedholes when specifying your paper width The width of the feedholes 0 5 inches is automatically added at runtime e The n option is mutually exclusive with the c option and overrides it when specified Both are ignored if the g option is not also spec
488. uest If the list is too large the server will indicate that the client should purge all records for the device 9 3 Compression Data that would normally be transferred uncompressed between the client and the host can optionally be compressed by specifiying the COMP n keyword on the device configuration statement see below or on the attach command The value n of the COMP n keyword is the zlib compression parameter which must be a number between 1 and 9 A value closer to 1 means less compression but less processor time to perform the compression A value closer to 9 means the data is compressed more but also more pro cessor time is required to compress the data If the server is on localhost then you should not specify compression Otherwise you are just stealing pro cessor time from Hercules to facilitate compression decompression If the server is on a local network then a low value such as 1 2 or 3 is recommended There is a tradeoff curve attempting to trade CPU cycles for network traffic to derive an optimal throughput If the devices on the server are compressed devices i e CCKD or CFBA then the records track images or block groups may be transferred compressed regardless of the COMP n settings This depends on whether the client supports the compression type zlib or bzip2 of the record on the server and whether the record is actually compressed in the server cache An example may help to explain this Suppose on the client
489. ule 7 62 2 Syntax Descriptive LSMOD Diagram gt gt LSMOD SAH 7 62 3 Parameter None 7 62 4 Examples Example 1 List the dynamic modules 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 FC4 FCA CA FC4 FCA FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 FC4 CA FC4 FC4 FC4 FCA FCA FCA dll type symbol symbol symbol load name hdt 3088 debug_tt32_stats loadcount 1 owner hdt3088 CTCI WIN VMNE load name 3430 3422 880 load name 3287 3270 321 load name 3211 1403 load name 3525 load name 3505 2501 144 load name panel_command debug_cpu_stat daemon_task 1 T CTCT CICI 3088 LCS hdt 3420 9 9348 9347 3490 3480 3420 3411 3410 hdt 3270 5 L052 hdt1403 hdt3525 hdt 3505 2 dyngui loadcount 2 owner dyngui e loadcount 1 owner dyngui oadcount 1 owner dyngui Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 273 00000FC4 symbol panel_display loadcount 1 owner dyngui 00000FC4 dll type load name dyncrypt OOO000FC4 symbol z900_compute_message_authentication_code loadcount 1 owner dyncrypt OO000FC4 symbol z900_compute_last_message_digest loadcount 1 owner dyncrypt OOO000FC4 symbol z900_compute_intermediate_message_digest loadcount 1
490. umber is 44C3 18D9 00000550 00000550 Directory of D MVS 00000550 00000550 07 08 2006 17 59 lt DIR gt 00000550 07 08 2006 17 59 lt DIR gt SS 00000550 07 08 2006 17 59 lt DIR gt BATCH 00000550 07 08 2006 17 59 lt DIR gt CONF 00000550 07 08 2006 17 59 lt DIR gt DASD 00000550 07 08 2006 17 59 lt DIR gt JCL 00000550 25 08 2006 16 11 lt DIR gt LOG 00000550 07 08 2006 17 59 lt DIR gt PCH 00000550 07 08 2006 17 59 lt DIR gt PRT 00000550 07 08 2006 17 59 lt DIR gt SHADOW 00000550 07 08 2006 17 59 lt DIR gt TAPE 00000550 07 08 2006 17 59 lt DIR gt TN3270 00000550 12 08 1994 12 23 8 480 SLEEP EXE 00000550 24 10 2005 07 57 633 MVS38J_GUI BAT 00000550 24 10 2005 08 23 632 MVS38J_NATIVE BAT 00000550 24 10 2005 08 18 1 053 MVS38J_TERMINAL BAT 00000550 4 File s 10 798 bytes 00000550 12 Dir s 25 160 966 144 bytes free Command ended rc 0 Figure 157 SH command Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 338 7 100 SHRD SHRD command 7 100 1 Function The SHRD command has two functions Depending on the given arguments it initializes the Shared De vice Server trace table and starts the trace or it prints the contents of the current trace table 7 100 2 Syntax Descriptive SHRD TRACE n Diagram n 7 100 3 Parameter TRACE TRACE when specified without a decimal number prints the current contents of the trace table n This specifies the trace table size
491. unction The ATTACH command configures a new device and makes it available in the active configuration The effect of this command is immediately visible in the device display of the Hercules Windows GUI or the Hercules Peripherals display if the GUI is not used 7 9 2 Syntax Descriptive ATTACH devn type argument argument Diagram ATTACH devn devtype TG I argument 7 9 3 Parameter devn The device number of the device that is to be configured in the current configuration type The device type that is to be configured in the current configuration For a list of valid device types see chapter 5 Device Definition Descriptions arguments These are the additional arguments for the device that is to be configured in the current configuration The arguments are dependent on the device type For additional infor mation on the valid arguments see chapter 5 Device Definition Descriptions 7 9 4 Examples Example 1 Attach a printer device to the active configuration 2007 06 30 13 32 45 562 00000618 attach 000f 1403 d mvs prt prt2 txt crlf Figure 17 ATTACH command configure printer Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 182 Example 2 Attach a display terminal to the active configuration 2007 06 30 13 33 01 062 00000618 attach 0700 3270 Figure 18 ATTACH command configure display terminal Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guid
492. ure 111 Figure 112 Figure 113 Figure 114 Figure 115 Figure 116 Figure 117 Figure 118 Figure 119 Figure 120 Figure 121 Figure 122 Figure 123 Figure 124 Figure 125 Figure 126 Figure 127 Figure 128 Figure 129 Figure 130 Figure 131 Figure 132 Figure 133 Figure 134 Figure 135 Figure 136 IPESGOMIMANG DEE 257 IPE GrCOmima nd EE 259 KCOMMMANG ege shed chose A 2 hedeet in E A E Miele nddece ne ay 261 EDMO B COMM ANG EE 262 LOADCORE commande 263 LOADPARM command display IPL poarametert nnn rsnnnssnnesnnssrnsnnssrnnnne 264 LOADPARM command Set IPL parameter ccccecceeeeeeeeeeceeeeecaeeesaaeseeeeeseaeeeseaeeneaeeeeaes 265 LOG rCOMMANG EE 267 LOGOPT ell ME 268 LPARNAME command display LPAR name c ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaes 269 LPARNAME command define LPAR name 269 LPARNUM command set LPARNUM AA 270 LPARNUM command display LPARNUM AAA 271 LSDEPCOMUMANIG E 272 ESMOD command WEE 274 MAXRATES command set the interval me 275 MAXRATES command display maximum rates cccceeeeeecee cece eeeeaeeeeeeseeeeeseaeeesaeeeeneeees 276 MESSAGE Commande Ee EENS deed 277 MOUNTED_TAPE_REINIT command display settings 00eesseesseeeeeeeeeene neneeese neern eee 279 MOUNTED_TAPE_REINIT command disallow tape mount reinftalzaton 279 MSG commandi ai arani ana ai aaa e a ap ev ie eee ay igre 280 MSGHELD command set new interval cccc
493. used for reports printed at 6 LPI but the 9pt font size is forced for reports printed at 8 LPI The font itself is always Courier New and cannot be changed The default line spacing is 6 lines per inch If you choose to print your report at 8 LPI then the 9pt font size is forced To squeeze long print lines onto narrow forms or stretch short print lines to fill wider forms enter here the number of columns you want to be able to fit onto your custom sized form The recommended default value of zero uses the normal default pitch of 10 charac ters columns per inch Note The columns option is ignored for RTF output Specifies how far from the left edge of the form not including the feed holes you wish each print line to start When the output is PDF the same value is also used as the right margin and print lines are prevented from printing beond it When the output is RTF however the value is only used as a left margin the right margin is always set to zero and any print lines which would otherwise extend beyond the far right edge of the form are instead automatically wrapped onto the next line Select this option to cause a realistic looking set of tractor feed holes to be drawn along the left and right sides of the report Note The feed holes option is ignored for RTF output Produces standard compressed PDF files instead of legacy uncompressed ones Page 450 thereby reducing the additional disk space the reports w
494. ut area is already empty causes the screen to switch to the semi graphical New Panel display mode which shows the overall status of the system and devices When in the semi graphical New Panel display mode there is no command input area Instead single character hot keys are used to issue some of the more common functions such as starting or stopping the CPU The hot keys are those which are highlighted Pressing the key displays brief help informa tion on how to use the semi graphical panel Sample windows are shown in the pictures on the following pages Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 153 Hercules Emulator HMC MVS V3 8 Hercules Version 3 07 Cc gt Copyright 1999 2616 by Roger Bowler Built on Mar 23 2616 at 61 41 44 Build information Windows MSUC gt build for AMD64 Modes 370 ESA 39 z fArch Max CPU Engines 8 Using fthreads instead of pthreads Dynamic loading support Using shared libraries HTTP Server support No SIGABEND handler Regular Expressions support Automatic Operator support Machine dependent assists cmpxchgl cmpxchg4 cmpxchg8 Running on GOOFY Windows_NT 6 1 AMD64 MP 8 HHCHD 18I Loadable module directory is hercules Crypto module loaded lt c gt Copyright Bernard van der Helm Active Message Security Assist Message Security Assist Extension 1 Message Security Assist Extension 2 Engine H set to type H CCP Engine 1 set to type CCP Engine 2 set to type CCP En
495. utility output print only dataset information 0 0 ececeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeaeeeeeenaeeeeeeaaes 427 HETMAP utility output TAPEMAP compatible output eee eeeeeeeeeeenneeeeeeaeeeetenaeeeeeeaaes 428 HET UPB utility OU EE 430 TAPECOPRY utility OULDUt eege at are die een i tnt ees 432 TAPEMAP utility output map AWS tape lei 434 TAPESPETutilityioutput s itt a a a atts E 436 FTAPE utility output display status 445 Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 14 Figure 229 Figure 230 Figure 231 Figure 232 Figure 233 Figure 234 Figure 235 Figure 236 Figure 237 Figure 238 Figure 239 Figure 240 Figure 241 Figure 242 Figure 243 Figure 244 Figure 245 Figure 246 Figure 247 Figure 248 Figure 249 HercPrt Program Options Page cccccccceeeeeeseeceeeeeceeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeaeeesaaeeeeaeeseeeeeseaeeseaeeseneeee 447 HercPrt PDF Options Page 449 Job Seperator Control File Sample 0 cccccecececeeececeeeeeeaeceeeeeceaeeesaaeeeeaeeseeeeeseaeessaeeseaeeteaes 461 Heck Report Samples iarain geed 23 e4 usec paves Gdieevuace pads edeuses andefevandadsavtaceepedngeeeye reads 462 AWSSL JCL Create AWS virtual ane 470 AWSSL JCL Create datasets from AWS virtual tape cceccceeeeeeeeteteeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeneeeeaes 471 AWSUTIE Utility JC La w2t8 eeben aa lon ate ei pants a hc ae 473 RAWS TAPE utility ETS ease e deene dE EE eg deeg 474 IEBGENER JCL for RAWSTAPE utility 000 0 cee ee cee cec
496. utput from the utility is the following D HERCULES gt DASDLOAD z D MVS DASD TST001 DAT D MVS DASD TST001 A80 1 Hercules DASD loader program Version 3 05 c Copyright 1999 2005 by Roger Bowler Jan Jaeger and others ee TSTOO1 3390 3 HHCDLOO6I Creating 3390 volume TST001 15 trks cyl 56832 bytes track HHCDU044I Creating 3390 volume TST001 3339 cyls 15 trks cyl 56832 bytes track HHCDU041I 3339 cylinders successfully written to file D MVS DASD TST001 A80 HHCDLOO9I Loading 3390 volume TSTOO1 ao Sar SYS2 RACF UTIL XMIT D MVS DASD CBT728 XMI HHCDLO12I Creating dataset SYS2 RACF UTIL at cyl 0 head 1 HHCDL110I Processing file D MVS DASD CBT728 XMI SSE SSSes SYS2 BATCH CNTL XMIT D MVS DASD CBT357 XMI HHCDLO12I Creating dataset SYS2 BATCH CNTL at cyl 0 head 2 HHCDL110I Processing file D MVS DASD CBT357 XMI sca aia stax est SYS2 PL1 SAMPLES XMIT D MVS DASD CBT316 XMI HHCDLO12I Creating dataset SYS2 PL1 SAMPLES at cyl 10 head 0 HHCDL110I Processing file D MVS DASD CBT316 XMI HHCDLO57I VTOC starts at cyl 21 head 10 and is 1 track HHCDLO14I Free space starts at cyl 21 head 11 HHCDLO16I Total of 3339 cylinders written to D MVS DASD TST001 A80 Figure 212 DASDLOAD utility output XMIT method message level 1 Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 409 Sample 2 Create a 3390 model 3 in a compressed file called TST001 A80 containing a library
497. v option option Diagram p gt devnum devtype sockspec sockdey gt E option SCH The socket specification sockspec can take any of the following formats ipaddr port The reader listens on the specific IP address and port number jpaddr must be the IP address of an interface on the local system For example 127 0 0 1 1234 is used to accept only jobs submitted locally via the loopback interface hostname port Similar to the previous example where hostname must resolve to an IP address belonging to the local system Example localhost 1234 port The reader listens on the specified port number and accepts jobs submitted from any IP address defined on the local system Example 1234 sockpath sockname _ The reader listens on the specified Unix Domain Socket Example tmp hercrdr 00C Examples 000A 2501 127 0 0 1 2501 SOCKDEV ASCII TRUNC EOF 000C 3905 localhost 1234 SOCKDEV ASCII TRUNC EOF 0012 3505 3505 SOCKDEV ASCII TRUNC EOF 0014 2501 tmp hercrdr 014 SOCKDEV ASCII TRUNC EOF Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 498 14 2 Submitting Jobs from Windows The HercRdr program is distributed as part of Fish s GUI package and allows you to send jobs to a socket reader via TCP IP Simply enter HercRdr from the command line i e from a Command Prompt window if you are using Windows to submit your file s
498. vailable when using the Hercules WinGUI 7 78 2 Syntax Descriptive QUIET Diagram WET pa 7 78 3 Parameter None 7 78 4 Examples Example 1 Change between automatic refresh of console display data 2007 06 30 13 30 43 062 00000618 quiet 2007 06 30 13 30 43 062 00000618 HHCPNO27I Automatic refresh disabled 2007 06 30 13 30 47 906 00000618 quiet 2007 06 30 13 30 47 906 00000618 HHCPNO27I Automatic refresh enabled Figure 130 QUIET command Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 303 7 79 QUIT Terminate the emulator 7 79 1 Function The QUIT command see also the EXIT command initiates the Hercules shutdown It terminates all threads detaches all channels and devices and releases the configuration Finally it terminates the emulator 7 79 2 Syntax Descriptive QUIT 7 79 3 Parameter None 7 79 4 Examples Example 1 Initiate the Hercules shutdown 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 2007 06 30 1 eee roy PST GR ST SSC S TIT 157 G 757s ST GE TOT
499. very well with this For example some guests may be dismayed because certain interrupts will occur way past its due time Also for S 370 an interval timer interrupt may be lost if the guest is interrupted for more than half the Interval Timer wrap time around 8 hours e Although some effort has been put in order to make this as transparent as possible that is it should appear to the guest operating system that the STOP key was pressed for a large amount of time some state information may be missed Some guest operating systems will fare better if the suspend state is prepared first For MVS as an example it seems to help when a QUIESCE command and a SYSTEM RESTART manual operation are issued prior to suspend the system 7 108 2 Syntax Descriptive SUSPEND Diagram kk SUSPEND HH Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 348 7 108 3 Parameter None 7 108 4 Examples Example 1 Suspend the Hercules session 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 2007 06 30 14 14 14 14 14 Os LSS LD 15 LGS 41 265 Zb DEIER 265 49 49 49 49 328 00000FC4 00000FC4 00000FC4 00000FC4 00000458 Figure 169 SUSPEND command suspend HHCIN900I HHCIN901I HHCCPOO8I HHCCPOO8I Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Begin Hercules shutdown Releasing configuration CPU0001 thread ended tid 00000F44 CPU0001 thread ended tid 00000F44 pid 1112 pid
500. vironment variable being substituted or if the variable is undefined the value dasd instead If no default value is specified then an empty string will be used instead An important distinction of enhanced symbol substitution is that it only occurs from host defined environ ment variables and not from any identically named DEFSYM symbol should one exist For example if environment variable FOO is defined with the value bar then the configuration file statement DEFSYM FOO myfoo followed immediately by the statement FOO causes the value bar to be substituted and not myfoo as might be expected Whereas the statement FOO since it is a normal symbol substitution sequence will be substituted with myfoo the value defined by the preceding DEFSYM statement To clarify the two symbol substitution techniques are supported completely separately from each other DEFSYM allows you to use previously defined or undefined private internally defined symbols separate from the host operating system s environment variable pool Enhanced symbol substitution allows read only access to the host environment variable pool with no support for modifying an already defined sym bol environment variable however with a convenient means of defining a default value to be used should the specified host environment variable be currently undefined It is important to note that symbol names potentially being the names of environment variables are
501. w rule pattern target Specifies the rule pattern to react on The target is a regular expression pattern which is matched against the text of the messages that Hercules issues CMD Keyword to specify a command for a previously defined rule command Specifies the command to be executed if a target rule matches The associated command must be a valid Hercules console command LIST List all rules commands or list only rule command at index nn DEL Delete rule and command at index nn nn Number of the index to be listed or deleted CLEAR Specifies to delete all defined rules This stops the Automatic Operator 7 42 4 Examples Example 1 Define target rule Check for message HHCPN139E Command not found 2007 06 20 16 54 31 625 00000FC4 hao tot HHCPN139E 2007 06 20 16 54 31 625 00000FC4 HHCAOO16I Target placed at index 0 Figure 76 HAO command igt Example 2 Define command for target rule Issue command List all valid commands 2007 06 20 16 54 31 625 00000FC4 hao cmd 2007 06 20 16 54 31 625 00000FC4 HHCAOO020I Command placed at index 0 Figure 77 HAO command cmd Example 3 List all defined rules 2007 06 20 16 54 31 625 00000FC4 hao list 2007 06 20 16 54 31 625 00000FC4 HHCAOO04I The defined Automatic Operator rule s are 2007 06 20 16 54 31 625 O0000FC4 HHCAOOO5I 00 HHCPN139E gt 2007 06 20 16 54 31 625 00000FC4 HHCAO006I 1 rule s displayed Figure 78 HAO command
502. well Parameters are appended in succession In all cases if the same parameter is coded more than once the last instance takes precedence Therefore it is possible to specify a set of parameters in the base configuration file another on an line and another for each individual line in the list of files Parameters are then appended in that order A SCSI tape device should not be given in a file list The remaining parameters are described in section 5 8 6 Common parameters for AWS HET and FakeTape virtual files 5 8 3 4 Examples Example 1 Define a 3490 tape device on device address 0580 The tape device is an AWSFILE virtual file named R0673A AWS located in path S390 TAPES 0580 3490 S390 TAPES R0673A AWS 5 8 4 HET virtual files 5 8 4 1 HET virtual files HET device statements are used to define HET virtual files to the Hercules configuration These contain a complete tape in one file and have the same structure as the AWSTAPE format with the added ability to have compressed data The first argument specifies the location of the HET file The filename must end with HET to be recog nized by Hercules as a HET file e g 023178 HET There are several additional arguments that control various HET settings Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 125 5 8 4 2 Syntax Descriptive devaddr devtype hetfile arguments where arguments are AWSTAPE COMPRESS 0
503. which is described separately below the main syntax diagram Complex syntax diagrams are occasionally broken into separated simpler segments SEGMENT SC value L value 3 BEE This symbol indicates a syntax segment which is referenced from a main syntax diagram that is shown above the syntax segment KEYWORDS variables Keywords are denoted with upper case letters Obey the spelling Lower case letters are optional and can be omitted for example DISable In the actual statements or commands the keywords can be coded in upper case or lower case letters All user defined values are denoted with lower case italic letters They represent user supplied names or values In the actual statements or commands they can be coded in upper case or lower case letters Table 32 Reading Syntax Diagrams C 3 Sample Syntax Description The following figure shows a sample of a complex syntax description This is not an example of an exis ting system parameter or panel command It is used mainly to demonstrate the look and feel of syntax descriptions Syntax CMDNAME reguired_argument optional_argument reguired_choice_1 required_choice_2 required_choice_3 Loptional_choice_1 optionai_choice 2 REQUIRED_KEYWORD variable OPTIONAL_KEYWORD var7ab e DEFAULT KEYWORD KEYWORD_1 KEYWORD 2 KEYWORD defau t choice KEYWORD choice_1 choice 2 Hercules Emulator V3 11 U
504. wo character suffix is not used in this case Alternatively the argument may specify the name of a file containg a compressed CKD DASD image CCKD DASD files The CKD driver will automatically detect whether the file contains a regular CKD image or a compressed CKD image 5 11 2 Syntax Descriptive devaddr devtype filename sf shadowfile NOSYNCIO SYNCIO READONLY FAKEWRITE CU type or devaddr devtype ipname port 3990 devnum COMP n Diagram devaddr devtype filename Sith oe aaa SF shadowfi le NOSYNCIO READONLY FAKEWRITE SYNCTO E CU type or Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 146 2000 devaddr devtype ipname hen sport DW tote i ok 2 devnum COMP 5 11 3 Parameter devaddr devtype filename shadowfile NO SYNCIO This is the device address This is the device type Valid device types are 2311 2314 3330 3350 3375 3380 3390 and 9345 This specifies the filename and path of the file containing the DASD image A shadow file contains all the changes made to the emulated DASD device since it was created maintained until the next shadow file is created The moment of the shadow file s creation can be thought of a snapshot of the current emulated DASD at that time as if the shadow file is later removed the emulated DASD reverts back to the state it was when the snapshot was taken Using sha
505. x Descriptive DASDINIT option option filename devtype model volser size Diagram gt gt DASDINIT eT filename _______ option devtype fea ata S es volser lt model size 8 11 3 Parameter Options V Display version information and help text Z Build compressed DASD image file using zlib bz2 Build compressed DASD image file using bzip2 0 Build compressed DASD image file with no compression 0 zero lfs Build a large uncompressed DASD file single file if it is supported on the platform DASDINIT is running on a Build a DASD image file that includes alternate cylinders This option is ignored if the size is manually specified r Build raw DASD image file no VOL1 or IPL track linux Null track images will look like Linux DASDFMT ed images 3390 device type only Arguments filename Name of DASD image file to be created Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 400 devtype FBA 0671 3310 3370 9313 9332 9335 9336 CKD 2311 2314 3330 3340 3350 3375 3380 3390 9345 A complete list of all Hercules supported DASD device types and models can be found in Appendix A model Device model Note this implies size A list of Hercules supported device types and models can be found in Appendix A volser Volume serial number 1 6 characters size Number of CKD cylinders or 512 byte FBA sectors required if model not specified othe
506. x 00 Additionally the general purpose registers control registers etc are reset to their initial value At this point the system is essentially in the same state as it was just after having been started Please note that all CPUs must be stopped prior to issuing a system clear reset or the function will be rejected with message HHCPNO53E 7 110 2 Syntax Descriptive SYSCLEAR Diagram kk SYSCLEAR a N 7 110 3 Parameter None 7 110 4 Examples Example 1 CLEAR RESET the system 2007 06 30 14 15 41 328 O0000FC4 stopall 2007 06 30 14 15 51 221 00000FC4 sysclear Figure 171 SYSCLEAR command Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 351 7 111 SYSRESET Issue SYSTEM RESET manual operation 7 111 1 Function The SYSRESET command issues a SYSTEM RESET manual operation A CPU and I O subsystem reset are performed Please note that all CPUs must be stopped prior to issuing a system reset or the function will be rejected with message HHCPNO53E 7 111 2 Syntax Descriptive SYSRESET Diagram SYSRESET gt lt 7 111 3 Parameter None 7 111 4 Examples Example 1 RESET the system 2007 06 30 14 16 42 228 O0000FC4 stopall 2007 06 30 14 17 03 421 O0000FC4 sysreset Figure 172 SYSRESET command Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 352 7 112 T Instruction trace 7 112 1 Function This command sets the instructi
507. x is very unforgiving no spaces are allowed anywhere within the paren theses and each value must be separated from the other with a single comma Please also note that not all systems support being able to modify all three values That is not all values may be able to be changed and it is system dependent which values you can change and which values you cannot On Windows for example the count value is ignored and cannot be changed from its default value of 10 Other systems may ignore one or more or all three values and use platform defaults instead This is entirely system dependent Check you system s documentation for details regarding which values can be changed and which cannot as well as how to adjust your system s default values 4 9 2 Syntax Descriptive CONKPALV 3 1 10 7d e intv count Diagram gt gt CONKPALV oan es 3 1 10 lt idle intv count 4 9 3 Parameter idle The idle value specifies the number of seconds of inactivity until the first keep alive probe is sent The default for the idle value is 3 seconds intv The intv value specifies the interval in seconds between the probes if no acknowledge ment is received from the previous probe The default for intv is 1 second Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 46 count The count value specifies the number of unacknowledged keep alive packets sent before the connection is considered to have failed The default value is 9 f
508. y automate Hercules startup The next figure shows a sample run commands file that does the following e pause 1 Wait one second before processing the first Hercules command 1 e traceopt traditional Specify the traditional trace mode registers are displayed following the instruction 2 e help Display all valid Hercules commanas 3 e maxrates midnight Set the MAXRATES reporting interval to midnight to have the MIPS and I O statistics issued date aligned 4 e sh startgui D MVS TERMINALS BAT Execute the named batch file in the shell to start a couple of tn3270 sessions See details below 5 e pause 3 Wait three seconds until all tn3270 sessions have been successfully connected 6 Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 492 e ipl 0148 Finally IPL MVS 3 8J from device address 148 7 Hercules RUN COMMANDS RC File sh startgui D MVS TERMINALS BAT Ep E fh es fk fk E Fs ee Ie ie a FS he et ah es aN Ps Ris at ph as ae is ps ek ak ok sl ak et alo ae sd i tk del ak Wait 3 second before IPL ing MVS 6 a aa OS NS IE a RENET IES a AISI SERISI geed ca a a Rao tate fae ay Ral a tae a tate ta geg pause 3 EE EE Se Onn OS RRSP E CES CERIN E E E E IPL MVS 3 87 7 dE ipl 0148 LE RC EOF eeseseaeeeeen ese enna seen eee eee eee eee ease eases eee eee esse eee s eee Figure 243 Run commands rc file
509. y pending interrupts ds Display subchannel r Display or alter real storage v Display or alter virtual storage u Disassemble storage devtmax Display or set max device threads k Display CCKD internal trace attach Configure device detach Remove device define Rename device devinit Reinitialize device devlist List device or all devices qd Query DASD mounted_tape_reinit auto_scsi_mount Control tape initialization Automatic SCSI tape mounts synonym for SCSIMOUNT scsimount Automatic SCSI tape mounts sysnonym for AUTO_SCSI_MOUNT automount Show or update allowable tape automount directories cd Change directory pwd Print working directory sh Shell command cache Cache command cckd CCKD command Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 168 shrd SHRD command conkpalv Display alter console TCP IP keep alive settings t Instruction trace t Instruction trace on t Instruction trace off t Instruction trace query s Instruction stepping S Instruction stepping on S Instruction stepping off s Instruction stepping query b Set breakpoint synonym for B b Set breakpoint synonym for B b Delete breakpoint g Turn off instruction stepping and start CPU ostailor Specify intended operating system pgmtrace Trace program interrupts savecore Save a core image file loadcore Load a
510. y whichever thread becomes idle first This option was created to address a threading issue possibly related to the Cygwin phtreads implementation on Windows systems On Windows systems positive DEVTMAX values are currently not honored and are treated identically as if the value 0 had been specified The default for non Windows systems is 0 Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 54 4 16 4 Examples Example 1 Set the upper limit for the number of device threads to 16 DEVTMAX 16 Example 2 Allow an unlimited number of device threads DEVTMAX 0 Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 55 4 17 DIAG8CMD DIAGNOSE 8 command setting 4 17 1 Function This parameter specifies whether a command issued through Diagnose 8 will be executed by Hercules as a Hercules commands or not An optional second argument can be specified to request whether the com mands issued using the Diagnose 8 interface will be traced at the console This may be useful for pro grams that routinely issue console commands using the Diagnose 8 interface Caution Enabling this feature may have security consequences When this feature is enabled it is possible for guest operating systems running under Hercules to issue commands directly to the host operating system by means of the Hercules sh shell command This ability may be disabled via the SHCMDOPT statement 4 17 2 Syntax Descriptive DIAGSCMD DISABL
511. ystem parameters 7490 001963 FD HERCULES EMULATOR ZZ HRC 16 0 DEFAULT 3270 2 0 S 370 0148 1928 aE 4b SE FE OE OE OE EEE SHEE HEHEHE tS CPU model CPU serial number CPU version code LPAR name returned by DIAG X 204 Model name returned by STSI Plant name returned by STSI Manufacturer name returned by STSI Main storage in MB Expanded storage in MB Codepage conversion table TELNET client port Number of emulated CPU s Number of vector facilities Initial architecture mode IPL parameters Base date for TOD clock Hercules Emulator V3 11 User Reference Guide Page 26 TZOFFSET 0000 TOD clock offset from GMT OSTAILOR 0S 390 Intended operating system PANRATE 1000 Panel refresh rate in ms PANTITLE MVS_V3 87 Console window panel title LOGOPT TIMESTAMP Hercules log options CONKPALV 3 1 10 Console and telnet clients keep alive option DEVTMAX 0 Maximum number of device threads PGMPRDOS LICENSED Do not emulate IFL hardware SHCMDOPT ODIAG8 SHELL command behaviour DIAG8CMD DISABLE DIAGNOSE 8 command setting ASN_AND_LX_REUSE DISABLE ESAME ASN and LX REUSE optional feature AUTO_SCSI_MOUNT O Automatic detection of SCSI tape mounts IODELAY 0 I O interrupt wait time Linux only ECPSVM O ECPS VM support status VM only HERCPRIO 0 Hercules process priority CPUPRIO 0 CPU thread process priority default 15 DEVPRIO 0 Device threads process prior

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Samsung SC8800 Canister VC with Eco Brush, 2000 W User Manual (XP)  BS-F2 Standalone Fingerprint or Card Access Control User Manual  CINEMA COMPACT NV1800  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file